2018 Nissan Rogue | Owner's Manual And Maintenance Information USA Owner

User Manual: Pdf 2018 Nissan Rogue Owners Manual PDF | SERVICE MANUAL OWNERS

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 547

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

2018

ROGUE

OWNER’S MANUAL
and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING
WARNING
Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger
vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to
chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as
necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when
servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

FOREWORD
This manual was prepared to help you understand the operation and maintenance
of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many
miles (kilometers) of driving pleasure.
Please read through this manual before
operating your vehicle.
A separate Warranty Information Booklet explains details about the warranties
covering your vehicle. The “Maintenance
and schedules” section of this manual
explains details about maintaining and
servicing your vehicle. Additionally, a
separate Customer Care/Lemon Law
Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to resolve any concerns you may have with
your vehicle, and clarify your rights under your state’s lemon law.
When you require any service or have any
questions, a NISSAN dealer will be glad to
assist you with the extensive resources
available to them.
In addition to factory-installed options,
your vehicle may also be equipped with
additional accessories installed prior to delivery. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for details concerning the
particular accessories with which your vehicle is equipped. It is important that you
familiarize yourself with all disclosures,

READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY
warnings, cautions and instructions concerning proper use of such accessories
prior to operating the vehicle and/or accessory. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for details concerning the
particular accessories with which your vehicle is equipped.

Before driving your vehicle, please read this
Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure
familiarity with controls and maintenance
requirements, assisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle.

WARNING
IMPORTANT
REMINDERS!

SAFETY

INFORMATION

Follow these important driving rules to
help ensure a safe and comfortable trip
for you and your passengers!
∙ NEVER drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs.
∙ ALWAYS observe posted speed limits
and never drive too fast for
conditions.
∙ ALWAYS give your full attention to
driving and avoid using vehicle features or taking other actions that
could distract you.
∙ ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint systems. Preteen children should be seated in the
rear seat.

∙ ALWAYS provide information about
the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle.
∙ ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual
for important safety information.
For descriptions specified for all-wheel
drive models, an AWD mark is placed at the
beginning
of
the
applicable
sections/items.
As with other vehicles with features for
off-road use, failure to operate all-wheel
drive models correctly may result in loss
of control or an accident. For additional
information, refer to “Driving safety precautions” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIVING
This vehicle will handle and maneuver
differently from an ordinary passenger car because it has a higher center
of gravity for off-road use. As with
other vehicles with features of this
type, failure to operate this vehicle
correctly may result in loss of control
or an accident.

For additional information, refer to
“On-pavement and off-road driving
precautions”, “Avoiding collision and
rollover” and “Driving safety precautions” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification
could
affect
its
performance, safety, emissions or durability and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage
or
performance
problems
resulting from modifications may not
be covered under NISSAN warranties.

WARNING
Installing an aftermarket On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses
the port during normal driving, for example remote insurance company
monitoring, remote vehicle diagnostics,
telematics or engine reprogramming,
may cause interference or damage to
vehicle systems. We do not recommend
or endorse the use of any aftermarket
OBD plug-in devices, unless specifically
approved by NISSAN. The vehicle warranty may not cover damage caused by
any aftermarket plug-in device.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL
This manual includes information for all
features and equipment available on this
model. Features and equipment in your vehicle may vary depending on model, trim
level, options selected, order, date of production, region or availability. Therefore,
you may find information about features or
equipment that are not included or installed on your vehicle.
All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at
the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the
right to change specifications, performance, design or component suppliers
without notice and without obligation.
From time to time, NISSAN may update or
revise this manual to provide Owners with
the most accurate information currently
available. Please carefully read and retain
with this manual all revision updates sent
to you by NISSAN to ensure you have access to accurate and up-to-date information regarding your vehicle. Current versions of vehicle Owner’s Manuals and any
updates can also be found in the Owner
section of the NISSAN website at
https://owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/
navigation/manualsGuide. If you have
questions concerning any information in
your Owner’s Manual, contact NISSAN Con-

sumer Affairs. For contact information, refer
to the NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM
page in this Owner’s Manual.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
THIS MANUAL
You will see various symbols in this manual.
They are used in the following ways:

WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence of
a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury. To avoid or reduce
the risk, the procedures must be followed precisely.

CAUTION
This is used to indicate the presence of
a hazard that could cause minor or
moderate personal injury or damage to
your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk,
the procedures must be followed
carefully.

APD1005

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do
this” or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in an
illustration, it means the arrow points to
the front of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to
these indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to
these call attention to an item in the illustration.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE
ADVISORY
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batteries, may contain perchlorate material.
The following advisory is provided: “Perchlorate Material – special handling may
apply. For additional information, refer
to www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate/”.

© 2018 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s
Manual may be reproduced or stored in a
retrieval system, or transmitted in any
form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Nissan North America, Inc.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM
NISSAN CARES . . .
Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your
NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service
needs.
However, if there is something that your
NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or
you would like to provide NISSAN directly
with comments or questions, please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department using our toll-free number:
For U.S. customers
1-800-NISSAN-1
(1-800-647-7261)

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask
for the following information:

You can write to NISSAN with the information at:

– Your name, address, and telephone
number

For U.S. customers
Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
or via e-mail at:
nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa.com

– Vehicle identification number (attached
to the top of the instrument panel on the
driver’s side)
– Date of purchase

For Canadian customers
1-800-387-0122

– Current odometer reading
– Your NISSAN dealer’s name
– Your comments or questions
OR

For Canadian customers
Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5
or via e-mail at:
information.centre@nissancanada.com
If you prefer, visit us at:
www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers)
or
www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

Table of
Contents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Do-it-yourself

Maintenance and schedules

Technical and consumer information

Index

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . 0-2
Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3
Exterior rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4
Passenger compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8
Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-9

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD
RESTRAINTS
1.
2.
3.

4.
5.

6.
7.
8.

9.
10.
11.
12.

Supplemental air bags (P. 1-50)
Occupant classification sensor
(weight sensor) (P. 1-50)
Front Seat belt with pretensioner(s)
and shoulder heights adjuster
(P. 1-16, 1-50)
Head restraints/headrests (P. 1-11)
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
and rollover supplemental air bag
(P. 1-50)
2nd row center position top tether
strap (located on ceiling) (P. 1-28)
Folding 3rd row bench
(if so equipped) (P. 1-2)
2nd row outboard seat top tether
strap anchor (located on bottom
of seatback) (P. 1-28)
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren) (P. 1-28)
Folding 2nd row bench (P. 1-2)
Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag (P. 1-50)
Seats (P. 1-2)

Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.

LII2545

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

EXTERIOR FRONT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

7.
8.
9.

10.

LII2540

Engine hood (P. 3-27)
Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-42)
Wiper blades (P. 8-19)
Windshield (P. 8-19)
Windshield-washer fluid (P. 8-10)
Power windows (P. 2-66)
Door locks (P. 3-5)
NISSAN Intelligent Key®
(if so equipped) (P. 3-11)
NISSAN Jackknife key
(if so equipped) (P. 3-2, 3-8)
Keys (P. 3-2)
Mirrors (P. 3-39)
Side view camera (if so equipped)
(P. 4-11)
Tire pressure (P. 8-31)
Flat tire (P. 6-3)
Tire chains (P. 8-31)
Fog light switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-44)
Headlight and turn signal switch
(P. 2-44)
Replacing bulbs (P. 8-27)
LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
system (P. 2-44)
Front view camera (if so equipped)
(P. 4-11)

Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

EXTERIOR REAR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-42)
Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-5)
Fuel-filler door (P. 3-34)
Fuel-filler cap (P. 3-34)
Fuel recommendation (P. 10-2)
Replacing bulbs (P. 8-27)
Rearview camera (P. 4-3, 4-11)
Liftgate release (P. 3-28)

Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.

LII2541

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
1. Glove box (P. 2-58)
2. Map lights (P. 2-71)
3. Power panoramic moonroof
(if so equipped) (P. 2-69)
4. Console box (P. 2-58)
5. Luggage hooks (P. 2-58)
6. Center armrest (2nd row) (P. 1-2)
7. Cup holders (P. 2-58)
8. Sun visors (P. 3-38)
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.

LII2515

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

INSTRUMENT PANEL
1.
2.

4.
5.

6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
LII2516

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

Vent (P. 4-28)
Headlight/fog light
(if so equipped)/turn signal switch
(P. 2-44)
Meters and gauges (P. 2-4)
Warning and indicator lights
(P. 2-11)
Vehicle information display (P. 2-21)
Wiper and washer switch, rear
wiper washer switch (P. 2-42)
Ignition switch (if so equipped)
(P. 5-13)
Push-button ignition switch
(if so equipped) (P. 5-15)
Hazard warning flasher switch
(P. 6-2)
Radio*
Navigation system*
Front passenger supplemental air
bag (P. 1-50)
Glove box (P. 2-58)
Heater and air conditioning
controls (P. 4-29)
Power outlet (P. 2-55)
Shift lever (P. 5-23)
Auxiliary jack*
USB port*

14.
15.

16.

17.
18.
19.
20.

Front passenger air bag status
light (P. 1-50)
Cruise control main/set switches
(if so equipped) (P. 5-64)
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-66)
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System*
ProPILOT Assist switch
(if so equipped) (P. 5-90)
Driver supplemental air bag
(P. 1-50)
Horn (P. 2-51)
Tilt and telescopic steering (P. 3-37)
Control panel and vehicle information display switches (P. 2-21)
Hood release (P. 3-27)
Fuel door release (P. 3-34)
SPORT mode switch (P. 5-33)
ECO mode switch (P. 5-33)
Power liftgate switch
(if so equipped) (P. 3-28)
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-54)
Steering Assist switch (for vehicles
with ProPILOT Assist)
(if so equipped) (P. 2-53)

21.

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
switch (P. 2-54)
Dynamic driver assistance switch
(for vehicles without ProPILOT
Assist) (if so equipped) (P. 2-53)
Heated steering wheel switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-52)
Instrument brightness control
(P. 2-44)
Twin trip odometer reset switch
(P. 2-5)

*: Refer to the separate NissanConnect®
Owner’s Manual (if so equipped).
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
QR25DE engine

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-4)
Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-6)
Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-10)
Battery (P. 8-12)
Air cleaner (P. 8-18)
Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-22)
Radiator cap (P. 8-4)
Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-6)
Drive belt location (P. 8-16)
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-10)

Engine cover removed for clarity.
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.

LDI2809

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

Warning
light

Name

Page

Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS)
warning light

2-12

Warning
light

Automatic Emergency Braking
(AEB) system
warning light (if so
equipped)

2-12

Automatic Emergency Braking
(AEB) with Pedestrian Detection
system warning
light (if so
equipped)

2-12

Brake warning
light

2-13

Name

Page

Charge warning
light

2-13

Electronic parking
brake warning
light (if so
equipped)

2-14

Low tire pressure
warning light

2-14

Master warning
light

2-16

Power steering
warning light

2-16

Seat belt warning
light and chime

2-17

Supplemental air
bag warning light

2-17

Indicator
light

Name

Page

All-Wheel Drive
(AWD) LOCK indicator light (if so
equipped)

2-18

Automatic brake
hold indicator
light (green) (if so
equipped)

2-18

Automatic brake
hold indicator
light (white) (if so
equipped)

2-18

Front fog light indicator light (if so
equipped)

2-18

Front passenger
air bag status
light

2-18

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

Indicator
light

Name

Page

High beam assist
indicator light
(green) (if so
equipped)

2-18

High beam indicator light (blue)

2-18

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

2-18

Security indicator
light

2-19

Side light and
headlight indicator light (green)

2-20

Slip indicator light

2-20

Turn signal/
hazard indicator
lights

2-20

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

Indicator
light

Name

Page

Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) OFF
indicator light

2-20

1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Front manual seat adjustment
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
Front power seat adjustment
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
2nd row bench seat adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
Flexible seating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Head restraints/headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Adjustable head restraint/headrest
components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Non-adjustable head restraint/
headrest components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Install. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Seat belt warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Pregnant women. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Three-point type seat belt with
retractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19

Seat belt extenders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Infants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Rear-facing child restraint installation
using LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Rear-facing child restraint installation
using the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Forward-facing child restraint
installation using LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
Forward-facing child restraint
installation using the seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-41
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). . . . . . . . . . . 1-50
Precautions on SRS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50
Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . 1-67
Supplemental air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . 1-68

SEATS

∙ Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls or
make the vehicle move. Unattended
children could become involved in serious accidents.

ARS1152

WARNING
∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries.
You could also slide under the lap belt
and receive serious internal injuries.

∙ For the most effective protection
when the vehicle is in motion, the seat
should be upright. Always sit well
back and upright in the seat with both
feet on the floor and adjust the seat
properly. For additional information,
refer to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section.
∙ After adjustment, gently rock in the
seat to make sure it is securely locked.

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, do not
leave children, people who require the
assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally,
the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people
and pets.
∙ Do not adjust the driver’s seat while
driving so full attention may be given
to vehicle operation. The seat may
move suddenly and could cause loss
of control of the vehicle.
∙ The seatback should not be reclined
any more than needed for comfort.
Seat belts are most effective when the
passenger sits well back and straight
up in the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the risk of sliding under the lap
belt and being injured is increased.

CAUTION
When adjusting the seat positions, be
sure not to contact any moving parts to
avoid possible injuries and/or damage.

FRONT MANUAL SEAT
ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)
Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manually. For additional information about adjusting the seats, refer to the steps outlined
in this section.

LRS2160

LRS2161

Forward and backward

Reclining

Pull the center of the bar up and hold it
while you slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Release the
bar to lock the seat in position.

To recline the seatback, pull the lever up
and lean back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever up and lean your body
forward. Release the lever to lock the seatback in position.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of
the seatback for occupants of different
sizes for added comfort and to help obtain
proper seat belt fit. For additional information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section. Also, the seatback can
be reclined to allow occupants to rest

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

when the vehicle is stopped and the shift
lever is in the P (Park) position.

LRS2843

Seat lifter (driver’s seat)
Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to
adjust the seat height until the desired position is achieved.

1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The reclining feature allows adjustment of
the seatback for occupants of different
sizes for added comfort and to help obtain
proper seat belt fit. For additional information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section. Also, the seatback can
be reclined to allow occupants to rest
when the vehicle is stopped and the shift
lever is in P (Park).

LRS2662

FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT
(if so equipped)
Operating tips
∙ The power seat motor has an autoreset overload protection circuit. If the
motor stops during operation, wait
30 seconds then reactivate the switch.

Forward and backward
Moving the switch as shown will slide the
seat forward or backward to the desired
position.

Reclining
Move the recline switch as shown until the
desired angle is obtained.

∙ Do not operate the power seat switch for
a long period of time when the engine is
off. This will discharge the battery.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

LRS2784

LRS2717

LRS2270

Seat lifter (driver’s seat)

Lumbar support (driver’s seat)

Move the switch as shown to achieve desired seat height.

The lumbar support feature provides adjustable lower back support to the driver.
Push the switch as shown to adjust the
seatback lumbar area.

1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Outboard seats

2ND ROW BENCH SEAT
ADJUSTMENT
Forward and backward
1 up and hold it
Pull the center of the bar 䊊
while you slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Release the
bar to lock the seat in position.

Reclining
To recline the seatback, pull up on the lever
2 and lean back. To bring the seatback
䊊
2 up and lean your
forward, pull the lever 䊊
body forward. Release the lever to lock the
seatback in position.
The recline feature allows adjustment of
the seatback for occupants of different
sizes for added comfort and to help obtain
proper seat belt fit. For additional information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section. Also, the seatback can
be reclined to allow occupants to rest
when the vehicle is stopped and the shift
lever is in P (Park).

WARNING
∙ After adjustment, gently rock in the
seat to make sure it is securely locked.
∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries.
You could also slide under the lap belt
and receive serious internal injuries.

∙ For the most effective protection
when the vehicle is in motion, the seat
should be upright. Always sit well
back and upright in the seat with both
feet on the floor and adjust the seat
belt properly. For additional information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt
usage” in this section.

LRS2713

ARMRESTS
The 2nd row center armrest is locked in the
up position. To lower the armrest, pull on
the armrest strap that is located in the
armrest pivot area.
To return the armrest to the up position,
pull up on the armrest until it is locked in
the up position.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

FLEXIBLE SEATING
WARNING
∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the
cargo area or on the rear seats when
they are in the fold-down position. In a
collision, people riding in these areas
without proper restraints are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
∙ Do not allow people to ride in any area
of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
∙ Do not allow more than one person to
use the same seat belt.
∙ Do not fold down the rear seats when
occupants are in the rear seat area or
any luggage is on the rear seats.
– Make sure that the seat path is
clear before moving the seat.
– Be careful not to allow hands or
feet to get caught or pinched in the
seat.

∙ Head restraints/headrests should be
adjusted properly as they may provide significant protection against injury in an accident. Always replace
and adjust them properly if they have
been removed for any reason.
∙ If the head restraints/headrests are
removed for any reason, they should
be securely stored to prevent them
from causing injury to passengers or
damage to the vehicle in case of sudden braking or an accident.
∙ When returning the seatbacks to the
upright position, be certain they are
completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in
an accident or sudden stop.
∙ Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not
place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision,
unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2844

Accessing the 3rd row seats (if so
equipped)
The 3rd row can be accessed from outside
the vehicle by using the seatback release
lever located on the 2nd row seatback. To
access the 3rd row from outside the vehicle:
1. Lower or remove the 2nd row head
restraints/headrests and store them
properly so they are not loose in the
vehicle. For additional information, refer
to “Head restraints/headrests” in this
section.

2. Stow the 2nd row seat belts in the seat
belt hooks found on the sides of the
vehicle.

3. To return the 2nd row bench seats to a
seating position, push up on the seatback until it latches in place.

A
3. Lift up on the seatback release lever 䊊
located on the 2nd row seatback and
push the seatback forward. The seatback will stop at a 45° angle and the
slide lock will disengage. This allows the
entire seat to slide forward and an occupant to enter/exit the 3rd row.

4. To return the 2nd row bench seats to a
seating position, push up on the seatback until it latches in place.
LRS2753

Folding the 2nd row bench seat
(for vehicles equipped with 3rd
row seats)
To fold the 2nd row bench seat flat for
maximum cargo hauling in vehicles
equipped with a 3rd row seat:
1. Follow steps 1–3 in “Accessing the 3rd
row seats” in this section to begin folding the seat.
B on the lower side of
2. Pull the strap 䊊
the outboard seats to fold the 2nd row
seats completely flat.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

2. Stow the 2nd row seat belts in the seat
belt hooks found on the sides of the
vehicle.
A
3. Lift up on the seatback release lever 䊊
on the top of the outboard seats to fold
the seatbacks flat.

4. To return the 2nd row bench seats to a
seating position, push up on the seatback until it latches in place.

LRS2754

Folding the 2nd row bench seat
(for vehicles not equipped with
3rd row seats)
To fold the 2nd row bench seat flat for
maximum cargo hauling in vehicles not
equipped with 3rd row seats:
1. Lower or remove the 2nd row head
restraints/headrests and store them
properly so they are not loose in the
vehicle. For additional information, refer
to “Head restraints/headrests” in this
section.

1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2348

Folding the 3rd row seats (if so
equipped)
To fold the 3rd row seats flat for maximum
cargo capacity:
1. Make
sure
the
head
restraints/headrests are all the way
down.
1 to release the seat.
2. Pull the strap 䊊

3. Once released, push the seatback for2 .
ward 䊊

HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS
To return the 3rd row seats to a seating
position:
1 to raise each
1. Use the pull straps 䊊
seatback. Pull back until the seatback
latches into position. Make sure to
properly raise each seatback to an
upright and secured position.

WARNING
When the seat is returned to the normal
seating
position,
the
head
restraints/headrests must be returned
to the upright position to properly protect vehicle occupants.

WARNING
Head restraints/headrests supplement
the other vehicle safety systems. They
may provide additional protection
against injury in certain rear end collisions.
Adjustable
head
restraints/headrests must be adjusted
properly, as specified in this section.
Check the adjustment after someone
else uses the seat. Do not attach anything to the head restraint/headrest
stalks
or
remove
the
head
restraint/headrest. Do not use the seat
if the head restraint/headrest has been
removed. If the head restraint/headrest
was removed, reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint/headrest before
an occupant uses the seating position.
Failure to follow these instructions can
reduce the effectiveness of the head
restraints/headrests. This may increase the risk of serious injury or death
in a collision.

LRS2403

2nd row seating
The illustration shows the seating positions
equipped
with
head
restraints/headrests.
䉱 Indicates the seating position
equipped with a head restraint.

䡲 Indicates the seating position is equipped
with a headrest.
+ Indicates the seating position is not
equipped with a head restraint or headrest
(if applicable).

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

∙ Proper Adjustment:
– For the adjustable type, align the
head restraint/headrest so the center of your ear is approximately level
with the center of the head
restraint/headrest.
– If your ear position is still higher than
the recommended alignment, place
the head restraint/headrest at the
highest position.

LRS2308

3rd row seating (if so equipped)
∙ Your vehicle is equipped with a head
restraint/headrest that may be integrated, adjustable or non-adjustable.

∙ If the head restraint/headrest has been
removed, ensure that it is reinstalled
and locked in place before riding in that
designated seating position.

∙ Adjustable head restraints/headrests
have multiple notches along the stalk(s)
to lock them in a desired adjustment
position.
∙ The
non-adjustable
head
restraints/headrests have a single locking notch to secure them to the seat
frame.

1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2300

ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/
HEADREST COMPONENTS
1. Removable head restraint/headrest
2. Multiple notches
3. Lock knob
4. Stalks

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head
restraint/headrest before an occupant
uses the seating position.

LRS2299

NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD
RESTRAINT/HEADREST
COMPONENTS
1. Removable head restraint/headrest

LRS2302

REMOVE
Use the following procedure to remove the
head restraint/headrest:

2. Single notch

1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to
the highest position.

3. Lock knob

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

4. Stalks

3. Remove the head restraint/headrest
from the seat.
4. Store the head restraint/headrest
properly in a secure place so it is not
loose in the vehicle.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

LRS2303

INSTALL
1. Align the head restraint/headrest
stalks with the holes in the seat. Make
sure that the head restraint/headrest is
facing the correct direction. The stalk
1 must be
with the notch (notches) 䊊
installed in the hole with the lock knob
2 .
䊊

WRS0134

ADJUST
For adjustable head restraint/headrest
Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the
center is level with the center of your ears. If
your ear position is still higher than the
recommended alignment, place the head
restraint/headrest at the highest position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push
the head restraint/headrest down.
3. Properly adjust the head restraint/
headrest before an occupant uses the
seating position.

1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2351

For non-adjustable
headrest

head

restraint/

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is
positioned so the lock knob is engaged in
the notch before riding in that designated
seating position.

LRS2305

LRS2306

Raise

Lower

To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it
up.

To lower, push and hold the lock knob and
push the head restraint/headrest down.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is
positioned so the lock knob is engaged in
the notch before riding in that designated
seating position.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

SEAT BELTS

SSS0136

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly
adjusted and you are sitting upright and
well back in your seat with both feet on the
floor, your chances of being injured or killed
in a collision and/or the severity of injury
may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly
encourages you and all of your passengers
to buckle up every time you drive, even if
your seating position includes a supplemental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces
or territories specify that seat belts be
worn at all times when a vehicle is being
driven.

1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0134

WARNING
∙ Every person who drives or rides in
this vehicle should use a seat belt at
all times. Children should be in the
rear seats and in an appropriate
restraint.

SSS0016

WARNING
∙ The seat belt should be properly adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do so
may reduce the effectiveness of the
entire restraint system and increase
the chance or severity of injury in an
accident. Serious injury or death can
occur if the seat belt is not worn
properly.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

∙ Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fastened to the proper buckle.
∙ Do not wear the seat belt inside out or
twisted. Doing so may reduce its
effectiveness.
∙ Do not allow more than one person to
use the same seat belt.
∙ Never carry more people in the vehicle
than there are seat belts.

SSS0014

WARNING
∙ Always route the shoulder belt over
your shoulder and across your chest.
Never put the belt behind your back,
under your arm or across your neck.
The belt should be away from your
face and neck, but not falling off your
shoulder.
∙ Position the lap belt as low and snug
as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT
THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high
could increase the risk of internal injuries in an accident.

∙ If the seat belt warning light glows
continuously while the ignition is
placed in the ON position with all
doors closed and all seat belts fastened, it may indicate a malfunction in
the system. Have the system checked.
It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
∙ No changes should be made to the
seat belt system. For example, do not
modify the seat belt, add material, or
install devices that may change the
seat belt routing or tension. Doing so
may affect the operation of the seat
belt system. Modifying or tampering
with the seat belt system may result
in serious personal injury.

1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ Once seat belt pretensioner(s) have
activated, they cannot be reused and
must be replaced together with the
retractor. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
∙ All seat belt assemblies, including retractors and attaching hardware,
should be inspected after any collision. It is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer for this service.
NISSAN recommends that all seat belt
assemblies in use during a collision be
replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage
and continue to operate properly.
Seat belt assemblies not in use during
a collision should also be inspected
and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
∙ All child restraints and attaching
hardware should be inspected after
any collision. Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s inspection instructions and replacement recommendations. The child restraints
should be replaced if they are
damaged.

For additional information, refer to “Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders” in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.

PREGNANT WOMEN

LRS0786

NISSAN recommends that pregnant
women use seat belts. The seat belt should
be worn snug and always position the lap
belt as low as possible around the hips, not
the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your
shoulder and across your chest. Never run
the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal
area. Contact your doctor for specific recommendations.

SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT

INJURED PERSONS

Both the driver’s and passenger’s front
seats are equipped with a seat belt warning light. The warning light, located on the
instrument panel, will show the status of
the driver and passenger seat belt.

NISSAN recommends that injured persons
use seat belts. Check with your doctor for
specific recommendations.

NOTE:
The front passenger seat belt warning
light will not light up if the seat is not
occupied.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
WITH RETRACTOR
WARNING
∙ Every person who drives or rides in
this vehicle should use a seat belt at
all times. Children should be in the
rear seats and in an appropriate
restraint.
∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries.
You could also slide under the lap belt
and receive serious internal injuries.
∙ For the most effective protection
when the vehicle is in motion, the seat
should be upright. Always sit well
back and upright in the seat with both
feet on the floor and adjust the seat
belt properly.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

∙ Do not allow children to play with the
seat belts. Most seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the
seat belt becomes wrapped around a
child’s neck with the ALR mode activated, the child can be seriously injured or killed if the seat belt retracts
and becomes tight. This can occur
even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle
the seat belt to release the child. If the
seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is
already unbuckled, release the child
by cutting the seat belt with a suitable
tool (such as a knife or scissors) to
release the seat belt.

LRS2160

Manual front seat shown (if so equipped)

Fastening the seat belts
1. Adjust the seat. For additional information, refer to “Seats” in this section.

1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2662

Power front seat shown (if so equipped)

LRS2674

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the
A until you hear and feel the
buckle 䊊
latch engage.
∙ The retractor is designed to lock
during a sudden stop or on impact.
A slow pulling motion permits the
seat belt to move and allows you
some freedom of movement in the
seat.
∙ If the seat belt cannot be pulled
from its fully retracted position,
firmly pull the belt and release it.
Then smoothly pull the belt out of
the retractor.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

The ELR mode allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow the driver and
passengers some freedom of movement
in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt
when the vehicle slows down rapidly or
during certain impacts.
The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks
the seat belt for child restraint installation.

LRS2675

3. Position the lap belt portion low and
B as shown.
snug on the hips 䊊
4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward
C .
the retractor to take up extra slack 䊊
Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over
your shoulder and across your chest.
The front passenger seat and the rear
seating positions’ three-point seat belts
have two modes of operation:
∙ Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
∙ Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

When the ALR mode is activated, the seat
belt cannot be extended again until the
seat belt tongue is detached from the
buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode after the seat belt
fully retracts. For additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section.
The ALR mode should be used only for
child restraint installation. During normal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR
mode should not be activated. If it is activated, it may cause uncomfortable seat
belt tension. It can also change the operation of the front passenger air bag.
For additional information, refer to
“Front passenger air bag and status
light” in this section.

1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING
When fastening the seat belts, be certain that the seatbacks are completely
secured in the latched position. If they
are not completely secured, passengers
may be injured in an accident or sudden
stop.

To increase your confidence in the seat
belts, check the operation as follows:
∙ Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock
and restrict further belt movement.
If the retractor does not lock during this
check, get the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service or to learn more about seat belt
operation.

WRS0139

Unfastening the seat belts
To unfasten the seat belt, press the button
1 . The seat belt automation the buckle 䊊
cally retracts.

Checking seat belt operation
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock
seat belt movement by two separate
methods:
∙ When the seat belt is pulled quickly from
the retractor
∙ When the vehicle slows down rapidly

LRS0242

Shoulder belt height adjustment
(front seats)
The shoulder belt anchor height should be
adjusted to the position best for you. For
additional information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section. To
1
adjust, pull out the adjustment button 䊊
and move the shoulder belt anchor to the
2 , so the belt passes over
desired position 䊊
the center of the shoulder. The belt should
be away from your face and neck, but not
falling off your shoulder. Release the adjustment button to lock the shoulder belt
anchor into position.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

The extender adds approximately 8 in
(200 mm) of length and are available for the:

WARNING
∙ After adjustment, release the adjustment button and try to move the
shoulder belt anchor up and down to
make sure it is securely fixed in
position.

∙ Driver and front passenger seating position
∙ 2nd and 3rd row (if so equipped) seating
position

∙ The shoulder belt anchor height
should be adjusted to the position
best for you. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire
restraint system and increase the
chance or severity of injury in an
accident.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for assistance with purchasing an
extender if an extender is required.

WARNING
LRS2157

3rd row shown (if so equipped); 2nd row
similar

Seat belt hook

∙ Only NISSAN seat belt extenders,
made by the same company which
made the original equipment seat
belts, should be used with NISSAN
seat belts.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

∙ Adults and children who can use the
standard seat belt should not use an
extender. Such unnecessary use
could result in serious personal injury
in the event of an accident.

If, because of body size or driving position, it
is not possible to properly fit the
lap/shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender
that is compatible with the installed seat
belts is available for purchase.

∙ Never use seat belt extenders to install child restraints. If the child restraint is not secured properly, the
child could be seriously injured or
killed in a collision or a sudden stop.

When the seat belt is not in use and when
folding down the rear seats, hook the rear
seat belts on the seat belt hooks.

1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

CHILD SAFETY
SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
∙ To clean the seat belt webbing, apply
a mild soap solution or any solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or
carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allow
the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not
allow the seat belts to retract until they
are completely dry.
∙ If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt
guide of the seat belt anchors, the
seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the
shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry
cloth.
∙ Periodically check to see that the seat
belt and the metal components, such
as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible
wires and anchors, work properly. If
loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other
damage on the webbing is found, the
entire seat belt assembly should be replaced.

WARNING
Do not allow children to play with the
seat belts. Most seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat
belt becomes wrapped around a child’s
neck with the ALR mode activated, the
child can be seriously injured or killed if
the seat belt retracts and becomes
tight. This can occur even if the vehicle
is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to release the child. If the seat belt cannot be
unbuckled or is already unbuckled, release the child by cutting the seat belt
with a suitable tool (such as a knife or
scissors) to release the seat belt.
Children need adults to help protect
them. They need to be properly restrained.
In addition to the general information in
this manual, child safety information is
available from many other sources, including doctors, teachers, government traffic
safety offices, and community organizations. Every child is different, so be sure to
learn the best way to transport your child.

There are three basic types of child restraint systems:
∙ Rear-facing child restraints
∙ Forward-facing child restraints
∙ Booster seats
The proper restraint depends on the child’s
size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year
and less than 20 lbs. (9 kg) should be placed
in rear-facing child restraints. Forwardfacing child restraints are available for children who outgrow rear-facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old. Booster
seats are used to help position a vehicle
lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no
longer use a forward-facing child restraint.

WARNING
Infants and children need special protection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not
fit them properly. The shoulder belt may
come too close to the face or neck. The
lap belt may not fit over their small hip
bones. In an accident, an improperly fitting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury. Always use appropriate child
restraints.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require the use of approved child
restraints for infants and small children. For
additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section.

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
You should choose a child restraint that fits
your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and
use.

A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by using either the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system or
with the vehicle seat belt. For additional
information, refer to “Child restraints” in this
section.

SMALL CHILDREN

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens
and children be restrained in the rear
seat. Studies show that children are
safer when properly restrained in the
rear seat than in the front seat.
This is especially important because
your vehicle has a supplemental restraint system (air bag system) for the
front passenger. For additional information, refer to “Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS)” in this section.

INFANTS

Children that are over 1 year old and weigh
at least 20 lbs. (9 kg) should remain in a
rear-facing child restraint as long as possible up to the height or weight limit of the
child restraint. Children who outgrow the
height or weight limit of the rear-facing
child restraint and are at least 1 year old
should be secured in a forward-facing child
restraint with a harness. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for minimum and
maximum weight and height recommendations. NISSAN recommends that small
children be placed in child restraints that
comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards. You should choose a
child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.

Infants up to at least 1 year old should be
placed in a rear-facing child restraint.
NISSAN recommends that infants be
placed in child restraints that comply with
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or

1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LARGER CHILDREN
Children should remain in a forward-facing
child restraint with a harness until they
reach the maximum height or weight limit
allowed by the child restraint manufacturer.
Once a child outgrows the height or weight
limit of the harness-equipped forwardfacing child restraint, NISSAN recommends
that the child be placed in a commercially
available booster seat to obtain proper
seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit properly, the
booster seat should raise the child so that
the shoulder belt is properly positioned
across the chest and the top, middle portion of the shoulder. The shoulder belt
should not cross the neck or face and
should not fall off the shoulder. The lap belt
should lie snugly across the lower hips or
upper thighs, not the abdomen. A booster
seat can only be used in seating positions
that have a three-point type seat belt. The
booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and
have a label certifying that it complies with
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

A booster seat should be used until the
child can pass the seat belt fit test below:

NOTE:
Laws in some communities may follow
different guidelines. Check local and
state regulations to confirm your child is
using the correct restraint system before
traveling.

∙ Are the child’s back and hips against the
vehicle seatback?
∙ Is the child able to sit without slouching?

WARNING

∙ Do the child’s knees bend easily over
the front edge of the seat with feet flat
on the floor?
∙ Can the child safely wear the seat belt
(lap belt low and snug across the hips
and shoulder belt across mid-chest
and shoulder)?
∙ Is the child able to use the properly adjusted head restraint/headrest?
∙ Will the child be able to stay in position
for the entire ride?

Never let a child stand or kneel on any
seat and do not allow a child in the
cargo area. The child could be seriously
injured or killed in a sudden stop or
collision.
LRS2690

If you answered no to any of these questions, the child should remain in a booster
seat using a three-point type seat belt.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

CHILD RESTRAINTS

– NISSAN recommends that all child
restraints be installed in the rear
seat. Studies show that children
are safer when properly restrained
in the rear seat than in the front
seat. If you must install a forwardfacing child restraint in the front
seat, refer to “Forward-facing child
restraint installation using the seat
belts” in this section.

ARS1098

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD
RESTRAINTS
WARNING
∙ Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in
serious injury or death of a child or
other passengers in a sudden stop or
collision:

WRS0256

– The child restraint must be used
and installed properly. Always follow all of the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.
– Infants and children should never
be held on anyone’s lap. Even the
strongest adult cannot resist the
forces of a collision.
– Do not put a seat belt around both
a child and another passenger.

1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

– Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rearfacing child restraint in the front
seat. An inflating air bag could seriously injure or kill a child. A rearfacing child restraint must only be
used in the rear seat.
– Be sure to purchase a child restraint that will fit the child and vehicle. Some child restraints may
not fit properly in your vehicle.

– Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items
or equipment to the vehicle. Doing
so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed
using
the
damaged
anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a
collision.
– Never use the anchor points for
adult seat belts, or other items.
– A child restraint with a top tether
strap should not be used in the
front passenger seat.
– Keep seatbacks as upright as possible after fitting the child
restraint.
– Infants and children should always
be placed in an appropriate child
restraint while in the vehicle.

∙ When the child restraint is not in use,
keep it secured with the LATCH system
or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or collision, loose objects can injure occupants or damage the vehicle.

CAUTION
A child restraint in a closed vehicle can
become very hot. Check the seating
surface and buckles before placing a
child in the child restraint.
This vehicle is equipped with a universal
child restraint anchor system, referred to
as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren) system. Some child restraints
include rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to these anchors. For additional information, refer to
“LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system” in this section.
If you do not have a LATCH compatible
child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be
used.

Several manufacturers offer child restraints for infants and children of various
sizes. When selecting any child restraint,
keep the following points in mind:
∙ Choose only a restraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
∙ Check the child restraint in your vehicle
to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat and seat belt system.
∙ If the child restraint is compatible with
your vehicle, place your child in the child
restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is
compatible with your child. Choose a
child restraint that is designed for your
child’s height and weight. Always follow
all recommended procedures.
∙ If the combined weight of the child and
child restraint is less than 65 lbs.
(29.5 kg), you may use either the LATCH
anchors or the seat belt to install the
child restraint (not both at the same
time).

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

∙ If the combined weight of the child and
child restraint is greater than 65 lbs.
(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not
the lower anchors) to install the child
restraint.

hicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to
install the child restraint. Be sure to follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation.
The LATCH lower anchor points are provided to install child restraints in the following positions only:

∙ Be sure to follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions for installation.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved
child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated. Canadian law requires the top tether strap on forwardfacing child restraints be secured to the
designated anchor point on the vehicle.

∙ 2nd row bench seat – outboard seating
positions

LATCH lower anchor
WARNING
LRS2975

LATCH system lower anchor locations bench seat

LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points that are used with LATCH system compatible child restraints. This system may also be referred to as the ISOFIX
or ISOFIX compatible system. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat
belt to secure the child restraint unless the
combined weight of the child and child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and child restraint
is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the ve-

1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in
serious injury or death of a child or
other passengers in a sudden stop or
collision:
– Attach LATCH system compatible
child restraints only at the locations shown in the illustration.
– Do not secure a child restraint in
the 2nd row center position using
the LATCH system anchors. The
child restraint will not be secured
properly.

– Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your fingers into the lower
anchor area. Feel to make sure
there are no obstructions over the
anchors such as seat belt webbing
or seat cushion material. The child
restraint will not be secured properly if the lower anchors are
obstructed.
– Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items
or equipment to the vehicle. Doing
so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed
using
the
damaged
anchorages, and a child could be
seriously injured or killed in a
collision.

WRS0700

LATCH lower anchor location

LRS2977

LATCH label locations 2nd row bench

LATCH lower anchor locations
The LATCH lower anchors are located as
shown. A label is attached to the seatback
to help you locate the LATCH lower anchors.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

Top tether anchor
WARNING
∙ Do not allow cargo to contact the top
tether strap when it is attached to the
top tether anchor. Properly secure the
cargo so it does not contact the top
tether strap. Cargo that is not properly
secured or cargo that contacts the top
tether strap may damage it during a
collision. A child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the top
tether strap is damaged.
LRS0661

LATCH webbing-mounted attachment

Installing child restraint LATCH
lower anchor attachments
LATCH compatible child restraints include
two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to two anchors located at certain seating positions
in your vehicle. With this system, you do not
have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the
child restraint. Check your child restraint for
a label stating that it is compatible with
LATCH. This information may also be in the
instructions provided by the child restraint
manufacturer.

LRS0662

LATCH rigid-mounted attachment
When installing a child restraint, carefully
read and follow the instructions in this
manual and those supplied with the child
restraint.

1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to
the vehicle. Doing so could damage
the child restraint anchorages. The
child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorages, and a child could be seriously
injured or killed in a collision.

The top tether anchor located in the roof is
only to be used for a child restraint located
in the center position of the 2nd row.
A child restraint with a top tether strap
should only be placed in the center position of the 2nd row if there are no 3rd row
occupants.

LRS2714
1
䊊
2
䊊

2nd row bench seat
Top tether strap
Anchor point

Top tether anchor point locations
Anchor points are located in the following
locations:
∙ 2nd row bench on the bottom of the
seatback in the seating positions
shown.

Rearward adjustment of the 2nd row
bench seat will result in loosening of the
top tether strap for the center position of
the 2nd row. Avoid moving the 2nd row
bench seat or retighten the top tether
strap following rearward movement of the
2nd row bench seat.
If you have any questions when installing a
top tether strap, it is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing
child restraint in the 2nd row seats using
the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING LATCH
For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
“Child restraints” sections of this manual
before installing a child restraint.

∙ Roof above the rear cargo area.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

WRS0801

Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 2

WRS0802

Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make sure the LATCH
attachment is properly attached to the
lower anchors.

1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS0673

Rear-facing – step 3
3. For child restraints that are equipped
with webbing-mounted attachments,
remove any additional slack from the
anchor attachments. Press downward
and rearward firmly in the center of the
child restraint with your hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion and
seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.

the vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not
all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
5. Check to make sure the child restraint
is properly secured prior to each use. If
the child restraint is loose, repeat
steps 1 through 4.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT
BELTS

restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing
child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in
the rear seats:

WARNING
LRS0674

Rear-facing – step 4
4. After attaching the child restraint, test
it before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the LATCH attachment
path. The child restraint should not
move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and
check to see if the LATCH attachment
holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH
attachment as necessary, or put the
restraint in another seat and test it
again. You may need to try a different
child restraint or try installing by using

The three-point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be
used when installing a child restraint.
Failure to use the ALR mode will result in
the child restraint not being properly
secured. The restraint could tip over or
be loose and cause injury to a child in a
sudden stop or collision.
For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
“Child restraints” sections of this manual
before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

WRS0256

Rear-facing – step 1
1. Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and
therefore must not be used in the
front seat. Position the child restraint
on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

WRS0761

Rear-facing – step 2
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the
child restraint and insert it into the
buckle until you hear and feel the latch
engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for
belt routing.

1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2395

Rear-facing – step 3
3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is
fully extended. At this time, the seat belt
retractor is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the ELR
mode when the seat belt is fully retracted.

LRS2396

Rear-facing – step 4
4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on
the shoulder belt to remove any slack
in the belt.

WRS0762

Rear-facing – step 5
5. Remove any additional slack from the
seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child
restraint to compress the vehicle seat
cushion and seatback while pulling up
on the seat belt.

LRS2397

Rear-facing – step 6
6. After attaching the child restraint, test
it before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the seat belt path. The
child restraint should not move more
than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.
Try to tug it forward and check to see if
the belt holds the restraint in place. If
the restraint is not secure, tighten the
seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again.
You may need to try a different child
restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all
types of vehicles.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each
use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat
steps 3 through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and the
seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode
(child restraint mode) is canceled.

Follow these steps to install a forwardfacing child restraint in the 2nd row seats
using the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
LATCH
For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
“Child restraints” sections of this manual
before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.

1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2398

Forward-facing

webbing-mounted –
step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make sure the LATCH
attachment is properly attached to the
lower anchors.
If the child restraint is equipped with a
top tether strap, route the top tether
strap and secure the tether strap to
the tether anchor point. For additional
information, refer to “Installing top
tether strap” in this section.

ditional information, refer to “Head
restraints/headrests” in this section.
If the seating position does not have
an adjustable head restraint/headrest
and it is interfering with the proper
child restraint fit, try another seating
position or a different child restraint.

LRS2399

Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in
seating positions that do not have a
top tether anchor.
3. The back of the child restraint should
be secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head
restraint/headrest is removed, store it
in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
the head restraint/headrest when
the child restraint is removed. For ad-

LRS0671

Forward-facing – step 4
4. For child restraints that are equipped
with webbing-mounted attachments,
remove any additional slack from the
anchor attachments. Press downward
and rearward firmly in the center of the
child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and
seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.
5. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

7. Check to make sure the child restraint
is properly secured prior to each use. If
the child restraint is loose, repeat
steps 1 through 6.

WRS0697

Forward-facing – step 6
6. After attaching the child restraint, test
it before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the LATCH attachment
path. The child restraint should not
move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and
check to see if the LATCH attachment
holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH
attachment as necessary, or put the
restraint in another seat and test it
again. You may need to try a different
child restraint. Not all child restraints fit
in all types of vehicles.

1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS3041
1
䊊
2
䊊

2nd row bench seat
Top tether strap
Anchor point

Installing top tether strap
The child restraint top tether strap must be
used when installing the child restraint with
the LATCH lower anchor attachments.
First, secure the child restraint with the
LATCH lower anchors (2nd row bench outboard seating positions only).

2nd row bench seat
OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS
1. Remove the head restraint/headrest
and store it in a secure place. Be sure to
reinstall the head restraint/headrest
when the child restraint is removed. For
additional information, refer to “Head
restraints/headrests” in this section.
1 over
2. Position the top tether strap 䊊
the seatback.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether
2 as shown.
anchor point 䊊
4. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack.

WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to
the vehicle. Doing so could damage the
child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a
child could be seriously injured or killed
in a collision.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
THE SEAT BELTS
WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be
used when installing a child restraint.
Failure to use the ALR mode will result in
the child restraint not being properly
secured. The restraint could tip over or
be loose and cause injury to a child in a
sudden stop or collision. Also, it can
change the operation of the front passenger air bag. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag
and status light” in this section.

If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

Follow these steps to install a forwardfacing child restraint using the vehicle seat
belt in the rear seats or in the front passenger seat:
1. If you must install a child restraint in
the front seat, it should be placed in a
forward-facing direction only. Move
the seat to the rearmost position.
Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and,
therefore, must not be used in the
front seat.
WRS0699

Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –
step 1
For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
“Child restraints” sections of this manual
before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
The back of the child restraint should
be secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head
restraint/headrest is removed, store it
in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
the head restraint/headrest when
the child restraint is removed. For additional information, refer to “Head
restraints/headrests” in this section.

1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

If the seating position does not have
an adjustable head restraint/headrest
and it is interfering with the proper
child restraint fit, try another seating
position or a different child restraint.

Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in
seating positions that do not have a
top tether anchor.

WRS0680

Forward-facing – step 3
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the
child restraint and insert it into the
buckle until you hear and feel the latch
engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for
belt routing.

LRS2394

Forward-facing – step 4
4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is
fully extended. At this time, the seat belt
retractor is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to ELR mode
when the seat belt is fully retracted.

If the child restraint is equipped with a
top tether strap, route the top tether
strap and secure the tether strap to
the tether anchor point (2nd row installation only). For additional information, refer to “Installing top tether strap”
in this section.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

LRS0668

Forward-facing – step 5
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on
the shoulder belt to remove any slack
in the belt.

WRS0681

Forward-facing – step 6
6. Remove any additional slack from the
seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child
restraint with your knee to compress
the vehicle seat cushion and seatback
while pulling up on the seat belt.
7. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack.

1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WRS0698

Forward-facing – step 8
8. After attaching the child restraint, test
it before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the seat belt path. The
child restraint should not move more
than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.
Try to tug it forward and check to see if
the belt holds the restraint in place. If
the restraint is not secure, tighten the
seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again.
You may need to try a different child
restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all
types of vehicles.

9. Check to make sure the child restraint
is properly secured prior to each use. If
the seat belt is not locked, repeat
steps 4 through 8.

WRS0475

Forward-facing – step 10
10. If the child restraint is installed in the
front passenger seat, place the ignition
switch in the ON position. The front
passenger air bag status light
should illuminate. If this light is not illuminated, refer to “Front passenger air
bag and status light” in this section.
Move the child restraint to another
seating position. Have the system
checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
After the child restraint is removed and the
seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode
(child restraint mode) is canceled.

LRS2714
1
䊊
2
䊊

2nd row bench seat
Top tether strap
Anchor point

Installing top tether strap
The child restraint top tether strap must be
used when installing the child restraint with
seat belts.
First, secure the child restraint with the seat
belt.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether
2 as shown.
anchor point 䊊
4. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack.
CENTER SEATING POSITION
1. Remove the head restraint/headrest
and store it in a secure place. Be sure to
reinstall the head restraint/headrest
when the child restraint is removed. For
additional information, refer to “Head
restraints/headrests” in this section.

4. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack. Make sure the head
restraint/headrest does not contact
the top tether strap.
If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.

2 cover
2. Open the top tether anchor 䊊
located on the ceiling.
1 to the tether
3. Secure the tether strap 䊊
2 as shown.
anchor point 䊊

1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

BOOSTER SEATS
For additional information on installing a
booster seat in your vehicle, follow the instructions outlined in this section.

Precautions on booster seats
WARNING
If a booster seat and seat belt are not
used properly, the risk of a child being
injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision greatly increases:
– Make sure the shoulder portion of
the belt is away from the child’s
face and neck and the lap portion
of the belt does not cross the
stomach.
– Make sure the shoulder belt is not
behind the child or under the
child’s arm.
– A booster seat must only be installed in a seating position that
has a lap/shoulder belt.

LRS2479

Low back booster seat

High back booster seat

LRS0453

LRS0464

Booster seats of various sizes are offered
by several manufacturers. When selecting
any booster seat, keep the following points
in mind:

∙ Make sure the child’s head will be properly supported by the booster seat or
vehicle seat. The seatback must be at
or above the center of the child’s ears.
For example, if a low back booster seat
is chosen, the vehicle seatback must be
at or above the center of the child’s ears.
If the seatback is lower than the center
of the child’s ears, a high back booster
seat should be used.

∙ Choose only a booster seat with a label
certifying that it complies with Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
∙ Check the booster seat in your vehicle
to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat and seat belt system.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

∙ If the booster seat is compatible with
your vehicle, place the child in the
booster seat and check the various adjustments to be sure the booster seat is
compatible with the child. Always follow
all recommended procedures.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat
in the 2nd or 3rd rows (if so equipped) or in
the front passenger seat:

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved
child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated.
The instructions in this section apply to
booster seat installation in the rear seats
or the front passenger seat.

Booster seat installation
WARNING
To avoid injury to child, do not use the
lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when using a booster seat with the seat belts.
For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety,”
“Child restraints” and “Booster seats” sections of this manual before installing a child
restraint.

1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WRS0699

1. If you must install a booster seat in
the front seat, move the seat to the
rearmost position.
2. Position the booster seat on the seat.
Only place it in a front-facing direction.
Always follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions.

If the seating position does not have
an adjustable head restraint/headrest
and it is interfering with the proper
booster seat fit, try another seating
position or a different booster seat.
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt
low and snug on the child’s hips. Be
sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the
seat belt routing.

LRS0454

Front passenger position
3. The booster seat should be positioned
on the vehicle seat so that it is stable.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the correct booster seat fit. If the head
restraint/headrest is removed, store it
in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
the head restraint/headrest when
the booster seat is removed. For additional information, refer to “Head
restraints/headrests” in this section.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the
seat belt toward the retractor to take
up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder
belt is positioned across the top,
middle portion of the child’s shoulder.
Be sure to follow the booster seat
manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing.
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instructions for properly fastening a seat
belt shown in “Three-point type seat
belt with retractor” in this section.

WRS0475

7. If the booster seat is installed in the
front passenger seat, place the ignition
switch in the ON position. The front pasmay or
senger air bag status light
may not illuminate, depending on the
size of the child and the type of booster
seat being used. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air
bag and status light” in this section.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
(SRS)
PRECAUTIONS ON SRS
This SRS section contains important information concerning the following systems:
∙ Driver and front passenger supplemental front-impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System)
∙ Front
seat-mounted
supplemental air bag

side-impact

∙ Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag
∙ Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front
seats)
Supplemental front-impact air bag system
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can
help cushion the impact force to the head
and chest of the driver and front passenger
in certain frontal collisions.
Front
seat-mounted
side-impact
supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact
force to the chest area of the driver and
front passenger in certain side-impact collisions. The side air bags are designed to
inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact
force to the head of occupants in front and
rear outboard seating positions in certain
side-impact collisions. The curtain air bags
are designed to inflate on the side where
the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, the
curtain air bags are designed to inflate and
remain inflated for a short time.
The SRS is designed to supplement the
crash protection provided by the driver and
front passenger seat belts and is not a
substitute for them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occupant
seated a suitable distance away from the
steering wheel, instrument panel and door
finishers. For additional information, refer
to “Seat belts” in this section.
The supplemental air bags operate only
when the ignition switch is placed in the
ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the
ON position, the supplemental air bag
warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off
after about 7 seconds if the system is
operational.

1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

and as far away as practical from the
steering wheel or instrument panel.
Always properly use the seat belts.
∙ The driver and front passenger seat
belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are
fastened. The NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System monitors the severity of a
collision and seat belt usage, then inflates the air bags as needed. Failure
to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in
an accident.
WRS0031

WARNING
∙ The front air bags ordinarily will not
inflate in the event of a side impact,
rear impact, rollover, or lower severity
frontal collision. Always wear your
seat belts to help reduce the risk or
severity of injury in various kinds of
accidents
∙ The front passenger air bag will not
inflate if the passenger air bag status
light is lit. For additional information,
refer to “Front passenger air bag and
status light” in this section.

∙ The seat belts and the front air bags
are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat.
The front air bags inflate with great
force. Even with the NISSAN Advanced
Air Bag System, if you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you
are at greater risk of injury or death in
a crash. You may also receive serious
or fatal injuries from the front air bag
if you are up against it when it inflates.
Always sit back against the seatback

∙ The front passenger seat is equipped
with an occupant classification sensor (weight sensor) that turns the
front passenger air bag OFF under
some conditions. This sensor is only
used in this seat. Failure to be properly
seated and wearing the seat belt can
increase the risk or severity of injury in
an accident. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag
and status light” in this section.
∙ Keep hands on the outside of the
steering wheel. Placing them inside
the steering wheel rim could increase
the risk that they are injured when the
front air bag inflates.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

ARS1133

ARS1041

WARNING
∙ Never let children ride unrestrained or
extend their hands or face out of the
window. Do not attempt to hold them
in your lap or arms. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.

1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ARS1042

ARS1043

ARS1044

WARNING
∙ Children may be severely injured or
killed when the front air bags, side air
bags or curtain air bags inflate if they
are not properly restrained. Pre-teens
and children should be properly restrained in the rear seat, if possible.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53

ARS1045

ARS1046

WRS0431

∙ Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rearfacing child restraint in the front seat.
An inflating front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. For additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section.

Front
seat-mounted
side-impact
supplemental air bags and roofmounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags:

WARNING

1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

∙ The side air bags and curtain air bags
ordinarily will not inflate in the event
of a frontal impact, rear impact, or
lower severity side collision. Always
wear your seat belts to help reduce
the risk or severity of injury in various
kinds of accidents.

WARNING
∙ The seat belts, the side air bags and
curtain air bags are most effective
when you are sitting well back and
upright in the seat with both feet on
the floor. The side air bag and curtain
air bag inflate with great force. Do not
allow anyone to place their hand, leg
or face near the side air bag on the
side of the seatback of the front seat
or near the side roof rails. Do not allow
anyone sitting in the front seats or
rear outboard seats to extend their
hand out of the window or lean
against the door. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the previous illustrations.

WRS0032

SSS0162

WARNING
∙ When sitting in the rear seat, do not
hold onto the seatback of the front
seat. If the side air bag inflates, you
may be seriously injured. Be especially careful with children, who
should always be properly restrained.
Some examples of dangerous riding
positions
are
shown
in
the
illustrations.
∙ Do not use seat covers on the front
seatbacks. They may interfere with
side air bag inflation.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55

SSS0159

LRS2815

1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats)
1. Supplemental front-impact air bag
modules
2. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)
3. Occupant classification sensor (weight
sensor)
4. Front
seat-mounted
side-impact
supplemental air bag modules
5. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
and rollover supplemental air bags
6. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
and rollover supplemental air bag inflators
7. Satellite sensors
8. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front
seats)
9. Pressure sensors in door (driver’s side
shown; front passenger side similar)
10. Crash zone sensor

WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the passenger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, please observe the following
items.
∙ Do not allow a passenger in the rear
bench seats to push or pull on the
seatback pocket.
∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than
9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head
restraint/headrest or in the seatback
pocket.
∙ Make sure that there is nothing pressing against the rear of the seatback,
such as a child restraint installed in
the rear seat or an object stored on
the floor.
∙ Make sure that there is no object
placed under the front passenger
seat.
∙ Make sure that there is no object
placed between the seat cushion and
center console or between the seat
cushion and the door.

∙ If a forward-facing child restraint is
installed in the front passenger seat,
do not position the front passenger
seat so the child restraint contacts the
instrument panel. If the child restraint
does contact the instrument panel,
the system may determine the seat is
occupied and the passenger air bag
may deploy in a collision. Also the
front passenger air bag status light
may not illuminate. For additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in
this section.
∙ Confirm the operating condition with
the front passenger air bag status
light.
∙ If you notice that the front passenger
air bag status light is not operating as
described in this section, get the occupant classification system checked.
It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
∙ Until you have confirmed with a
dealer that your passenger seat occupant classification system is working
properly, position the occupants in
the rear seating positions.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57

∙ Do not position the front passenger
seat so it contacts the rear seat. If the
front seat does contact the rear seat,
the air bag system may determine a
sensor malfunction has occurred and
the front passenger air bag status
light may illuminate and the supplemental air bag warning light may
flash.
This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN
Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and
front passenger seats. This system is designed to meet certification requirements
under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in
Canada. However, all of the information,
cautions and warnings in this manual
still apply and must be followed.
The driver supplemental front-impact air
bag is located in the center of the steering
wheel. The front passenger supplemental
front-impact air bag is mounted in the
dashboard above the glove box. The front
air bags are designed to inflate in higher
severity frontal collisions, although they
may inflate if the forces in another type of
collision are similar to those of a higher
severity frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle

damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper front air bag system operation.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
monitors information from the crash zone
sensor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), seat
belt buckle sensors and occupation classification sensor (weight sensor). Inflator operation is based on the severity of a collision and seat belt usage for the driver. For
the front passenger, the occupant classification sensor is also monitored. Based on
information from the sensor, only one front
air bag may inflate in a crash, depending on
the crash severity and whether the front
occupants are belted or unbelted. Additionally, the front passenger air bag may be
automatically turned off under some conditions, depending on the weight detected
on the front passenger seat and how the
seat belt is used. If the front passenger air
bag is OFF, the front passenger air bag status light will be illuminated. For additional
information, refer to “Front passenger air
bag and status light” in this section. One
front air bag inflating does not indicate improper performance of the system.
If you have any questions about your air
bag system, it is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer to obtain information

1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

about the system. If you are considering
modification of your vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the front of
this Owner’s Manual.
When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud
noise may be heard, followed by the release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful
and does not indicate a fire. Care should be
taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a
breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.
Front air bags, along with the use of seat
belts, help to cushion the impact force on
the face and chest of the front occupants.
They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating front air
bag may cause facial abrasions or other
injuries. Front air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.
Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat
belts should be correctly worn and the
driver and front passenger seated upright
as far as practical away from the steering
wheel or instrument panel. The front air
bags inflate quickly in order to help protect
the front occupants. Because of this, the
force of the front air bag inflating can in-

crease the risk of injury if the occupant is
too close to, or is against, the front air bag
module during inflation.

Status light

The front air bags deflate quickly after a
collision.
The front air bags operate only when the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the
ON position, the supplemental air bag
warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off
after about 7 seconds if the system is
operational.

WRS0475

Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

The front passenger seat is equipped with
an occupant classification sensor (weight
sensor) that turns the front passenger air
bag on or off depending on the weight applied to the front passenger seat. The status of the front passenger air bag (ON or
OFF) is indicated by the front passenger air
which is located on
bag status light
the instrument panel.
After the ignition switch is placed in the
"ON" position, the front passenger air bag
status light on the instrument panel illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns
off or remains illuminated depending on
the front passenger seat occupied status.
The light operates as follows:

The front passenger air bag is designed
to automatically turn OFF under some
conditions. Read this section carefully
to learn how it operates. Proper use of
the seat, seat belt and child restraints is
necessary for most effective protection. Failure to follow all instructions in
this manual concerning the use of
seats, seat belts and child restraints can
increase the risk or severity of injury in
an accident.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59

CONDITION

DESCRIPTION

Empty

Empty front passenger seat
Bag or Child or Child Restraint or
Small Adult in front passenger seat
Adult in the front passenger seat

Nobody/Somebody
Adult

In addition to the above, certain objects
placed on the front passenger seat may
also cause the light to operate as described above depending on their weight.
For additional information, refer to “Normal
operation” and “Troubleshooting” in this
section.
Front passenger air bag
The front passenger air bag is designed to
automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is
operated under some conditions as described below in accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front passenger air bag is OFF,
it will not inflate in a crash. The driver air bag
and other air bags in your vehicle are not
part of this system.
The purpose of the regulation is to help
reduce the risk of injury or death from an
inflating air bag to certain front passenger
seat occupants, such as children, by requir-

PASSENGER AIR BAG STA)
TUS LIGHT (
ON (illuminated)

FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG STATUS
INHIBITED

ON (illuminated)

INHIBITED

OFF (dark)

ACTIVATED

ing the air bag to be automatically turned
OFF. Certain sensors are used to meet the
requirements.
The occupant classification sensor in this
vehicle is a weight sensor. It is designed to
detect an occupant and objects on the
seat by weight. For example, if a child is in
the front passenger seat, the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System is designed to turn
the front passenger air bag OFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if a child
restraint of the type specified in the regulations is on the seat, its weight and the
child’s weight can be detected and cause
the air bag to turn OFF.
Front passenger seat adult occupants who
are properly seated and using the seat belt
as outlined in this manual should not
cause the front passenger air bag to be
automatically turned OFF. For small adults
it may be turned OFF, however if the occupant takes his/her weight off the seat
cushion (for example, by not sitting upright,

1-60 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by
otherwise being out of position), this could
cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF.
Always be sure to be seated and wearing
the seat belt properly for the most effective
protection by the seat belt and supplemental air bag.
NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and
children be properly restrained in a rear
seat. NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child restraints and booster
seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If
this is not possible, the occupant classification sensor is designed to operate as described above to turn the front passenger
air bag OFF for specified child restraints as
required by the regulations. Failing to properly secure child restraints and to use the
ALR mode may allow the restraint to tip or
move in a collision or sudden stop. This can
also result in the passenger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being OFF. For

additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section.
If the front passenger seat is not occupied,
the front passenger air bag is designed not
to inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects
placed on the seat could result in air bag
inflation, because of the object’s weight detected by the occupant classification sensor. Other conditions could also result in air
bag inflation, such as if a child is standing
on the seat, or if two children are on the
seat, contrary to the instructions in this
manual. Always be sure that you and all
vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly.
Using the front passenger air bag status
light, you can monitor when the front passenger air bag is automatically turned OFF.
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the
front passenger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating that the air bag is OFF),
it could be that the person is a small adult,
or is not sitting on the seat properly or not
using the seat belt properly.
If a child restraint must be used in the front
seat, the front passenger air bag status
light may or may not be illuminated, depending on the size of the child and the
type of child restraint being used. If the air

bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that the air bag might inflate in a crash),
it could be that the child restraint or seat
belt is not being used properly. Make sure
that the child restraint is installed properly,
the seat belt is used properly and the occupant is positioned properly. If the air bag
status light is still not illuminated, reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear
seat.
If the front passenger air bag status light
will not illuminate even though you believe
that the child restraint, the seat belts and
the occupant are properly positioned, it is
recommended that you take your vehicle
to a NISSAN dealer. A NISSAN dealer can
check system status by using a special
tool. However, until you have confirmed
with a dealer that your air bag is working
properly, reposition the occupant or child
restraint in a rear seat.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and
front passenger air bag status light will
take a few seconds to register a change in
the front passenger seat status. This is normal system operation and does not indicate a malfunction.
If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air bag system, the supplemental air

, located in the mebag warning light
ter and gauges area of the instrument
panel, will be illuminated (blinking or
steadily lit). Have the system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Normal operation
In order for the occupant classification
sensor system to classify the front passenger based on weight, please follow the precautions and steps outlined below:
Precautions
∙ Make sure that there are no objects
weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) hanging on
the seat or placed in the seatback
pocket.
∙ Make sure that a child restraint or other
object is not pressing against the rear
of the seatback.
∙ Make sure that a rear passenger is not
pushing or pulling on the back of the
front passenger seat.
∙ Make sure that the front passenger
seat or seatback is not forced back
against an object on the seat or floor
behind it.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61

∙ Make sure that there is no object placed
under the front passenger seat.
Steps
1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the “Seats”
section of this manual. Sit upright, leaning against the seatback, and centered
on the seat cushion with your feet comfortably extended to the floor.
2. Make sure there are no objects on your
lap.
3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the
“Seat belts” section of this manual.
Front passenger seat belt buckle status is monitored by the occupant classification system, and is used as an input to determine occupancy status. So,
it is highly recommended that the front
passenger fasten their seat belt.
4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds
allowing the system to classify the
front passenger before the vehicle is
put into motion.

NOTE:
This vehicle’s occupant classification
sensor system generally keeps the classification locked during driving, so it is
important that you confirm that the
front passenger is properly classified
prior to driving. However, the occupant
classification sensor may recalculate the
weight of the occupant under some conditions (both while driving and when
stopped), so front passenger seat occupants should continue to remain seated
as outlined above.
Troubleshooting

However, if the occupant is not a small
adult, then this may be due to the following
conditions that may be interfering with the
weight sensors:
∙ Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning
against the seatback, and centered on
the seat cushion with his/her feet comfortably extended to the floor.
∙ A child restraint or other object pressing
against the rear of the seatback.
∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on
the back of the front passenger seat.

If you think the front passenger air bag
status light is incorrect:

∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback
against an object on the seat or floor
behind it.

1. If the light is ON with an adult occupying
the front passenger seat:

∙ An object placed under the front passenger seat.

∙ Occupant is a small adult — the air bag
light is functioning as intended. The
front passenger air bag is suppressed.

∙ An object placed between the seat
cushion and center console or between
the seat cushion and the door.

5. Ensure proper classification by checking the front passenger air bag status
light.

1-62 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a
stop when it is safe to do so. Check and
correct any of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

NOTE:
A system check will be performed during
which the front passenger air bag status
light will remain lit for about 7 seconds
initially.
If the light is still ON after this, the person
should be advised not to ride in the front
passenger seat and the vehicle should be
checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
2. If the light is OFF with a small adult,
child or child restraint occupying the
front passenger seat.
This may be due to the following conditions that may be interfering with the
weight sensors:
∙ Small adult or child is not sitting upright,
leaning against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion with his/her
feet comfortably extended to the floor.
∙ The child restraint is not properly installed, as outlined in the “Child restraints” section of this manual.
∙ An object weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg)
hanging on the seat or placed in the
seatback pocket.

∙ A child restraint or other object pressing
against the rear of the seatback.
∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on
the back of the front passenger seat.
∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback
against an object on the seat or floor
behind it.
∙ An object placed under the front passenger seat.
∙ An object placed between the seat
cushion and center console.
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a
stop when it is safe to do so. Check and
correct any of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.
NOTE:
A system check will be performed during
which the front passenger air bag status
light will remain lit for about 7 seconds
initially.
If the light is still OFF after this, the small
adult, child or child restraint should be repositioned in the rear seat and the vehicle
should be checked as soon as possible. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

3. If the light is OFF with no front passenger and no objects on the front passenger seat, the vehicle should be
checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.
Other supplemental front-impact air
bag precautions

WARNING
∙ Do not place any objects on the steering wheel pad or on the instrument
panel. Also, do not place any objects
between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel. Such
objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the front air
bags inflate.
∙ Immediately after inflation, several
front air bag system components will
be hot. Do not touch them; you may
severely burn yourself.
∙ No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the supplemental air bag system. This
is to prevent accidental inflation of
the supplemental air bag or damage
to the supplemental air bag system.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-63

∙ Do not make unauthorized changes
to your vehicle’s electrical system,
suspension system or front end structure. This could affect proper operation of the front air bag system.
∙ Tampering with the front air bag system may result in serious personal injury. Tampering includes changes to
the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad and
above the instrument panel or by installing additional trim material
around the air bag system.
∙ Removing or modifying the front passenger seat may affect the function of
the air bag system and result in serious personal injury.

∙ Modifying or tampering with the front
passenger seat may result in serious
personal injury. For example, do not
change the front seats by placing material on the seat cushion or by installing additional trim material, such as
seat covers, on the seat that are not
specifically designed to assure proper
air bag operation. Additionally, do not
stow any objects under the front passenger seat or the seat cushion and
seatback. Such objects may interfere
with the proper operation of the occupant classification sensor (weight
sensor).
∙ No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the seat belt system. This may affect
the front air bag system. Tampering
with the seat belt system may result
in serious personal injury.

∙ It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and around
the front air bag. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for installation of electrical equipment. The Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) wiring harnesses*
should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test
equipment and probing devices
should not be used on the air bag
system.
∙ A cracked windshield should be replaced immediately by a qualified repair facility. A cracked windshield
could affect the function of the
supplemental air bag system.
*The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the front air
bag system and guide the buyer to the
appropriate sections in this Owner’s
Manual.

1-64 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity impact.
They are designed to inflate on the side
where the vehicle is impacted. They may
not inflate in certain side collisions.
Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate
in certain types of rollover collisions or near
rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle movements (for example, during severe offroading) may cause the curtain air bags to
inflate.

WRS0381

Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag and
roof-mounted curtain sideimpact and rollover supplemental
air bag systems
The side air bags are located in the outside
of the seatback of the front seats. The curtain air bags are located in the side roof
rails in all three rows. All of the information, cautions and warnings in this
manual apply and must be followed. The
side air bags and curtain air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions, although they may inflate if the

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always
an indication of proper side air bag and
curtain air bag operation.
When the side air bags and curtain air bags
inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard,
followed by release of smoke. This smoke is
not harmful and does not indicate a fire.
Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it
may cause irritation and choking. Those
with a history of a breathing condition
should get fresh air promptly.
Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
help to cushion the impact force on the
chest of the front occupants. Curtain air
bags help to cushion the impact force to the
head of occupants in the front and rear outboard seating positions in all rows. They can
help save lives and reduce serious injuries.

However, an inflating side air bag or curtain
air bag may cause abrasions or other injuries. Side air bags and curtain air bags do not
provide restraint to the lower body.
The seat belts should be correctly worn
and the driver and front passenger seated
upright as far as practical away from the
side air bag. Rear seat passengers should
be seated as far away as practical from the
door finishers and side roof rails. The side
air bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly
in order to help protect the occupants. Because of this, the force of the side air bags
and curtain air bags inflating can increase
the risk of injury if the occupant is too close
to, or is against, these air bag modules during inflation. The side air bag will deflate
quickly after the collision is over.
The curtain air bag will remain inflated for a
short time.
The side air bags and curtain air bags
operate only when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the
ON position, the supplemental air bag
warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off
after about 7 seconds if the system is
operational.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-65

WARNING
∙ Do not place any objects near the
seatback of the front seats. Also, do
not place any objects (an umbrella,
bag, etc.) between the front door finisher and the front seat. Such objects
may become dangerous projectiles
and cause injury if a side air bag
inflates.
∙ Right after inflation, several side air
bag and curtain air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch
them; you may severely burn yourself.
∙ No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the side air bag and curtain air bag
systems. This is to prevent damage to
or accidental inflation of the side air
bag and curtain air bag systems.
∙ Do not make unauthorized changes
to your vehicle’s electrical system,
suspension system or side panel. This
could affect proper operation of the
curtain air bag systems.

∙ Tampering with the side air bag system may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the
front seats by placing material near
the seatbacks or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, around the side air bag.
∙ It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and around
the side air bag and curtain air bag. It
is also recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical
test equipment and probing devices
should not be used on the side air bag
or curtain air bag systems.
*The SRS wiring harness or connectors
are yellow or orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the side air
bags and curtain air bag system and guide
the buyer to the appropriate sections in
this Owner’s Manual.

1-66 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Seat belt with pretensioner(s)
(front seats)
WARNING
∙ The pretensioner(s) cannot be reused
after activation. They must be replaced together with the retractor
and buckle as a unit.
∙ If the vehicle becomes involved in a
collision but pretensioner(s) are not
activated, be sure to have the pretensioner system checked and, if necessary, replaced. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
∙ No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the pretensioner system. This is to
prevent damage to or accidental activation of the pretensioner(s). Tampering with the pretensioner system may
result in serious personal injury.

∙ It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and around
the pretensioner system. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for installation of electrical
equipment. Unauthorized electrical
test equipment and probing devices
should not be used on the pretensioner system.
∙ If you need to dispose of the pretensioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.
The pretensioner system may activate
with the supplemental air bag system in
certain types of collisions. Working with the
seat belt retractor, the pretensioner(s) help
tighten the seat belt when the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat occupants.
The pretensioner(s) are encased within the
seat belt retractor and to the seat belt anchor affixed to the floor of the vehicle.
These seat belts are used the same way as
conventional seat belts.

When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard. This
smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to
inhale it, as it may cause irritation and
choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.
After the pretensioner(s’) activation, load
limiters allow the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to reduce forces against
the chest.
The supplemental air bag warning
is used to indicate malfunctions
light
in the pretensioner system. For additional
information, refer to "Supplemental air bag
warning light" in this section. If the operation of the supplemental air bag warning
light indicates there is a malfunction, have
the system checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the pretensioner system and guide the buyer to the
appropriate sections in this Owner’s
Manual.

WRS0885

1. SRS Air Bag Warning Labels
The warning labels are located on the
surface of the sun visor.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING
LABELS
Warning labels about the supplemental
front-impact air bag system are placed in
the vehicle as shown in the illustration.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-67

If any of the following conditions occur, the
front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag
and pretensioner systems need servicing:

WARNING
Do not use a rear-facing child restraint
on a seat protected by an air bag in
front of it. If the air bag deploys, it may
cause serious injury or death.

∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
does not come on at all.

LRS0100

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING
LIGHT
The supplemental air bag warning light,
displaying
in the instrument panel,
monitors the circuits for the air bag systems, pretensioner(s) and all related wiring.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates for about 7 seconds and
then turns off. This means the system is
operational.

1-68 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Under these conditions, the front air bag,
side air bag, curtain air bag or pretensioner
systems may not operate properly. They
must be checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning
light is on, it could mean that the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag
and/or pretensioner systems will not
operate in an accident. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

Repair and replacement
procedure
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air
bags and pretensioner(s) are designed to
inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light remains illuminated after inflation has occurred. These
systems should be repaired and/or replaced as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
When maintenance work is required on the
vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags,
curtain air bags, pretensioner(s) and related parts should be pointed out to the
person performing the maintenance. The
ignition switch should always be placed in
the LOCK position when working under the
hood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING
∙ Once a front air bag, side air bag, or
curtain air bag has inflated, the air
bag module will not function again
and must be replaced. Additionally,
the activated pretensioner(s) must
also be replaced. The air bag module
and pretensioner(s) should be replaced. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
However, the air bag module and pretensioner(s) cannot be repaired.

∙ If there is an impact to your vehicle
from any direction, your Occupant
Classification Sensor (OCS) should be
checked to verify it is still functioning
correctly. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
The OCS should be checked even if no
air bags deploy as a result of the impact. Failure to verify proper OCS
function may result in an improper air
bag deployment resulting in injury or
death.

∙ The front air bag, side air bag, curtain
air bag systems and the pretensioner
system should be inspected if there is
any damage to the front end or side
portion of the vehicle. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
∙ If you need to dispose of the supplemental air bag or pretensioner systems or scrap the vehicle, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures
could cause personal injury.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-69

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Meters and gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Compass (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Warning lights, indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Checking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Vehicle information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
How to use the vehicle information
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Startup display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Resetting the drive computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Vehicle information display warnings
and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Rear switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Rear window and outside mirror
(if so equipped) defroster switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Instrument brightness control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Heated seat switches (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped) . . 2-52
Dynamic driver assistance switch
(for vehicles without ProPILOT Assist)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Steering Assist switch (for vehicles with
ProPILOT Assist) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch. . . . . . 2-54
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK switch
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54

E-call (SOS) switch (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
12v outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Front-door pockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Glove box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Overhead sunglasses storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
Cargo area storage bin (if so equipped) . . . . . . 2-62
Divide-N-Hide® adjustable floor
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
Luggage hooks (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
Cargo cover (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
Roof rack (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66

Power moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
Console light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
Personal lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
Room light (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Luggage compartment light (if so equipped) . . . 2-73
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Programming HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Programming HomeLink® for Canadian
customers and gate openers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
Operating the HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
Clearing the programmed information . . . . . . 2-77
Reprogramming a single HomeLink®
button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
If your vehicle is stolen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78

INSTRUMENT PANEL
1.
2.

4.
5.

6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
LII2516

2-2 Instruments and controls

14.
15.

16.

17.
18.
19.
20.

Front passenger air bag status
light (P. 1-50)
Cruise control main/set switches
(if so equipped) (P. 5-64)
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-66)
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System*
ProPILOT Assist switch
(if so equipped) (P. 5-90)
Driver supplemental air bag
(P. 1-50)
Horn (P. 2-51)
Tilt and telescopic steering (P. 3-37)
Control panel and vehicle information display switches (P. 2-21)
Hood release (P. 3-27)
Fuel door release (P. 3-34)
SPORT mode switch (P. 5-33)
ECO mode switch (P. 5-33)
Power liftgate switch (if so
equipped) (P. 3-28)
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-54)
Steering Assist switch (for vehicles
with ProPILOT Assist)
(if so equipped) (P. 2-53)

21.

*: Refer to the separate NissanConnect®
Owner’s Manual (if so equipped).
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.

Instruments and controls 2-3

METERS AND GAUGES

LIC2255

Speedometer
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

LIC2627

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Tachometer
Warning and indicator lights
Vehicle information display
Speedometer
Fuel gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge

2-4 Instruments and controls

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER
This vehicle is equipped with a speedometer and odometer. The speedometer is
located on the right side of the meter cluster. The odometer is located within the vehicle information display.

Changing the display
2 on the left
Push the TRIP RESET switch 䊊
side of the instrument panel to change the
display as follows:

ODO → Trip

→ Trip

→ ODO

Resetting the trip odometer
2 for more
Pushing the TRIP RESET switch 䊊
than 1 second resets the currently displayed trip odometer to zero.

LIC3693

Odometer/Twin trip odometer
The odometer and the twin trip odometer
1 are displayed in the vehicle information
䊊
display when the ignition switch is placed
in the ON position.
The odometer records the total distance
the vehicle has been driven.
The twin trip odometer records the distance of individual trips.

LIC3694

Clock and Outside temperature
display
Clock
The clock is displayed at the top of the
vehicle information display.
Outside temperature display
The outside temperature is displayed at
the top of the vehicle information display.
The snowflake icon appears if the outside
temperature is below 37°F (3°C). The temperature can be changed to display in Celsius or Fahrenheit. For additional information, refer to “Unit” in this section.

Instruments and controls 2-5

CAUTION
If the gauge indicates coolant temperature near the hot (H) end of the normal
range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease
temperature. If the gauge is over the
normal range, stop the vehicle as soon
as safely possible. If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may seriously damage the engine.
For additional information, refer to “If
your vehicle overheats” in the “In case
of emergency” section of this manual
for immediate action required.
LIC2219

TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev
1 .
engine into the red zone 䊊

CAUTION
When engine speed approaches the red
zone, reduce engine speed. Operating
the engine in the red zone may cause
serious engine damage.

2-6 Instruments and controls

LIC2220

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
The gauge indicates the engine coolant
temperature. The engine coolant tempera1 when
ture is within the normal range 䊊
the gauge needle points within the zone
shown in the illustration.
The engine coolant temperature varies
with the outside air temperature and driving conditions.

COMPASS (if so equipped)
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers 0 (Empty).
indicates that the fuel-filler door
The
is located on the passenger’s side of the
vehicle.

CAUTION

LIC2222

FUEL GAUGE
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel
level in the tank.
The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning, acceleration, or going up or
down hills.

∙ If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may
come on. Refuel as soon as possible.
light
After a few driving trips. the
should turn off. If the light remains on
after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
∙ For additional information, refer to
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in
this section.

This unit measures terrestrial magnetism
and indicates the heading direction of the
vehicle.
With the ignition switch in the ON position,
button as described in the
press the
charts below to activate various features of
the automatic anti-glare rearview mirror.
Push and hold
the
button for
about:
1 second
8 seconds
10 seconds

Feature:
(Push button again for about
1 second to change settings)
Compass display toggles on/off
Compass zone can be changed
to correct false compass readings
Compass enters calibration
mode

For additional information about the automatic anti-glare feature, refer to “Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror” in the
“Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual.

The gauge needle returns to 0 (Empty) after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position.
The low fuel warning message appears in
the vehicle information display when the
amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

Instruments and controls 2-7

You can also calibrate the compass by driving your vehicle on your everyday route.
The compass will be calibrated once it has
tracked three complete circles.

LIC1487

COMPASS DISPLAY
Press the
button for about one second when the ignition switch is placed in
the ON position to toggle the compass di1 on or off. The display will
rection display 䊊
indicate the direction that the vehicle is
heading.
N: North
E: East
S: South
W: West
If the display reads “C”, calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle in three complete circles at less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

2-8 Instruments and controls

Zone variation change procedure
The difference between magnetic north
and geographical north is known as variance. In some areas, this difference can
sometimes be great enough to cause false
compass readings. Follow these instructions to set the variance for your particular
location if this happens:
button for
1. Press and hold the
about 8 seconds. The current zone
number will appear in the display. Release the button.
2. Find your current location on the zone
map. Refer to the illustration.
button repeatedly to
3. Press the
toggle through the zone numbers until
the desired number appears in the display. Once you have selected a zone
number, the display will show a compass direction within a few seconds.
Inaccurate compass direction
The compass display is equipped with automatic correction function. If the correct
direction is not shown, follow this procedure.
WIC0355

Instruments and controls 2-9

1. With the display turned on, press and
hold the
for about 10 seconds.
The “C” icon in the compass display will
illuminate.
2. Calibrate the compass by driving the
vehicle in three complete circles at a
maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).
3. After completing the circles, the display
should return to normal.

CAUTION
∙ Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,
which are attached to the vehicle by
means of a magnet. They affect the
operation of the compass.
∙ When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened
with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass
cleaner directly on the mirror as it
may cause the liquid cleaner to enter
the mirror housing.

2-10 Instruments and controls

WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS
AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Power steering warning light

High beam assist indicator light (green)
(if so equipped)

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) system
warning light (if so equipped)

Seat belt warning light and chime

High beam indicator light (blue)

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with
Pedestrian Detection system warning light
(if so equipped)

Supplemental air bag warning light

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK indicator
light (if so equipped)

Security indicator light

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
warning light

Brake warning light

Charge warning light

Automatic brake hold indicator light
(green) (if so equipped)

Side light and headlight indicator light
(green)

Automatic brake hold indicator light
(white) (if so equipped)

Slip indicator light

Electronic parking brake warning
light (if so equipped)

Low tire pressure warning light

Front fog light indicator light
(if so equipped)

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Master warning light

Front passenger air bag status light

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
indicator light

Instruments and controls 2-11

CHECKING LIGHTS

WARNING LIGHTS

With all doors closed, apply the parking
brake, fasten the seat belts and place the
ignition switch in the ON position without
starting the engine. The following lights (if
so equipped) will come on:

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle
information display” in this section.

,
or
,
,
The following lights (if so equipped) come
on briefly and then go off:
or
,
,
,
,
If any light fails to come on or operate in a
way other than described, it may indicate a
burned-out bulb and/or a system malfunction. Have the system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Some indicators and warnings are also displayed on the vehicle information display
between the speedometer and tachometer. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in this section.

Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS)
warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the ABS warning light illuminates
and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is
operational.
If the ABS warning light illuminates while
the engine is running or while driving, it
may indicate the ABS is not functioning
properly. Have the system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock
function is turned off. The brake system
then operates normally but without antilock assistance. For additional information,
refer to “Brake system” in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.

Automatic Emergency
Braking (AEB) system
warning light (if so
equipped)
This light comes on when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position. It turns
off after the engine is started.
This light illuminates when the AEB system
is set to OFF on the vehicle information
display.
If the light illuminates when the AEB system is on, it may indicate that the system is
unavailable. For additional information, refer to “Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)”
in the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.

Automatic Emergency
Braking (AEB) with
Pedestrian Detection
system warning light (if so
equipped)
This light comes on when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position. It turns
off after the engine is started.

2-12 Instruments and controls

This light illuminates when the AEB with
Pedestrian Detection system is set to OFF
in the vehicle information display.
If the light illuminates when the AEB with
Pedestrian Detection system is on, it may
indicate that the system is unavailable. For
additional information, refer to “Automatic
Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian
Detection” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Brake warning
light

This light functions for both the parking
brake and the foot brake systems.
Low brake fluid warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the light warns of a low brake fluid
level. If the light comes on while the engine
is running with the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and perform the following:
1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake
fluid as necessary. For additional information, refer to “Brake fluid” in the “Doit-yourself ” section of this manual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have
the warning system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

WARNING
∙ Your brake system may not be working properly if the warning light is on.
Driving could be dangerous. If you
judge it to be safe, drive carefully to
the nearest service station for repairs.
Otherwise, have your vehicle towed
because
driving
it
could
be
dangerous.
∙ Pressing the brake pedal with the engine stopped and/or a low brake fluid
level may increase your stopping distance and braking will require greater
pedal effort as well as pedal travel.
∙ If the brake fluid level is below the
MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake
fluid reservoir, do not drive until the
brake system has been checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
indicator
When the parking brake is released and the
brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the
brake warning light and the ABS warning
light illuminate, it may indicate the ABS is
not functioning properly. Have the brake
system checked and, if necessary, repaired.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. Avoid high-speed
driving and abrupt braking. For additional
information, refer to “Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light” in this section.

Charge warning light
If this light comes on while the engine is
running, it may indicate the charging system is not functioning properly. Turn the
engine off and check the generator belt. If
the belt is loose, broken, missing, or if the
light remains on, have the system checked.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

Instruments and controls 2-13

CAUTION
∙ Do not ground electrical accessories
directly to the battery terminal. Doing
so will bypass the variable voltage
control system and the vehicle battery may not charge completely. For
additional information, refer to “Variable voltage control system” in the
“Do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
∙ Do not continue driving if the generator belt is loose, broken or missing.

Electronic parking
brake warning
light (if so
equipped)

This light illuminates when the electronic
parking brake is activated.
For additional information, refer to “Electronic parking brake” in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.

2-14 Instruments and controls

Low tire pressure warning
light
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire pressure of all tires except the
spare.
The low tire pressure warning light warns
of low tire pressure or indicates that the
TPMS is not functioning properly.
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this light illuminates for about
1 second and turns off.
Low tire pressure warning
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire
pressure, the warning light will illuminate. A “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air”
warning also appears in the vehicle information display.
When the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates, you should stop and adjust
the tire pressure of all four tires to the
recommended COLD tire pressure shown
on the Tire and Loading Information label located in the driver’s door opening.
The low tire pressure warning light does
not automatically turn off when the tire
pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure,

the vehicle must be driven at speeds
above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the
TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure
warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge
to check the tire pressure.
The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning
appears each time the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position as long as the low
tire pressure warning light remains illuminated.
For additional information, refer to “Vehicle
information display” in this section and
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in
the “Starting and driving” section and in the
“In case of emergency” section of this
manual.
TPMS malfunction
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the
low tire pressure warning light will flash for
approximately 1 minute when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position. The
light will remain on after 1 minute. Have the
system checked. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
The "Tire Pressure Low — Add Air" warning
does not appear if the low tire pressure
warning light illuminates to indicate a
TPMS malfunction.

For additional information, refer to “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the
“Starting and driving” section and “Tire
pressure” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of
this manual.

WARNING
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should contact
the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
∙ If the light does not illuminate with
the ignition switch placed in the ON
position, have the vehicle checked as
soon as possible. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.

∙ If the light illuminates while driving,
avoid sudden steering maneuvers or
abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,
pull off the road to a safe location and
stop the vehicle as soon as possible.
Driving with under-inflated tires may
permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and
may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury or
death. Check the tire pressure for all
four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to
the recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading Information label located in the driver’s
door opening to turn the low tire pressure warning light off. If the light still
illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat
or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If
you have a flat tire, replace it with a
spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire
is flat and all tires are properly inflated, have the vehicle checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

∙ When replacing a wheel without the
TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS
will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your
tires replaced and/or TPMS system
reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for these services.
∙ Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect
the proper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION
∙ The TPMS is not a substitute for the
regular tire pressure check. Be sure to
check the tire pressure regularly.
∙ If the vehicle is being driven at speeds
of less than 16 mph (25 km/h), the
TPMS may not operate correctly.
∙ Be sure to install the specified size of
tires to the four wheels correctly.

Instruments and controls 2-15

Master warning light
When the ignition is in the ON position, the
master warning light illuminates if any of
the following are displayed on the vehicle
information display.
∙ All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Tire Size Incorrect
See Owner’s Manual
∙ All-Wheel Drive (AWD) High Temp. Stop
vehicle
∙ All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Error See Owner’s
Manual
∙ No key warning
∙ Low fuel warning
∙ Low windshield-washer fluid warning
∙ Parking brake release warning
∙ Door/liftgate open warning
∙ Loose fuel cap warning
If the All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system malfunctions, or the diameter of the front and
the rear wheels are different, the master
warning light will illuminate. For additional
information, refer to “All-Wheel Drive (AWD)”
in the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.

2-16 Instruments and controls

∙ If the warning light comes on while driving there may be a malfunction in the
AWD system. Reduce the vehicle speed
and have your vehicle checked as soon
as possible. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

CAUTION
∙ If the master warning light was illuminated while driving:
—AWD High Temp Stop vehicle
Pull off the road in a safe area and idle
the engine. The driving mode will
change to 2WD to prevent the AWD system from malfunctioning. If the warning light turns off, you can drive again.
—Tire Size
Manual

Incorrect

See

Owner’s

Pull off the road in a safe area and idle
the engine. Check that all tire sizes are
the same, tire pressure is correct and
tires are not worn.
∙ If the warning light is still on after the
above operations, have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

Power steering warning
light
WARNING
∙ If the engine is not running or is
turned off while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work.
Steering will be harder to operate.
∙ When the power steering warning
light illuminates with the engine running, there will be no power assist for
the steering. You will still have control
of the vehicle, but the steering will be
harder to operate. Have the power
steering system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the power steering warning light
illuminates. After starting the engine, the
power steering warning light turns off. This
indicates the power steering is operational.

If the power steering warning light illuminates while the engine is running, it may
indicate the power steering is not functioning properly and may need servicing. Have
the power steering checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if the front passenger’s seat belt is not
fastened when the front passenger’s seat
is occupied. For 7 seconds after the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position, the system does not activate the warning light for
the front passenger.

When the power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running, there will
be no power assist for the steering, but you
will still have control of the vehicle. At this
time, greater steering effort is required to
operate the steering wheel, especially in
sharp turns and at low speeds.

For additional information, refer to “Seat
belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of
this manual.

For additional information, refer to “Power
steering” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
or START position, the supplemental air
bag warning light illuminates for about
7 seconds and then turns off. This means
the system is operational.

Seat belt warning light and
chime
The light and chime remind you to fasten
your seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the ignition switch is placed in the ON
or START position and remains illuminated
until the driver’s seat belt is fastened. At the
same time, the chime sounds for about
6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt is
securely fastened.

Supplemental air bag
warning light

If any of the following conditions occur, the
front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag,
and pretensioner seat belt systems need
servicing:

∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
does not come on at all.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for these services.
Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental restraint system (air bag system)
and/or the pretensioner(s) may not function properly. For additional information, refer to “Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS)” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of
this manual.

∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.

Instruments and controls 2-17

INDICATOR LIGHTS
For additional information, refer to “Vehicle
information display” in this section.

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK
indicator light (if so
equipped)
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK indicator light illuminates and then turns off.
When selecting AWD LOCK mode while the
engine is running, the AWD LOCK indicator
light illuminates.

CAUTION
Do not drive on dry hard surface roads
in the LOCK mode.

Automatic brake hold
indicator light (green) (if so
equipped)
The automatic brake hold indicator light
(green) illuminates while the automatic
brake hold system is operating.
For additional information, refer to “Automatic brake hold” in the “Starting and driving” section of the Owner’s Manual.

2-18 Instruments and controls

Automatic brake hold
indicator light (white) (if so
equipped)
The automatic brake hold indicator (white)
illuminates when the automatic brake hold
system is on standby.
For additional information, refer to “Automatic brake hold” in the “Starting and driving” section of the Owner’s Manual.

Front fog light indicator
light (if so equipped)
The front fog light indicator light illuminates when the front fog lights are on. For
additional information, refer to “Fog light
switch” in this section.

Front passenger air bag
status light
The front passenger air bag status light will
be lit and the passenger front air bag will be
off depending on how the front passenger
seat is being used.
For additional information, refer to “Front
passenger air bag and status light” in the
“Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual.

High beam assist indicator
light (green) (if so equipped)
This indicator light illuminates when the
headlights come on while the headlight
switch is in the AUTO position with the high
beams selected. This indicates that the
high beam assist is operational.
For additional information, refer to “Headlight and turn signal switch” in this section.

High beam indicator light
(blue)
This blue light comes on when the headlight high beams are on and goes out when
the low beams are selected.
The high beam indicator light also comes
on when the passing signal is activated.

Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)
If this indicator light comes on steady or
blinks while the engine is running, it may
indicate a potential emission control malfunction.

The MIL may also come on steady if the
fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if the
vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure
the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed
tightly, and that the vehicle has at least
3 gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.
light
After a few driving trips, the
should turn off if no other potential emission control system malfunction exists.
If this indicator light comes on steady for
20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds
when the engine is not running, it indicates
that the vehicle is not ready for an emission
control system inspection/maintenance
test. For additional information, refer to
“Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance
(I/M) test” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.

Operation
The MIL will come on in one of two ways:
∙ MIL on steady — An emission control
system malfunction has been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap if the
Loose Fuel Cap warning appears in the
vehicle information display. If the fuelfiller cap is loose or missing, tighten or
install the cap and continue to drive the
light should turn off
vehicle. The
after a few driving trips. If the
light
does not turn off after a few driving
trips, have the vehicle inspected. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. You do not need
to have your vehicle towed to the
dealer.
∙ MIL blinking — An engine misfire has
been detected which may damage the
emission control system. To reduce or
avoid emission control system damage:

– avoid steep uphill grades.
– if possible, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled or towed.
The MIL may stop blinking and come on
steady. Have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service. You do not need to have
your vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without
having the emission control system
checked and repaired as necessary
could lead to poor driveability, reduced
fuel economy, and possible damage to
the emission control system.

Security indicator light
This light blinks when the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF or LOCK position.

– do not drive at speeds above
45 mph (72 km/h).

The blinking security indicator light indicates that the security systems equipped
on the vehicle are operational.

– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.

For additional information, refer to “Security
systems” in this section.

Instruments and controls 2-19

Side light and headlight
indicator light (green)
The side light and headlight indicator light
illuminates when the side light or headlight
position is selected. For additional information, refer to “Headlight and turn signal
switch” in this section.

Slip indicator light
This indicator will blink when the VDC system is operating, thus alerting the driver to
the fact that the road surface is slippery
and the vehicle is nearing its traction limits.
You may feel or hear the system working;
this is normal.
The light will blink for a few seconds after
the VDC system stops limiting wheel spin.
indicator light also comes on
The
when you place the ignition switch in the
ON position. The light will turn off after approximately 2 seconds if the system is operational. If the light does not come on
have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

2-20 Instruments and controls

Turn signal/hazard
indicator lights
The appropriate light flashes when the turn
signal switch is activated.
Both lights flash when the hazard switch is
turned on.

Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) OFF indicator light
This indicator light comes on when the
VDC OFF switch is pushed to off. This indicates the VDC system has been turned off.
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart
the engine and the system will operate
normally. For additional information, refer
to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system”
in the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
The VDC indicator light also comes on
when you place the ignition switch in the
ON position. The light will turn off after
about 2 seconds if the system is operational. If the light stays on or comes on
indicator light while
along with the
you are driving, have the VDC system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

While the VDC system is operating, you
might feel a slight vibration or hear the system working when starting the vehicle or
accelerating, but this is normal.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Brake pad wear warning
The disc brake pads have audible wear
warnings. When a disc brake pad requires
replacement, it makes a high pitched
scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon
as possible if the warning sound is heard.

Key reminder chime
A chime sounds if the driver’s door is
opened while the ignition switch is placed
in the OFF position or placed in the OFF or
LOCK position with the key left in the vehicle. Make sure the ignition switch is
placed in the LOCK position, and take the
key with you when leaving the vehicle.

Light reminder chime
With the ignition switch placed in the OFF
position, a chime sounds when the driver’s
door is opened if the headlights or parking
lights are on.
Turn the headlight control switch off before
leaving the vehicle.

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY
NISSAN Intelligent Key® door
buzzer (if so equipped)

∙ Chassis Control

The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if
any one of the following improper operations is found.

∙ Tire Pressure information

∙ Indicators and warnings

∙ The Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle when locking the doors.
∙ Any doors are not closed securely when
locking the doors.
When the buzzer sounds, be sure to check
both the vehicle and the Intelligent Key. For
additional information, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks
and adjustments” section of this manual.

LIC2630

The vehicle information display is located
to the left of the speedometer. It displays
such items as:
∙ Vehicle settings
∙ Trip computer information
∙ Drive system warnings and settings
∙ Cruise control system information
∙ NISSAN Intelligent Key® operation information

Instruments and controls 2-21

3
䊊

LIC3566

HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE
INFORMATION DISPLAY
The vehicle information display can be
changed using the
,
, and OK buttons located on the
steering wheel.
1
䊊

2
䊊

- Use these
buttons to navigate the vehicle information display.
OK - Change or select an item in the
vehicle information display.

2-22 Instruments and controls

— Returns to the previous menu.

and
buttons also
The OK,
control audio and control panel functions
in some conditions. Most screens and
menus offer instruction prompts of the
steering switch buttons to indicate how to
control the vehicle information display.
Dots on the left side of the vehicle information display will appear if there is more than
one page of menu items. The OK button
changes
the
audio
source
and
buttons also control voice
the
recognition manual mode. For additional
information, refer to the separate
NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.

∙ Fuel Economy
∙ Compass
∙ Audio
∙ Safety Shield
∙ Tire Pressure
∙ 4x4–i
∙ Chassis Control
∙ Warnings
∙ Settings

STARTUP DISPLAY

Warnings will only display if there are any
present. For additional information, refer to
“Vehicle information display warnings and
indicators” in this section.

When the vehicle is placed in the ON position, the vehicle information display may
display the following screens:

To control which items display in the vehicle information display, refer to “Meter
settings” in this section.

∙ Home
∙ Cruise Control
∙ Average speed
∙ Trip

RESETTING THE DRIVE COMPUTER
1. Press the
or
buttons
until you reach the desired drive computer mode.
NOTE:
Once you have a drive computer displayed, you can use the
and
buttons to switch between
1 or 䊊
2 .
Drive Computer 䊊

– “Distance” - resets the distance and
time of the selected drive computer.
– “Fuel Economy” - resets the fuel
economy of the selected drive computer.
∙ “All” — resets all linked values for the selected drive computer. This includes
distance and time, average fuel
economy and average speed information for the selected drive computer.

2. Press the OK button.

NOTE:

3. Select one of the following items:

Drive computer 2 will automatically reset
each time the ignition is placed in the
OFF position.

∙ “Cancel” — returns to the previous
screen without resetting the trip computer.
∙ Drive computer value

SETTINGS
The setting mode allows you to change the
information displayed in the vehicle information display:
∙ Driver Assistance
∙ Clock
∙ Meter Settings
∙ Vehicle Settings
∙ Maintenance
∙ Alarm
∙ Tire Pressures
∙ Unit
∙ Language
∙ Factory Reset

– “Average Speed” - resets the average
speed of the selected drive computer.

Instruments and controls 2-23

Driver Assistance
The driver assistance menu allows the user
to change the settings for driving, parking,
and braking aids.
Menu item
Driving Aids (if so equipped)
Lane (if so equipped)
Warning (LDW)

Prevention (LDP)
Blind Spot
Warning (BSW)
Emergency Brake
Steering Assist (if so equipped)
Parking Aids
Moving Object (if so equipped)

Cross Traffic
Front Sensor (if so equipped)
Rear Sensor (if so equipped)
Display (if so equipped)
Volume (if so equipped)
Range (if so equipped)

2-24 Instruments and controls

Result
Displays available driving aids.
Displays available lane options.
Allows user to turn the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) and Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) systems on or off. For
additional information, refer to “Lane Departure Warning (LDW)” and “Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Allows user to turn the Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) system on or off. For additional information, refer to “Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Displays available blind spot options.
Allows user to turn Blind Spot Warning (BSW) on or off. For additional information, refer to “Blind Spot Warning
(BSW)” in the “Starting and driving” section of your owner’s manual.
Allows user to turn the emergency brake feature on or off. For additional information, refer to “Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)” in the “Starting and driving” section of your owner’s manual.
Allows user to turn the steering assist on or off.
Displays available parking aids.
Allows user to turn the Moving Object Detection (MOD) feature on or off. For additional information, refer to “Intelligent Around View Monitor” in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section of your
owner’s manual.
Allows user to turn the Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) feature on or off.
Allows user to turn the front sensor on or off.
Allows user to turn the rear sensor on or off.
Allows user to turn the display on or off.
Allows user to select sensor volume (High, Mid. or Low).
Allows user to select the sensor range (Far, Mid. or Near).

Menu item
Chassis Control
Trace Control
Engine Brake

Result
Displays available chassis controls options.
Allows user to turn the trace control feature on or off. For additional information, refer to “Intelligent Trace Control
(I-TC)” in the “Starting and driving” section of your owner’s manual.
Allows user to turn the engine brake feature on or off. For additional information, refer to “Intelligent Engine Brake
(I-EB)” in the “Starting and driving” section of your owner’s manual.

Clock
Menu item
Clock

Result
Allows user to adjust the clock settings and time within the vehicle information display. Adjustments that
can be made include automatically setting the time, 12H/24H format, Daylight Savings Time, time zone, and
manually setting the time.
If these options do not appear, the clock must be set within the center display. For additional information,
refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual (if so equipped).

Instruments and controls 2-25

Meter Settings
The meter settings allow the user to change the settings for the vehicle information display.
Menu item
Main Menu Selection
Home
Average Speed
Trip
Fuel Economy
Navigation (if so equipped)
Audio
Cruise Control
Safety Shield (if so equipped)
Tire Pressures
4x4–i (if so equipped)
Chassis Control
Body Color
ECO Mode Settings
ECO Indicator
DISP Mode
Pedal
Inst.FE
ECO Drive Report
Display
View History
Welcome Effect
Dial Effect
Display Effect

2-26 Instruments and controls

Result
Displays the available options.
Allows user to turn the home screen on or off in the vehicle information display.
Allows user to turn the average speed screen on or off in the vehicle information display.
Allows user to turn the trip display on or off in the vehicle information display.
Allows user to turn the fuel economy display on or off in the vehicle information display.
Allows user to turn the navigation display on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional information,
refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.
Allows user to turn the audio screen on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer
to “Audio system” in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section of this manual.
Allows user to turn the cruise control display on or off in the vehicle information display.
Allows user to turn the driving aids display on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional information,
refer to “Driver Assistance” in this section.
Allows user to turn the tire pressure display on or off in the vehicle information display.
Allows user to turn the 4x4–i display on or off in the vehicle information display.
Allows user to turn the chassis control display on or off in the vehicle information display.
Allows user to select the color of the vehicle displayed in the vehicle information display.
Displays the available options for ECO mode settings.
Allows the user to turn the ECO indicator on or off in the vehicle information display.
Allows user to select how the ECO mode in displayed.
Select to have the ECO mode shown as a pedal display.
Select to have the ECO mode shown as instant fuel economy.
Displays the available options for the ECO drive report.
Allows user to turn the ECO drive report on or off.
Allows user to view and reset ECO drive report history.
Displays the available options for the welcome effect.
Allows user to turn the dial effect on or off.
Allows user to turn the display effect on or off.

Vehicle Settings
The vehicle settings allow the user to change the settings for lights, wipers, locking, keys, and other vehicle settings.
Menu item
Lighting
Welcome Light
Auto Room Lamp
Light Sensitivity (if so equipped)
Light Off Delay (if so equipped)
Turn indicator
3 Flash Pass
Locking
I-Key Door Lock (if so equipped)
Selective Unlock

Auto Door Unlock
Answer Bk. Horn
Wipers
Speed Dependent
Reverse Link (if so equipped)
Drip Wipe
Remote Start (if so equipped)
Battery Saver (if so equipped)
Driving Position (if so equipped)
Exit Seat Slide

Result
Displays the available lighting options.
Allows user to turn the welcome light on or off.
Allows user to turn the auto room lamp on or off.
Allows user to change when the lights illuminate based on the brightness outside the vehicle.
Allows user to change the duration of time that the automatic headlights stay on after the vehicle is shut off.
Displays the available turn indicator options.
Allows user to turn the 3 flash pass feature on or off.
Displays the available locking options.
Allows user to turn I-Key door lock on or off. When turned on, the request switch on the door is activated.
Allows user to turn selective unlock on or off. When turned on, only the driver’s door is unlocked after the door unlock
operation. When the door handle request switch on the driver’s or front passenger’s side door is pushed to be
unlocked, only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock operation is
performed again within 5 seconds. When this item is turned off, all the doors will be unlocked after the door unlock
operation is performed once.
Allows the user to customize the auto door unlock options.
Allows user to turn answer back horn on or off. When turned on, the horn will chirp and the hazard indicators will flash
once when locking the vehicle with the Intelligent Key.
Displays the available wiper options.
Allows user to turn wiper with speed on or off.
Allows user to turn the reverse link feature on or off.
Allows user to turn the drip wipe feature on or off.
Allows user to turn the Remote Engine Start on or off. When turned on, the engine can be restarted remotely. For additional information, refer to “Remote Engine Start” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual.
Allows user to turn the battery saver on or off. When turned on, the battery saver automatically turns off the ignition
after a period of time when the ignition switch is left in the ON position.
Displays the available driving position options.
Allows the user to turn the exit seat slide on or off. When turned on, this feature will move the driver’s seat backward
for an easy exit when the ignition is turned off and the driver’s door is opened. After getting into the vehicle and placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the driver’s seat will move to the previous set position. For additional
information, refer to “Automatic drive positioner” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual.

Instruments and controls 2-27

Maintenance
The maintenance menu allows the user to
set reminders for various vehicle maintenance items.

Menu item
Maintenance
Oil and Filter
Tire
Other

2-28 Instruments and controls

WARNING
The tire replacement indicator is not a
substitute for regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks. For additional information, refer to “Changing
wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself ”
section of this manual. Many factors including tire inflation, alignment, driving
habits and road conditions affect tire
wear and when tires should be replaced. Setting the tire replacement indicator for a certain driving distance
does not mean your tires will last that
long. Use the tire replacement indicator
as a guide only and always perform
regular tire checks. Failure to perform
regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks could result in tire failure.
Serious vehicle damage could occur
and may lead to a collision, which could
result in serious personal injury or
death.
Result
Displays various maintenance reminder options.
Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.
Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.
Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.

Alarm
The alarm menu allows the user to set specific alarms for various items on the vehicle.
Menu item
Timer Alert
Navigation (if so equipped)
Phone
Mail

Result
Allows user to set the timer alert alarm.
Allows user to turn the navigation alarm on or off.
Allows user to turn the phone alarm on or off.
Allows user to turn the mail alarm on or off.

Tire Pressures
The tire pressure menu allows the user to
change the units for the tire pressure display.
Menu item

Result

Tire Pressure Unit

Displays available units for tire pressure display.

Unit
The unit menu allows the user to customize the information that appears in the vehicle information display.
Menu item
Mileage
Tire Pressures
Temperature

Result
Displays available mileage options shown in the vehicle information display.
Displays available tire pressures options shown in the vehicle information display.
Displays available temperature options shown in the vehicle information display.

Instruments and controls 2-29

Language
The language menu allows the user to
change the languages displayed in the vehicle information display.
Menu item
Language

Result
Displays available language options for the vehicle information display.

Factory Reset
The factory reset menu allows the user to
restore the vehicle information display settings to factory status.
Menu item
Factory Reset

2-30 Instruments and controls

Result
Allows user to reset the vehicle information display settings to the original factory settings. Once selected,
the user can confirm or deny the reset.

LIC3963

Instruments and controls 2-31

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY
WARNINGS AND INDICATORS
1. Engine start operation

17. AWD High Temp. Stop vehicle (if so
equipped)

34. Unavailable: Road is slippery (if so
equipped)

18. Tire Size Incorrect: See Owner’s Manual
(if so equipped)

35. Unavailable: VDC OFF (if so equipped)

19. Battery Voltage Low Charge Battery

36. Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction (if
so equipped)

3. Shift to Park

20. Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse

37. Side Radar Obstruction (if so equipped)

4. Key Battery Low (if so equipped)

21. Power will turn off to save the battery

5. Engine start operation for Intelligent
Key system (if I-Key battery level is low)
(if so equipped)

22. Power turned off to save the battery

38. Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indicator (if so equipped)

6. Key ID incorrect (if so equipped)

24. Headlight System Error: See Owner’s
Manual (if so equipped)

2. No Key Detected (if so equipped)

7. Release Parking Brake
8. Low Fuel

23. Reminder: Turn OFF Headlights

25. Timer Alert — Time for a driver break?

39. Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) indicator (if so equipped)
40. Steering Assist
equipped)

indicator

(if

26. Chassis Control System Error: See
Owner’s Manual

41. Not Available Poor Road Conditions (if
so equipped)

10. Door/liftgate Open

27. Cruise control indicator (if so equipped)

42. Currently not available (if so equipped)

11. Key System Error: See Owner’s Manual
(if so equipped)

28. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) indicators (if so equipped)

43. Not Available Front Camera
structed (if so equipped)

12. Loose Fuel Cap

29. Transmission Shift Position Indicator

13. Tire Pressure Low — Add Air

30. CVT Error: See Owner’s Manual

44. Steering Assist Currently unavailable (if
so equipped)

14. Flat Tire — Visit dealer (if so equipped)

31. Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual

15. Low Oil Pressure Stop Vehicle

32. Drive mode indicators

16. AWD Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so
equipped)

33. Unavailable: High Cabin Temp (if so
equipped)

9. Low Washer Fluid (if so equipped)

2-32 Instruments and controls

Ob-

45. Not Available Front camera visibility impaired (if so equipped)
46. Not Available Parking Brake On (if so
equipped)

47. Not Available Seat Belt Not Fastened (if
so equipped)
48. Step on Brake Now (if so equipped)
49. Steering Assist on Standby (if so
equipped)
50. Electronic parking brake indicator (if so
equipped)
Engine start operation
This indicator appears when the shift lever
is in the P (Park) position.
This indicator means that the engine will
start by pushing the ignition switch with
the brake pedal depressed. You can start
the engine from any position of the ignition
switch.
No Key Detected (if so equipped)
This warning appears when the Intelligent
Key is left outside the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ON position. Make sure
the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
For additional information about the Intelligent Key, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®”
in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual.

Shift to Park
This warning illuminates when the ignition
switch is in the OFF position and the shift
lever is not in the P (Park) position. Also, a
chime sounds when the ignition switch is
in the OFF position.
If this warning illuminates, move the shift
lever to the P (Park) position and start the
engine.
Key Battery Low (if so equipped)
This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent Key battery is running out of power.
If this indicator illuminates, replace the battery with a new one. For additional information, refer to “Battery replacement” in
the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual.
Engine start operation for Intelligent
Key system (if I-Key battery level is low)
(if so equipped)
This indicator appears when the battery of
the Intelligent Key is low and when the Intelligent Key system and the vehicle are not
communicating normally.
If this appears, touch the ignition switch
with the Intelligent Key while depressing
the brake pedal. For additional information,

refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge” in the “Starting and driving” section
of this manual.
Key ID incorrect (if so equipped)
This warning appears when the ignition
switch is placed from the OFF position and
the Intelligent Key is not recognized by the
system. You cannot start the engine with
an unregistered key.
For additional information, refer to “NISSAN
Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks
and adjustments” section of this manual.
Release Parking Brake
This warning illuminates in the message
area of the vehicle information display
when the parking brake is set and the vehicle is driven.
Low Fuel
This warning illuminates when the fuel level
in the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as
soon as it is convenient, preferably before
the fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There
will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank
when the fuel gauge needle reaches 0
(Empty).

Instruments and controls 2-33

Low Washer Fluid (if so equipped)

Loose Fuel Cap

This warning illuminates when the
windshield-washer fluid is at a low level.
Add windshield-washer fluid as necessary.
For additional information, refer to
“Windshield-washer fluid” in the “Do-ityourself” section of this manual.

This warning appears when the fuel-filler
cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been refueled. For additional information, refer to “Fuel-filler cap” in the
“Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual.

Door/liftgate Open

Tire Pressure Low - Add Air

This warning illuminates when a door has
been opened when the engine is running.

This warning appears when the low tire
pressure warning light in the meter illuminates and low tire pressure is detected. The
warning appears each time the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position as long
as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated. If this warning appears,
stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pressures of all four tires to the recommended
COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. For additional
information, refer to “Low tire pressure
warning light” in this section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this
manual.

Key System Error: See Owner’s Manual
(if so equipped)
After the ignition switch is pushed to the
ON position, this light comes on for about
2 seconds and then turns off.
The Key System Error message warns of a
malfunction with the Intelligent Key system. If the light comes on while the engine
is stopped, it may be impossible to start
the engine.
If the light comes on while the engine is
running, you can drive the vehicle. However
in these cases, contact a NISSAN dealer for
repair as soon as possible.

2-34 Instruments and controls

Flat Tire – Visit dealer (if so equipped)
This warning appears when the low tire
pressure warning light in the meter illuminates and one or more flat tires are de-

tected while driving. A chime also sounds
for approximately 10 seconds.
Low Oil Pressure Stop Vehicle
This warning appears in the message area
of the vehicle information display if low oil
pressure is detected. This gauge is not designed to indicate low oil level. The low oil
pressure warning is not designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to
check the oil level. For additional information, refer to “Engine oil” in the “Do-ityourself” section of this manual.
AWD Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so
equipped)
This warning appears when the all-wheel
drive system is not functioning properly
while the engine is running.
AWD High Temp. Stop vehicle (if so
equipped)
This warning may appear while trying to
free a stuck vehicle due to increased oil
temperature. The driving mode may
change to 2-Wheel Drive (2WD). If this warning is displayed, stop the vehicle with the
engine idling, as soon as it is safe to do so.
Then if the warning turns off, you can continue driving.

Tire Size Incorrect: See Owner’s Manual
(if so equipped)
This warning may appear if there is a large
difference between the diameters of the
front and rear wheels. Pull off the road in a
safe area, with the engine idling. Check that
all the tire sizes are the same, that the tire
pressure is correct and that the tires are
not excessively worn.
Battery Voltage Low Charge Battery
This warning appears when the battery is
low and needs to be charged.
Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse
This warning may appear if the extended
storage switch is not pushed in. When this
warning appears, push in the extended
storage switch to turn off the warning. For
additional information, refer to “Extended
storage switch” in this section.
Power will turn off to save the battery
This warning appears in the message area
of the vehicle information display after a
period of time if the shift lever has not
moved from the P (Park) position.

Power turned off to save the battery
This warning appears after the ignition
switch is automatically turned off to save
the battery.
Reminder: Turn OFF Headlights
This warning appears when the headlights
are left in the ON position when exiting the
vehicle. Place the headlight switch to OFF
or AUTO position. For additional information, refer to “Headlight and turn signal
switch” in this section.
Headlight System Error: See Owner’s
Manual (if so equipped)
This warning illuminates when there is an
error with the system. For additional information, refer to “Headlight and turn signal
switch” in this section.
Timer Alert – Time for a driver break?
This indicator appears when the set time is
reached. The time can be set up to six
hours. For additional information on setting the timer, refer to “Alarm” in this section.

Chassis Control System Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so equipped)
This warning appears if the Integrated
Dynamics-control Module detects an error
in the Intelligent Trace Control, Intelligent
Engine Brake, or the Active Ride Control
systems. Have the system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. For additional information, refer to “Chassis control” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
Cruise control indicator (if so equipped)
This indicator shows the cruise control system status.
For additional information, refer to “Cruise
control” in the “Starting and driving” section
of this manual.
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) indicators (if so equipped)
These indicators show the Intelligent
Cruise Control (ICC) system status. The status is shown by color. For additional information, refer to “Intelligent Cruise Control
(ICC)” in the “Starting and driving” section of
this manual.

Instruments and controls 2-35

Transmission Shift Position Indicator

Drive mode indicators

This indicator shows the transmission shift
position.

These indicators illuminate in the vehicle
information display when either the ECO or
SPORT modes are selected.

CVT Error: See Owner’s Manual
This warning illuminates when there is a
problem with the CVT system. If this warning comes on, have the system checked. It
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual (if so
equipped)
This warning appears when one or more of
the following systems (if so equipped) is
not functioning properly:
∙ Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)
∙ Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
∙ Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
∙ Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
If one or more of these warning appears,
have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit an NISSAN dealer for
this service.

For additional information, refer to “SPORT
mode switch” or “ECO mode switch” in the
“Starting and driving” or the section of this
manual.
Unavailable: High Cabin Temp. (if so
equipped)
This message appears when the camera
detects an interior temperature of more
than approximately 104°F (40°C). For additional information, refer to “Lane Departure
Warning (LDW)” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
Unavailable: Road is slippery (if so
equipped)
This message appears when the Intelligent
Lane Intervention (I-LI) system becomes
unavailable because the road is slippery.
For additional information, refer to “ Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)” in the “Starting
and driving” section of this manual.
Unavailable: VDC OFF (if so equipped)
This message appears when the Intelligent
Lane Intervention (I-LI) system becomes

2-36 Instruments and controls

unavailable because the VDC is turned off.
For additional information, refer to “ Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)” in the “Starting
and driving” section of this manual.
Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction (if
so equipped)
This message appears when the Intelligent
Cruise Control (ICC) system become unavailable because the front radar is obstructed. For additional information, refer
to “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
Side Radar Obstruction (if so equipped)
This message appears when the Blind
Spot Warning (BSW) or Rear Cross Traffic
Alert (RCTA) systems become unavailable
because a radar blockage is detected. For
additional information, refer to “Blind Spot
Warning (BSW)” or “Rear Cross Traffic Alert
(RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving” section
of this manual.
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indicator
(if so equipped)
This indicator shows when the LDW system
is engaged.

For additional information, refer to “Lane
Departure Warning (LDW) system” and “Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) indicator (if so equipped)
This indicator shows when the I-LI system
is engaged.

Under the following conditions, the ICC
(with ProPILOT Assist) or the ICC system is
automatically canceled:
∙ When the VDC operates
∙ When a wheel slips
The above system cannot be used in some
situations (VDC operates and wheel slip.)
Currently not available (if so equipped)

For additional information, refer to “Dynamic driver assistance switch” in this section and “Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)”
in the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.

This message may appear when the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (with ProPILOT
Assist) system or the ICC system is engaged.

Steering Assist indicator (if so
equipped)

Under the following conditions, the ICC
(with ProPILOT Assist) or the ICC system is
automatically canceled:

This indicator appears when the Steering
Assist system is engaged.
For additional information, refer to “ProPILOT Assist” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Not Available Poor Road Conditions (if
so equipped)
This message may appear when the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (with ProPILOT
Assist) system or the ICC system is engaged.

∙ When the VDC operates
∙ When a wheel slips
∙ When the VDC system is turned off
The above system cannot be used in some
situations (VDC operates, wheel slip and
VDC system is off.)

Not Available Front Camera Obstructed
(if so equipped)
This message may appear when the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (with ProPILOT
Assist) system is engaged.
Under the following conditions, the ICC
(with ProPILOT Assist) system is automatically canceled:
∙ The camera area of the windshield is
fogged up or covered with dirt, water,
drops, ice, snow, etc.
∙ Strong light, such as sunlight or high
beams from oncoming vehicles, enter
the front camera
∙ When the wiper (HI) operates
The system will be available when the
above conditions no longer exist.
If the warning message continues to appear, stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn
the engine off and clean the windshield.
Steering Assist Currently unavailable (if
so equipped)
This message may appear when the Steering Assist system is engaged.

Instruments and controls 2-37

Under the following conditions, the Steering Assist system is automatically canceled:
∙ When the wiper (LO) operates
∙ When lane markers in the traveling lane
cannot be correctly detected for a period of time due to such items as a
snow rut, reflection of light on a rainy
day or several unclear lane markers are
present
If you want to use the Steering Assist system again, cancel the ProPILOT Assist system and set it again when lane markers are
clearly visible.
Not Available Front camera visibility is
impaired (if so equipped)
This message may appear when the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (with ProPILOT
Assist) system is engaged.
Under the following conditions, the ICC
(with ProPILOT Assist) system is automatically canceled:
∙ The camera area of the windshield is
fogged up or covered with dirt, water,
drops, ice, snow, etc.

2-38 Instruments and controls

∙ Strong light, such as sunlight or high
beams from oncoming vehicles, enter
the front camera
∙ When the wiper (HI) operates
The system will be available when the
above conditions no longer exist.
If the warning message continues to appear, stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn
the engine off and clean the windshield.
Not Available Parking Brake On (if so
equipped)
This message may appear when the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (with ProPILOT
Assist) system is engaged.

Not Available Seat Belt Not Fastened (if
so equipped)
This message may appear when the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (with ProPILOT
Assist) system is engaged.
Under the following condition, the ICC (with
ProPILOT Assist) system is automatically
canceled:
∙ When the driver’s seat belt is not fastened
The above system cannot be used when
the driver’s seat belt is not fastened.
Step on Brake Now (if so equipped)

Under the following condition, the ICC (with
ProPILOT Assist) system is automatically
canceled:

This message may appear when the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (with ProPILOT
Assist) system is engaged.

∙ The electronic parking brake is applied

It will be displayed under the following condition:

The above system cannot be used when
the electric parking brake is activated.

∙ While the vehicle is stopped by the ICC
(with ProPILOT Assist), the driver’s door
is opened but the electronic parking
brake was not activated.
Please step on the brake immediately.

SECURITY SYSTEMS
Steering Assist on Standby(if so
equipped)

The system helps deter vehicle theft but
cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the
theft of interior or exterior vehicle components in all situations. Always secure your
vehicle even if parking for a brief period.
Never leave your keys in the vehicle, and
always lock the vehicle when unattended.
Be aware of your surroundings, and park in
secure, well-lit areas whenever possible.

This message may appear when the Steering Assist system is engaged.
It will be displayed under the following condition:
∙ When not holding the steering wheel or
when there is no steering wheel operation
Please hold on the steering wheel immediately. When the steering operation is detected, the warning turns off and the steering assist function is automatically
restored.
Electronic parking brake indicator (if so
equipped)
This indicates the current status of the
electronic parking brake.
For additional information, refer to “Electronic parking brake” in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.

LIC2385

Your vehicle may have two types of security
systems:
∙ Vehicle security system
∙ NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM
The vehicle security system provides visual
and audible alarm signals if someone
opens the doors or liftgate when the system is armed. It is not, however, a motion
detection type system that activates when
a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.

Many devices offering additional protection, such as component locks, identification markers, and tracking systems, are
available at auto supply stores and specialty shops. A NISSAN dealer may also offer
such equipment. Check with your insurance company to see if you may be eligible
for discounts for various theft protection
features.

How to arm the vehicle security
system
1. Close all windows. (The system can be
armed even if the windows are open.)
2. Remove the keys from the vehicle.
3. Close all doors and liftgate. Lock all
doors. The doors can be locked with
the key fob (if so equipped), Intelligent
Key (if so equipped), door handle request switch, or mechanical key.

Instruments and controls 2-39

4. Confirm that the
security indicator light stays on for about 30 seconds.
The vehicle security system is now prearmed. The vehicle security system will
automatically shift into the armed
security light begins
phase. The
to flash once every three seconds. If
during the pre-armed phase one of the
following occurs, the system will not
arm:

Vehicle security system activation

∙ Any door is unlocked with the key fob (if
so equipped), the Intelligent Key (if so
equipped), mechanical key, or door request switch.

The alarm is activated by:

∙ Ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
∙ Even when the driver and/or passengers are in the vehicle, the system will
activate with all the doors, hood and
liftgate locked with the ignition
switch placed in the LOCK position.
When placing the ignition switch in
the ON position, the system will be
released.

2-40 Instruments and controls

The vehicle security system will give the
following alarm:
∙ The headlights blink and the horn
sounds intermittently but synchronously.
∙ The alarm automatically turns off after
a period of time. However, the alarm
reactivates if the vehicle is tampered
with again.

∙ opening any door or the liftgate without
using the key or Intelligent Key (even if
the door is unlocked by releasing the
door inside lock knob).

How to stop an activated alarm
The alarm stops only by unlocking a door
or the liftgate with the mechanical key the
key fob (if so equipped), pressing the
button on the Intelligent Key (if so
equipped), or pushing the request switch
on the driver’s or passenger’s door with the
Intelligent Key (if so equipped) in range of
the door handle.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
will not allow the engine to start without
the use of a registered key.
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

If the light still remains on and/or the
engine will not start, seek service for the
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System service as soon as possible. Please bring all
registered keys that you have. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

This device complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.

LIC0474

Security indicator light
The security indicator light blinks whenever
the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or
LOCK position.
This function indicates the NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System is operational.
If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is
malfunctioning, the light will remain on
while the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.

Instruments and controls 2-41

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

CAUTION
∙ Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 30 seconds.
∙ Do not operate the washer if the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir is
empty.

LIC2661

SWITCH OPERATION
WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer
solution may freeze on the windshield
and obscure your vision which may lead
to an accident. Warm the windshield
with the defroster before you wash the
windshield.

∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir with windshield-washer
fluid concentrates at full strength.
Some
methyl
alcohol
based
windshield-washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the
grille if spilled while filling the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
∙ Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before
pouring the fluid into the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir. Do not use the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir to
mix the windshield-washer fluid concentrate and water.

NOTE:
If the windshield wiper operation is interrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may
stop moving to protect its motor. If this
occurs, turn the wiper switch to the OFF
position and remove the snow or ice that
is on and around the wiper arms. In approximately 1 minute, turn the switch on
again to operate the wiper.
The windshield wiper and washer operates
when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
Push the lever down to operate the wiper
at the following speed:
1
䊊

2
䊊
3
䊊

2-42 Instruments and controls

Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation can be adjusted by turning the
A (Slower) or 䊊
B (Faster).
knob toward 䊊
Also, the intermittent operation speed
varies in accordance with the vehicle
speed. (For example, when the vehicle
speed is high, the intermittent operation speed will be faster.)
Low (LO) — continuous low speed operation
High (HI) — continuous high speed operation

4 to have one sweep opLift the lever up 䊊
eration (MIST) of the wiper.
5 to operate the
Pull the lever toward you 䊊
washer. The wiper will also operate several
times.

CAUTION
∙ Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 30 seconds.
∙ Do not operate the washer if the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir is
empty.

After a short delay the drip wipe function
will operate the wiper once more to clear
remaining windshield-washer fluid from
the windshield.
NOTE:
The Speed Dependent feature and Drip
Wipe feature may be disabled. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in this section.

LIC2662

REAR SWITCH OPERATION
WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer
solution may freeze on the window and
obscure your vision. Warm the rear window with the defroster before you wash
the rear window.

Instruments and controls 2-43

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE
MIRROR (if so equipped)
DEFROSTER SWITCH

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH

NOTE:
If the rear window wiper operation is interrupted by snow, etc., the wiper may
stop moving to protect its motor. If this
occurs, turn the wiper switch to OFF and
remove the snow, etc. on and around the
wiper arms. After about 1 minute, turn
the switch ON again to operate the wiper.
The rear window wiper and washer operate when the ignition switch is in the ON
position. Turn the switch clockwise from
the OFF position to operate the wiper.
1
䊊
2
䊊

Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation (not adjustable)
Low (ON) — continuous low speed operation

3 to operate the
Push the switch forward 䊊
washer. The wiper will also operate several
times.

NOTE:
The Reverse Link feature may be disabled. For additional information, refer
to “Vehicle information display” in this
section.

2-44 Instruments and controls

LIC2634

LIC2614

To defrost the rear window glass and outside mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine and push the rear window defroster
switch on. The rear window defroster indicator light on the switch comes on. Push
the switch again to turn the defroster off.

Type A (if so equipped)

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH
Lighting
1
䊊

The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the rear window defroster.

2
䊊

Rotate the switch to the
position,
and the front parking, tail, license plate,
and instrument panel lights will come
on.
Rotate the switch to the
position,
and the headlights will come on and all
the other lights remain on.

NOTE:
Autolight activation sensitivity and the
time delay for autolight shutoff can be
adjusted. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in
this section.
To turn on the autolight system:
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO
1 .
position 䊊
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON.
3. The autolight system automatically
turns the headlights on and off.
LIC2635

Type B (if so equipped)

CAUTION
Use the headlights with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.

LIC2636

Autolight system (if so equipped)
The autolight system allows the headlights
to turn on and off automatically. The autolight system can:
∙ Turn on the headlights, front parking,
tail, license plate and instrument panel
lights automatically when it is dark.

Initially, if the ignition switch is placed in the
OFF position and a door is opened and left
open, the headlights remain on for a period
of time. If another door is opened while the
headlights are on, then the timer is reset.
To turn the autolight system off, turn the
, or
position.
switch to the OFF,

∙ Turn off all the lights when it is light.
∙ Keep all the lights on for a period of time
after you place the ignition switch in the
OFF position and all doors are closed.

Instruments and controls 2-45

High Beam Assist (if so equipped)
The High Beam Assist system will operate
when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) and above. If
an oncoming vehicle or leading vehicle appears in front of your vehicle when the
headlight high beam is on, the headlight
will be switched to the low beam automatically.

WARNING

LIC3051

Be sure you do not put anything on top
of the autolight sensor located in the top
1 of the instrument panel. The auside 䊊
tolight sensor controls the autolight; if it
is covered, the autolight sensor reacts as
if it is dark out and the headlights will
illuminate. If this occurs while parked
with the engine off and the ignition
switch placed in the ON position, your
vehicle’s battery could become discharged.

LIC2637

Headlight beam select
1
䊊

2
䊊
3
䊊

To select the high beam function, push
the lever forward. The high beam lights
light illumicome on and the
nates.

∙ The High Beam Assist system is a convenience but it is not a substitute for
safe driving operation. The driver
should remain alert at all times, ensure safe driving practices and switch
the high beams and low beam manually when necessary.

Pull the lever back to select the low
beam.

∙ The high beam or low beam may not
switch automatically under the following conditions. Switch the high
beam and low beam manually.

Pulling and releasing the lever flashes
the headlight high beams on and off.

– During bad weather (rain, fog,
snow, wind, etc.).
– When a light source similar to a
headlight or tail light is in the vicinity of the vehicle.

2-46 Instruments and controls

– When the headlights of the oncoming vehicle or the leading vehicle are turned off, when the color
of the light is affected due to foreign materials on the lights, or
when the light beam is out of
position.
– When there is a sudden, continuous change in brightness.
– When driving on a road that passes
over rolling hills, or a road that has
level differences.
– When driving on a road with many
curves.
– When a sign or mirror-like surface
is reflecting intense light towards
the front of the vehicle.
– When the container, etc. being
towed by a leading vehicle is reflecting intense light.
– When a headlight on your vehicle is
damaged or dirty.
– When the vehicle is leaning at an
angle due to a punctured tire, being towed, etc.

∙ The timing of switching the low beam
and high beam may change under the
following situations.
– The brightness of the headlights of
the oncoming vehicle or leading
vehicle.
– The movement and direction of
the oncoming vehicle and the leading vehicle.
– When only one light on the oncoming vehicle or the leading vehicle is
illuminated.
– When the oncoming vehicle or the
leading vehicle is a two-wheeled
vehicle.
– Road conditions (incline, curve, the
road surface, etc.).
– The number of passengers and the
amount of luggage.

LIC3696

High Beam Assist operation
To activate the High Beam Assist system,
turn the headlight switch to the AUTO po1 and push the lever forward 䊊
2
sition 䊊
(high beam position). The High Beam Assist
indicator light in the meter will illuminate
while the headlights are turned on.
If the High Beam Assist indicator light does
not illuminate in the above condition, it may
indicate that the system is not functioning
properly. Have the system checked, it is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

Instruments and controls 2-47

When the vehicle speed lowers to less than
approximately 16 mph (25 km/h), the headlight uses the low beam.
To turn off the High Beam Assist system,
positurn the headlight switch to the
tion or select the low beam position by
placing the lever in the neutral position.

∙ Do not strike or damage the areas
around the ambient image sensor. Do
not touch the sensor lens that is located on the ambient image sensor.
If the ambient image sensor is damaged
due to an accident, it is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer.

Battery saver system
The battery saver system automatically
turns off the ignition after a period of time
when the ignition switch is left in the ON
position.
LSD2712

Ambient image sensor maintenance
1 for the High
The ambient image sensor 䊊
Beam Assist system is located in front of
the inside mirror. To maintain the proper
operation of the high beam assist system
and prevent a system malfunction, be sure
to observe the following:
∙ Always keep the windshield clean.
∙ Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory
near the ambient image sensor.

2-48 Instruments and controls

The battery saver system automatically
turns off the following lights after a period
of time when the ignition switch is placed in
the OFF position and the doors are closed:
∙ Headlights, when the headlight switch
or
position
is in the
∙ Interior lights, when left in the ON position

CAUTION
Even though the battery saver feature
automatically turns off the headlights
after a period of time, you should turn
the headlight switch to the OFF position
when the engine is not running to avoid
discharging the vehicle battery.

LED DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS
(DRL) SYSTEM
The LED portion of the headlights automatically illuminate at 100% intensity when
the engine is started and the parking brake
released. The LED Daytime Running Lights
(DRL) system operates with the headlight
switch in the OFF position. When you turn
position
the headlight switch to the
for full illumination, the LED lights switch
from LED DRL system to the park function.
If the parking brake is applied before the
engine is started, the LED DRL system does
not illuminate. The LED DRL system illuminates when the parking brake is released.
The LED DRL system will remain on until the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlight
switch on for interior controls and switches
to illuminate, as those remain off while the
switch is in the OFF position.

WARNING
When the LED DRL system is active, tail
lights on your vehicle are not on. It is
necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an
accident injuring yourself and others.

LIC2624

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL
A to decrease the
Press the “-” button 䊊
brightness of instrument panel lights.

LIC2638

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Turn signal
1
䊊

B to increase the
Press the “+” button 䊊
brightness of instrument panel lights.

Move the lever up or down to signal the
turning direction. When the turn is
completed, the turn signal cancels automatically.

Lane change signal
2
䊊

Move the lever up or down until the
turn signal begins to flash, but the lever
does not latch, to signal a lane change.
Hold the lever until the lane change is
completed.

Instruments and controls 2-49

Move the lever up or down until the
turn signal begins to flash, but the lever
does not latch, and release the lever.
The turn signal will automatically flash
three times.

The headlights must be on and the low
beams selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog lights automatically turn off
when the high beam headlights are selected.

Choose the appropriate method to signal
a lane change based on road and traffic
conditions.
NOTE:
The 3 flash pass feature may be disabled.
For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in this section.
LIC2639

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so
equipped)
To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight
switch to the
position, then turn the
fog light switch to the
position.
To turn the fog lights on with the headlight
switch in the AUTO position, the headlights
must be on, then turn the fog light switch to
position.
the
To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light
switch to the OFF position.

2-50 Instruments and controls

HORN

HEATED SEAT SWITCHES (if so
equipped)
WARNING
Do not use or allow occupants to use
the seat heater if you or the occupants
cannot monitor elevated seat temperatures or have an inability to feel pain in
body parts that contact the seat. Use of
the seat heater by such people could
result in serious injury.

∙ When cleaning the seat, never use
gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any
similar materials.
∙ If any malfunctions are found or the
heated seat does not operate, turn
the switch off and have the system
checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

CAUTION

LIC3568

To sound the horn, push near the horn icon
on the steering wheel.

WARNING
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so
could affect proper operation of the
supplemental front air bag system.
Tampering with the supplemental front
air bag system may result in serious
personal injury.

∙ The battery could run down if the seat
heater is operated while the engine is
not running.
∙ Do not use the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat.
∙ Do not put anything on the seat which
insulates heat, such as a blanket,
cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise,
the seat may become overheated.
∙ Do not place anything hard or heavy
on the seat or pierce it with a pin or
similar object. This may result in damage to the heater.
∙ Any liquid spilled on the heated seat
should be removed immediately with
a dry cloth.

Instruments and controls 2-51

HEATED STEERING WHEEL SWITCH (if
so equipped)
Push the switch again to turn the heated
steering wheel system off manually. The
indicator light will go off.
NOTE:
If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is above 68°F (20°C) when the
switch is turned on, the system will not
heat the steering wheel. This is not a
malfunction.

LIC3475

LIC0421

The front seats are warmed by built-in
heaters.

The heated steering wheel system is designed to operate only when the surface
temperature of the steering wheel is below
68°F (20°C).

1. Start the engine.
2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch,
as desired. The indicator light in the
switch will illuminate.
The heater is controlled by a thermostat, automatically turning the heater
on and off. The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on.
3. When the seat is warmed or before you
leave the vehicle, be sure to push the
switch to turn it off.

2-52 Instruments and controls

Push the heated steering wheel switch to
warm the steering wheel after the engine
starts. The indicator light will come on.
If the surface temperature of the steering
wheel is below 68°F (20°C), the system will
heat the steering wheel and cycle off and
on to maintain a temperature above 68°F
(20°C). The indicator light will remain on as
long as the system is on.

DYNAMIC DRIVER ASSISTANCE
SWITCH (for vehicles without
ProPILOT Assist) (if so equipped)

STEERING ASSIST SWITCH (for
vehicles with ProPILOT Assist) (if so
equipped)
The I-LI system warns the driver with a
warning light and a chime, and helps assist
the driver to return the vehicle to the center
of the traveling lane by applying the brakes
to the left or right wheels individually (for a
short period of time). For additional information, refer to “Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)” in the “Starting and driving” section and “Vehicle information display” in the
“Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.

LIC3681

LIC3853

The dynamic driver assistance switch is
used to temporarily turn on and off the
Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) system
that is activated using the settings menu of
the vehicle information display.

The Steering Assist switch is used to turn
on and off the Steering Assist system that
is activated using the settings menu of the
vehicle information display.

The I-LI system must be turned on with the
dynamic driver assistance switch every
time the ignition is placed in the ON position.
When the dynamic driver assistance
1 on the
switch is turned off, the indicator 䊊
switch is off. The indicator will also be off if
the I-LI system is deactivated using the vehicle information display.

The Steering Assist system controls the
steering system to help keep your vehicle
near the center of the lane when driving.
For additional information, refer to ”ProPILOT Assist” and “Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Instruments and controls 2-53

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
OFF SWITCH

ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) LOCK
SWITCH (if so equipped)
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart
the engine to turn on the system. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

LIC3344

LIC2645

The vehicle should be driven with the VDC
system on for most driving conditions.

The All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK switch is
located on the instrument panel. The AWD
LOCK indicator light will illuminate when
the switch is turned on. For additional information, refer to “Warning lights, indicator
lights and audible reminders” in this section and “AWD Lock Switch Operations” in
the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the
VDC system reduces the engine output to
reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will
be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum engine
power is needed to free a stuck vehicle,
turn the VDC system off.
To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC
indicator will come
OFF switch. The
on.

2-54 Instruments and controls

Each time you push the switch, the AWD
mode will switch: AUTO →LOCK → AUTO.

E-CALL (SOS) SWITCH (if so
equipped)

POWER OUTLETS
NOTE:
∙ When the ignition is in the OFF position,
the front and center console power
outlets stop delivering power one minute after the door is opened and stays
open.
∙ If the door remains closed after the ignition is placed in the OFF position, the
front and center console power outlets
continue to deliver power until the accessory power timer has elapsed.

LIC2615

LIC3357

∙ The cargo area power outlet(s) continues to deliver power normally.

Instrument Panel

The E-call (SOS) system switch is used in
combination with a NissanConnect® Services subscription to call for assistance in
case of an emergency.

12V OUTLETS

Pushing the switch will (with a paid subscription) reach a Response Specialist that
will provide assistance based on the situation described by the vehicle’s occupant.
For additional information, or to enroll your
vehicle,
refer
to
www.NissanUSA.com/connect,
www.Nissan.ca/NissanConnect,
or
www.Nissan.ca/NissanConnect/fr or call
855–426–6628.

The front and center console power outlets
are powered only when the ignition switch
is in the ON position, or while the accessory
power is active.

The power outlets are for powering electrical accessories such as cellular telephones. They are rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A)
maximum.

Instruments and controls 2-55

∙ Push the plug in as far as it will go. If
good contact is not made, the plug
may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may open.
∙ When not in use, be sure to close the
cap. Do not allow water or any other
liquid to contact the outlet.

LIC3697

Center Console

CAUTION
∙ The outlet and plug may be hot during
or immediately after use.
∙ Only certain power outlets are designed for use with a cigarette lighter
unit. Do not use any other power outlet for an accessory lighter. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for additional information.
∙ Do not use with accessories that exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.

2-56 Instruments and controls

LIC2617

Cargo Area
∙ Do not use double adapters or more
than one electrical accessory.
∙ Use power outlets with the engine
running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.
∙ Avoid using power outlets when the
air conditioner, headlights or rear window defroster is on.
∙ Before inserting or disconnecting a
plug, be sure the electrical accessory
being used is turned OFF.

EXTENDED STORAGE SWITCH

LIC3266

LIC3359

OFF position

LIC3268

ON position
The extended storage switch is used when
shipping the vehicle. It is located in the fuse
panel on the driver’s side of the instrument
panel. If any electrical equipment does not
operate, ensure the extended storage
switch is pushed fully in place, as shown.
To inspect the extended storage switch,
ensure the ignition switch and headlight
switch are off, remove the fuse box cover
A using a suitable tool in combination
䊊
with a cloth to avoid damaging the trim.

Instruments and controls 2-57

STORAGE

WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the passenger’s advanced air bag system,
please observe the following items:
∙ Do not allow a passenger in the 2nd
row to push or pull on the seatback
pocket.
∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than
9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head
restraint/headrest or in the seatback
pocket.
LIC2308

FRONT-DOOR POCKETS

LIC2618

SEATBACK POCKETS
There is a pocket located on the back of the
driver and passenger seats. These pockets
can be used to store maps.

2-58 Instruments and controls

LIC3718

LIC3698

GLOVE BOX

CONSOLE BOX

Open the glove box by pulling the handle.

To open the console box, press in on the
1 and raise the lid 䊊
2 .
lever 䊊

WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving
to help prevent injury in an accident or a
sudden stop.

To close, push the lid down until the lock
latches.

LIC2312

OVERHEAD SUNGLASSES
STORAGE
To open the sunglasses holder, push and
release.
Only store one pair of sunglasses in the
holder.

WARNING
Keep the sunglasses holder closed
while driving to avoid obstructing the
driver’s view and to help prevent an
accident.

Instruments and controls 2-59

CAUTION
∙ Do not use for anything other than
sunglasses.
∙ Do not leave sunglasses in the sunglasses holder while parking in direct
sunlight. The heat may damage the
sunglasses.

LIC2619

Front console

CUP HOLDERS

LIC2620

2nd row

WARNING
∙ Do not recline the rear seatback when
you use the cup holders on the rear
armrest. Doing so may cause the beverages to spill over, and if they are hot,
they may scald the passengers.
∙ Avoid abrupt starting and braking
when the cup holder is being used to
prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid
is hot, it can scald you or your
passenger.

2-60 Instruments and controls

CAUTION
Use only soft cups in the cup holder.
Hard objects can injure you in an
accident

LIC2622

Bottle holder — front

LIC2623

Bottle holder — rear

Instruments and controls 2-61

LIC2837

Bottle holder — 3rd row (if so equipped)

CAUTION
∙ Do not use bottle holder for any other
objects that could be thrown about in
the vehicle and possibly injure people
during sudden braking or an accident.
∙ Do not use bottle holder for open liquid containers.

LIC2625

CARGO AREA STORAGE BIN (if so
equipped)
WARNING
If your vehicle is equipped with 3rd row
seating, do not attempt to store/place a
spare tire in the cargo area storage
area. In a collision a spare tire could become loose and strike a person resulting in severe injury or death.
To access the floor storage area, pull up on
the handle to lift the luggage board.

2-62 Instruments and controls

LIC2646

DIVIDE-N-HIDE® ADJUSTABLE
FLOOR (if so equipped)
WARNING
Do not put objects heavier than 165 lbs.
(75 kg) on the Divide-N-Hide® while in
the mid position. In the upper position,
objects should not weigh more than
30 lbs. (14 kg).
There are multiple positions for the adjustable floor. The upper position allows
for additional storage below the adjustable floor.

LIC2647

To move the adjustable floor from the
lower position to the upper position:
1. Use the handle to lift the adjustable
floor.
2. Move the adjustable floor to the upper
guide track and ensure it is secure in
place.

LIC2629

LUGGAGE HOOKS (if so equipped)
When securing items using luggage hooks
located on the side finisher do not apply a
load over more than 6.5 lbs. (29 N) to a
single hook.
The luggage hooks that are located on the
floor should have loads less than 110 lbs.
(490 N) to a single hook.
The luggage hooks can be used to secure
cargo with ropes or other types of straps.

∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage area. It is extremely dangerous
to ride in a cargo area inside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
∙ Do not allow people to ride in any area
of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and seat belts.
∙ The child restraint top tether strap
may be damaged by contact with
items in the cargo area. Secure any
items in the cargo area. Your child
could be seriously injured or killed in a
collision if the top tether strap is
damaged.
∙ Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.

Instruments and controls 2-63

CARGO COVER (if so equipped)
WARNING
∙ Do not place objects on the cargo
cover while the vehicle is parked or in
motion, no matter how small. The object on the cargo cover could cause an
injury in an accident or sudden stop,
and/or the cargo cover can become
damaged.
∙ Do not leave the cargo cover in the
vehicle with it disengaged from the
holder.
∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding
or shifting. Do not place cargo higher
than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop
or collision, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.

∙ Properly secure cargo and do not allow it to contact the top tether strap
when it is attached to the top tether
anchor. Cargo that is not properly secured or cargo that contacts the top
tether strap may damage the top
tether strap during a collision. If the
cargo cover contacts the top tether
strap when it is attached to the top
tether anchor, remove the cargo cover
from the vehicle or secure it on the
cargo floor below its attachment location. If the cargo cover is not removed, it may damage the top tether
strap during a collision. Your child
could be seriously injured or killed in a
collision if the child restraint top
tether strap is damaged.

WIC1003

The cargo cover keeps the luggage compartment contents hidden from the outside.

2-64 Instruments and controls

Only attach the hook and loop fastener on
the cargo cover privacy cloth to the area on
the rear seatback where it is supposed to
be attached. Otherwise, the seat surface
could be damaged.

Be careful that your vehicle does not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) or its Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR front and rear). The GVWR and GAWR
are located on the F.M.V.S.S. or C.V.M.S.S. certification label (located on the driver’s door
pillar). For additional information regarding
GVWR and GAWR, refer to “Vehicle loading
information” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

To remove the cargo cover:
1
䊊
2
䊊
3
䊊

Remove the straps from the rear
hatch.
Remove the edge of the cargo cover
privacy cloth from the rear seatback.

WARNING

Remove the cargo cover holders from
the rear pillar.
LIC2386

ROOF RACK (if so equipped)
Do not apply any load directly to the roof
side rails. Cross bars must be installed before applying load/cargo/luggage to the
roof of the vehicle. Genuine NISSAN accessory cross bars are available through a
NISSAN dealer. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for additional information.
The service load capacity for the roof side
rails is 165 lbs. (74 kg), however do not exceed the accessory cross bars load capacity.

∙ Always install the cross bars onto the
roof side rails before loading cargo of
any kind. Loading cargo directly onto
the roof side rails or the vehicle’s roof
may cause vehicle damage.
∙ Drive extra carefully when the vehicle
is loaded at or near the cargo carrying
capacity, especially if the significant
portion of that load is carried on the
cross bars.
∙ Heavy loading of the cross bars has
the potential to affect the vehicle stability and handling during sudden or
unusual handling maneuvers.
∙ Roof rack cross bars should be evenly
distributed.

Instruments and controls 2-65

WINDOWS

∙ Do not exceed maximum roof rack
cross bars load capacity.
∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding
or shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause
personal injury.

POWER WINDOWS
WARNING
∙ Make sure that all passengers have
their hands, etc., inside the vehicle
while it is in motion and before closing
the windows. Use the window lock
switch to prevent unexpected use of
the power windows.
∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, including
entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave
children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended
in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a
warm day can quickly become high
enough to cause a significant risk of
injury or death to people and pets.
The power windows operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or
for a period of time after the ignition switch
is placed in the OFF position. If the driver’s
or passenger’s door is opened during this
period of time, the power to the windows is
canceled.

2-66 Instruments and controls

LIC3208

Driver’s side power window
switches
1. Window lock button
2. Power door lock switch
3. Front passenger side switch
4. Right rear passenger side switch
5. Left rear passenger side switch
6. Driver side automatic switch
The driver’s side control panel is equipped
with switches to open or close all of the
windows.

To open a window, push the switch to the
first detent and continue to hold down until
the desired window position is reached. To
close a window, pull the switch to the first
detent and continue to hold up until the
desired window position is reached.

Locking passengers’ windows
When the window lock switch is depressed,
only the driver’s side window can be
opened or closed. Push it again to cancel
the window lock function.

LIC2309

Front passenger’s power window
switch
The passenger’s window switch operates
only the corresponding passenger’s window. To open the window partially, push the
1 lightly until the desired
switch down 䊊
window position is reached. To close the
2 until
window partially, pull the switch up 䊊
the desired window position is reached.

LIC2663

Rear power window switch
The rear power window switches open or
close only the corresponding windows. To
open the window, push the switch and hold
1 . To close the window, pull the
it down 䊊
2 .
switch up 䊊

Instruments and controls 2-67

Auto-reverse function (if so
equipped)
The auto-reverse function can be activated when a window is closed by automatic operation.
Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto-reverse function may be activated if an impact or
load similar to something being caught
in the window occurs.

WARNING
LIC0410

Automatic operation
To fully open a window equipped with automatic operation, press the window
switch down to the second detent and release it; it need not be held. The window
automatically opens all the way. To stop
the window, lift the switch up while the window is opening.
To fully close a window equipped with automatic operation, pull the switch up to the
second detent and release it; it need not be
held. To stop the window, push the switch
down while the window is closing.

2-68 Instruments and controls

There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which
cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the
window.
If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, replaced, or jump started, the power window
auto-reverse function may not operate
properly. Have the power window autoreverse system re-initialized. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

If the control unit detects something
caught in a window equipped with automatic operation as it is closing, the window
will be immediately lowered.

POWER MOONROOF (if so equipped)
Sliding the moonroof
To fully open the moonroof, slide the switch
1 position to the second
toward the OPEN 䊊
detent and release it. If the switch is slid to
the first detent and released while the sunshade is closed only the sunshade will
open.

LIC3477

The moonroof will only operate when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
The moonroof is operational for a period of
time, even if the ignition switch is placed in
the OFF position. If the driver’s door or the
front passenger’s door is opened during
this period of time, the power to the moonroof is canceled.
When operating the power moonroof or
panoramic sunshade, the switch need not
be held continuously. To stop the moonroof or sunshade at any point while it is
opening or closing, slide the switch momentarily.

To fully close the moonroof, slide the switch
2 position to the sectoward the CLOSE 䊊
ond detent and release it. If the switch is
slid to the first detent and released, the
moonroof will close but the sunshade will
remain open.

Tilting the moonroof
To tilt the moonroof up, push and release
3 . If the moonroof is open, it
the tilt switch 䊊
will automatically close and then tilt up.
To tilt the moonroof down but keep the
sunshade open, push and release the tilt
3 or slide the switch toward the
switch 䊊
2 to the first detent.
CLOSE position 䊊
To tilt the moonroof down and close the
sunshade at the same time, slide the
2 to the
switch toward the CLOSE position 䊊
second detent.

Auto-reverse function (when
closing or tilting down the
moonroof)
The auto-reverse function can be activated when the moonroof is closed or
tilted down by automatic operation when
the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or for a period of time after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto-reverse function may be activated if an impact or
load similar to something being caught
in the moonroof occurs.

WARNING
There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which
cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the
moonroof.
When closing
If the control unit detects something
caught in the moonroof as it moves to the
front, the moonroof will immediately open
backward.

Instruments and controls 2-69

When tilting down

CAUTION

If the control unit detects something
caught in the moonroof as it tilts down, the
moonroof will immediately tilt up.

∙ Remove water drops, snow, ice or
sand from the moonroof before
opening.

If the auto-reverse function malfunctions
and repeats opening or tilting up the
moonroof, keep pushing the tilt down
switch within 5 seconds after it happens;
the moonroof will fully close gradually.
Make sure nothing is caught in the moonroof.

∙ Do not place heavy objects on the
moonroof or surrounding area.

WARNING
∙ In an accident you could be thrown
from the vehicle through an open
moonroof. Always use seat belts and
child restraints.
∙ Do not allow anyone to stand up or
extend any portion of their body out
of the moonroof opening while the
vehicle is in motion or while the
moonroof is closing.

Panoramic sunshade
The panoramic sunshade operates when
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
When opening or closing the sunshade the
switch need not be held.
To open the sunshade:
∙ To fully open the sunshade, slide the
1 toward the OPEN position to
switch 䊊
the first detent.
∙ To fully open the sunshade and the
1
moonroof together, slide the switch 䊊
toward the OPEN position to the second detent.
To close the sunshade:
∙ To fully close the sunshade, slide the
2 toward the CLOSE position to
switch 䊊
the second detent. If the moonroof is
open, both the moonroof and the sunshade will close automatically.

2-70 Instruments and controls

2 toward the CLOSE
∙ If the switch is slid 䊊
position to the first detent while the
moonroof is open, only the moonroof
will close. The sunshade will remain
open.

WARNING
∙ To avoid personal injury, keep your
hands, fingers and head away from
the sunshade arm, the arm rail and
sunshade inlet port.
∙ Do not allow children near the rear
sunshade system. They could be
injured.
∙ Do not place objects on or near the
rear sunshade. This could cause improper operation or damage it.
∙ Do not pull or push the rear sunshade.
This could cause improper operation
or damage it.

INTERIOR LIGHTS
2 is pushed, the inWhen the OFF switch 䊊
terior lights do not illuminate even when
pushed. When the DOOR/OFF switch is
pressed and the ON switch is pressed, all of
the lights will come on.

CAUTION
∙ Do not place objects (such as newspapers, handkerchiefs, etc.) on the sunshade inlet port. Doing so may entangle these objects in the sunshade
when it is extending or retracting,
causing improper operation or damage to the sunshade.

NOTE:
The footwell lights and step lights illuminate when the driver and passenger
doors are open regardless of the interior
light switch position. These lights will
turn off automatically after a period of
time while doors are open to prevent the
battery from becoming discharged.

∙ Do not push the sunshade arm with
your hands, etc., as this may deform it.
Improper operation or damage to the
sunshade may result.
∙ Do not put any object into the sunshade inlet port as this may result in
improper operation or damage the
sunshade.
∙ Do not hang any object on the arm rail
as this may result in improper operation or damage the sunshade.

LIC2302

1 is pressed, the footWhen the ON switch 䊊
well lights (if so equipped), step lights (if so
equipped), map lights and rear personal
lights will automatically turn on and stay on
for a period of time when:

∙ Do not forcefully pull the sunshade.
Doing so may elongate the sunshade.
Improper operation or damage to the
sunshade may result.

∙ The doors are unlocked by the Intelligent Key, a key or the request switch (if
so equipped) while all doors are closed
and the ignition switch is in the OFF
position.

If the moonroof does not close

∙ When individually pushed.

CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

Have your moonroof checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

Instruments and controls 2-71

LIC2303

Rear personal lights

CONSOLE LIGHT

MAP LIGHTS

The console light will turn on whenever the
parking lights or headlights are illuminated.

Press the button to turn the map lights on.
To turn them off, press the button again.

The console light brightness can be adjusted with the illumination brightness
control.

2-72 Instruments and controls

LIC1083

LIC2304

CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

PERSONAL LIGHTS (if so equipped)
To turn the rear personal lights on, push the
switch. To turn them off, push the switch
again.

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT (if
so equipped)
The lights will turn off automatically after a
period of time while doors are open to prevent the battery from becoming discharged.

CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

SIC2063A

ROOM LIGHT (if so equipped)

LIC3925

The room light on the overhead trim has a
three-position switch. To operate, push the
switch to the desired position.

The luggage compartment light on the
overhead trim has a two-position switch.
To operate, push the switch to the desired
position.

1
䊊

2
䊊

3
䊊

ON: The light is illuminated, regardless
of door position.
DOOR: The light illuminates when a
door or the liftgate is opened. The light
turns off when the door or liftgate is
closed.
OFF: The light does not illuminate.

2
䊊

OFF: The light does not illuminate regardless of door position or lock status.
ON: The light is illuminated.

CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

Instruments and controls 2-73

HOMELINK® UNIVERSAL
TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the
functions of up to three individual handheld transmitters into one built-in device.
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver:
∙ Will operate most radio frequency devices such as garage doors, gates,
home and office lighting, entry door
locks and security systems.
∙ Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No
separate batteries are required. If the
vehicle’s battery is discharged or is disconnected, HomeLink® will retain all
programming.
When the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is programmed, retain the original
transmitter for future programming procedures (Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the
programmed
HomeLink®
Universal
Transceiver buttons should be erased for
security purposes. For additional information,
refer
to
“Programming
HomeLink®” in this section.

2-74 Instruments and controls

WARNING
∙ Do not use the HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver with any garage door
opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal
safety standards. (These standards
became effective for opener models
manufactured after April 1, 1982). A
garage door opener which cannot detect an object in the path of a closing
garage door and then automatically
stop and reverse, does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a
garage door opener without these
features increases the risk of serious
injury or death.
∙ During the programming procedure
your garage door or security gate will
open and close (if the transmitter is
within range). Make sure that people
or objects are clear of the garage door,
gate, etc. that you are programming.

∙ Your vehicle’s engine should be
turned off while programming the
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver. Do
not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness
or death.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK®
If you have any questions or are having
difficulty programming your HomeLink®
buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at:
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.
NOTE:
Place the ignition switch in the ACC position when programming HomeLink®. It is
also recommended that a new battery
be placed in the hand-held transmitter
of the device being programmed to
HomeLink® for quicker programming
and accurate transmission of the radio
frequency.

NOTE:
Some devices may require you to replace
Step 2 with the cycling procedure noted
in “Programming HomeLink® for Canadian customers and gate openers” in this
section.
3. Press and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button and observe the indicator light.

LIC2365

LIC2366

1. Position the end of your hand-held
transmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away from
the HomeLink® surface, keeping the
1 in view.
HomeLink® indicator light 䊊

2. Using both hands, simultaneously
press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button and hand-held transmitter button. DO NOT release until the
1 flashes
HomeLink® indicator light 䊊
slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons
may be released. (The rapid flashing
indicates successful programming.)

1
is
∙ If the indicator light 䊊
solid/continuous, programming is
complete and your device should
activate when the HomeLink® button
is pressed and released.
1 blinks rapidly
∙ If the indicator light 䊊
for 2 seconds and then turns to a
solid/continuous light, continue
with Steps 4-6 for a rolling code device. A second person may make the
following steps easier. Use a ladder or
other device. Do not stand on your
vehicle to perform the next steps.

Instruments and controls 2-75

4. At the receiver located on the garage
door opener motor in the garage, locate the “learn” or “smart” button (the
name and color of the button may vary
by manufacturer but it is usually located near where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the unit). If
there is difficulty locating the button,
reference the garage door opener’s
manual.
5. Press and release the “learn” or “smart”
button.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® FOR
CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND GATE
OPENERS
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission –
which may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during
training. Similar to this Canadian law, some
U.S. gate operators are designed to “timeout” in the same manner.

6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press
and hold the trained HomeLink® button for 2 seconds and release. Repeat
the “press/hold/release” sequence up
to three times to complete the training
process. HomeLink® should now activate your rolling code equipped device.

If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties training a gate operator or garage
door opener by using the “Training” procedures, replace “Programming HomeLink®”
Step 2 with the following:

7. If you have any questions or are having
difficulty
programming
your
HomeLink® buttons, refer to the
HomeLink®
web
site
at:
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-3553515.

When programming a garage door
opener, etc., unplug the device during
the “cycling” process to prevent possible
damage to the garage door opener components.

2-76 Instruments and controls

NOTE:

1. For additional information, refer to “Programming HomeLink®” step 1 in this
section.

2. Using both hands, simultaneously
press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button and the hand-held transmitter
button. During training, your hand-held
transmitter may automatically stop
transmitting. Continue to press and
hold the desired HomeLink® button
while you press and re-press (“cycle”)
your hand-held transmitter every
2 seconds until the frequency signal
has been learned. The HomeLink® indicator light will flash slowly and then
rapidly after several seconds upon
successful training. DO NOT release until the HomeLink® indicator light flashes
slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons
may be released. The rapid flashing indicates successful training.
Proceed
with
“Programming
HomeLink®” step 3 to complete.
If the device was unplugged during the
programming procedure, remember
to plug it back in when programming is
completed.

OPERATING THE HOMELINK®
UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver, after
it is programmed, can be used to activate
the programmed device. To operate, simply press and release the appropriate programmed HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button. The amber indicator light will
illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.
For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any
time.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLEDIAGNOSIS
If the HomeLink® does not quickly learn the
hand-held transmitter information:
∙ replace the hand-held transmitter batteries with new batteries.
∙ position the hand-held transmitter with
its battery area facing away from the
HomeLink® surface.
∙ press and hold both the HomeLink®
and hand-held transmitter buttons
without interruption.

∙ position the hand-held transmitter 1 3 in (26 - 76 mm) away from the
HomeLink® surface. Hold the transmitter in that position for up to 15 seconds.
If HomeLink® is not programmed within
that time, try holding the transmitter in
another position – keeping the indicator
light in view at all times.
If you have any questions or are having
difficulty programming your HomeLink®
buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at:
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED
INFORMATION
The following procedure clears the programmed information from both buttons.
Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However, individual buttons can be reprogrammed. For additional information, refer
to “Reprogramming a single HomeLink®
button” in this section.
To clear all programming:
1. Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink® buttons until the indicator
light begins to flash in approximately
10 seconds. Do not hold for longer than
20 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.
HomeLink® is now in the programming
mode and can be programmed at any
time beginning with “Programming
HomeLink®” - Step 1.

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
HOMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver button, complete the following:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button. DO NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash
after 20 seconds. Without releasing the
HomeLink® button, proceed with “Programming HomeLink®” - Step 1.
For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com or
1–800–355–3515 (except Mexico).
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button has now been reprogrammed. The
new device can be activated by pressing
the HomeLink® button that was just programmed. This procedure will not affect
any other programmed HomeLink® buttons.

Instruments and controls 2-77

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

NOTE:

If your vehicle is stolen, you should change
the codes of any non-rolling code device
that has been programmed into
HomeLink®. Consult the Owner’s Manual of
each device or call the manufacturer or
dealer of those devices for additional information.

Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

When your vehicle is recovered, you will
need to reprogram the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver with your new transmitter information.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.

2-78 Instruments and controls

For Canada:
This device complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of
the device.

MEMO

Instruments and controls 2-79

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Remote keyless entry (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 3-2
NISSAN Intelligent Key® (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 3-3
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Locking with inside lock knob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Automatic door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Remote keyless entry system (if so equipped) . . . 3-8
How to use remote keyless entry
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
NISSAN Intelligent Key® (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . .3-11
Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Door locks/unlocks precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
NISSAN Intelligent Key® Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
How to use the remote keyless entry
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Remote Engine Start operating range . . . . . . . 3-24

Remote starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Extending engine run time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Canceling a Remote Engine Start . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Conditions the Remote Engine Start will
not work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Liftgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Operating the manual liftgate
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Operating the power liftgate
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Motion-Activated Liftgate
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Liftgate release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Liftgate position setting
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Opener operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Card holder (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Manual anti-glare rearview mirror
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) . . . . . 3-43
Memory storage function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Entry/exit function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

KEYS
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (if so
equipped)
CAUTION
Do not leave the ignition key inside the
vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

LPD2197

1.
2.
3.

Jackknife type key
Integrated door lock key fob with
transponder chip
Key number plate

A key number plate is supplied with your
keys. Record the key number and keep it in
a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the
vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
duplicates by using the key number.
NISSAN does not record key numbers so it
is very important to keep track of your key
number plate.
A key number is only necessary when you
have lost all your keys. If you still have a key,
it can be duplicated without knowing the
key number.

LPD2192

Storing remote keyless entry
To lock or unlock the vehicle using the key
1 to unfold the
press the release button 䊊
key from the fob.
When storing the key press the release but1 and push key 䊊
2 to fold the key back
ton 䊊
3 .
into fob slot 䊊
Never leave keys in vehicle.

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD2279

Type A (if so equipped)

1.
2.
3.

Intelligent Key (two sets)
Mechanical key
Key number plate (one plate)

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® (if so
equipped)
Your vehicle can only be driven with the
Intelligent Keys which are registered to
your vehicle’s Intelligent Key System components and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
System components.

A key number is only necessary when you
have lost all keys and do not have one to
duplicate from. If you still have a key, it can
be duplicated without knowing the key
number.

LPD2052

Type B (if so equipped)
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

CAUTION

As many as four Intelligent Keys can be
registered and used with one vehicle. The
new keys must be registered prior to use
with the Intelligent Key System and NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System of your vehicle.
Since the registration process requires
erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key
components when registering new keys,
be sure to take all Intelligent Keys that you
have to the NISSAN dealer.

Listed below are conditions or occurrences which will damage the Intelligent Key:
∙ Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which
contains electrical components, to
come into contact with water or salt
water. This could affect the system
function.
∙ Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
∙ Do not strike the Intelligent Key
sharply against another object.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

CAUTION

∙ Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key.

Always carry the mechanical key installed in the Intelligent Key slot.

∙ Wetting may damage the Intelligent
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely
dry.

For additional information, refer to “Doors”
in this section.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM KEYS

∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
extended period in an area where
temperatures exceed 60°C (140°F).

You can only drive your vehicle using the
keys which are registered to the NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System components
in your vehicle.

∙ Do not attach the Intelligent Key with
a key holder that contains a magnet.
∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a magnetic
field, such as a TV, audio equipment
and personal computers.
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN
recommends erasing the ID code of that
Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may
prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing procedure, it
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer.

SPA1951

Mechanical key

A mechanical key can be used for all the
locks.

The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key.

Never leave the keys in the vehicle.

To remove the mechanical key, release the
lock knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.
To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it
into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob
returns to the lock position.
Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock
the driver’s door.

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Additional or replacement keys:
If you still have a key, the key number is not
necessary when you need extra NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. Your existing key can be duplicated without knowing the key number. As many as four
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys
can be used with one vehicle. You should
bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to a NISSAN dealer
for registration. This is because the registration process will erase the memory of all

DOORS
key codes previously registered into the
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. After
the registration process, these components will only recognize keys coded into
the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
during registration. Any key that is not
given to the dealer at the time of registration will no longer be able to start your
vehicle.

CAUTION
Do not allow the immobilizer system
key, which contains an electrical transponder, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect system function.

When the doors are locked using one of the
following methods, the doors cannot be
opened using the inside or outside door
handles. The doors must be unlocked to
open the doors.

WARNING
∙ Always have the doors locked while
driving. Along with the use of seat
belts, this provides greater safety in
the event of an accident by helping to
prevent persons from being thrown
from the vehicle. This also helps keep
children and others from unintentionally opening the doors, and will help
keep out intruders.

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, including
entrapment in windows and/or inadvertent door lock activation, do not
leave children, people who require the
assistance of others and/or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally,
the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people
and/or pets.

∙ Before opening any door, always look
for and avoid oncoming traffic.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

LPD2129

LPD0461

Driver’s side

SPA2726

Inside lock

LOCKING WITH KEY

Power (if so equipped)

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB

To lock or unlock the vehicle, turn the key as
shown.

The power door lock system allows you to
lock or unlock all doors at the same time.

Manual

1 of the
Turning the key toward the front 䊊
vehicle locks all doors.

To lock the door without the key, move the
1 ,
inside lock knob to the lock position 䊊
then close the door.

To lock a door, turn the key toward the front
1 . To unlock a door, turn the
of the vehicle 䊊
2 .
key toward the rear 䊊

Turning the key one time toward the rear
2 of the vehicle unlocks that door. From
䊊
that position, returning the key to neutral
3 (where the key can only be removed and
䊊
inserted) and turning it toward the rear
4 within 5 seconds unlocks all
again 䊊
doors.

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

To unlock the door without the key, move
the inside lock knob to the unlock position
2 .
䊊

Lockout protection
When the power door lock switch is moved
to the lock position with any door open and
the Intelligent Key is left in the vehicle, all
doors will unlock automatically and a
chime will sound after the door is closed.
This function helps to prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked
inside the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS
LPD2093

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR
LOCK SWITCH
To lock all the doors without a key, push the
door lock switch (driver’s or front passen1 . When
ger’s side) to the lock position 䊊
locking the door this way, be certain not to
leave the key inside the vehicle.
To unlock all the doors without a key, push
the door lock switch (driver’s or front pas2 .
senger’s side) to the unlock position 䊊

∙ All doors lock automatically when the
vehicle speed reaches 15 mph
(24 km/h).
∙ All doors unlock automatically when the
transmission is placed in the P (Park)
position or when the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
The automatic door unlock function can
be changed using “Vehicle Settings” of
the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments
and controls” section of this manual.

LPD2374

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK
Child safety locks help prevent the rear
doors from being opened accidentally, especially when small children are in the vehicle.
The child safety lock levers are located on
the edge of the rear doors.
When the lever is in the LOCK position,
the door can be opened only from the
outside.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (if
so equipped)
WARNING
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should contact
the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
∙ The remote keyless entry key fob
transmits radio waves when the buttons are pressed. The FAA advises radio waves may affect aircraft navigation and communication systems. Do
not operate the remote keyless entry
key fob while on an airplane. Make
sure the buttons are not operated unintentionally when the unit is stored
for a flight.

As many as four key fobs can be used with
one vehicle. For information concerning
the purchase and use of additional key
fobs, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer.
The key fob will not function when:
∙ The battery is discharged.
∙ The distance between the vehicle and
the key fob is over 33 ft (10 m).
The panic alarm will not activate when
the key is in the ignition switch.

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn
the interior lights on, and activate the panic
alarm by using the key fob from outside the
vehicle.

CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occurrences which will damage the key fob:
∙ Do not allow the key fob, which contains electrical components, to come
into contact with water or salt water.
This could affect the system function.
∙ Do not drop the key fob.

Be sure to remove the key from the vehicle before locking the doors.

∙ Do not strike the key fob sharply
against another object.

The key fob can operate at a distance of
approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle.
The effective distance depends on the
conditions around the vehicle.

∙ Do not change or modify the key fob.

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

∙ Wetting may damage the key fob. If
the key fob gets wet, immediately
wipe until it is completely dry.

∙ Do not place the key fob for an extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).
∙ Do not attach the key fob with a key
holder that contains a magnet.
∙ Do not place the key fob near equipment that produces a magnetic field,
such as a TV, audio equipment and
personal computers.
If a key fob is lost or stolen, NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that
key fob. This will prevent the key fob
from unauthorized use to unlock the
vehicle. For information regarding the
erasing procedure, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

NOTE:
An auto-relock function will operate after a full or partial unlock, when no further user action occurs. The relock will
operate approximately one minute after
full or partial unlock. The auto-relock
function is canceled when any door is
opened or the key is inserted into the
ignition.

LPD2193

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS
ENTRY SYSTEM
Locking doors
1. Remove the ignition key.
2. Close all the doors.
3. Press the

LPD2194

Unlocking doors
∙ Press the
button on the key fob to
unlock the driver’s door.
∙ The hazard indicator lights flash once.
button again within five
∙ Press the
seconds to unlock all doors.

button on the key fob.

∙ All the doors will lock.
∙ The hazard indicator flashes twice and
the horn beeps once.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

The panic alarm stops when:
∙ It has run for a period of time.
∙ Any button is pressed on the key fob.

Using the interior lights
Press the
button on the key fob once
to turn on the interior lights.
For additional information, refer to “Interior
lights” in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.

LPD2195

LPD2196

Using the panic alarm

Answer back horn feature

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the panic alarm to
call attention by pressing and holding
button on the key fob for longer
the
than 0.5 seconds.
The panic alarm will stay on for a period of
time.

If desired, the answer back horn feature
can be deactivated using the key fob. When
button is
deactivated and the
pressed the hazard indicator flashes twice
button is pressed, neiand when the
ther the hazard indicator nor the horn operates.

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® (if so
equipped)
NOTE:
If you change the answer back horn and
light flash feature with the key fob, the
vehicle information display screen will
show the current mode after the ignition
switch has been cycled from the OFF to
the ON position. The vehicle information
display screen can also be used to
change the answer back horn mode.
To deactivate: Press and hold the
and
buttons for at least two seconds.
The hazard indicator lights will flash three
times to confirm that the answer back
horn feature has been deactivated.
To activate: Press and hold the
and
buttons for at least two seconds once more.
The hazard indicator lights will flash once
and the horn will sound once to confirm
that the horn beep feature has been reactivated.
Deactivating the horn beep feature does
not silence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

WARNING

CAUTION

∙ Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should contact
the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
∙ The Intelligent Key transmits radio
waves when the buttons are pressed.
The FAA advises the radio waves may
affect aircraft navigation and communication systems. Do not operate
the Intelligent Key while on an airplane. Make sure the buttons are not
operated unintentionally when the
unit is stored for a flight.
The Intelligent Key system can operate all
the door locks using the remote control
function or pushing the request switch on
the vehicle without taking the key out from
a pocket or purse. The operating environment and/or conditions may affect the Intelligent Key system operation.
Be sure to read the following before using
the Intelligent Key system.

∙ Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key
with you when operating the vehicle.
∙ Never leave the Intelligent Key in the
vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
The Intelligent Key is always communicating with the vehicle as it receives radio
waves. The Intelligent Key system transmits weak radio waves. Environmental
conditions may interfere with the operation of the Intelligent Key system under the
following operating conditions:
∙ When operating near a location where
strong radio waves are transmitted,
such as a TV tower, power station and
broadcasting station.
∙ When in possession of wireless equipment, such as a cellular telephone,
transceiver, or a CB radio.
∙ When the Intelligent Key is in contact
with or covered by metallic materials.
∙ When any type of radio wave remote
control is used nearby.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed near
an electric appliance such as a personal
computer.
∙ When the vehicle is parked near a parking meter.
In such cases, correct the operating conditions before using the Intelligent Key function or use the mechanical key.
Although the life of the battery varies depending on the operating conditions, the
battery’s life is approximately two years. If
the battery is discharged, replace it with a
new one.
When the Intelligent Key battery is low, an
indicator illuminates in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the
“Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.
Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving radio waves, if the key is left near
equipment which transmits strong radio
waves, such as signals from a TV and personal computer, the battery life may become shorter.
For additional information, refer to “Battery
replacement” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section
of this manual.

As many as four Intelligent Keys can be
registered and used with one vehicle. For
information about the purchase and use of
additional Intelligent Keys, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occurrences which will damage the Intelligent Key:
∙ Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which
contains electrical components, to
come into contact with water or salt
water. This could affect the system
function.
∙ Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
∙ Do not strike the Intelligent Key
sharply against another object.
∙ Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key.
∙ Wetting may damage the Intelligent
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely
dry.
∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
extended period in an area where
temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door
glass, handle or rear bumper, the request
switches may not function.
When the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone, even
someone who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the request switch to
lock/unlock the doors.

LPD2653

OPERATING RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be
used when the Intelligent Key is within the
specified operating range from the request
1 .
switch 䊊
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or strong radio waves are present
near the operating location, the Intelligent
Key operating range becomes narrower,
and the Intelligent Key may not function
properly.
The operating range is within 31.5 in (80 cm)
1 .
from each request switch 䊊

LPD2554

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS
PRECAUTION
∙ Do not push the door handle request
switch with the Intelligent Key held in
your hand as illustrated. The close distance to the door handle will cause the
Intelligent Key system to have difficulty
recognizing that the Intelligent Key is
outside the vehicle.
∙ After locking with the door handle request switch, verify the doors are securely locked by testing them.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

∙ To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left inside the vehicle, make sure you
carry the Intelligent Key with you and
then lock the doors.
∙ Do not pull the door handle before
pushing the door handle request
switch. The door will be unlocked but
will not open. Release the door handle
once and pull it again to open the door.

LPD2181

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®
OPERATION
You can lock or unlock the doors without
taking the Intelligent Key out of your pocket
or bag.
When you carry the Intelligent Key with you,
you can lock or unlock all doors by pushing
the door handle request switch within the
range of operation.

LPD2509

Locking doors
1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position, place the ignition switch in the
LOCK position and make sure you carry
the Intelligent Key with you.
2. Close the driver’s door and press the
driver’s door request switch OR close
all doors and press any door request
switch while carrying the Intelligent Key
with you.
3. All doors and the rear liftgate will lock.

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

NOTE:

CAUTION

∙ Request switches for all doors and
the liftgate can be deactivated when
the I-Key Door Lock setting is turned
off in the Vehicle Settings of the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle
information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.

LPD2773

4. The hazard indicator lights flash twice
and the outside chime sounds twice,
unless the answer back feature is deactivated, then only the hazard lights
will flash. For additional information, refer to “Answer back horn feature” in this
section.

∙ Doors lock with the door handle request switch while the ignition switch
is not in the LOCK position.
∙ Doors do not lock by pushing the door
handle request switch while the driver’s door is open. However, doors lock
with the mechanical key even if any
door is open.
∙ Doors do not lock with the door
handle request switch with the Intelligent Key inside the vehicle and a
beep sounds to warn you. However,
when an Intelligent Key is inside the
vehicle, doors can be locked with another Intelligent Key.

∙ After locking the doors using the request switch, make sure that the
doors have been securely locked by
operating the door handles or the rear
liftgate opener switch.
∙ When locking the doors using the request switch, make sure to have the
Intelligent Key in your possession before operating the request switch to
prevent the Intelligent Key from being
left in the vehicle.
∙ The request switch is operational only
when the Intelligent Key has been detected by the Intelligent Key system.
Lockout protection
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being
accidentally locked in the vehicle, lockout
protection is equipped with the Intelligent
Key system.
When the driver’s side door is open, the
doors are locked, and then the Intelligent
Key is put inside the vehicle and all the
doors are closed; the lock will automatically unlock and the door buzzer sounds.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

NOTE:
The doors may not lock when the Intelligent Key is in the same hand that is operating the request switch to lock the
door. Put the Intelligent Key in a purse,
pocket or your other hand.

CAUTION
The lockout protection may not function under the following conditions:
∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed on
top of the instrument panel.
∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed inside the glove box or a storage bin.
∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed inside the door pockets.
∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed inside or near metallic materials.

LPD2509

Unlocking doors
1. Carry the Intelligent Key.
2. Push the door handle request switch.
3. The hazard warning lights flash once
and the outside chime sounds once,
unless the answer back feature is deactivated, then only the hazard lights
will flash. For additional information, refer to “Answer back horn feature” in this
section.
4. Push the door handle request switch
again within one minute to unlock all
doors.

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD2773

NOTE:
Request switches for all doors and liftgate can be deactivated when the I-Key
Door Lock setting is turned off in the Vehicle Settings of the vehicle information
display. For additional information, refer
to “Vehicle information display” in the
“Instruments and controls” section of
this manual.

If a door handle is pulled while unlocking
the doors, that door may not be unlocked.
Returning the door handle to its original
position will unlock the door. If the door
does not unlock after returning the door
handle, push the door handle request
switch to unlock the door.
All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within one minute after pushing
the request switch.
∙ Opening any door.
∙ Pushing the ignition switch.
The interior light timer illuminates for a period of time when a door is unlocked and
the room light switch is in the DOOR position.
The interior light can be turned off without
waiting by performing one of the following
operations:
∙ Placing the ignition switch in the ON position.
∙ Locking the doors with the remote control.

∙ Switching the Auto Room Lamp to the
OFF position in Vehicle Settings of the
vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments
and controls” section.

CAUTION
When locking the doors using the Intelligent Key, be sure not to leave the key in
the vehicle.

HOW TO USE THE REMOTE
KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION
The remote keyless entry function can operate all door locks using the remote keyless function of the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function can operate at a
distance of 33 ft (10 m) away from the vehicle. The operating distance depends
upon the conditions around the vehicle.
The remote keyless entry function will not
function under the following conditions:
∙ When the Intelligent Key is not within the
operational range.
∙ When the doors or the rear liftgate are
open or not closed securely.
∙ When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged.

∙ Switching the room light switch to the
OFF position.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

CAUTION
After locking the doors using the Intelligent Key, be sure that the doors have
been securely locked by operating the
door handles.

LPD2257

Locking doors

LPD2258

Unlocking doors

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK
position.

1. Press the
Key.

2. Close all doors.

2. The driver’s door will unlock and the
hazard indicator lights flash once.

3. Press the
gent Key.

button on the Intelli-

4. The hazard indicator lights flash twice
and the horn beeps once, unless the
answer back feature is deactivated,
then only the hazard lights will flash.
For additional information, refer to “Answer back horn feature” in this section.
5. All doors will be locked.

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

button on the Intelligent

button again within five
3. Press the
seconds, the hazard indicator lights
flash once and the remaining doors
unlock.

NOTE:
The unlocking operation can be changed
in Selective Unlock in the Vehicle Settings of the vehicle information display.
For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.

All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within one minute after pressing
button:
the
∙ Opening any doors.
∙ Pushing the ignition switch.
The interior light illuminates for a period of
time when a door is unlocked and the
room light switch is in the DOOR position.
The light can be turned off without waiting
by performing one of the following operations:
∙ Placing the ignition switch in the ON position.
∙ Locking the doors with the Intelligent
Key.
∙ Switching the room light switch to the
OFF position.

WPD0414

Releasing the rear liftgate (if so
equipped)
The rear liftgate can be opened and closed
by performing the following:
button for longer than
∙ Press the
0.5 seconds to open the rear liftgate.
button again for longer
∙ Press the
than 0.5 seconds to close the rear liftgate.
button is pressed during
When the
the open or close process the liftgate will
stop. When pressed again, the liftgate will
reverse and go in the opposite direction.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

The panic alarm stops when:
∙ It has run for a period of time, or
∙ Any button is pressed on the Intelligent
Key.
∙ The request switch on the driver or passenger door is pushed and the Intelligent Key is in range of the door handle.

Using the interior lights

WPD0415

Using the panic alarm

Press the
button on the key fob once
to turn on the interior lights.
For additional information, refer to “Interior
lights” in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the panic alarm to
call attention by pressing and holding
button on the Intelligent Key for
the
longer than 0.5 seconds.
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on
for a period of time.

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD2259

Answer back horn feature
If desired, the answer back horn feature
can be deactivated using the Intelligent
Key. When it is deactivated and the
button is pressed, the hazard indicator
button is
lights flash twice. When the
pressed, neither the hazard indicator lights
nor the horn operates.

NOTE:

WARNING SIGNALS

If you change the answer back horn and
light flash feature with the Intelligent
Key, the vehicle information display
screen will show the current mode after
the ignition switch has been cycled from
the OFF to the ON position. The vehicle
information display screen can also be
used to change the answer back horn
mode.

To help prevent the vehicle from moving
unexpectedly by erroneous operation of
the Intelligent Key or to help prevent the
vehicle from being stolen, a chime or
buzzer sounds from inside and outside the
vehicle and a warning is displayed in the
instrument panel.

To deactivate: Press and hold the
and
buttons for at least 2 seconds.
The hazard indicator lights will flash three
times to confirm that the answer back
horn feature has been deactivated.

When a chime or beep sounds or a warning
is displayed, be sure to check the vehicle
and the Intelligent Key.
For additional information, refer to the
“Troubleshooting guide” in this section and
“Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

To activate: Press and hold the
and
buttons for at least 2 seconds
once more.
The hazard indicator lights will flash once
and the horn will sound once to confirm
that the horn beep feature has been reactivated.
Deactivating the horn beep feature does
not silence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that
are programmed for the vehicle. If another
Intelligent Key is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehicle system may respond differently than expected.
Symptom
The red Shift to Park warning appears
When stopping the engine
on the display and the inside warning
chime sounds continuously.
When shifting the shift lever to the P
The Push ignition to OFF warning ap(Park) position
pears on the display.
When opening the driver’s door to get The Door Open warning appears on
out of the vehicle
the display.
The No Key Detected warning appears
on the display, the outside chime
sounds three times and the inside
warning chime sounds for approxiWhen closing the door after getting
mately three seconds.
out of the vehicle
The red Shift to Park warning appears
on the display and the inside side
chime sounds continuously.
When closing the door with the inside The outside chime sounds for approxilock knob turned to the locked
mately three seconds and all the
position.
doors unlock.
When pushing the door handle reThe outside chime sounds for approxibutton on
quest switch or the
mately three seconds.
the Intelligent Key to lock the door

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Possible Cause

Remedy

The shift lever is not in the P (Park)
position.

Move the shift lever to the P (Park)
position.

The ignition switch is in the ON
position.
The ignition switch is in the ON
position.

Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.

The ignition switch is in the ON
position.

Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.

The ignition switch is in the ON position and the shift lever is not in the P
(Park) position.

Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position and place the ignition switch in
the OFF position.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

Symptom

When pushing the ignition switch to
start the engine

When pushing the ignition switch

The Intelligent Key battery indicator
appears on the display.
The yellow Key ID Incorrect warning
appears on the display.
The Key System Error warning appears on the display.

Possible Cause
The battery charge is low.

Remedy
Replace the battery with a new one.
For additional information, refer to
“Battery replacement” in the “Do-ityourself” section of this manual.

The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

It warns of a malfunction with the Intelligent Key system.

It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

REMOTE ENGINE START (if so
equipped)
Remote Engine Start to have the vehicle in
view. Check local regulations for any requirements.
Other conditions may affect the function of
the Remote Engine Start feature. For additional information, refer to “Conditions the
Remote Engine Start will not work” in this
section.
Other conditions can affect the performance of the Intelligent Key transmitter.
For additional information, refer to “NISSAN
Intelligent Key®” in this section.
LPD2293

Type A (if so equipped)
The
button will be on the NISSAN Intelligent Key® if the vehicle has Remote Engine Start. This feature allows the engine to
start from outside the vehicle.
The following features may be affected
when Remote Engine Start is used:
∙ Vehicles with a manual climate control
system will default to the last used
heating or cooling mode.

LPD2272

Type B (if so equipped)
∙ Vehicles with an automatic climate
control system may default to either
heating or cooling mode, depending on
outside and cabin temperatures. For
additional information, refer to “Remote
Engine Start with Intelligent Climate
Control” in the “Monitor, climate, audio,
phone and voice recognition systems”
section of this manual.
Laws in some local communities may restrict the use of remote starters. For example, some laws require a person using

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

REMOTE ENGINE START
OPERATING RANGE
WARNING
To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, including
entrapment in windows or inadvertent
door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance
of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can
quickly become high enough to cause a
significant risk of injury or death to
people and pets.

CAUTION
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or other strong radio wave
sources are present near the operating
location, the Intelligent Key operating
range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not function properly.
The Remote Engine Start function can only
be used when the Intelligent Key is within
the specified operating range from the vehicle.
The Remote Engine Start operating range
is approximately 197 ft (60 m) from the vehicle.

REMOTE STARTING THE VEHICLE
To use the Remote Engine Start feature
perform the following:
1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle.
2. Press the
doors.

button to lock all

3. Within 5 seconds press and hold
button until the turn signal
the
lights flash and the tail lamps turn on. If
the vehicle is not within view press and
button for at least 2 sechold the
onds.

The following events will occur when the
engine starts:
∙ The parking lights will turn on and remain on as long as the engine is running.
∙ The doors will be locked and the climate
control system may come on.
∙ The engine will continue to run for
10 minutes. Repeat the steps to extend
the time for an additional 10 minutes.
For additional information, refer to “Extending engine run time” in this section.
Press and hold the brake pedal while
switching the ignition to the ON position
before driving. For additional information,
refer to “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting
and driving” section of this manual.

EXTENDING ENGINE RUN TIME
The Remote Engine Start feature can be
extended one time by performing the
steps listed in “Remote starting the vehicle”
in this section. Run time will be calculated
as follows:
∙ The first 10 minute run time will start
when the Remote Engine Start function
is performed.

∙ The second 10 minutes will start immediately when the Remote Engine Start
function is performed again. For example, if the engine has been running
for 5 minutes, and 10 minutes are
added, the engine will run for a total of
15 minutes.
∙ Extending engine run time will bring you
to the two Remote Engine Start limit.
A maximum of two Remote Engine Starts,
or a single Remote Engine Start with an
extension, are allowed between ignition
cycles. The ignition switch must be cycled
to the ON position and then back to the
OFF position before the Remote Engine
Start procedure can be used again.

CANCELING A REMOTE ENGINE
START
To cancel a Remote Engine Start, perform
one of the following:
∙ Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle
until the parking lights
and press
turn off.
∙ Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
∙ Cycle the ignition switch on and then
off.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25

∙ The extended engine run time has expired.

button is not pressed and
∙ The
held for at least 2 seconds.

∙ The first 10 minute timer has expired.

button is not pressed and
∙ The
held within 5 seconds of pressing the
lock button.

∙ Opening the engine hood.
∙ Shifting the vehicle out of P (Park).
∙ The alarm sounds due to illegal entry
into the vehicle.
∙ Pushing the ignition switch without the
Intelligent Key in the vehicle.
∙ Not pressing the brake pedal while
pressing the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key in the vehicle.

CONDITIONS THE REMOTE ENGINE
START WILL NOT WORK
The Remote Engine Start will not operate if
any of the following conditions are present:
∙ The ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
∙ The hood is not securely closed.
∙ The hazard indicator lights are on.
∙ The engine is still running. The engine
must be completely stopped. Wait at
least 6 seconds if the engine goes from
running to off. This is not applicable
when extending engine run time.

∙ The brake is pressed.
∙ The doors are not closed and locked.
∙ The liftgate is open.
∙ The I–Key Indicator Light remains solid
is in the vehicle information display.
∙ The alarm sounds due to illegal entry
into the vehicle.
∙ Two Remote Engine Starts, or a single
Remote Engine Start with an extension,
have already been used.
∙ The vehicle is not in P (Park).
∙ There is a detected registered key already inside of the vehicle.
∙ The Remote Engine Start function has
been switched to the OFF position in
Vehicle Settings of the vehicle information display. For additional information,
refer to “Vehicle information display” in
the “Instruments and controls” section
of this manual.

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

The Remote Engine Start may display a
warning or indicator in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the
“Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.

HOOD

WARNING
∙ Make sure the hood is completely
closed and latched before driving.
Failure to do so could cause the hood
to fly open and result in an accident.
∙ If you see steam or smoke coming
from the engine compartment, to
avoid injury do not open the hood.

1
1. Pull the hood lock release handle 䊊
located below the instrument panel
until the hood springs up slightly.
2 in between the
2. Locate the lever 䊊
hood and grille and push the lever sideways with your fingertips.
3 .
3. Raise the hood 䊊

4 and insert
4. Remove the support rod 䊊
5 .
it into the slot 䊊

LPD2679

A when removing
Hold the coated parts 䊊
or resetting the support rod. Avoid direct
contact with the metal parts, as they
may be hot immediately after the engine
has been stopped.
When closing the hood, return the support
rod to its original position, lower the hood
to approximately 12 in (30 cm) above the
latch and release it. This allows proper engagement of the hood latch.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27

LIFTGATE

WARNING
∙ Always be sure the liftgate has been
closed securely to prevent it from
opening while driving.

CAUTION
Do not use accessory carriers that attach to the hatch. Doing so will cause
damage to the vehicle.

∙ Do not drive with the liftgate open.
This could allow dangerous exhaust
gases to be drawn into the vehicle. For
additional information, refer to “Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and or its systems, including
entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave
children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended
in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a
warm day can quickly become high
enough to cause a significant risk of
injury or death to people and pets.
∙ Always be sure that hands and feet
are clear of the door frame to avoid
injury while closing the liftgate.

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD2184

OPERATING THE MANUAL
LIFTGATE (if so equipped)
The power door lock system allows you to
lock or unlock all doors including the liftgate simultaneously.
To open the liftgate, push the liftgate
A and pull up on the
opener switch 䊊
handle.
To close, lower and push the liftgate down
securely.

OPERATING THE POWER LIFTGATE
(if so equipped)

Power Open:
The power liftgate automatically moves
from the fully closed position to the fully
open position in approximately five – eight
seconds. The power open feature can be
activated by the button on the key fob, the
instrument panel switch or the liftgate
open switch. A chime sounds to indicate
the power open sequence has been
started.

WARNING
∙ Make sure that all passengers have
their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the liftgate.
∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and or its systems, including
entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave
children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended
in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a
warm day can quickly become high
enough to cause a significant risk of
injury or death to people and pets.

LPD2212

Instrument panel switch
NOTE:
To open, close or reverse the power liftgate, the shift lever must be in P (Park).
Also, the power liftgate will not operate if
battery voltage is low.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29

A is acti∙ If the liftgate open switch 䊊
vated while the cinching motor is engaged, the cinching motor will disengage and release the latch.

∙ The key fob button must be held for
0.5 second before the liftgate closes.

LPD2656

Liftgate opener switch
∙ When the vehicle is locked, the liftgate
can be opened with the instrument
panel switch or key fob.
∙ The key fob button must be held for
0.5 second before the liftgate opens.
∙ The liftgate must be unlocked (or the
key fob must be within range) to open
A .
with the liftgate open switch 䊊
A warning chime will sound if the shift lever
is moved out of P (Park) during a power
open operation.

LPD2270

Power Close:
The power liftgate automatically moves
from the fully open position to the secondary position. When the liftgate reaches the
secondary position, the cinching motor engages and pulls the liftgate to its primary
latch position. Power close takes approximately seven – ten seconds. The power
close feature can be activated by the button on the key fob, the instrument panel
B. A
switch or the liftgate close switch 䊊
chime sounds to indicate the power close
sequence has been started.

3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Stop - Reverse:
During the open/close movement, the liftgate can be stopped, if the Intelligent Key,
A or
instrument panel or liftgate switch (䊊
B ) is pressed. The liftgate can be reversed
䊊
in the Intelligent Key, instrument panel or
A or 䊊
B ) is pressed again.
liftgate switch (䊊
Auto Reverse:
If an obstacle is detected during power
open or power close, a warning chime will
sound and the liftgate will reverse direction
and return to the full open or full close position. If a second obstacle is detected, the
liftgate motion will stop and the liftgate will
enter manual mode.
A pinch strip is mounted on each side of
the liftgate. If an obstacle is detected by a
pinch strip during power close, the liftgate
will reverse direction and return to the full
open position.

NOTE:

To open the liftgate manually, push the liftA and raise the liftgate.
gate open switch 䊊

If the pinch strip is damaged or removed,
the power close function will not operate.

To close, lower and push the liftgate down
securely.

MOTION-ACTIVATED LIFTGATE (if
so equipped)

The liftgate can be operated using a quick
kicking motion under the center of the rear
bumper.
To operate, the Intelligent Key must be
within 31.5 in (80 cm) of the liftgate.
LPD2655

Manual Mode:
If power operation is not available, the liftgate may be operated manually. Power operation may not be available under the following conditions:
∙ Multiple obstacles have been detected
in a single power cycle

NOTE:
Tow hitches are available as an accessory for this vehicle. If a tow hitch is installed, the liftgate electronic control
unit (ECU) needs to be replaced with an
ECU programmed with towing logic for
the Motion-Activated Liftgate to function properly.

∙ Battery voltage is low
A is
If the power liftgate open switch 䊊
pushed during power open or close, the
power operation will be canceled and the
liftgate can be operated manually.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31

LPD2762

Activation zone

Proper operation technique
∙ While at the rear of the vehicle, begin
making a quick forward kicking motion.
∙ Raise your foot straight under the center of the rear bumper then immediately return your foot to the ground in a
continuous motion.
∙ The kicking motion should be straight,
smooth and consistent.
∙ After your kick motion is complete, step
back and allow the liftgate to
open/close.

LPD2780

DO: Quick forward kick and return while
the key fob is within range
∙ Three beeps will sound and the liftgate
will begin moving within two seconds
after the kick.

CAUTION
Before performing the kicking motion,
steady your stance to prevent any loss
of balance. Also, while making the kicking motion, take caution around hot exhaust system parts. Otherwise, there
may be danger of injury.

3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD2764

DO NOT: Swing foot side to side or pause
during kick

WARNING
Prevent
unintentional
liftgate
opening/closing. There may be conditions when opening/closing the liftgate
is not desired. Keep the Intelligent Key
out of range of the liftgate, (31.5 in or
80 cm), when washing or working
around the back of the vehicle.

CAUTION
∙ Interference or malfunction can be
caused by parking in close proximity
to radio or satellite towers.
∙ Intelligent Key interference could be
caused if you have your key fob stored
next to your cell phone or any RFenabled smart card. For additional information, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent
Key®” in this section.

LIFTGATE RELEASE
WARNING
∙ Always be sure the liftgate has been
closed securely to prevent it from
opening while driving.
∙ Do not drive with the liftgate open.
This could allow dangerous exhaust
gases to be drawn into the vehicle. For
additional information, refer to “Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
∙ To avoid personal injury, do not attempt to activate the power liftgate if
one or both of the liftgate struts are
removed.

CAUTION
∙ If the power liftgate does not stay
open or if the liftgate unexpectedly
closes at any time while a continuous
warning chime sounds, do not operate the liftgate. There may be a pressure loss in one or both of the liftgate
struts. It is recommended that you
have the liftgate inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
∙ Do not activate the power liftgate if
one or both of the liftgate struts are
removed. Damage to the liftgate or
power liftgate mechanisms may
occur.

LPD2375

Liftgate release (manual and
power)
The liftgate release mechanism allows the
liftgate to be opened in the event of a discharged battery.
To release the liftgate from the inside of the
vehicle, perform the following operations:
1. Fold the rear seats down. For additional
information, refer to “Folding the 3rd
row seats” in the “Safety—Seats, seat
belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-33

FUEL-FILLER DOOR
2. Insert a suitable tool in the top access
opening hole. Move the release lever to
the right. The liftgate will be unlatched.
3. Push the liftgate up to open.

The liftgate will open to the selected position setting. To change the position of the
liftgate, repeat steps 1-3 for setting the position of the liftgate.

NOTE:
If you had to open the liftgate using this
lever, it is recommended that you have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

LIFTGATE POSITION SETTING (if so
equipped)
The liftgate can be set to open to a specific
height by performing the following:
1. Open the liftgate using the request
switch or the Intelligent Key.
2. Pull the liftgate down to the desired
position and hold the liftgate (the liftgate will have some resistance when
being manually adjusted).
3. While holding the liftgate in position,
push and hold the liftgate switch
located on the liftgate for approximately 5 seconds or until three beeps
are heard.

3-34 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD2283

OPENER OPERATION
The fuel-filler door opener switch is located
on the instrument panel. To open, push the
fuel-filler opener switch.
To lock, close the fuel-filler door securely.

FUEL-FILLER CAP
WARNING
∙ Gasoline is extremely flammable and
highly explosive under certain conditions. You could be burned or seriously injured if it is misused or mishandled. Always stop the engine and
do not smoke or allow open flames or
sparks near the vehicle when
refueling.
∙ Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank
after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off
automatically. Continued refueling
may cause fuel overflow, resulting in
fuel spray and possibly a fire.
∙ Use only an original equipment type
fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has
a built-in safety valve needed for
proper operation of the fuel system
and emission control system. An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury. It could
Malfunction Indialso cause the
cator Light (MIL) to come on.
∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body
to attempt to start your vehicle.

∙ Do not fill a portable fuel container in
the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity
can cause an explosion of flammable
liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or
trailer. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death when filling portable
fuel containers:
– Always place the container on the
ground when filling.
– Do not use electronic devices when
filling.
– Keep the pump nozzle in contact
with the container while you are
filling it.
– Use only approved portable fuel
containers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION
∙ Do not use a fuel containing more
than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. For
additional information, refer to “Fuel
recommendation” in the “Technical
and consumer information” section of
this manual.

∙ The Loose Fuel Cap warning message
will be displayed/warning will appear
if the fuel-filler cap is not properly
tightened. It may take a few driving
trips for the message to be displayed.
Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap
properly after the Loose Fuel Cap
warning message is displayed/ warnMaling appears may cause the
function Indicator Light (MIL) to
illuminate.
∙ Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap
Malproperly may cause the
function Indicator Light (MIL) to illumilight illuminates benate. If the
cause the fuel-filler cap is loose or
missing, tighten or install the cap and
continue to drive the vehicle.
light should turn off after a
The
few driving trips. If the
light does
not turn off after a few driving trips,
have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
∙ For additional information, refer to
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in
the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-35

∙ If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,
flush it away with water to avoid paint
damage.

LPD2186

To remove the fuel-filler cap:
1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise to remove.
2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder
1 while refueling.
䊊
To install the fuel-filler cap:
1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the
fuel-filler tube.
2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a
single click is heard.

3-36 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD2659

Loose Fuel Cap warning
The Loose Fuel Cap warning message will
be displayed in the vehicle information display when the fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been
refueled. It may take a few driving trips for
the message to be displayed. To turn off
the warning message, perform the following:
1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as
soon as possible. For additional information, refer to “Fuel-filler cap” in this
section.

STEERING WHEEL
2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until a single
click is heard.
A on the steering
3. Press the OK button 䊊
wheel for about one second to turn off
the Loose Fuel Cap warning message
B after tightening the fuel-filler cap.
䊊

WARNING
∙ Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving. You could lose control of your
vehicle and cause an accident.
∙ Do not adjust the steering wheel any
closer to you than is necessary for
proper steering operation and comfort. The driver’s air bag inflates with
great force. If you are unrestrained,
leaning forward, sitting sideways or
out of position in any way, you are at
greater risk of injury or death in a
crash. You may also receive serious or
fatal injuries from the air bag if you
are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback
and as far away as practical from the
steering wheel. Always use the seat
belts.

LPD2648

MANUAL OPERATION
Tilt and telescopic operation
1 down:
Pull the lock lever 䊊

∙ Adjust the steering wheel up or down in
2 to the desired position.
direction 䊊
∙ Adjust the steering wheel forward or
3 to the desired
backward in direction 䊊
position.
1 up firmly to lock the
Push the lock lever 䊊
steering wheel in place.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-37

SUN VISORS
1. To block glare from the front, swing
1 .
down the sun visor 䊊
2. To block glare from the side, remove
the sun visor from the center mount
2 .
and swing the visor to the side 䊊

3 in or
3. To extend the sun visor, slide 䊊
out as needed.

CAUTION
∙ Do not store the sun visor before returning the extension to its original
position.
∙ Do not pull the extension sun visor
forcedly downward.

LPD2312

VANITY MIRRORS
To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun
visor down and flip open the mirror cover.
Some vanity mirrors will illuminate when
the mirror cover is open.

WPD0344

3-38 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

MIRRORS
AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE
REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)
The inside mirror is designed so that it automatically dims during night time conditions and according to the intensity of the
headlights of the vehicle following you. The
automatic anti-glare feature is activated
when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
NOTE:

LPD2598

Driver’s side

WPD0126

CARD HOLDER (if so equipped)

MANUAL ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW
MIRROR (if so equipped)

To access the card holder, slide card in the
card holder. Do not view information while
operating the vehicle.

1 to reduce glare
Use the night position 䊊
from the headlights of vehicles behind you
at night.

Do not hang any objects over the sen1 or apply glass cleaner to the sensors 䊊
sors. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity
of the sensors, resulting in improper operation.

2 when driving in
Use the day position 䊊
daylight hours.

WARNING
Use the night position only when necessary, because it reduces rear view
clarity.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-39

NOTE:
Do not hang any objects over the sen1 or apply glass cleaner to the sensors 䊊
sors. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity
of the sensors, resulting in improper operation.

WPD0446

Type A (if so equipped)
The indicator light will illuminate when the
automatic anti-glare feature is operating.
With the ignition switch in the ON position,
button as described:
press the
∙ To turn off the anti-glare feature, press
button. The indicator light will
the
turn off.
∙ To turn on the anti-glare feature, press
button again. The indicator
the
light will turn on.

LPD0469

Type B (if so equipped)
2 will illuminate when
The indicator light 䊊
the automatic anti-glare feature is operating.
To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature,
press the O button. The indicator light
will turn off.
To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature,
press the | button again. The indicator
light will turn on.
For information on HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver operation, refer to “HomeLink®
Universal Transceiver” in the “Instruments
and controls” section of this manual.

3-40 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

To turn on the compass feature, press
3
the
button again. The compass 䊊
will display.
For additional information on HomeLink®
Universal Transceiver operation, refer to
“HomeLink® Universal Transceiver” in the
“Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.
NOTE:

LPD2660

Type C (if so equipped)
2 will illuminate when
The indicator light 䊊
the automatic anti-glare feature is operating.
To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature,
button. The indicator light
press the
will turn off.
To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature,
button again. The indicator
press the
light will turn on.
To turn off the compass feature, press
button. The compass will turn off.
the

For additional information about the
3 and compass features, refer
compass 䊊
to “Compass display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.

LPD2452

OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror remote control will operate only when the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
1 to select the left
Move the small switch 䊊
or right mirror. Adjust each mirror to the
2 .
desired position using the large switch 䊊
1 to the center (neutral)
Move the switch 䊊
position to prevent accidentally moving
the mirror.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-41

The outside mirror surfaces will return to
their original position when one of the following conditions has occurred:

WARNING
∙ Objects viewed in the outside mirror
on the passenger side are closer than
they appear. Be careful when moving
to the right. Using only this mirror
could cause an accident. Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to
other objects.

∙ The shift lever is moved to any position
other than R (Reverse).
∙ The outside mirror control switch is set
to the neutral or center position.
∙ The ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position.

∙ Do not adjust the mirrors while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.

NOTE:

Manual folding outside mirrors

If the outside mirror control switch is in
the “center” position, the mirror surface
will NOT turn downward when the shift
lever is moved to R (Reverse).

Pull the outside mirror toward the door to
fold it.

For additional information, refer to “Automatic drive positioner” in this section.

Reverse tilt-down feature (if so
equipped)

Heated mirrors (if so equipped)

LPD2084

The reverse tilt-down feature will turn both
outside mirror surfaces downward to provide better rear visibility close to the vehicle
when the mirror control switch is in either
the L or R position.
The mirrors automatically return to their
original position when you shift out of R
(Reverse).

3-42 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Some outside mirrors can be heated to
defrost, defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For additional information, refer to
“Rear window and outside mirror (if so
equipped) defroster switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if so
equipped)
The automatic drive positioner system has
two features:

tem” section of this manual and “Outside mirrors” in this section.

∙ Memory storage function

3. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds, push the memory switch (1 or 2).

∙ Entry/exit function

4. The indicator light for the pushed
memory switch will come on and stay
on for approximately 5 seconds.
5. The chime will sound if the memory
has been stored.
NOTE:
LPD2531

MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION
Two positions for the driver’s seat and outside mirrors can be stored in the automatic
drive positioner memory. Follow these procedures to use the memory system.
1. Place the ignition in the ON or OFF position (the vehicle should be stopped
while setting the memory).
2. Adjust the driver’s seat and outside
mirrors to the desired positions by
manually operating each adjusting
switch. For additional information, refer
to “Seats” in the “Safety—Seats, seat
belts and supplemental restraint sys-

If a new memory position is stored in the
same memory switch, the previous
memory position will be overwritten by
the new stored position.

Confirming memory storage
∙ Push the SET switch.
∙ If a memory position has not been
stored in the switch (1 or 2) the indicator
light for the respective switch will come
ON for approximately 0.5 seconds.
∙ If a memory position has been stored in
the switch (1 or 2) then the indicator light
for the respective switch will stay ON for
approximately 5 seconds.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-43

Linking a key fob to a stored
memory position
Each key fob can be linked to a stored
memory position (memory switch 1 or 2)
with the following procedure.
1. Follow steps 1-3 in the “Memory storage
function” section for storing the
memory position.
2. The indicator light for the pushed
memory switch will come on. While the
indicator light is on for 5 seconds, press
button on the key fob. The
the
indicator light of the linked memory
switch will blink. After the indicator light
goes off, the key fob is linked to that
memory setting.
Once it is linked, when ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position, pressing
button on the key fob will move
the
the driver’s seat and outside mirrors to the
linked memory switch position.
NOTE:
If a new memory position is stored in the
linked memory switch, then the key fob
will link the new position and overwrites
the previous position.

ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION

SYSTEM OPERATION

This system is designed so that the driver’s
seat will automatically move when the shift
lever is in the P (Park) position. This allows
the driver to get into and out of the driver’s
seat more easily.

The automatic drive positioner system will
not work or will stop operating under the
following conditions:

The driver’s seat will slide backward:
∙ When the driver’s door is opened with
the ignition switch placed in the OFF
position.
∙ When the ignition switch is changed
from ON to OFF with the driver’s door
open.
The driver’s seat will return to the previous
position:
∙ When the ignition switch is turned to ON
while the shift lever is in the P (Park)
position.
The entry/exit function can be adjusted or
canceled through “Vehicle Settings” in the
vehicle information display by performing
the following:
∙ Switch the “Exit Seat Slide” from ON to
OFF. For additional information, refer to
“Vehicle Settings” in the “Instruments
and controls” section of this manual.

3-44 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

∙ When the vehicle speed is above 4 mph
(7 km/h).
∙ When any of the memory switches are
pushed while the automatic drive positioner is operating.
∙ When the switch for the driver’s seat and
steering column is pushed while the automatic drive positioner is operating.
∙ When the seat has already been moved
to the memorized position.
∙ When no seat position is stored in the
memory switch.
∙ When the shift lever is moved from P
(Park) to any other position.

MEMO

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-45

4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and
voice recognition systems
NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
RearView Monitor (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
RearView Monitor system operation . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
How to read the displayed lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Difference between predicted and
actual distances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
How to park with predicted course
lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
How to turn on and off predicted
course lines (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
RearView Monitor system limitations . . . . . . . . . 4-9
System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Intelligent Around View Monitor
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
Intelligent Around View Monitor system
operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Difference between predicted and
actual distances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
How to park with predicted course
lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
How to switch the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Intelligent Around View Monitor system
limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Moving Object Detection (MOD)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
MOD system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Turning MOD on and off (if so equipped) . . . . . 4-26
MOD system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Vents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Heater and air conditioner (manual)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Air flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Heater and air conditioner (automatic)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40

Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
USB/iPod® Charging Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42

Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42

NISSANCONNECT® OWNER’S
MANUAL
Refer to the NissanConnect® Owner’s
Manual that includes the following information.
∙ NissanConnect® Services
∙ Navigation system (if so equipped)
∙ Audio system
∙ Apple CarPlayTM
∙ Android AutoTM
∙ Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone system
∙ Viewing information
∙ Other settings
∙ Voice recognition
∙ General system information

4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

REARVIEW MONITOR (if so
equipped)

LHA4694

1. CAMERA button

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RearView Monitor system could result in serious injury or death.
∙ RearView Monitor is a convenience
feature and is not a substitute for
proper backing. Always turn and look
out the windows and check mirrors to
be sure that it is safe to move before
operating the vehicle. Always back up
slowly.

CAUTION
Do not scratch the camera lens when
cleaning dirt or snow from the front of
the camera.
The RearView Monitor system automatically shows a rear view of the vehicle when
the shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse)
position. While in R (Reverse), pressing the
CAMERA button will cycle through guideline options. The radio can still be heard
while the RearView Monitor is active.

∙ The system is designed as an aid to
the driver in showing large stationary
objects directly behind the vehicle, to
help avoid damaging the vehicle.
∙ The distance guide line and the vehicle width line should be used as a
reference only when the vehicle is on a
level paved surface. The distance
viewed on the monitor is for reference
only and may be different than the
actual distance between the vehicle
and displayed objects.

4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA3694

To display the rear view, the RearView Monitor system uses a camera located just
1 .
above the vehicle’s license plate 䊊

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
OPERATION
With the ignition switch in the ON position,
move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position to operate the RearView Monitor.

Distance guide lines
Indicate distances from the vehicle body.
1 : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)
∙ Red line 䊊

∙ Yellow line 䊊: approx. 3 ft (1 m)
2

3 : approx. 7 ft (2 m)
∙ Green line 䊊

4 : approx. 10 ft (3 m) (if so
∙ Green line 䊊
equipped)

5
Vehicle width guide lines 䊊

Indicate the vehicle width when backing
up.
LHA1196

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED
LINES
Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle
width and distances to objects with referA are disence to the vehicle body line 䊊
played on the monitor.

6
Predicted course lines 䊊

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED
AND ACTUAL DISTANCES
The displayed guidelines and their locations on the ground are for approximate
reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill
surfaces or projecting objects will be actually located at distances different from
those displayed in the monitor relative to
the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When
in doubt, turn around and view the objects
as you are backing up, or park and exit the
vehicle to view the positioning of objects
behind the vehicle.

Indicate the predicted course when backing up. The predicted course lines will be
displayed on the monitor when the shift
lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the
steering wheel is turned. The predicted
course lines will move depending on how
much the steering wheel is turned and will
not be displayed while the steering wheel is
in the straight-ahead position.
The vehicle width guide lines and the width
of the predicted course lines are wider than
the actual width and course.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5

LHA3695

LHA3696

Backing up on a steep uphill

Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width
guide lines are shown closer than the actual
distance. Note that any object on the hill is
further than it appears on the monitor.

When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width
guide lines are shown farther than the actual
distance. Note that any object on the hill is
closer than it appears on the monitor.

4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA1201

Backing up near a projecting
object
A do not touch
The predicted course lines 䊊
the object in the display. However, the vehicle may hit the object if it projects over
the actual backing up course.

A
object when backing up to the position 䊊
if the object projects over the actual backing up course.

HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED
COURSE LINES
WARNING
∙ If the tires are replaced with different
sized tires, the predicted course lines
may be displayed incorrectly.
∙ On a snow-covered or slippery road,
there may be a difference between
the predicted course line and the actual course line.
∙ If the battery is disconnected or becomes discharged, the predicted
course lines may be displayed incorrectly. If this occurs, please perform
the following procedures:
LHA3697

Backing up behind a projecting
object
C is shown farther than the
The position 䊊
B in the display. However, the poposition 䊊
C is actually at the same distance as
sition 䊊
A . The vehicle may hit the
the position 䊊

– Turn the steering wheel from lock
to lock while the engine is running.

LHA1197

– Drive the vehicle on a straight road
for more than 5 minutes.

1. Visually check that the parking space is
safe before parking your vehicle.

∙ When the steering wheel is turned
with the ignition switch in the ACC position, the predicted course lines may
be displayed incorrectly.

2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed
A when the shift lever is
on the screen 䊊
moved to the R (Reverse) position.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make
D parallel
the vehicle width guide lines 䊊
C while referring
to the parking space 䊊
to the predicted course lines.
5. When the vehicle is parked in the space
completely, move the shift lever to the
P (Park) position and apply the parking
brake.

LHA3522

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
1. While on the main menu screen, touch
the Settings key.
2. Use the arrow to tab to the next screen
and touch the Camera key.
LHA1198

3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting
the steering wheel so that the preB enter the parkdicted course lines 䊊
C .
ing space 䊊

4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

3. Touch the Display Settings key.
4. Touch the “Brightness”, “Contrast”, Tint”,
“Color”, or “Black Level” key.
5. Adjust the item by touching the + or –
key on the touch-screen display.

NOTE:
Do not adjust any of the display settings
of the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is moving. Make sure the parking
brake is firmly applied.

HOW TO TURN ON AND OFF
PREDICTED COURSE LINES (if so
equipped)
To toggle ON and OFF the predicted course
lines while in the P (Park) position:
1. Touch the Settings key.
2. Touch the Camera key.
3. Touch the Predicted Course Lines key
to turn the feature ON or OFF.

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for RearView Monitor. Failure to operate
the vehicle in accordance with these
system limitations could result in serious injury or death.

∙ The system cannot completely eliminate blind spots and may not show
every object.

∙ Do not put anything on the rearview
camera. The rearview camera is installed above the license plate.

∙ Underneath the bumper and the corner areas of the bumper cannot be
viewed on the RearView Monitor because of its monitoring range limitation. The system will not show small
objects below the bumper, and may
not show objects close to the bumper
or on the ground.

∙ When washing the vehicle with high
pressure water, be sure not to spray it
around the camera. Otherwise, water
may enter the camera unit causing
water condensation on the lens, a
malfunction, fire or an electric shock.

∙ Objects viewed in the RearView Monitor differ from actual distance because a wide-angle lens is used.
∙ Objects in the RearView Monitor will
appear visually opposite compared to
when viewed in the rearview and outside mirrors.
∙ Use the displayed lines as a reference.
The lines are highly affected by the
number of occupants, fuel level, vehicle position, road conditions and
road grade.
∙ Make sure that the liftgate is securely
closed when backing up.

∙ Do not strike the camera. It is a precision instrument. Otherwise, it may
malfunction or cause damage resulting in a fire or an electric shock.
The following are operating limitations and
do not represent a system malfunction:
∙ When the temperature is extremely
high or low, the screen may not clearly
display objects.
∙ When strong light directly shines on the
camera, objects may not be displayed
clearly.
∙ Vertical lines may be seen in objects on
the screen. This is due to strong reflected light from the bumper.
∙ The screen may flicker under fluorescent light.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9

∙ The colors of objects on the RearView
Monitor may differ somewhat from the
actual color of objects.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the
1 , the RearView Monitor may not
camera 䊊
display objects clearly. Clean the camera
by wiping it with a cloth dampened with a
diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping it with a dry cloth.

∙ Objects on the monitor may not be
clear in a dark environment.
∙ There may be a delay when switching
between views.
∙ If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the
camera, the RearView Monitor may not
display objects clearly. Clean the camera.
∙ Do not use wax on the camera lens.
Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth
dampened with a diluted mild cleaning
agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.

LHA3694

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
CAUTION
∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner
to clean the camera. This will cause
discoloration.
∙ Do not damage the camera as the
monitor screen may be adversely
affected.

4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW
MONITOR (if so equipped)

LHA4694

1. CAMERA button

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for the proper use of the Intelligent Around View Monitor system
could result in serious injury or death
∙ The Intelligent Around View Monitor is
a convenience feature and is not a
substitute for proper vehicle operation because it has areas where objects cannot be viewed. The four corners of the vehicle in particular, are
areas where objects do not always
appear in the bird’s-eye, front, or rear
views. Always check your surroundings to be sure that it is safe to move
before operating the vehicle. Always
operate the vehicle slowly.
∙ The driver is always responsible for
safety during parking and other
maneuvers.

CAUTION
Do not scratch the camera lens when
cleaning dirt or snow from the front of
the camera.

The Intelligent Around View Monitor system is designed as an aid to the driver in
situations such as slot parking or parallel
parking.
The monitor displays various views of the
position of the vehicle in a split screen format. Not all views are available at all times.
Available views:
∙ Front View
An approximately 150–degree view of
the front of the vehicle.
∙ Rear View
An approximately 150–degree view of
the rear of the vehicle.
∙ Bird’s-Eye View
The surrounding views of the vehicle
from above.
∙ Front-Side View
The view around and ahead of the front
passenger’s side wheel.
∙ Rear-Wide View
An approximately 180–degree view of
the rear of the vehicle.

4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA3700

To display the multiple views, the Intelligent
Around View Monitor system uses cameras located in the front grille, on the vehicle’s outside mirrors and one just above
1 .
the vehicle’s license plate 䊊

INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW
MONITOR SYSTEM OPERATION
With the ignition switch in the ON position,
move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position or press the CAMERA button to operate the Intelligent Around View Monitor.

The screen displayed on the Intelligent
Around View Monitor will automatically return to the previous screen 3 minutes after
the CAMERA button has been pressed with
the shift lever in a position other than the R
(Reverse) position.

Available views
WARNING
∙ The distance guide lines and the vehicle width lines should be used as a
reference only when the vehicle is on a
paved, level surface. The apparent
distance viewed on the monitor may
be different than the actual distance
between the vehicle and displayed
objects.
∙ Use the displayed lines and the bird’seye view as a reference. The lines and
the bird’s-eye view are greatly affected by the number of occupants,
cargo, fuel level, vehicle position, road
condition and road grade.
∙ If the tires are replaced with different
sized tires, the predicted course lines
and the bird’s-eye view may be displayed incorrectly.

∙ When driving the vehicle up a hill, objects viewed in the monitor are further than they appear. When driving
the vehicle down a hill, objects viewed
in the monitor are closer than they
appear.
∙ Objects in the rear view will appear
visually opposite compared to when
viewed in the monitor and outside
mirrors.
∙ Use the mirrors or actually look to
properly judge distances to other
objects.
∙ On a snow-covered or slippery road,
there may be a difference between
the predicted course lines and the actual course line.
∙ The vehicle width and predicted
course lines are wider than the actual
width and course.
∙ The displayed lines will appear
slightly off to the right, because the
rearview camera is not installed in the
rear center of the vehicle.

SAA1840

Front view
Front and rear view
Guiding lines that indicate the approximate
vehicle width and distance to objects with
A are
reference to the vehicle body line 䊊
displayed on the monitor.
Distance guide lines
Indicate distances from the vehicle body:
1 : approximately 1.5 ft (0.5 m)
∙ Red line 䊊
2 : approximately 3 ft (1 m)
∙ Yellow line 䊊

3 : approximately 7 ft (2 m)
∙ Green line 䊊

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13

not be displayed while the steering wheel is
in the straight-ahead position.
The front view will not be displayed when
the vehicle speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h).
NOTE:

SAA1896

When the monitor displays the front
view and the steering wheel turns about
90 degrees or less from the straightahead position, both the right and left
6 are displayed.
predicted course lines 䊊
When the steering wheel turns about 90
degrees or more, a line is displayed only
on the opposite side of the turn.

Rear view
4 : approximately 10 ft (3 m)
∙ Green line 䊊
(if so equipped)
5 :
Vehicle width guide lines 䊊

Indicate the approximate vehicle width
when backing up.
6 :
Predicted course lines 䊊

Indicate the predicted course when operating the vehicle. The predicted course
lines will be displayed on the monitor when
the steering wheel is turned. The predicted
course lines will move depending on how
much the steering wheel is turned and will

4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA4534

Front view
Bird’s-eye view
The bird’s-eye view shows the overhead
view of the vehicle, which helps confirm the
vehicle position and the predicted course
to a parking space.
1 shows the position of
The vehicle icon 䊊
the vehicle. Note that the apparent distance between objects viewed in the bird’seye view may differ somewhat from the
actual distance to the vehicle.

The areas that the cameras cannot cover
2 are indicated in black.
䊊

4 indicate the prePredictive course lines 䊊
dictive course when operating the vehicle.
The predictive course lines will be displayed
on the monitor when the steering wheel is
turned. The predictive course lines will
move depending on how much the steering wheel is turned and will not be displayed while the steering wheel is in the
neutral position.

LHA4535

Rear view
2 is highlighted in
The non-viewable area 䊊
yellow for several seconds after the bird’seye view is displayed. It will be shown only
the first time after the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.
In addition, the non-viewable corners are
displayed in red and blink for the first 3 sec3 to remind the driver to be cauonds 䊊
tious.

When the monitor displays the front view
and the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or less from the neutral position, the
two green predictive course lines are
shown in front of the vehicle.
When the steering wheel turns about 90
degrees or more, one green predictive
course line is shown in front of the vehicle
and the other predictive course line is
shown at the side of the vehicle.

WARNING
∙ Objects in the bird’s-eye view will appear further than the actual distance.
∙ Tall objects, such as a curb or vehicle,
may be misaligned or not displayed at
the seam of the views.
∙ Objects that are above the camera
cannot be displayed.
∙ The view of the bird’s-eye view may be
misaligned when the camera position
alters.
∙ A line on the ground may be misaligned and is not seen as being
straight at the seam of the views. The
misalignment will increase as the line
proceeds away from the vehicle.

When the monitor displays the rear view,
the predictive course lines are shown at
the back of the vehicle.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15

Front-side view
Guiding lines
Guiding lines that indicate the approximate
width and the front end of the vehicle are
displayed on the monitor.
1 shows the front
The front-of-vehicle line 䊊
part of the vehicle.
2 shows the apThe side-of-vehicle line 䊊
proximate vehicle width including the outside mirrors.
3 of both the front 䊊
1 and
The extensions 䊊
2 lines are shown with a green dotted
side 䊊
line.

4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA3695

Backing up on a steep uphill
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width
guide lines are shown closer than the actual
distance. Note that any object on the hill is
further than it appears on the monitor.

on the hill is closer than it appears on the
monitor.

LHA3696

Backing up on a steep downhill
When backing up the vehicle down a hill,
the distance guide lines and the vehicle
width guide lines are shown farther than
the actual distance. Note that any object

LHA1201

Backing up near a projecting
object
A do not touch
The predicted course lines 䊊
the object in the display. However, the vehicle may hit the object if it projects over
the actual backing up course.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17

A
object when backing up to the position 䊊
if the object projects over the actual backing up course.

– Turn the steering wheel from lock
to lock while the engine is running.

LHA1197

– Drive the vehicle on a straight road
for more than 5 minutes.

1. Visually check that the parking space is
safe before parking your vehicle.

∙ When the steering wheel is turned
with the ignition switch in the ON position, the predicted course lines may
be displayed incorrectly.

2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed
A when the shift lever is
on the screen 䊊
moved to the R (Reverse) position.

4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY
With the ignition switch in the ON position,
press the CAMERA button or move the shift
lever to the R (Reverse) position to operate
the Intelligent Around View Monitor.
The Intelligent Around View Monitor displays different split screen views depending on the position of the shift lever. Press
the CAMERA button to switch between the
available views.

If the shift lever is in the P (Park) position, the
available views are:
∙ Front view/bird’s-eye view split screen
∙ Front view/front-side view split screen
If the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position,
the only available view is front view/frontside view split screen.
The display will switch from the Intelligent
Around View Monitor screen when:
∙ The shift lever is in the D (Drive) position
and the vehicle speed increases above
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
∙ A different screen is selected.

If the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position,
the available views are:
LHA1198

3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting
the steering wheel so that the preB enter the parkdicted course lines 䊊
C .
ing space 䊊

∙ Rear view/bird’s-eye view split screen
∙ Rear view/front-side view split screen
∙ Rear-wide view

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19

NOTE:
Do not adjust any of the display settings
of the Intelligent Around View Monitor
while the vehicle is moving. Make sure
the parking brake is firmly applied.

LHA3522

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
1. While on the main menu screen, touch
the Settings key.
2. Use the arrow to tab to the next screen
and touch the Camera key.
3. Touch the Display Settings key.
4. Touch the “Brightness”, “Contrast”, Tint”,
“Color”, or “Black Level” key.
5. Adjust the item by touching the + or –
key on the touch-screen display.

4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA3750

INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW
MONITOR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for Intelligent Around View Monitor.
Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations
could result in serious injury or death.
∙ Do not use the Intelligent Around View
Monitor with the outside mirrors in
the stored position, and make sure
that the liftgate is securely closed
when operating the vehicle using the
Intelligent Around View Monitor.
∙ The apparent distance between objects viewed on the Intelligent Around
View Monitor differs from the actual
distance.
∙ The cameras are installed on the front
grille, the outside mirrors and above
the rear license plate. Do not put anything such as a license plate frame on
the vehicle that covers or blocks the
view of the cameras.
∙ When washing the vehicle with high
pressure water, be sure not to spray it
around the cameras. Otherwise, water may enter the camera unit causing
water condensation on the lens, a
malfunction, fire or an electric shock.

∙ Do not strike the cameras. They are
precision instruments. Doing so could
cause a malfunction or cause damage
resulting in a fire or an electric shock.
There are some areas where the system
will not show objects and the system does
not warn of moving objects. When in the
front or rear view display, an object below
the bumper or on the ground may not be
1 . When in the bird’s-eye view, a tall
viewed 䊊
2 of the camera
object near the seam 䊊
viewing areas will not appear in the monitor.
The following are operating limitations and
do not represent a system malfunction:

∙ The colors of objects on the Intelligent
Around View Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual color of objects.
∙ Objects on the Intelligent Around View
Monitor may not be clear and the color
of the object may differ in a dark environment.
∙ There may be differences in sharpness
between each camera view of the
bird’s-eye view.
∙ Do not use wax on the camera lens.
Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth that
has been dampened with a diluted mild
cleaning agent, then wipe with a dry
cloth.

∙ There may be a delay when switching
between views.
∙ When the temperature is extremely
high or low, the screen may not display
objects clearly.
∙ When strong light directly shines on the
camera, objects may not be displayed
clearly.
∙ The screen may flicker under fluorescent light.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21

LHA3591

System temporarily unavailable
When the “!” icon is displayed on the screen,
there are abnormal conditions in the Intelligent Around View Monitor. This will not
hinder normal driving operation but the
system should be inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

LHA3592

When the “[X]” icon is displayed on the
screen, the camera image may be receiving temporary electronic disturbances
from surrounding devices. This will not hinder normal driving operation but the system should be inspected if it occurs frequently. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

LHA3700

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
CAUTION
∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner
to clean the camera. This will cause
discoloration.
∙ Do not damage the cameras as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of
1 , the Intelligent Around View
the cameras 䊊
Monitor may not display objects clearly.
Clean the camera by wiping with a cloth
dampened with a diluted mild cleaning
agent and then wiping with a dry cloth.

4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

MOVING OBJECT DETECTION (MOD)
(if so equipped)

LHA4694

1. CAMERA button

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23

WARNING

MOD SYSTEM OPERATION

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the Moving
Object Detection (MOD) system could
result in serious injury or death

The MOD system will turn on automatically
under the following conditions:

∙ The MOD system is not a substitute
for proper vehicle operation and is not
designed to prevent contact with objects surrounding the vehicle. When
maneuvering, always use the outside
mirrors and rearview mirror and turn
and check the surroundings to ensure
it is safe to maneuver.

∙ When the CAMERA button is pressed to
activate the camera view on the display.

∙ When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)
position.

∙ When vehicle speed decreases below
approximately 6mph (10 km/h) and the
camera screen is displayed.

∙ The system is deactivated at speeds
above 5 mph (8 km/h). It is reactivated
at lower speeds.
∙ The MOD system is not designed to
detect
surrounding
stationary
objects.
The MOD system can inform the driver of
moving objects near the vehicle when
backing out of garages, maneuvering in
parking lots and in other such instances.
The MOD system detects moving objects
by using image processing technology on
the image shown in the display.

4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA4190

Front and bird’s-eye views
The MOD system operates in the following
conditions when the camera view is displayed:
∙ When the shift lever is in the P (Park) or N
(Neutral) position and the vehicle is
stopped, the MOD system detects moving objects in the bird’s-eye view. The
MOD system will not operate if the outside mirrors are moving in or out, in the
stowed position, or if either front door is
opened.

LHA4191

Rear and bird’s-eye views
∙ When the shift lever is in the D (Drive)
position and the vehicle speed is below
approximately 6mph (10 km/h), the
MOD system detects moving objects in
the front view.
∙ When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)
position and the vehicle speed is below
approximately 6mph (10 km/h), the
MOD system detects moving objects in
the rear view. The MOD system will not
operate if the liftgate is open.

LHA4193

Rear and front-side views
The MOD system does not detect moving
objects in the front-side view. The MOD
icon is not displayed on the screen when in
this view.
When the MOD system detects moving objects near the vehicle, a chime will be heard
when in front or rear view and a yellow
frame will be displayed on the view where
the objects are detected. While the MOD
system continues to detect moving objects, the yellow frame continues to be displayed.

LHA4533

Rear-wide view
NOTE:
While the RCTA chime (if so equipped) is
beeping, the MOD system does not
chime.
1 is
In the bird’s-eye view, the yellow frame 䊊
displayed on each camera image (front,
rear, right, left) depending on where moving objects are detected.
2 is displayed on each
The yellow frame 䊊
view in the front view and rear view modes.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25

3 is displayed in the view
A blue MOD icon 䊊
where the MOD system is operative. A gray
MOD icon is displayed in the view where the
MOD system is not operative.

If the MOD system is turned off, the MOD
3 is not displayed.
icon 䊊

TURNING MOD ON AND OFF (if so
equipped)
Some vehicles include the option to allow
the MOD system to be turned on or off.
To turn the MOD system on or off:
or
button on the
1. Press the
steering wheel and select “Settings” in
the vehicle information display.
buttons, select “Driver
2. Using the
Assistance” and press the OK button.
3. Select “Parking Aids”.
4. Toggle ON or OFF “Moving Object” using the OK button.

MOD SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for MOD. Failure to operate the vehicle
in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or
death.
∙ Do not use the MOD system when
towing a trailer. The system may not
function properly.
∙ Excessive noise (for example, audio
system volume or open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime
sound, and it may not be heard.
∙ The MOD system performance will be
limited according to environmental
conditions and surrounding objects
such as:
– When there is low contrast between background and the moving
objects.
– When there is a blinking source of
light.
– When strong light such as another
vehicle’s headlight or sunlight is
present.

4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

– When camera orientation is not in
its usual position, such as when a
mirror is folded.
– When there is dirt, water drops or
snow on the camera lens.
– When the position of the moving
objects in the display is not
changed.
∙ The MOD system might detect flowing
water droplets on the camera lens,
white smoke from the muffler, moving shadows, etc.
∙ The MOD system may not function
properly depending on the speed, direction, distance or shape of the moving objects.
∙ If your vehicle sustains damage to the
parts where the camera is installed,
leaving it misaligned or bent, the
sensing zone may be altered and the
MOD system may not detect objects
properly.
∙ When the temperature is extremely
high or low, the screen may not display objects clearly. This is not a
malfunction.

NOTE:

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of
1 , the MOD system may not
the cameras 䊊
operate properly. Clean the camera by wiping with a cloth dampened with a diluted
mild cleaning agent and then wiping with a
dry cloth.

The blue MOD icon will change to orange
if one of the following has occurred:
∙ When the system is malfunctioning.
∙ When the component temperature
reaches a high level (icon will blink).
∙ When the Rear View camera has detected a blockage (icon will blink).
If the icon light continues to illuminate
orange, have the MOD system checked. It
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

LHA3700

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
CAUTION
∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner
to clean the camera. This will cause
discoloration.
∙ Do not damage the camera as the
monitor screen may be adversely
affected.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27

VENTS

LHA4301

Side
Adjust air flow direction by moving the vent
slides.

LHA4302

Center

Open or close the vents by using the dial.
to open the
Move the dial toward the
vents or toward the
to close them.

4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA1134

Rear

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(manual) (if so equipped)
WARNING
∙ The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
∙ Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle.
Pets should also not be left alone.
They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent
operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,
sunny days, temperatures in a closed
vehicle could quickly become high
enough to cause severe or possibly
fatal injuries to people or animals.
∙ Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up.
NOTE:
LHA2243

Fan speed control dial / A/C (air
conditioner) button

4.
5.

2. Air flow control buttons
3. Temperature control dial / MAX A/C
button

Air recirculation button
Rear window and outside mirror
(if so equipped) defroster switch
Front windshield defrost button

∙ Odors from inside and outside the vehicle can build up in the air conditioner
unit. Odor can enter the passenger
compartment through the vents.
∙ When parking, set the heater and air
conditioner controls to turn off air recirculation to allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. This should help
reduce odors inside the vehicle.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29

CONTROLS
Fan control dial
The
fan control dial allows you to adjust the fan speed for the outlet air flow. To
fan control
turn the fan off, turn the
dial to the OFF position.

Air flow control buttons
The air flow control buttons allow you to
select the air flow outlets.

MAX — Air flows mainly from center
A/C
and side vents with maximum
cooling and
turns on.
— Air flows mainly from center
and side vents.
— Air flows mainly from center
and side vents and foot
outlets.
— Air flows mainly from foot outlets and partly from defroster.
— Air flows mainly from defroster outlets and foot
outlets.
— Air flows mainly from defroster outlets.

Temperature control dial
The temperature control dial allows you to
adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To
lower the temperature, turn the dial to the
left. To increase the temperature, turn the
dial to the right.

Air recirculation button
On position (Indicator light on):
Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.
Press the
when:

button to the ON position

∙ driving on a dusty road.
∙ to prevent traffic fumes from entering
passenger compartment.
∙ for maximum cooling when using the
air conditioner.
Off position (Indicator light off):
Outside air is drawn into the passenger
compartment and distributed through the
selected outlet.
Use the off position for normal heater or air
conditioner operation.

Air conditioner button
Start the engine, turn the
fan control
dial to the desired position and press
button to turn on the air condithe
tioner. To turn off the air conditioner, press
button again.
the
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

Rear window and outside mirror
(if so equipped) defroster switch
For additional information, refer to “Rear
window and outside mirror (if so equipped)
defroster switch” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.

HEATER OPERATION
Heating
This mode is used to direct heated air to
the foot outlets. Some air also flows from
the defrost outlets and the side vent outlets.
button to change to
1. Press the
fresh air intake mode. The
indicator light will turn off for normal heating.
2. Press the

4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

air flow control button.

3. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position between the
middle and the hot position.

Ventilation
This mode directs outside air to the side
and center vents.
button to change to
1. Press the
indicafresh air intake mode. The
tor light will turn off.
2. Press the

air flow control button.

3. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.

Defrosting or defogging
This mode directs the air to the defrost
outlets to defrost/defog the windows.
1. Press the

defroster button.

2. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position between the
middle and the hot position.
∙ To quickly remove ice or fog from the
windows, turn the fan control dial to the
highest setting and the temperature
control to the full HOT position.
position is selected, the
∙ When the
air conditioner automatically turns on if
the outside temperature is more than
36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the air
which helps defog the windshield.
indicator automatically turns
The
off, allowing outside air to be drawn into
the passenger compartment to further
improve the defogging performance.
The recirculation mode cannot be actiposition.
vated in the

Bi-level heating
The bi-level mode directs warmed air to
the side and center vents and to the front
and rear floor outlets.

fan control dial to the de3. Turn the
sired position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.

Heating and defogging
This mode heats the interior and defogs
the windshield.
1. Press the

air flow control button.

2. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position between the
middle and the hot position.
position is selected, the
∙ When the
air conditioner automatically turns on if
the outside temperature is more than
36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the air
which helps defog the windshield.
indicator automatically turns
The
off, allowing outside air to be drawn into
the passenger compartment to further
improve the defogging performance.

button to change to
1. Press the
will
fresh air intake mode. The
turn off.
2. Press the

air flow control button.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31

Operating tips
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades
and air inlet in front of the windshield.
This improves heater operation.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION
Start the engine, turn the
fan control
dial to the desired position, and press
button to activate the air condithe
tioner. When the air conditioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functions are
added to the heater operation.
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

Cooling
This mode is used to cool and dehumidify
the air.
1. Press the

air flow control button.

2. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.
3. Press the

button.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.

∙ For quick cooling, press the MAX A/C
button. When the MAX A/C button is
mode.
pressed, it will activate the
The amount of air coming through the
vents is the highest it can go when in
MAX A/C mode regardless of the posifan control dial.
tion of the

Dehumidified heating
This mode is used to heat and dehumidify
the air.
1. Press the
tion.

button to the OFF posi-

2. Press the

air flow control button.

3. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.
4. Press the A/C button. The indicator
light comes on.
5. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.

Dehumidified defogging
This mode is used to defog the windows
and dehumidify the air.
1. Press the

front defrost button.

4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

fan control dial to the de2. Turn the
sired position.
or
are selected,
∙ When the
the air conditioner automatically turns
on if the outside temperature is more
than 36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the air
which helps defog the windshield.
mode automatically turns off,
The
allowing outside air to be drawn into the
passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance.
∙ The air conditioner is always on in
or
mode, regardless of whether
the indicator light is on or off.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.

Operating tips
∙ Keep the windows and moonroof (if so
equipped) closed while the air conditioner is in operation.
∙ After parking in the sun, drive for two or
three minutes with the windows open
to vent hot air from the passenger
compartment. Then, close the windows. This allows the air conditioner to
cool the interior more quickly.

∙ The air conditioning system should
be operated for approximately
10 minutes at least once a month.
This helps prevent damage to the
system due to lack of lubrication.
∙ A visible mist may be seen coming from
the ventilators in hot, humid conditions
as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not
indicate a malfunction.

AIR FLOW CHARTS
The following charts show the button and
dial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK
heating, cooling or defrosting. The air recirculation indicator should always be in
the OFF position for heating and defrosting.

∙ If the engine coolant temperature
gauge indicates engine coolant temperature over the normal range, turn
the air conditioner off. For additional
information, refer to “If your vehicle
overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual.
∙ If the engine coolant temperature bewill be activated
comes too high,
and the indicator light will come on automatically.
∙ When the ignition is OFF, button characters will not illuminate.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33

LHA4364

4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA4365

LHA4366

LHA4367

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35

LHA4685

4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(automatic) (if so equipped)
7.

8.
9.
10.
11.

Rear window and outside
mirror (if so equipped) defroster
switch
Fresh air intake button
AUTO (automatic mode) button
Fan speed control buttons
Air recirculation button
WARNING

∙ The air conditioner cooling function
operates only when the engine is
running.

LHA2875

1.
2.
3.
4.

Front defroster button
Temperature control dial (driver’s
side) / ON-OFF button
MODE (manual air flow control)
button
Display screen

5.
6.

A/C (air conditioner) button
Temperature control dial (passenger’s side)/DUAL (passenger’s side
temperature control) button

∙ Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle.
Pets should also not be left alone.
They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent
operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,
sunny days, temperatures in a closed
vehicle could quickly become high
enough to cause severe or possibly
fatal injuries to people or animals.
∙ Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37

NOTE:
∙ Odors from inside and outside the vehicle can build up in the air conditioner
unit. Odor can enter the passenger
compartment through the vents.
∙ When parking, set the heater and air
conditioner controls to turn off air recirculation to allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. This should help
reduce odors inside the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Heating (A/C OFF)
The air conditioner does not activate. When
you need to heat only, use this mode.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Turn the temperature control dial to set
the desired temperature.
∙ The temperature of the passenger
compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan
speed are also controlled automatically.
∙ Do not set the temperature lower than
the outside air temperature. Otherwise,
the system may not work properly.

Dehumidified defrosting or
defogging
1. Press the
front defroster button
on. The indicator light on the button will
come on.
2. Turn the temperature control dial to set
the maximum temperature to aid in
defrosting or defogging.
∙ To quickly remove ice from the outside
of the windows, use the fan speed control button to set the fan speed to maximum.
∙ As soon as possible after the windshield is clean, press the AUTO button to
return to the automatic mode.
front defroster button is
∙ When the
pressed, the air conditioner will automatically be turned on at outside temperatures above 36°F (2°C). The air recirculate mode automatically turns off,
allowing outside air to be drawn into the
passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance.
When the air recirculate mode automatically turns off, the air fresh mode
will automatically turn on.

∙ Not recommended if windows fog up.

4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Cooling and/or dehumidified
heating (AUTO)
This mode may be used all year round as
the system automatically works to keep a
constant temperature. Air flow distribution,
air intake control and fan speed are also
controlled automatically.
1. Press the AUTO button on. The indicator on the button will illuminate.
2. Turn the temperature control dial to the
left or right to set the desired temperature.
∙ The temperature of the passenger
compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution, air intake
control and fan speed are also controlled automatically.
∙ A visible mist may be seen coming from
the vents in hot, humid conditions as
the air is cooled rapidly. This does not
indicate a malfunction.
3. You can individually set driver’s and front
passenger’s side temperature using
each temperature control dial. When the
DUAL button is pressed or passenger’s
side temperature dial is turned, the DUAL
indicator will come on. To turn off the
passenger’s side temperature control,
press the DUAL button.

Remote Engine Start with
Intelligent Climate Control (if so
equipped)
Vehicles equipped with automatic climate
controls and Remote Engine Start function
may go into automatic heating or cooling
mode when Remote Engine Start is activated depending on outside and cabin
temperatures. During this period, the climate control display and buttons will be
inoperable until the ignition switch is
turned on. In Remote Engine Start defrosting mode, the rear window defroster and
heated steering wheel (if so equipped) may
be activated automatically.

Voice Recognition logic (if so
equipped)
When the climate control system is on, the
fan speed may be automatically lowered
so that commands are more easily recognized. Fan speed can be adjusted using
fan speed control buttons, if dethe
sired.

MANUAL OPERATION
Fan speed control
Press the
fan speed control buttons
to manually control the fan speed.
Press the AUTO button to return to automatic control of the fan speed.

Air recirculation
Press the
air recirculation button to
recirculate interior air inside the vehicle.
button will
The indicator light on the
come on.
The air recirculation cannot be activated
when the air conditioner is in the
front defrosting mode.
When the outside temperature exceeds 70°F
(21°C), the air conditioning system may default to air recirculation mode automatically
to reduce overall power consumption. To exit
air recirculation mode, select the fresh air
intake button to enter fresh air mode.

Fresh air intake
Press the
fresh air intake button to
draw outside air into the passenger compartment.

Automatic intake air control
In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be
controlled automatically. When the outside
temperature exceeds 70°F (21°C), the air
conditioning system may default to air recirculation mode automatically to reduce
overall power consumption. To exit air recirculation mode, select the fresh air intake
button to enter fresh air mode.
To manually control the intake air, press
air
recirculation
button
the
or
fresh air intake button. To return to
the
automatic
control
mode
if
fresh air indicator is illuminated,
the
press and hold the
fresh air intake
button for about 2 seconds. The fresh air
indicator and air recirculation indicator
lights will flash twice, and then the intake air
will be controlled automatically. To return
to the automatic control mode if
air recirculation icon is illumithe
nated, press and hold the
air recirculation button for about 2 seconds.
air
recirculation
indicator
The

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39

and
fresh air intake indicator lights
will flash twice and the intake air will be
controlled automatically.

Air conditioner button
Start the engine, press the
fan control
buttons to the desired position and press
button to turn on the air condithe
tioner. To turn off the air conditioner, press
button again.
the
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

Air flow control
Pressing the MODE button manually controls air flow and selects the air outlet:

— Air flows mainly from center
and side vents.
— Air flows mainly from center
and side vents and foot
outlets.
— Air flows mainly from foot outlets and partly from defroster.
— Air flows mainly from defroster
and foot outlets.

To turn system off

LHA2949

Press the ON-OFF button.

OPERATING TIPS

Rear window and outside mirror
(if so equipped) defroster switch

The sunload sensor, located on the top and
center of the instrument panel, helps the
system maintain a constant temperature.
Do not put anything on or around this sensor.

For additional information, refer to “Rear
window and outside mirror (if so equipped)
defroster switch” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.

4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER
∙ When the climate system is in automatic operation and the engine coolant
temperature and outside air temperature are low, the air flow outlet may default to defroster mode for a maximum
of 2 minutes 30 seconds. This is not a
malfunction. After the engine coolant
temperature warms up, the air flow outlet will return to foot mode and operation will continue normally.
∙ When the outside and interior cabin
temperatures are moderate to high, the
intake setting may default to turn off air
recirculation to allow fresh air into the
passenger compartment. You may notice air flow from the foot mode, bi-level
mode, or side demist vent outlets for a
maximum of 15 seconds. This may occur when previous climate setting was
system off. This is not a malfunction.
After the initial warm air is expelled, the
intake will return to automatic control,
air flow outlet will return to previous settings, and operation will continue normally. To exit, press any climate control
button.

∙ Keep the moonroof (if so equipped)
closed while the air conditioner is in operation.
∙ If you feel that the air flow mode you
have selected and the outlets the air is
coming out do not match, select
mode.
the
∙ When you change the air flow mode,
you may feel air flow from the feet vents
for just a moment. This is not a malfunction.

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN
vehicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind.
This refrigerant does not harm the
earth’s ozone layer.
Special charging equipment and lubricant
is required when servicing your NISSAN air
conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or
lubricants will cause severe damage to
your air conditioner system. For additional
information, refer to “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations”
in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer to service your “environmentally
friendly” air conditioner system.

WARNING
The air conditioner system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid
personal injury, any air conditioner service should be done only by an experienced
technician
with
proper
equipment.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41

USB/iPod® CHARGING PORT

ANTENNA

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

The vehicle is equipped with a shark fin
antenna and an antenna pattern is printed
inside the rear window.

When installing a CB, ham radio or car
phone in your vehicle, be sure to observe
the following precautions; otherwise, the
new equipment may adversely affect the
engine control system and other electronic
parts.

CAUTION
∙ Do not place metalized film near the
rear window glass or attach any metal
parts to it. This may cause poor reception or noise.

LHA4476

∙ When cleaning the inside of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the rear window antenna.
Lightly wipe along the antenna with a
dampened soft cloth.

There is a USB/iPod® charging port located
in the center console. This port will charge
compatible devices.
NOTE:
Only the USB connection port located
below the instrument panel will allow
operation of the USB/iPod® devices
through the audio system.

4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WARNING
∙ A cellular phone should not be used
for any purpose while driving so full
attention may be given to vehicle operation. Some jurisdictions prohibit
the use of cellular phones while
driving.
∙ If you must make a call while your vehicle is in motion, the hands free cellular phone operational mode is highly
recommended. Exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
∙ If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking
on the phone, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION
∙ Keep the antenna as far away as possible from the electronic control
modules.
∙ Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in
(20 cm) away from the electronic control system harnesses. Do not route
the antenna wire next to any harness.
∙ Adjust the antenna standing-wave
ratio as recommended by the
manufacturer.
∙ Connect the ground wire from the CB
radio chassis to the body.
∙ For additional information, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
On-pavement and off-road driving
precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Off-road recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Rapid air pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Driving safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Ignition switch (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Continuously Variable Transmission . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Push-button ignition switch (if so equipped) . . . . 5-15
Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Push-button ignition switch positions . . . . . . . 5-16
Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery
discharge (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Starting the engine (models without NISSAN
Intelligent Key® system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Starting the engine (models with NISSAN
Intelligent Key® system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 5-21
Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Pedal type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Switch type (models with electronic
parking brake system). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Automatic brake hold (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
How to activate/deactivate the
automatic brake hold function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
How to use the automatic brake hold
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
SPORT mode switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
ECO mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
LDW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
How to enable/disable the LDW system . . . . . 5-36
LDW system limitations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
I-LI system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
How to enable/disable the I-LI system. . . . . . . 5-41
I-LI system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
BSW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
How to enable/disable the BSW system . . . . . 5-49
BSW system limitations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
BSW driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
RCTA system operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
How to enable/disable the RCTA
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
RCTA system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62

System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
Cruise control (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Precautions on cruise control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (for vehicles
without ProPILOT Assist) (if so equipped). . . . . . . . 5-66
How to select the cruise control mode . . . . . .5-68
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-68
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82
System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-84
Conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85
ProPILOT Assist (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90
ProPILOT Assist system operation . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92
Turning the conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95
Operating ProPILOT Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96

How to enable/disable the Steering
Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
(for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist). . . . . . . . . . . 5-102
Steering Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-112
Conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-119
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-123
AEB system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-124
Turning the AEB system on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-126
AEB system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-127
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128
System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-129
System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-129
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with
Pedestrian Detection (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 5-131
AEB with Pedestrian Detection system
operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-132
Turning the AEB with Pedestrian
Detection system ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-134
AEB with Pedestrian Detection system
limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-135
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-137

System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-138
System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-138
Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-140
Fuel efficient driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-140
Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-142
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 5-142
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Lock Switch
Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-143
Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-145
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-146
Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-147
Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-147
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-148
Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-149
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . 5-149
Brake force distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-151
Chassis Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-152
Intelligent Trace Control (I-TC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-152
Intelligent Engine Brake (I-EB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-153
Active Ride Control (ARC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-154
Hill start assist system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-155
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-156
Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-156

Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-156
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-156
Draining of coolant water. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-157
Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-157

Special winter equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-157
Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-157
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-158

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING
∙ Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle.
Pets should also not be left alone.
They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent
operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,
sunny days, temperatures in a closed
vehicle could quickly become high
enough to cause severe or possibly
fatal injuries to people or animals.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)
WARNING
∙ Do not breathe exhaust gases; they
contain colorless and odorless carbon
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness
or death.
∙ If you suspect that exhaust fumes are
entering the vehicle, drive with all
windows fully open, and have the vehicle inspected immediately.

∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding
or shifting. Do not place cargo higher
than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop
or collision, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.

∙ Do not run the engine in closed spaces
such as a garage.

∙ To avoid raising the center of gravity
excessively, do not exceed the rated
capacity of the roof rack (if so
equipped) and evenly distribute the
load.

∙ Keep the rear vent windows, liftgates,
doors and trunk lids (if so equipped)
closed while driving, otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the
passenger compartment. If you must
drive with one of these open, follow
these precautions:

∙ Do not park the vehicle with the engine running for any extended length
of time.

1. Open all the windows.

5-4 Starting and driving

air recirculation but2. Set the
ton to off and the fan control dial to
high to circulate the air.
∙ If electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass to a trailer
through the seal on the liftgate or the
body, follow the manufacturer’s recommendation to prevent carbon
monoxide entry into the vehicle.
∙ The exhaust system and body should
be inspected by a qualified mechanic
whenever:
a. The vehicle is raised for service.
b. You suspect that exhaust fumes
are entering into the passenger
compartment.
c. You notice a change in the sound of
the exhaust system.
d. You have had an accident involving
damage to the exhaust system,
underbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST
The three-way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system.
Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst
are burned at high temperatures to help
reduce pollutants.

WARNING
∙ The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are very hot. Keep people, animals or flammable materials away
from
the
exhaust
system
components.
∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags. They may
ignite and cause a fire.

CAUTION
∙ Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits
from leaded gasoline will seriously reduce the three-way catalyst’s ability
to help reduce exhaust pollutants.

∙ Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions in the ignition, fuel injection, or
electrical systems can cause over rich
fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,
causing it to overheat. Do not keep
driving if the engine misfires, or if noticeable loss of performance or other
unusual operating conditions are detected. Have the vehicle inspected
promptly. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
∙ Avoid driving with an extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, damaging the three-way catalyst.
∙ Do not race the engine while warming
it up.
∙ Do not push or tow your vehicle to
start the engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the vehicle

placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates
a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is
the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.

Starting and driving 5-5

When the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
Additional information:
∙ When replacing a wheel without the
TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS
does not monitor the tire pressure of
the spare tire.
∙ The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph
(25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for
example, a flat tire while driving).

5-6 Starting and driving

∙ The low tire pressure warning light does
not automatically turn off when the tire
pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure,
the vehicle must be driven at speeds
above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the
TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure
warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge
to check the tire pressure.
∙ The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning appears each time the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position as
long as the low tire pressure warning
light remains illuminated.
∙ The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning appears in the vehicle information
display when the low tire pressure
warning light is illuminated and low tire
pressure is detected. The “Tire Pressure
Low - Add Air” warning turns off when
the low tire pressure warning light turns
off.
∙ The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning does not appear if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.

∙ Tire pressure rises and falls depending
on the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation and the outside temperature.
Do not reduce the tire pressure after
driving because the tire pressure rises
after driving. Low outside temperature
can lower the temperature of the air
inside the tire which can cause a lower
tire inflation pressure. This may cause
the low tire pressure warning light to
illuminate. If the warning light illuminates, check the tire pressure for all four
tires.
∙ The Tire and Loading Information label
is located in the driver’s door opening.
∙ You can also check the pressure of all
tires (except the spare tire) on the vehicle information display screen. The order of the tire pressure figures displayed on the screen corresponds with
the actual order of the tire position.
For additional information, refer to “Low tire
pressure warning light” in the “Instruments
and controls” section and “Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “In case of
emergency” section of this manual.

WARNING
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should contact
the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
∙ If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sudden
steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,
reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road
to a safe location and stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Driving with underinflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle
damage could occur and may lead to
an accident and could result in serious
personal injury. Check the tire pressure
for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure
to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire
pressure warning light off. If you have a
flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as
soon as possible. (For additional information, refer to “Flat tire” in the “In case
of emergency” section for changing a
flat tire.)

∙ When replacing a wheel without the
TPMS such as the spare tire, when a
spare tire is mounted or a wheel is
replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, the TPMS will not function and
the low tire pressure warning light will
flash for approximately 1 minute. The
light will remain on after 1 minute.
Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS
system reset as soon as possible. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
∙ Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect
the proper operation of the TPMS.
∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.

CAUTION
∙ The TPMS may not function properly
when the wheels are equipped with
tire chains or the wheels are buried in
snow.

∙ Do not place metalized film or any
metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This may cause poor reception
of the signals from the tire pressure
sensors, and the TPMS will not function properly.
Some devices and transmitters may temporarily interfere with the operation of the
TPMS and cause the low tire pressure
warning light to illuminate.
Some examples are:
∙ Facilities or electric devices using similar
radio frequencies are near the vehicle.
∙ If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is being used in or near the vehicle.
∙ If a computer (or similar equipment) or
a DC/AC converter is being used in or
near the vehicle.
The low tire pressure warning light may
illuminate in the following cases:
∙ If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel
and tire without TPMS.
∙ If the TPMS has been replaced and the
ID has not been registered.
∙ If the wheel is not originally specified by
NISSAN.

Starting and driving 5-7

visual and audible signals outside the vehicle to help you inflate the tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure.
Vehicle set-up
1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place.
2. Apply the parking brake and place the
shift lever in the P (Park) position.

∙ The TPMS will not activate the EasyFill Tire Alert under the following conditions:

3. Place the ignition switch in the ON position. Do not start the engine.

– If there is interference from an external device or transmitter.

Operation

Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

1. Add air to the tire.

For Canada:

3. When the designated pressure is
reached, the horn beeps once and the
hazard indicators stop flashing.

This device complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert
When adding air to an under-inflated tire,
the TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert provides

5-8 Starting and driving

∙ If the hazard indicator does not flash
within approximately 15 seconds after starting to inflate the tire, it indicates that the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is
not operating.

2. After a few seconds, the hazard indicators will start flashing.

4. Perform the above steps for each tire.
∙ If the tire is over-inflated more than
approximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn
beeps and the hazard indicators
flash three times. To correct the pressure, push the core of the valve stem
on the tire briefly to release pressure.
When the pressure reaches the designated pressure, the horn beeps
once.

– The air pressure from the inflation
device is not sufficient to inflate the
tire.
– There is a malfunction in the TPMS
system.
– There is a malfunction in the horn or
hazard indicators.
– The identification code of the tire
pressure sensor is not registered to
the system.
– The battery of the tire pressure sensor is low.
∙ If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert does not operate due to TPMS interference, move
the vehicle about 3 ft (1 m) backward
or forward and try again.

If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is not working, use a
tire pressure gauge.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD
DRIVING PRECAUTIONS

AVOIDING COLLISION AND
ROLLOVER
WARNING

Utility vehicles have a significantly
higher rollover rate than other types of
vehicles.

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe
and prudent manner may result in loss
of control or an accident.

They have higher ground clearance than
passenger cars to make them capable of
performing in a variety of on-pavement
and off-road applications. This gives them
a higher center of gravity than ordinary vehicles. An advantage of higher ground
clearance is a better view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems. However,
they are not designed for cornering at the
same speeds as conventional 2-wheel
drive vehicles any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If at all
possible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may result in
loss of control or vehicle rollover. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times.
Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive
speed, high speed cornering, or sudden
steering maneuvers, because these driving
practices could cause you to lose control of
your vehicle.

For additional information, refer to “Driving
safety precautions” in this section.

As with any vehicle, loss of control could
result in a collision with other vehicles or
objects or cause the vehicle to roll over,
particularly if the loss of control causes
the vehicle to slide sideways.
Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving
when tired. Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs (including prescription or over-the-counter drugs which
may cause drowsiness). Always wear your
seat belt as outlined in the “Safety – Seats,
seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual, and also instruct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in
collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash,
an unbelted or improperly belted person
is significantly more likely to be injured
or killed than a person properly wearing
a seat belt.

OFF-ROAD RECOVERY
While driving, the right side or left side
wheels may unintentionally leave the road
surface. If this occurs, maintain control of
the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this procedure is only
a general guide. The vehicle must be driven
as appropriate based on the conditions of
the vehicle, road and traffic.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Do not apply the brakes.
3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering
wheel with both hands and try to hold a
straight course.
4. When appropriate, slowly release the
accelerator pedal to gradually slow the
vehicle.

Starting and driving 5-9

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the
vehicle to follow the road while vehicle
speed is reduced. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle back onto the road
surface until vehicle speed is reduced.
6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn
the steering wheel until both tires return to the road surface. When all tires
are on the road surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the appropriate driving
lane.
∙ If you decide that it is not safe to return the vehicle to the road surface
based on vehicle, road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the vehicle to a
stop in a safe place off the road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS
Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can
occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged
due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air
pressure loss can also be caused by driving
on under-inflated tires.
Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling and stability of the vehicle, especially
at highway speeds.
Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by
maintaining the correct air pressure and
visually inspecting the tires for wear and

5-10 Starting and driving

damage. For additional information, refer
to “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself ”
section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses
air pressure or “blows-out” while driving,
maintain control of the vehicle by following
the procedure below. Please note that this
procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based
on the conditions of the vehicle, road and
traffic.

WARNING
The following actions can increase the
chance of losing control of the vehicle if
there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure. Losing control of the vehicle may
cause a collision and result in personal
injury.
∙ The vehicle generally moves or pulls
in the direction of the flat tire.
∙ Do not rapidly apply the brakes.
∙ Do not rapidly release the accelerator
pedal.
∙ Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering
wheel with both hands and try to hold a
straight course.
3. When appropriate, slowly release the
accelerator pedal to gradually slow the
vehicle.
4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe
location off the road and away from
traffic if possible.
5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually stop the vehicle.
6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers
and contact a roadside emergency
service to change the tire. For additional information, refer to “Changing a
flat tire” in the “In case of emergency”
section of this manual.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND
DRIVING
WARNING
Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream
reduces coordination, delays reaction
time and impairs judgement. Driving
after drinking alcohol increases the
likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others. Additionally, if you are injured in an accident,
alcohol can increase the severity of the
injury.
NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However, you must choose not to drive under
the influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are injured or killed in
alcohol-related collisions. Although the local laws vary on what is considered to be
legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol
affects all people differently and most
people underestimate the effects of alcohol.
Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix!
That is true for drugs (over-the-counter,
prescription) and illegal drugs, too. Don’t

drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is
impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other
physical condition.

DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Your NISSAN is designed for both normal
and off-road use. However, avoid driving in
deep water or mud as your NISSAN is
mainly designed for leisure use, unlike a
conventional off-road vehicle.
Remember that 2-wheel drive models are
less capable than All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
models for rough road driving and extrication when stuck in deep snow or mud, or
the like.
Please observe the following precautions:

WARNING
∙ Spinning the front wheels on slippery
surfaces may cause the AWD warning
message to display and the AWD system to automatically switch from the
AWD to the 2WD mode. This could reduce the traction. Be especially careful when towing a trailer (AWD
models).

∙ Drive carefully when off the road and
avoid dangerous areas. Every person
who drives or rides in this vehicle
should be seated with their seat belt
fastened. This will keep you and your
passengers in position when driving
over rough terrain.
∙ Do not drive across steep slopes. Instead drive either straight up or
straight down the slopes. Off-road vehicles can tip over sideways much
more easily than they can forward or
backward.
∙ Many hills are too steep for any vehicle. If you drive up them, you may
stall. If you drive down them, you may
not be able to control your speed. If
you drive across them, you may roll
over.
∙ Do not shift gears while driving on
downhill grades as this could cause
loss of control of the vehicle.
∙ Stay alert when driving to the top of a
hill. At the top there could be a dropoff or other hazard that could cause
an accident.

Starting and driving 5-11

∙ If your engine stalls or you cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill, never
attempt to turn around. Your vehicle
could tip or roll over. Always back
straight down in the R (Reverse) gear
and apply brakes to control your
speed.
∙ Heavy braking going down a hill could
cause your brakes to overheat and
fade, resulting in loss of control and
an accident. Apply brakes lightly and
use a low gear to control your speed.
∙ Unsecured cargo can be thrown
around when driving over rough terrain. Properly secure all cargo so it will
not be thrown forward and cause injury to you or your passengers.
∙ To avoid raising the center of gravity
excessively, do not exceed the rated
capacity of the roof rack (if so
equipped) and evenly distribute the
load.
∙ Secure heavy loads in the cargo area
as far forward and as low as possible.
Do not equip the vehicle with tires
larger than specified in this manual.
This could cause your vehicle to roll
over.

5-12 Starting and driving

∙ Do not grip the inside or spokes of the
steering wheel when driving off-road.
The steering wheel could move suddenly and injure your hands. Instead
drive with your fingers and thumbs on
the outside of the rim.
∙ Before operating the vehicle, ensure
that the driver and all passengers
have their seat belts fastened.
∙ Always drive with the floor mats in
place as the floor may become hot.
∙ Lower your speed when encountering
strong crosswinds. With a higher center of gravity, your NISSAN is more affected by strong side winds. Slower
speeds ensure better vehicle control.
∙ Do not drive beyond the performance
capability of the tires, even with AWD
engaged.
∙ For AWD equipped vehicles, do not attempt to raise two wheels off the
ground and shift the transmission to
any drive or reverse position with the
engine running. Doing so may result
in drivetrain damage or unexpected
vehicle movement which could result
in serious vehicle damage or personal
injury.

∙ Do not attempt to test an AWD
equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer (such as the dynamometers
used by some states for emissions
testing), or similar equipment even if
the other two wheels are raised off the
ground. Make sure you inform test facility personnel that your vehicle is
equipped with AWD before it is placed
on a dynamometer. Using the wrong
test equipment may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle
movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal
injury.
∙ When a wheel is off the ground due to
an unlevel surface, do not spin the
wheel excessively.
∙ Accelerating quickly, sharp steering
maneuvers or sudden braking may
cause loss of control.
∙ If at all possible, avoid sharp turning
maneuvers, particularly at high
speeds. Your NISSAN vehicle has a
higher center of gravity than a passenger car. The vehicle is not designed for cornering at the same
speeds as passenger cars.

IGNITION SWITCH (if so equipped)

∙ Failure to operate this vehicle correctly could result in loss of control
and/or a rollover accident.
∙ Always use tires of the same type,
size, brand, construction (bias, biasbelted, or radial), and tread pattern on
all four wheels. Install tire chains on
the front wheels when driving on slippery roads and drive carefully.

WARNING
Never remove or turn the key to the
LOCK position while driving. The steering wheel will lock (for models with a
steering lock mechanism). This may
cause the driver to lose control of the
vehicle and could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.

∙ Be sure to check the brakes immediately after driving in mud or water. For
additional information, refer to “Brake
precautions” in this section.
∙ Avoid parking your vehicle on steep
hills. If you get out of the vehicle and it
rolls forward, backward or sideways,
you could be injured.
∙ Whenever you drive off-road through
sand, mud or water as deep as the
wheel hub, more frequent maintenance may be required. For additional
information, refer to “Maintenance
under severe operating conditions” in
the “Maintenance and schedules” section of this manual.

LIC2717

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION
The ignition lock is designed so that the
ignition switch cannot be turned to the
LOCK position until the shift lever is moved
to the P (Park) position.
∙ When moving the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, make sure the shift lever
is in the P (Park) position.
∙ When removing the key from the ignition switch, make sure the shift lever is
in the P (Park) position.

Starting and driving 5-13

When the ignition switch cannot be turned
to the LOCK position:

START: (3)

1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

This position starts the engine. As soon as
the engine has started, release the key. It
automatically returns to the ON position.

2. Turn the ignition switch slightly in the
ON direction.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM

3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position.
4. Remove the key if it is inserted in the
ignition switch.
If the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position, the shift lever cannot be moved
from the P (Park) position.
The shift lever can be moved if the ignition switch is placed in the ON position
and the foot brake pedal is depressed.

KEY POSITIONS
LOCK: Normal parking position (0)

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
will not allow the engine to start without
the use of the registered key.
If the engine fails to start using a registered
key (for example, when interference is
caused by another registered key, an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring), restart the
engine using the following procedure:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds.

Off position (1)

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position, and wait approximately
10 seconds.

This position activates electrical accessories such as the radio when the engine is
not running.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

ON: Normal operating position (2)
This position turns on the ignition system
and the electrical accessories.

5-14 Starting and driving

4. Restart the engine while holding the
device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN
recommends placing the registered key on
a separate key ring to avoid interference
from other devices.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH (if
so equipped)
The ignition lock is designed so that the
ignition switch position cannot be
switched to OFF until the shift lever is
moved to the P (Park) position.

WARNING
Do not operate the push-button ignition switch while driving the vehicle except in an emergency. (The engine will
stop when the ignition switch is pushed
three consecutive times in quick succession or the ignition switch is pushed
and held for more than 2 seconds.) If the
engine stops while the vehicle is being
driven, this could lead to a crash and
serious injury.

When the ignition switch cannot be pushed
toward the OFF position, proceed as follows:
1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition
switch position will change to the ON
position.
LSD2184

When the ignition switch is pushed without
depressing the brake pedal, the ignition
switch will illuminate.
Push the ignition switch center:
∙ Once to change to ON.
∙ Two times to change to OFF.
The ignition switch will automatically return to the LOCK position when any door is
either opened or closed with the switch in
the OFF position.

3. Push the ignition switch again to the
OFF position.
The shift lever can be moved from the P
(Park) position if the ignition switch is in
the ON position and the brake pedal is
depressed.
If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,
the push-button ignition switch cannot
be moved from the LOCK position.
Some indicators and warnings for operation are displayed on the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the
“Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.

Starting and driving 5-15

If the Intelligent Key is within the operating
range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who does not carry the Intelligent Key,
to push the ignition switch to start the engine.
The operating range of the engine start
1 .
function is inside of the vehicle 䊊
∙ The luggage area is not included in the
operating range, but the Intelligent Key
may function.

LSD2020

OPERATING RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be
used when the Intelligent Key is within the
specified operating range.
When the Intelligent Key battery is almost
discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key system’s operating range becomes narrower and may not function
properly.

∙ If the Intelligent Key is placed on the
instrument panel, inside the glove box,
storage bin or door pocket, the Intelligent Key may not function.
∙ If the Intelligent Key is placed near the
door or window outside the vehicle, the
Intelligent Key may function.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
POSITIONS
LOCK (Normal parking position):
The ignition switch can only be locked in
this position.
The ignition switch will lock when any door
is opened or closed with the ignition
switched off.

5-16 Starting and driving

ON (Normal operating position):
This position turns on the ignition system
and electrical accessories.
ON has a battery saver feature that will
place the ignition switch in the OFF position, if the vehicle is not running, after some
time under the following conditions:
∙ All doors are closed.
∙ The shift lever is in P (Park).
The battery saver feature will be canceled if
any of the following occur:
∙ Any door is opened.
∙ The shift lever is moved out of the P
(Park) position.
∙ The ignition switch changes position.

CAUTION
Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ON position when the
engine is not running for an extended
period. This can discharge the battery.
OFF:
The ignition switch is in the OFF position
when the engine is turned off using the
ignition switch. No lights will illuminate on
the ignition switch.

AUTO ACC:

3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key as illustrated. (A chime will
sound.)

With the vehicle in the P (Park) position, the
Intelligent Key with you and the ignition
switch placed from the ON position to the
OFF position, the radio can still be used for
a period of time, or until the driver’s door is
opened.
After a period of time, functions such as
radio, navigation, and Bluetooth® HandsFree Phone System may be restarted by
pressing the POWER button/VOLUME control knob or the key fob unlock button. For
additional information, refer to the “Monitor,
climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section of this manual.

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF
To shut off the engine in an emergency
situation while driving, perform the following procedure:

After step 3 is performed, when the
ignition switch is pushed without depressing the brake pedal, the ignition
switch position will change to the ON
position.
4. Push the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal within 10 seconds
after the chime sounds. The engine will
start.
SSD0860

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®
BATTERY DISCHARGE (if so
equipped)

∙ Rapidly push the push-button ignition
switch three consecutive times in less
than 1.5 seconds, or

If the battery of the NISSAN Intelligent Key®
is discharged, or environmental conditions
interfere with the Intelligent Key operation,
start the engine according to the following
procedure:

∙ Push and hold the push-button ignition
switch for more than 2 seconds.

1. Place the shift lever in the P (Park) position.

NOTE:
∙ When the ignition switch is pushed to
the ON position or the engine is
started by the above procedure, the
Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator appears in the vehicle information display even when the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. This is
not a malfunction. To turn off the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator, touch the ignition switch with
the Intelligent Key again.

2. Firmly apply the foot brake.

Starting and driving 5-17

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE
∙ If the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator appears, replace the
battery as soon as possible. For additional information, refer to “Battery
replacement” in the “Do-it-yourself ”
section of this manual.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN
recommends placing the registered key on
a separate key ring to avoid interference
from other devices.

∙ Make sure the area around the vehicle is
clear.
∙ Check fluid levels such as engine oil,
coolant, brake fluid, and windshieldwasher fluid as frequently as possible,
or at least whenever you refuel.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM

∙ Check that all windows and lights are
clean.

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
will not allow the engine to start without
the use of the registered key.

∙ Visually inspect tires for their appearance and condition. Also check tires for
proper inflation.

If the engine fails to start using a registered
key (for example, when interference is
caused by another registered key, an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring), restart the
engine using the following procedure:

∙ Check that all doors are closed.

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position, and wait approximately
10 seconds.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the
device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered key.

5-18 Starting and driving

∙ Position seat and
restraints/headrests.

adjust

head

∙ Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
∙ Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to do likewise.
∙ Check the operation of warning lights
when the ignition switch is placed in the
ON position. For additional information,
refer to “Warning lights, indicator lights
and audible reminders” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.

STARTING THE ENGINE (models
without NISSAN Intelligent Key®
system)
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N
(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.
The shift lever cannot be moved out
of P (Park) and into any of the other
gear positions if the ignition key is
turned to the OFF position or if the
key is removed from the ignition
switch.
The starter is designed not to operate if the shift lever is in any of the
driving positions.
3. Crank the engine with your foot off
the accelerator pedal by turning the
ignition key to the START position. Release the key when the engine starts. If
the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat
the above procedure.
∙ If the engine is very hard to start in
extremely cold weather or when restarting, depress the accelerator
pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the
floor) and hold it and then crank the
engine. Release the key and the accelerator pedal when the engine
starts.

∙ If the engine is very hard to start because it is flooded, depress the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
and hold it. Crank the engine for 5 to
6 seconds. After cranking the engine,
release the accelerator pedal. Crank
the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by turning the ignition key to the START position. Release the key when the engine starts.
If the engine starts, but fails to run,
repeat the above procedure.

CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more
than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine
does not start, turn the key off and wait
10 seconds before cranking again, otherwise the starter could be damaged.

NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions
such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not
running (phone chargers, GPS, DVD
players, etc.).
2. The vehicle is not driven regularly
and/or only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to
be charged to maintain battery health.

4. Allow the engine to idle for at least
30 seconds after starting. Do not race
the engine while warming it up. Drive at
a moderate speed for a short distance
first, especially in cold weather.

Starting and driving 5-19

STARTING THE ENGINE (models with
NISSAN Intelligent Key® system)
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N
(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.
The starter is designed not to operate if the shift lever is in any of the
driving positions.
3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position. Depress the brake pedal and
push the ignition switch to start the
engine.
To start the engine immediately, push
and release the ignition switch while
depressing the brake pedal with the
ignition switch in any position.
∙ If the engine is very hard to start in
extremely cold weather or when restarting, depress the accelerator
pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the
floor) and while holding, crank the engine. Release the accelerator pedal
when the engine starts.
∙ If the engine is very hard to start because it is flooded, depress the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
and hold it. Push the ignition switch
to the ON position to start cranking
the engine. After 5 or 6 seconds, stop
cranking by pushing the ignition

5-20 Starting and driving

switch to the LOCK position. After
cranking the engine, release the accelerator pedal. Crank the engine
with your foot off the accelerator
pedal by depressing the brake pedal
and pushing the ignition switch to
start the engine. If the engine starts,
but fails to run, repeat the above procedure.

CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more
than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine
does not start, push the ignition switch
to the OFF position and wait 10 seconds
before cranking again, otherwise the
starter could be damaged.
4. Warm-up:
Allow the engine to idle for at least
30 seconds after starting. Do not race
the engine while warming it up. Drive at
a moderate speed for a short distance
first, especially in cold weather. In cold
weather, keep the engine running for a
minimum of 2 to 3 minutes before
shutting it off. Starting and stopping
the engine over a short period of time
may make the vehicle more difficult to
start.

5. To stop the engine, place the shift lever
in the P (Park) position and push the
ignition switch to the OFF position.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions
such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not
running (phone chargers, GPS, DVD
players, etc.).
2. The vehicle is not driven regularly
and/or only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to
be charged to maintain battery health.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE
REMOTE ENGINE START (if so
equipped)
Vehicles started with the Remote Engine
Start require the ignition switch to be
placed in the ON position before the shift
lever can be moved from the P (Park) position. To place the ignition switch in the ON
position, follow these steps:
1. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is on
you.
2. Apply the brake.
3. Push the ignition switch once to the ON
position.
For additional information, refer to “NISSAN
Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks
and adjustments” section of this manual.

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (CVT)
WARNING
∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), or M
(Manual shift mode). Always depress
the brake pedal until shifting is completed. Failure to do so could cause
you to lose control and have an
accident.
∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so use
caution when shifting into a forward
or reverse gear before the engine has
warmed up.
∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of
control.
∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R
(Reverse) position while the vehicle is
moving forward and P (Park) or D
(Drive) position while the vehicle is reversing. This could cause an accident
or damage the transmission.

CAUTION
∙ To avoid possible damage to your vehicle, when stopping the vehicle on an
uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by
depressing the accelerator pedal. The
foot brake should be used for this
purpose.
∙ Except in an emergency, do not shift
to the N (Neutral) position while driving. Coasting with the transmission in
the N (Neutral) position may cause serious damage to the transmission.
The CVT in your vehicle is electronically
controlled to produce maximum power
and smooth operation.
The recommended operating procedures
for this transmission are shown on the following pages. Follow these procedures for
maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment.
Engine power may be automatically reduced to protect the CVT if the engine
speed increases quickly when driving on
slippery roads or while being tested on
some dynamometers.

Starting and driving 5-21

– I-LI is enabled when the driving aid is
solid.
1
2
or 䊊
to navi– Use the 䊊
gate the settings screen. For additional information, refer to “How to
use the vehicle information display”
in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.

3. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed
and move the shift lever to a driving
position.
LSD3073

Starting the vehicle
1. Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)
2. Lane Departure Warning (LDW) when
shaded and Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) when solid
3. Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
1. After starting the engine, fully depress
the foot brake pedal before moving the
shift lever out of the P (Park) position.
This Continuously Variable Transmission is designed so that the foot
brake pedal must be depressed before shifting from P (Park) to any driv-

5-22 Starting and driving

LSD3074

ing position while the ignition switch
is in the ON position.
The shift lever cannot be moved out
of the P (Park) position and into any
of the other positions if the ignition
switch is placed in the LOCK or OFF
position.
2. A screen is displayed for a period of
time that indicates the status of the
driving aid functions (if so equipped).
– AEB, LDW, and BSW are enabled
when the specified driving aid is
shaded.

4. Release the parking brake and foot
brake pedal, and then gradually start
the vehicle in motion.

WARNING
∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or M
(Manual shift mode). Always depress
the brake pedal until shifting is completed. Failure to do so could cause
you to lose control and have an
accident.
∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so use
caution when shifting into a forward
or reverse gear before the engine has
warmed up.

CAUTION

∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of
control.

Use the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position
only when the vehicle is completely
stopped.

∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R
(Reverse) position while the vehicle is
moving forward and P (Park) or D
(Drive) position while the vehicle is reversing. This could cause an accident
or damage the transmission.

P (Park)

CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use
the P (Park) position only when the vehicle is completely stopped.

LSD2691

Shifting
After starting the engine, fully depress the
brake pedal, press the shift lever button
and move the shift lever from the P (Park)
position to any of the desired shift positions.

WARNING
Apply the parking brake if the shift lever
is in any position while the engine is not
running. Failure to do so could cause
the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll
away and result in serious personal injury or property damage.

Use the P (Park) shift lever position when
the vehicle is parked or when starting the
engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely
stopped. The brake pedal must be depressed and the shift lever button
pressed in to move the shift lever from N
(Neutral) or any drive position to P (Park).
Apply the parking brake. When parking on a
hill, apply the parking brake first, then move
the shift lever into the P (Park) position.
R (Reverse)

CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use
the R (Reverse) position only when the
vehicle is completely stopped.

Starting and driving 5-23

Use the R (Reverse) position to back up.
Make sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before selecting the R (Reverse)
position. The brake pedal must be depressed and the shift lever button
pressed in to move the shift lever from P
(Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position to
R (Reverse).
N (Neutral)
Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The engine can be started in this
position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and
restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is
moving.
D (Drive)
Use this position for all normal forward
driving.

Manual shift mode
When the shift lever is in the manual shift
gate, the transmission is ready for the
manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be
selected manually by moving the shift lever up or down. To cancel manual shift
mode, return the shift lever to the D (Drive)
position. The transmission returns to automatic driving mode.

5-24 Starting and driving

When the shift lever is shifted from D (Drive)
to the manual shift gate with the vehicle
stopped or while driving, the transmission
enters the manual shift mode. Shift ranges
can be selected manually. In the manual
shift mode, the shift range is displayed on
the position indicator in the meter. When
moving the shift lever to the manual shift
gate, the position indicator displays 1 (1st)
up to 7 (7th) depending on vehicle speed.
Shift ranges up or down one by one as
follows:
1⇔ 2 ⇔ 3 ⇔ 4 ⇔ 5 ⇔ 6 ⇔ 7
7 (7th)
Use this position for all normal forward
driving at highway speeds.
6 (6th) and 5 (5th)
Use this position when driving up long
slopes, or for engine braking when driving
down long slopes.
4 (4th), 3 (3rd) and 2 (2nd)
Use these positions for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill grades.

1 (1st)
Use this position when climbing steep hills
slowly or when driving slowly, or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill
grades.
∙ Remember not to drive at high speeds
for extended periods of time in lower
than 7th gear. This reduces fuel
economy.
When shifting up
Move the shift lever to the + (up) side. (Shifts
to higher range.)
When shifting down
Move the shift lever to the ⫺ (down) side.
(Shifts to lower range.)
∙ The transmission will automatically
downshift the gears. (For example, if you
select the 3rd range, the transmission
will shift down between the 3rd and 1st
gears.)
∙ Moving the shift lever rapidly to the
same side twice will shift the ranges in
succession.

When canceling the manual shift mode
Return the shift lever to the D (Drive) position to return the transmission to the normal driving mode.

∙ When the CVT fluid temperature is high,
the shift range may upshift in lower
rpm than usual. This is not a malfunction.

∙ In the manual shift mode, the transmission may not shift to the selected
gear. This helps maintain driving performance and reduces the chance of
vehicle damage or loss of control.
∙ When this situation occurs, the Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
position indicator light will blink and
the chime will sound.
∙ In the manual shift mode, the transmission may shift up automatically to
a higher range than selected if the
engine speed is too high. When the
vehicle speed decreases, the transmission automatically shifts down
and shifts to 1st gear before the vehicle comes to a stop.
∙ CVT operation is limited to automatic
drive mode when CVT fluid temperature is extremely low even if manual
shift mode is selected. This is not a malfunction. When CVT fluid warms up,
manual mode can be selected.

LSD2756

Shift lock release
If the battery charge is low or discharged,
the shift lever may not be moved from the
P (Park) position even with the brake pedal
depressed and the shift lever button
pressed. To move the shift lever, perform
the following procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Remove the shift lock release cover using a suitable tool.

Starting and driving 5-25

4. Push down the shift lock release using
a suitable tool.

High fluid temperature protection
mode

5. Press the shift lever button and move
the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position
while holding down the shift lock release. The vehicle may be moved to the
desired location. Replace the removed
shift lock release cover after the operation. If the shift lever cannot be moved
out of the P (Park) position, have the
Continuously Variable Transmission
system checked as soon as possible. It
is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

This transmission has a high fluid temperature protection mode. If the fluid temperature becomes too high (for example,
when climbing steep grades in high temperatures with heavy loads, such as when
towing a trailer), engine power and, under
some conditions, vehicle speed will be decreased automatically to reduce the
chance of transmission damage. Vehicle
speed can be controlled with the accelerator pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed
may be limited.

WARNING
If the shift lever cannot be moved from
the P (Park) position while the engine is
running and the brake pedal is depressed, the stop lights may not work.
Malfunctioning stop lights could cause
an accident injuring yourself and others.

Accelerator downshift
— in D (Drive) position —
For passing or hill climbing, depress the
accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts
the transmission down into a lower gear,
depending on the vehicle speed.

5-26 Starting and driving

Fail-safe
When the fail-safe operation occurs, the
Continuously Variable Transmission will
not be shifted into the selected driving position.
If the vehicle is driven under extreme
conditions, such as excessive wheel
spinning and subsequent hard braking,
the fail-safe system may be activated.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
may come on to indicate the fail-safe
mode is activated. For additional information, refer to “Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL)” in the “Instruments and con-

trols” section of this manual. This will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly. In this case, place the
ignition switch in the OFF position and
wait for 10 seconds. Then place the ignition switch back in the ON position. The
vehicle should return to its normal operating condition. If it does not return to its
normal operating condition, have the
transmission checked and repaired, if
necessary. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING
When the high fluid temperature protection mode or fail-safe operation occurs, vehicle speed may be gradually reduced. The reduced speed may be lower
than other traffic, which could increase
the chance of a collision. Be especially
careful when driving. If necessary, pull
to the side of the road at a safe place
and allow the transmission to return to
normal operation, or have it repaired if
necessary.

PARKING BRAKE

WARNING
∙ Be sure the parking brake is fully released before driving. Failure to do so
can cause brake failure and lead to an
accident.
∙ Do not release the parking brake from
outside the vehicle.
∙ Do not use the shift lever in place of
the parking brake. When parking, be
sure the parking brake is fully
engaged.
∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, do not
leave children, people who require the
assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally,
the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people
and pets.

LSD0158

PEDAL TYPE
To engage: Firmly depress the parking
brake.
To release:
1. Firmly apply the foot brake.
2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
3. Firmly depress the parking brake pedal
and it will release.
4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning light goes out.

LSD2828

SWITCH TYPE (models with
electronic parking brake system)
The electronic parking brake can be applied or released automatically or by operating the parking brake switch.

Automatic operation
The electronic parking brake will apply automatically if the ignition switch is placed in
the OFF position when the brake force is
maintained by the automatic brake hold
function.

Starting and driving 5-27

The electronic parking brake is automatically released as soon as the vehicle starts
and the accelerator pedal is depressed.
The driver’s seat belt needs to be fastened.

WARNING
∙ The electronic parking brake will not
be automatically applied when the
engine is stopped without using the
ignition switch (for example, by engine stalling). Without the vehicle stationary, the electronic parking brake
will not be automatically applied even
if the engine is turned off with the ignition switch.
∙ Before leaving the vehicle, move the
shift lever to the P (Park) position and
check that the electronic parking
brake warning light is illuminated to
confirm that the electronic parking
brake is applied. The electronic parking brake warning light will remain on
for a period of time after the driver’s
door is locked.

CAUTION
When parking in an area where the outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), do
not apply the parking brake to prevent
it from freezing.
For safe parking, place the shift lever in
the P (Park) position and securely block
the wheels.
NOTE:
∙ To keep the electronic parking brake
released after the engine is turned
off, place the ignition switch in the
OFF position, depress the brake pedal
and push down the parking brake
switch before opening the driver’s
door.
∙ If a malfunction occurs in the electronic parking brake system (for example, due to battery discharge), it is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer.
∙ If the shift lever is moved to the P
(Park) position when the brake force
is maintained by the automatic brake
hold function, the electronic parking
brake will apply automatically.

5-28 Starting and driving

∙ If the driver’s seat belt is unfastened
when the brake force is maintained
by the automatic brake hold function,
the electronic parking brake will apply automatically.
∙ If the ignition switch is placed in the
OFF position when the brake force is
maintained by the automatic brake
hold function, the electronic parking
brake will apply automatically.

Manual operation
The electronic parking brake will not be automatically applied if the engine is stopped
without using the ignition switch (for example, by engine stalling). In such a case, you
have to apply the parking brake manually.
1 . The indicaTo apply: Pull the switch up 䊊
A will illuminate.
tor light 䊊

To release: With the ignition switch in the
ON position, depress the brake pedal and
2 . The indicator
push the switch down 䊊
A will turn off.
light 䊊
Before driving, check that the electronic
or PARK)
parking brake warning light (
goes out. For additional information, refer
to “Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.

NOTE:
∙ A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is
driven without releasing the parking
brake. For additional information, refer to “Warning lights, indicator lights
and audible reminders” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.
∙ While the electronic parking brake is
applied or released, an operating
sound is heard from the lower side of
the rear seat. This is normal and does
not indicate a malfunction.
∙ When the electronic parking brake is
frequently applied and released in a
short period of time, the parking
brake may not operate in order to
prevent the parking brake system
from overheating. If this occurs, operate the electronic parking brake
switch again after waiting approximately 1 minute.

∙ If the electronic parking brake must
be applied while driving in an emergency, pull up and hold the parking
brake switch. When you release the
parking brake switch, the parking
brake will be released.
∙ While pulling up the electronic parking brake switch during driving, the
parking brake is applied and a chime
sounds. The electronic parking brake
warning light in the meter and in the
parking brake switch illuminates.
This does not indicate a malfunction.
The electronic parking brake warning
light in the meter and in the parking
brake switch turns off when the parking brake is released.

When towing a trailer
Depending on the weight of the vehicle and
trailer and the steepness of the slope, there
may be a tendency for the vehicle to move
backwards when starting from a standstill.
When this occurs, you can use the parking
brake switch in the same way as a conventional lever type parking brake.
Before starting on sloping roads when
towing a trailer, be sure to read the following to prevent the vehicle from moving
backward unintentionally:
∙ Release the parking brake switch as
soon as the engine is delivering enough
torque to the wheels.

∙ When pulling the electronic parking
brake switch up with the ignition
switch in the OFF or ACC position, the
parking brake switch indicator light
will continue to illuminate for a short
period of time.

Starting and driving 5-29

AUTOMATIC BRAKE HOLD (if so
equipped)
The automatic brake hold function maintains the braking force without the driver
having to depress the brake pedal when
the vehicle is stopped at a traffic light or
intersection. As soon as the driver depresses the accelerator pedal again, the
automatic brake hold function is deactivated and the braking force is released. The
operating status of the automatic brake
hold can be displayed on the vehicle information display.

WARNING
∙ The automatic brake hold function is
not designed to hold the vehicle on a
steep hill or slippery road. Never use
the automatic brake hold when the
vehicle is stopped on a steep hill or
slippery road. Failure to do so may
cause the vehicle to move.
∙ When the automatic brake hold function is activated but fails to maintain
the vehicle at a standstill, depress the
brake pedal to stop the vehicle. If the
vehicle unexpectedly moves due to
outside conditions, the chime may
sound and automatic brake hold
warning may illuminate in the vehicle
information display.

5-30 Starting and driving

∙ Be sure to deactivate the automatic
brake hold function when using a car
wash or towing your vehicle.
∙ Make sure to place the shift lever in
the P (Park) position and apply the
parking brake when parking your vehicle, riding on or off the vehicle, or
loading luggage. Failure to do so
could cause the vehicle to move or roll
away unexpectedly and result in serious personal injury or property
damage.

CAUTION
∙ If any of the following conditions occur, the automatic brake hold function
may not function. Have the system
checked promptly. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
– A warning message appears in the
vehicle information display.
– The indicator light on the automatic brake hold switch does not
illuminate when the switch is
pushed.

∙ The automatic brake hold function
will not be activated if the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning light,
electronic parking brake warning
light or master warning light illuminate and the chassis control system
fault message appears in the vehicle
information display.
∙ To maintain the braking force to keep
the vehicle to a standstill, a noise may
be heard. This is not a malfunction.

How to activate the automatic
brake hold function
1. With the ignition switch in the ON position, push the automatic brake hold
1 . The indicator light on the auswitch 䊊
2 illumitomatic brake hold switch 䊊
nates.
2. When the automatic brake hold function
goes into standby, the automatic brake
hold indicator light (white) illuminates.
To use the automatic brake hold function,
the following conditions need to be met:
LSD2830

∙ The driver’s seat belt is fastened.

HOW TO ACTIVATE/DEACTIVATE
THE AUTOMATIC BRAKE HOLD
FUNCTION

∙ The electronic parking brake is released.

For additional information on activating
and deactivating the automatic brake hold
function, refer to the instructions outlined
in this section.

∙ The vehicle is not parked on a steep hill.

∙ The shift lever is not in the P (Park) position.

NOTE:

How to deactivate the automatic
brake hold function
While the automatic brake hold function is
activated, push the automatic brake hold
switch to turn off the automatic brake hold
indicator light and deactivate the automatic brake hold function. To deactivate
the automatic brake hold function while
the brake force has been maintained by
the automatic brake hold function, depress
the brake pedal and push the automatic
brake hold switch.

CAUTION
Make sure to firmly depress and hold
the brake pedal when turning off the
automatic brake hold function while
the brake force is applied. When the automatic brake hold function is deactivated, the brake force will be released.
This could cause the vehicle to move or
roll away unexpectedly and result in an
accident.

The automatic brake hold function resets to OFF every time the ignition
switch is switched from the OFF position
to the ON position.

Starting and driving 5-31

HOW TO USE THE AUTOMATIC
BRAKE HOLD FUNCTION
For additional information on using the automatic brake hold function, refer to the
instructions outlined in this section.

To maintain braking force
automatically
With the automatic brake hold function activated and the automatic brake hold indicator light (white) illuminated on the meter,
depress the braking pedal to stop the vehicle. The brake force is automatically applied without your foot depressed on the
brake pedal. While the brake hold is maintained, the automatic brake hold indicator
light (green) illuminates on the meter.

To start the vehicle from a
standstill
With the shift lever not in the P (Park) or N
(Neutral) position, depress the accelerator
pedal while the brake force is maintained.
The brake force will automatically be released to restart the vehicle.
The automatic brake hold indicator light
(white) on the meter illuminates and the
automatic brake hold returns to standby.

5-32 Starting and driving

Parking
When the shift lever is in the P (Park) position with the brake force maintained by the
automatic brake hold function, the parking
brake will automatically be applied and the
brake force of the automatic brake hold will
be released. The automatic brake hold indicator light turns off. When the parking
brake is applied with the brake force maintained by the automatic brake hold function, the brake force of the automatic brake
hold will be released. The automatic brake
hold indicator light turns off.
NOTE:
∙ Under the following conditions, the
parking brake will automatically be
applied and the brake force of the automatic brake hold will be released:
– The braking force is applied by the
automatic brake hold function for
3 minutes or longer
– The driver’s seat belt is unfastened
– The ignition switch is placed in the
OFF position
– If a malfunction occurs in the automatic brake hold function

∙ When the vehicle stops, but the brake
force is not automatically applied, depress the brake pedal firmly until the
automatic brake hold indicator light
(green) illuminates.

Automatic brake hold function
display
The automatic brake hold function status
can be checked in the “Chassis Control”
mode in the vehicle information display.
For additional information, refer to “Vehicle
information display” in the “Instruments
and controls” section of this manual.

SPORT MODE SWITCH

ECO MODE SWITCH
The ECO mode cannot be turned off while
the accelerator pedal is depressed, even if
the ECO mode switch is pushed to OFF.
Release the accelerator pedal to turn off
the ECO mode.
The ECO mode will turn off automatically if
a malfunction occurs in the system.
Turn off the ECO mode or depress the accelerator pedal fully when:
∙ Driving with a heavy load of passengers
or cargo in the vehicle
∙ Driving on a steep uphill slope
LIC2417

LIC2416

The SPORT mode switch adjusts the engine and transmission points to enhance
performance. Push the SPORT mode
switch on the instrument panel to activate.
The SPORT mode indicator appears in the
vehicle information display.

The ECO mode helps to enhance the fuel
economy by controlling the throttle sensitivity and transmission points.

NOTE:

To turn on the ECO mode, push the ECO
mode switch. The ECO mode indicator light
(on the meter) will remain lit while the
mode is active.

Selecting this drive mode will not necessarily improve fuel economy as many
driving factors influence its effectiveness.

NOTE:
In the SPORT mode, fuel economy may
be reduced.

∙ ECO mode may affect air conditioner
performance

To turn off the ECO mode, push the ECO
mode switch again. The ECO mode indicator light (on the meter) will turn off.

Starting and driving 5-33

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) (if
so equipped)
The LDW system will operate when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately
37 mph (60 km/h) and above, and only
when the lane markings are clearly visible
on the road.
The LDW system monitors the lane markers on the traveling lane using the camera
A located above the inside mirror.
unit 䊊
The LDW system warns the driver with a
warning light and chime that the vehicle is
beginning to leave the driving lane. For additional information, refer to “LDW system
operation” in this section.
LSD2795

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the LDW
system could result in serious injury or
death.
∙ This system is only a warning device
to inform the driver of a potential unintended lane departure. It will not
steer the vehicle or prevent loss of
control. It is the driver’s responsibility
to stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in
control of the vehicle at all times.

5-34 Starting and driving

LDW SYSTEM OPERATION
The LDW system provides a lane departure
warning function when the vehicle is driven
at speeds of approximately 37 mph
(60 km/h) and above and the lane markings are clear. When the vehicle approaches either the left or the right side of
the traveling lane, a warning chime will
sound and the LDW indicator light on the
instrument panel will blink to alert the
driver.
The warning function will stop when the
vehicle returns inside of the lane markers.

LSD2675

Starting and driving 5-35

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
LDW SYSTEM
Perform the following steps to enable or
disable the LDW system.
button until “Settings”
1. Press the
displays in the vehicle information disbutton to select
play. Use the
“Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK
button.
2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the OK
button.
3. To set the LDW system to on or off, use
buttons to navigate in the
the
menu and use the OK button to select
or change an item:
∙ Select “Lane” and press the OK button.
– To turn on the warning system, use
the OK button to check the box for
“Warning (LDW).”

LSD3093

5-36 Starting and driving

LDW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for the LDW system. Failure to follow the
warnings and instructions for proper
use of the LDW system could result in
serious injury or death.
∙ The system will not operate at speeds
below
approximately
37
mph
(60 km/h) or if it cannot detect lane
markers.
∙ Excessive noise will interfere with the
warning chime sound, and the chime
may not be heard.
∙ Do not use the LDW system under the
following conditions as it may not
function properly:
– During bad weather (rain, fog,
snow, etc.).
– When driving on slippery roads,
such as on ice or snow.
– When driving on winding or uneven roads.
– When there is a lane closure due to
road repairs.

– When driving in a makeshift or
temporary lane.
– When driving on roads where the
lane width is too narrow.
– When driving without normal tire
conditions (for example, tire wear,
low tire pressure, installation of
spare tire, tire chains, nonstandard
wheels).
– When the vehicle is equipped with
non-original brake parts or suspension parts.
– When you are towing a trailer or
other vehicle.
∙ The system may not function properly under the following conditions:
– On roads where there are multiple
parallel lane markers; lane markers that are faded or not painted
clearly; yellow painted lane markers; non-standard lane markers; or
lane markers covered with water,
dirt, snow, etc.
– On roads where the discontinued
lane markers are still detectable.
– On roads where there are sharp
curves.

– On roads where there are sharply
contrasting objects, such as shadows, snow, water, wheel ruts, seams
or lines remaining after road repairs. (The LDW system could detect
these items as lane markers.)
– On roads where the traveling lane
merges or separates.
– When the vehicle’s traveling direction does not align with the lane
marker.
– When traveling close to the vehicle
in front of you, which obstructs the
lane camera unit detection range.
– When rain, snow, dirt or an object
adheres to the windshield in front
of the lane camera unit.
– When the headlights are not bright
due to dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not adjusted properly.
– When strong light enters the lane
camera unit. (For example, the light
directly shines on the front of the
vehicle at sunrise or sunset.)
– When a sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example, when
the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel
or under a bridge.)

Starting and driving 5-37

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight
under high temperature conditions (over
approximately 104°F [40°C]) and then
started, the LDW system may be deactivated automatically and the following
message will appear in the vehicle information display: “Unavailable: High Cabin
Temp.”
When the interior temperature is reduced,
the LDW system will resume operating automatically.
The LDW system is not designed to warn
under the following conditions:
∙ When you operate the lane change signal and change traveling lanes in the
direction of the signal. (The LDW system
will become operable again approximately 2 seconds after the lane change
signal is turned off.)
∙ When the vehicle speed lowers to less
than approximately 37 mph (60 km/h).
After the above conditions have finished
and the necessary operating conditions
are satisfied, the LDW functions will resume.

5-38 Starting and driving

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the LDW system malfunctions, it will cancel automatically and “Malfunction: See
Owner’s Manual” will appear in the vehicle
information display. If “Malfunction: See
Owner’s Manual” appears in the vehicle information display, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop the vehicle. Place the
shift lever in the P (Park) position and the
ignition switch in the OFF position and restart the engine/motor. If “Malfunction: See
Owner’s Manual” continues to appear in
the vehicle information display, have the
system checked. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LSD2712

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
1 for the LDW sysThe lane camera unit 䊊
tem is located above the inside mirror. To
keep the proper operation of the LDW system and prevent a system malfunction, be
sure to observe the following:

∙ Always keep the windshield clean.
∙ Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory
near the camera unit.

INTELLIGENT LANE INTERVENTION
(I-LI) (if so equipped)
∙ Do not place reflective materials, such
as white paper or a mirror, on the instrument panel. The reflection of sunlight
may adversely affect the camera unit’s
capability of detecting the lane markers.

∙ The I-LI system is primarily intended
for use on well-developed freeways or
highways. It may not detect the lane
markers in certain road, weather, or
driving conditions.
The I-LI system must be turned on with the
dynamic driver assistance switch (for vehicles without ProPILOT Assist) or the ProPILOT Assist switch (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist) on the steering wheel, every
time the ignition is placed in the ON position.

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the I-LI system could result in serious injury or
death.
∙ The I-LI system will not steer the vehicle or prevent loss of control. It is the
driver’s responsibility to stay alert,
drive safely, keep the vehicle in the
traveling lane, and be in control of the
vehicle at all times.

The I-LI system will operate when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately
37 mph (60 km/h) and above, and only
when the lane markings are clearly visible
on the road.
The I-LI system warns the driver when the
vehicle has left the center of the traveling
lane with a warning light and chime. The
system helps assist the driver to return the
vehicle to the center of the traveling lane by
applying the brakes to the left or right
wheels individually (for a short period of
time).
The I-LI system monitors the lane markers
on the traveling lane using the camera unit
A located above the inside mirror.
䊊

Starting and driving 5-39

1
䊊
2
䊊
3
䊊
4
䊊

Dynamic driver assistance switch (for
vehicles without ProPILOT Assist)
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)/Intelligent
Lane Intervention (I-LI) indicator
Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)
indicator (if so equipped)
ProPILOT Assist switch (for vehicles
with ProPILOT Assist)

I-LI SYSTEM OPERATION
The I-LI system operates above approximately 37 mph (60 km/h). When the vehicle
approaches either the left or the right side of
the traveling lane, a warning chime will
sound and the I-LI indicator light (orange) on
the instrument panel will blink to alert the
driver. Then, the I-LI system will automatically
apply the brakes for a short period of time to
help assist the driver to return the vehicle to
the center of the traveling lane.

LSD3137

5-40 Starting and driving

To turn on the I-LI system, push the dynamic
driver assistance switch (for vehicles without
ProPILOT Assist) or the ProPILOT Assist
switch (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist) on
the steering wheel after starting the
engine/motor. The I-LI indicator light on the
instrument panel will illuminate. Push the dynamic driver assistance switch or the ProPILOT Assist switch again to turn off the I-LI
system. The I-LI indicator light will turn off.

Driving aid selection in vehicle information display
Lane Departure
Intelligent Lane
Warning
Intervention

x
x
x

Engine started
Lane Departure
Warning
No lane warnings
No lane warnings
Lane warnings
active
Lane warnings
active

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE I-LI
SYSTEM
Perform the following steps to enable or
disable the I-LI system.
button until “Settings”
1. Press the
displays in the vehicle information disbutton to select
play. Use the
“Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK
button.
2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the OK
button.
3. To set the I-LI system to on or off, use
buttons to navigate in the
the
menu and use the OK button to select
or change an item:

Intelligent Lane
Intervention
No lane intervention
No lane intervention
No lane intervention
No lane intervention

ProPILOT Assist switch pressed to the
ON position and the icon illuminates
Lane Departure
Intelligent Lane
Warning
Intervention
No lane warnings No lane intervention
Lane warnings
Lane intervention
active
active
Lane warnings
No lane intervenactive
tion
Lane warnings
Lane intervention
active
active

∙ Select “Lane” and press the OK button.
– To turn on the warning system, use
the OK button to check the box for
“Prevention (LDP).”
NOTE:
Turning on the ProPILOT Assist system (if
so equipped) will turn on the I-LI system
at the same time. For additional information, refer to “ProPILOT Assist” in this
section.

ProPILOT Assist set (Blue Cruise indicator illuminated)
Lane Departure
Intelligent Lane
Warning
Intervention
Lane warnings
Lane intervention
active
active
Lane warnings
Lane intervention
active
active
Lane warnings
Lane intervention
active
active
Lane warnings
Lane intervention
active
active

I-LI SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for the I-LI system. Failure to follow the
warnings and instructions for proper
use of the I-LI system could result in
serious injury or death.
∙ The I-LI system may activate if you
change lanes without first activating
your turn signal or, for example, if a
construction zone directs traffic to
cross an existing lane marker. If this
occurs you may need to apply corrective steering to complete your lane
change.

Starting and driving 5-41

∙ Because the I-LI may not activate under the road, weather, and lane
marker conditions described in this
section, it may not activate every time
your vehicle begins to leave its lane
and you will need to apply corrective
steering.
∙ When the I-LI system is operating,
avoid excessive or sudden steering
maneuvers. Otherwise, you could lose
control of the vehicle.
∙ The I-LI system will not operate at
speeds below approximately 37 mph
(60 km/h) or if it cannot detect lane
markers.
∙ Do not use the I-LI system under the
following conditions as it may not
function properly:
– During bad weather (rain, fog,
snow, etc.).
– When driving on slippery roads,
such as on ice or snow.
– When driving on winding or uneven roads.
– When there is a lane closure due to
road repairs.
LSD3093

5-42 Starting and driving

– When driving in a makeshift or
temporary lane.
– When driving on roads where the
lane width is too narrow.
– When driving without normal tire
conditions (for example, tire wear,
low tire pressure, installation of
spare tire, tire chains, nonstandard wheels).
– When the vehicle is equipped with
nonoriginal brake parts or suspension parts.
– When you are towing a trailer or
other vehicle.
– On roads where there are multiple
parallel lane markers; lane markers that are faded or not painted
clearly; yellow painted lane markers; non-standard lane markers; or
lane markers covered with water,
dirt, snow, etc.
– On roads where discontinued lane
markers are still detectable.
– On roads where there are sharp
curves.

– On roads where there are sharply
contrasting objects, such as shadows, snow, water, wheel ruts,
seams or lines remaining after
road repairs. (The I-LI system could
detect these items as lane
markers.)
– On roads where the traveling lane
merges or separates.
– When the vehicle’s traveling direction does not align with the lane
marker.
– When traveling close to the vehicle
in front of you, which obstructs the
lane camera unit detection range.
– When rain, snow or dirt adheres to
the windshield in front of the lane
camera unit.
– When the headlights are not bright
due to dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not adjusted properly.
– When strong light enters the lane
camera unit. (For example, the light
directly shines on the front of the
vehicle at sunrise or sunset.)

– When a sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example, when
the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel
or under a bridge.)
∙ Excessive noise will interfere with the
warning chime sound, and the chime
may not be heard.
While the I-LI system is operating, you may
hear a sound of brake operation. This is
normal and indicates that the I-LI system is
operating properly.

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
Condition A:
The warning and assist functions of the I-LI
system are not designed to work under the
following conditions:
∙ When you operate the lane change signal and change the traveling lanes in
the direction of the signal. (The I-LI system will be deactivated for approximately 2 seconds after the lane change
signal is turned off.)
∙ When the vehicle speed lowers to less
than approximately 37 mph (60 km/h).

Starting and driving 5-43

After the above conditions have finished
and the necessary operating conditions
are satisfied, the warning and assist functions will resume.
Condition B:
The assist function of the I-LI system is not
designed to work under the following conditions (warning is still functional):
∙ When the brake pedal is depressed.
∙ When the steering wheel is turned as far
as necessary for the vehicle to change
lanes.
∙ When the vehicle is accelerated during
I-LI system operation.
∙ When the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
approach warning occurs.
∙ When the hazard warning flashers are
operated.
∙ When driving on a curve at high speed.
After the above conditions have finished
and the necessary operating conditions
are satisfied, the I-LI system application of
the brakes will resume.

5-44 Starting and driving

Condition C:
If the following messages appear in the
vehicle information display, a chime will
sound and the I-LI system will be turned off
automatically.
∙ “Unavailable: Road is slippery”:
When the VDC system (except Traction
Control System [TCS] function) or ABS
operates.
∙ “Unavailable: VDC OFF”:
When the VDC system is turned off.

Temporary disabled status at high temperature:
If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight
under high temperature conditions (over
approximately 104°F [40°C]) and then the
I-LI system is turned on, the I-LI system
may be deactivated automatically and the
following message will appear on the vehicle information display: “Unavailable: High
Cabin Temp.” When the interior temperature is reduced, the system will resume operating automatically.

Action to take:

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

When the above conditions no longer exist,
turn off the I-LI system. Push the dynamic
driver assistance switch (for vehicles without ProPILOT Assist) or the ProPILOT Assist
switch (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist) on
the steering wheel again to turn the I-LI
system back on.

If the I-LI system malfunctions, it will cancel
automatically. The I-LI system warning light
(orange) will illuminate in the display.
If the I-LI system warning light (orange) illuminates in the display, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop the vehicle. Turn the
engine/motor off and restart the
engine/motor. If the I-LI system warning
light (orange) continues to illuminate, have
the I-LI system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW)
∙ Do not place reflective materials, such
as white paper or a mirror, on the instrument panel. The reflection of sunlight
may adversely affect the camera unit’s
capability of detecting the lane markers.
∙ Do not strike or damage the areas
around the camera unit. Do not touch
the camera lens or remove the screw
located on the camera unit. If the camera unit is damaged due to an accident,
it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer.
LSD2712

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
1 for the I-LI system
The lane camera unit 䊊
is located above the inside mirror. To keep
the proper operation of the I-LI system and
prevent a system malfunction, be sure to
observe the following:

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the BSW
system could result in serious injury or
death.
∙ The BSW system is not a replacement
for proper driving procedures and is
not designed to prevent contact with
vehicles or objects. When changing
lanes, always use the side and rear
mirrors and turn and look in the direction your vehicle will move to ensure it
is safe to change lanes. Never rely
solely on the BSW system.
The BSW system helps alert the driver of
other vehicles in adjacent lanes when
changing lanes.

∙ Always keep the windshield clean.
∙ Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory
near the camera unit.

Starting and driving 5-45

LSD2439

The BSW system uses radar sensors 䊊
installed near the rear bumper to detect
other vehicles in an adjacent lane.
1

5-46 Starting and driving

SSD1030

Detection zone
The radar sensors can detect vehicles on
either side of your vehicle within the detection zone shown as illustrated. This detection zone starts from the outside mirror of
your vehicle and extends approximately
10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear bumper, and
approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) sideways.

1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light

BSW SYSTEM OPERATION
The BSW system operates above approximately 20 mph (32 km/h).
If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the
detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indicator light (1) illuminates. If the turn signal is
then activated, the system chimes (twice),
the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes,
and the BSW/RCTA indicator illuminates
(yellow) in the vehicle information display.
The side BSW/RCTA indicator light continues to flash until the detected vehicle
leaves the detection zone.
The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illuminates for a few seconds when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position.
The brightness of the side BSW/RCTA indicator light is adjusted automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient
light.

LSD2734

If a vehicle comes into the detection zone
after the driver activates the turn signal,
then only the side BSW/RCTA indicator light
flashes and no chime sounds. For additional information, refer to “BSW driving
situations” in this section.

Starting and driving 5-47

The BSW system automatically turns on
every time the engine/motor is started, as
long as it is activated using the settings
menu on the vehicle information display.

LSD3095

5-48 Starting and driving

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
BSW SYSTEM
Perform the following steps to enable or
disable the BSW system.
button until “Settings”
1. Press the
displays in the vehicle information disbutton to select
play. Use the
“Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK
button.
2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the OK
button.
3. Select “Blind Spot” and press the OK
button.
– To turn on the warning system, use
the OK button to check the box for
“Warning (BSW).”

BSW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for the BSW system. Failure to operate
the vehicle in accordance with these
system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
∙ The BSW system cannot detect all vehicles under all conditions.
∙ The radar sensors may not be able to
detect and activate BSW when certain
objects are present such as:
– Pedestrian, bicycles, animals.
– Vehicles such as motorcycles, low
height vehicles, or high ground
clearance vehicles.

– A vehicle which your vehicle overtakes rapidly.
– A vehicle that passes through the
detection zone quickly.
– When overtaking several vehicles
in a row, the vehicles after the first
vehicle may not be detected if they
are traveling close together.
∙ The radar sensor’s detection zone is
designed based on a standard lane
width. When driving in a wider lane,
the radar sensors may not detect vehicles in an adjacent lane. When driving in a narrow lane, the radar sensors
may detect vehicles driving two lanes
away.

NOTE:

– Oncoming vehicles.

When enabling/disabling the system,
the system will retain current settings
even if the engine is restarted.

– Vehicles remaining in the detection zone when you accelerate
from a stop.

∙ The radar sensors are designed to ignore most stationary objects; however, objects such as guardrails, walls,
foliage and parked vehicles may occasionally be detected. This is a normal operation condition.

– A vehicle merging into an adjacent
lane at a speed approximately the
same as your vehicle.

∙ The following conditions may reduce
the ability of the radar to detect other
vehicles:

– A vehicle approaching rapidly from
behind.

– Severe weather
– Road spray

Starting and driving 5-49

– Ice/frost/dirt
vehicle
∙

build-up

Another vehicle approaching
from behind

the

Do not attach stickers (including
transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the
radar sensors. These conditions may
reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles.

Illustration 1: The side indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone
from behind in an adjacent lane.

∙ Excessive noise (for example, audio
system volume, open vehicle window)
will interfere with the chime sound,
and it may not be heard.
LSD2299

Illustration 1 – Approaching from behind

BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS
Indicator
on
Indicator
off
Indicator
flashing

5-50 Starting and driving

∙ If the driver activates the turn signal
before a vehicle enters the detection
zone, the side indicator light will flash
but no chime will sound when the
other vehicle is detected.

LSD2300

Illustration 2 – Approaching from behind
Illustration 2: If the driver activates the
turn signal when another vehicle is in the
detection zone, then the system chimes
(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.
NOTE:

LSD2302

Illustration 3 – Overtaking another vehicle

Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 3: The side indicator light illuminates if you overtake a vehicle and that
vehicle stays in the detection zone for approximately 2 seconds.

∙ The radar sensors may not detect vehicles which are approaching rapidly
from behind.

Starting and driving 5-51

∙ If the driver activates the turn signal
before a vehicle enters the detection
zone, the side indicator light will flash
but no chime will sound when the
other vehicle is detected. .

LSD2303

Illustration 4 – Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 4: If the driver activates the
turn signal while another vehicle is in the
detection zone, then the system chimes
(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
∙ When overtaking several vehicles in a
row, the vehicles after the first vehicle
may not be detected if they are traveling close together.
∙ The radar sensors may not detect
slower moving vehicles if they are
passed quickly.

5-52 Starting and driving

LSD2305

Illustration 5 – Entering from the side

Entering from the side
Illustration 5: The side indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection
zone from either side.

∙ The radar sensors may not detect a
vehicle which is traveling at about the
same speed as your vehicle when it
enters the detection zone.

LSD2308

Illustration 6 – Entering from the side
Illustration 6: If the driver activates the
turn signal while another vehicle is in the
detection zone, then the system chimes
(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
∙ If the driver activates the turn signal
before a vehicle enters the detection
zone, the side indicator light will flash
but no chime will sound when the
other vehicle is detected.

Starting and driving 5-53

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
When radar blockage is detected, the system will be deactivated automatically. The
“Side Radar Obstruction” warning message
will appear in the vehicle information display.
The system is not available until the conditions no longer exist.
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as
ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the
RCTA system will also stop working.
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer exist,
the system will resume automatically.

LSD2735

5-54 Starting and driving

Malfunction

Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply
additional paint near the radar sensors.

If the BSW system malfunctions, it will turn
off automatically. The system malfunction
warning message will appear in the vehicle
information display.

Do not strike or damage the area around
the radar sensors. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around
the radar sensors is damaged due to a
collision.

NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the
RCTA system will also stop working.

Radio frequency statement

Action to take:

For USA

Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the
vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the message continues to appear, have the system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

FCC : OAYSRR3B
LSD2439

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
1 for the BSW and
The two radar sensors 䊊
RCTA systems are located near the rear
bumper. Always keep the area near the radar sensors clean.

The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused
by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.

This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment

Check for and remove objects obstructing
the area around the radar sensors.

Starting and driving 5-55

REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (RCTA)
For Canada
Applicable law: Canada 310
This device complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Frequency bands: 24.05 – 24.25GHz
Output power: less than 20 milliwatts

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RCTA
system could result in serious injury or
death.
∙ The RCTA system is not a replacement
for proper driving procedures and is
not designed to prevent contact with
vehicles or objects. When backing out
of a parking space, always use the
side and rear mirrors and turn and
look in the direction your vehicle will
move. Never rely solely on the RCTA
system.
The RCTA system will assist you when
backing out from a parking space. When
the vehicle is in reverse, the system is designed to detect other vehicles approaching from the right or left of the vehicle. If the
system detects cross traffic, it will alert you.

5-56 Starting and driving

1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light

RCTA SYSTEM OPERATION
The RCTA system can help alert the driver
of an approaching vehicle when the driver
is backing out of a parking space.
When the shift position is in R (Reverse) and
the vehicle speed is less than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h), the RCTA system is
operational.
If the radar detects an approaching vehicle
from either side, the system chimes (once)
and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light
flashes on the side the vehicle is approaching from.

LSD2734

Starting and driving 5-57

LSD2216

LSD2439

1
The RCTA system uses radar sensors 䊊
installed on both sides near the rear bumper to detect an approaching vehicle.
1 can detect an apThe radar sensors 䊊
proaching vehicle from up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) away.

5-58 Starting and driving

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
RCTA SYSTEM
Perform the following steps to enable or
disable the RCTA system.
button until “Settings”
1. Press the
displays in the vehicle information disbutton to select
play. Use the
“Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK
button.
2. Select “Parking Aids” and press the OK
button.
3. Select “Cross Traffic” and use the OK
button to enable or disable the system.
NOTE:
When enabling/disabling the system,
the system setting will be retained even
if the engine is restarted.

LSD2768

Starting and driving 5-59

WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for the RCTA system. Failure to operate
the vehicle in accordance with these
system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
∙ Always check surroundings and turn
to check what is behind you before
backing up. The radar sensors detect
approaching (moving) vehicles. The
radar sensors cannot detect every
object such as:
– Pedestrians, bicycles, motorcycles,
animals or child-operated toy
vehicles
– A vehicle that is passing at speeds
greater
than
approximately
19 mph (30 km/h)
– A vehicle that is passing at speeds
lower than approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h)
LSD3195

RCTA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

∙ The radar sensors may not detect approaching vehicles in certain situations:
A : When a vehicle
– Illustration 䊊
parked next to you obstructs the
beam of the radar sensor.
B : When the vehicle is
– Illustration 䊊
parked in an angled parking space.

5-60 Starting and driving

C : When the vehicle is
– Illustration 䊊
parked on inclined ground.
D : When an approach– Illustration 䊊
ing vehicle turns into your vehicle’s
parking lot aisle.
E : When the angle
– Illustration 䊊
formed by your vehicle and approaching vehicle is small.

∙ The following conditions may reduce
the ability of the radar to detect other
vehicles:
– Severe weather
LSD2043

– Road spray
– Ice/frost/dirt
vehicle

Illustration 1
build-up

the

∙ Do not attach stickers (including
transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the
radar sensors. These conditions may
reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles.

LSD2044

Illustration 2

NOTE:
In the case of several vehicles approaching in a row (Illustration 1) or in the opposite direction (Illustration 2), a chime may
not be sounded by the RCTA system after the first vehicle passes the sensors.

∙ Excessive noise (e.g., audio system
volume, open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it
may not be heard.

Starting and driving 5-61

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
When radar blockage is detected, the system will be deactivated automatically. The
“Side Radar Obstruction” warning message
will appear in the vehicle information display.
The systems are not available until the
conditions no longer exist.
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused
by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the
RCTA system will also stop working.
Action to take
When the above conditions no longer exist,
the system will resume automatically.

LSD2735

5-62 Starting and driving

Malfunction

Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply
additional paint near the radar sensors.

When the RCTA system malfunctions, it will
turn off automatically. The system malfunction warning message will appear in
the vehicle information display.

Do not strike or damage the area around
the radar sensors. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around
the radar sensors is damaged due to a
collision.

NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the
RCTA system (if so equipped) will also
stop working.
Action to take
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the
vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the message continues to appear, have the system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

Radio frequency statement
For USA
FCC : OAYSRR3B
LSD2439

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
1 for the BSW and
The two radar sensors 䊊
RCTA systems are located near the rear
bumper. Always keep the area near the radar sensors clean.

Check for and remove objects obstructing
the area around the radar sensors.

Starting and driving 5-63

CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)
For Canada

indicator light blinks, turn the
∙ If the
cruise control switch off and have the
system checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.

Applicable law: Canada 310
This device complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

indicator light may blink
∙ The
when the cruise control switch is turned
on while pushing the RES+, SET-, or CANCEL switch. To properly set the cruise
control system, use the following procedures.

Frequency bands: 24.05 – 24.25GHz

WARNING

Output power: less than 20 milliwatts
LSD2722

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE
CONTROL
1
䊊
2
䊊
3
䊊
4
䊊

CANCEL switch

∙ When it is not possible to keep the
vehicle at a set speed.

RES+ switch

∙ In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies
in speed.

SET- switch

∙ On winding or hilly roads.

Cruise control switch

∙ On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).

∙ If the cruise control system malfunctions, it cancels automatically. The
indicator light in the vehicle information
display then blinks to warn the driver.

5-64 Starting and driving

Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions:

∙ In very windy areas.
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle
control and result in an accident.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS
The cruise control allows driving at a speed
between 25 - 89 mph (40 - 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator
pedal.
To turn on the cruise control, push the
indicacruise control switch on. The
tor light in the vehicle information display
will illuminate.
To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed, push the SETswitch and release it. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains
the set speed.
∙ To pass another vehicle, depress the
accelerator pedal. When you release the
pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously set speed.
∙ The vehicle may not maintain the set
speed when going up or down steep
hills. If this happens, drive without the
cruise control.
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the
following three methods:

∙ Push the cruise control switch off.
indicator light in the vehicle
The
information display goes out.
The cruise control is automatically canceled if:

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use
one of the following three methods:

∙ You depress the brake pedal while
pushing the RES+ or SET- switch. The
preset speed is deleted from memory.

∙ Push and hold the SET- switch. Release
the switch when the vehicle slows to
the desired speed.

∙ The vehicle slows down more than
8 mph (13 km/h) below the set speed.

∙ Push and release the SET- switch. Each
time you do this, the set speed decreases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

∙ You move the shift lever to N (Neutral).
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use
one of the following three methods:
∙ Depress the accelerator pedal. When
the vehicle attains the desired speed,
push and release the SET- switch.
∙ Push and hold the RES+ switch. When
the vehicle attains the speed you desire,
release the switch.
∙ Push and release the RES+ switch. Each
time you do this, the set speed increases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

∙ Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push
the SET- switch and release it.

To resume the preset speed, push and
release the RES+ switch. The vehicle returns to the last set cruising speed when
the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).
To turn off the cruise control, use one of
the following three methods:
∙ Push the CANCEL switch.
∙ Tap the brake pedal.
∙ Push the cruise control switch off.
indicator light in the vehicle
The
information display goes out.

∙ Push the CANCEL switch.
∙ Tap the brake pedal.

Starting and driving 5-65

INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC)
(for vehicles without ProPILOT
Assist) (if so equipped)

A ICC switch
䊊

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the ICC system could result in serious injury or
death.
∙ The ICC system is only an aid to assist
the driver and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive
safely, and be in control of the vehicle
at all times.
∙ Always observe posted speed limits
and do not set the speed over them.
∙ Always drive carefully and attentively
when using the ICC system. Read and
understand the Owner’s Manual thoroughly before using the ICC system.
To avoid serious injury or death, do
not rely on the system to prevent accidents or to control the vehicle’s
speed in emergency situations. Do
not use the ICC system except in appropriate road and traffic conditions.

LSD3096

5-66 Starting and driving

∙ In the conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode, a warning chime
will not sound to warn you if you are
too close to the vehicle ahead. Pay
special attention to the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead of you or a collision could occur.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with ProPILOT Assist, refer to “ProPILOT Assist” in this section.
The ICC system maintains a selected distance from the vehicle in front of you within
the speed range of 0 to 90 mph (0 to
144 km/h) up to the set speed. The set
speed can be selected by the driver between 20 to 90 mph (32 to 144 km/h).
The vehicle travels at a set speed when the
road ahead is clear.

The ICC system can be set to one of two
cruise control modes:
∙ Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode: For maintaining a selected distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you up to the preset
speed

For the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode, refer to “Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode” in this section.
For the conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control mode, refer to “Conventional (fixed
speed) cruise control mode” in this section.

∙ Conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control mode: For cruising at a preset
speed
A to choose the
Push the ICC switch 䊊
cruise control mode between the vehicleto-vehicle distance control mode and the
conventional (fixed speed) cruise control
mode.

Once a control mode is activated, it cannot
be changed to the other cruise control
mode. To change the mode, push the ICC
A once to turn the system off. Then
switch 䊊
A again to turn the
push the ICC switch 䊊
system back on and select the desired
cruise control mode.
Always confirm the setting in the ICC system display.

Starting and driving 5-67

LSD2727

HOW TO SELECT THE CRUISE
CONTROL MODE
Selecting the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode: To choose the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
1 , quickly push and release the ICC switch
䊊
A .
䊊

Selecting the conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode: To choose the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode
2 , push and hold the ICC switch 䊊
A for
䊊
longer than approximately 1.5 seconds. For
additional information, refer to “Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode” in
this section.

LSD2731

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE
CONTROL MODE
In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode, the ICC system automatically maintains a selected distance from the vehicle
traveling in front of you according to that
vehicle’s speed (up to the set speed), or at
the set speed when the road ahead is clear.
The ICC system is intended to enhance the
operation of the vehicle when following a
vehicle traveling in the same lane and direction.

5-68 Starting and driving

B detects a slower
If the radar sensor 䊊
moving vehicle ahead, the system will reduce the vehicle speed so that your vehicle
follows the vehicle in front at the selected
distance.

The system automatically controls the
throttle and applies the brakes (up to approximately 40% of vehicle braking power)
if necessary.
The detection range of the sensor is approximately 650 ft (200 m) ahead.

LSD2679

Starting and driving 5-69

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE
CONTROL MODE OPERATION
The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode is designed to maintain a selected
distance from the vehicle in front of you
and can reduce the speed to match a
slower vehicle ahead. The system will decelerate the vehicle as necessary and if the
vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle
decelerates to a standstill. However, the ICC
system can only apply up to 40% of the
vehicle’s total braking power.
This system should only be used when traffic conditions allow vehicle speeds to remain fairly constant or when vehicle
speeds change gradually. If a vehicle
moves into the traveling lane ahead or if a
vehicle traveling ahead rapidly decelerates,
the distance between vehicles may become closer because the ICC system cannot decelerate the vehicle quickly enough.
If this occurs, the ICC system will sound a
warning chime and blink the system display to notify the driver to take necessary
action.

5-70 Starting and driving

The system will cancel and a warning
chime will sound if the speed is below approximately 15 mph (24 km/h) and a vehicle
is not detected ahead. The system will also
disengage when the vehicle goes above
the maximum set speed.
For additional information, refer to “Approach warning” in this section.
The following items are controlled in the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode:
∙ When there are no vehicles traveling
ahead, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode maintains the speed set
by the driver. The set speed range is
between approximately 20 and 90 mph
(32 and 144 km/h).
∙ When there is a vehicle traveling ahead,
the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode adjusts the speed to maintain
the distance, selected by the driver,
from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle
ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill within the limitations of the system. The system will
cancel once it judges a standstill with a
warning chime.

∙ When the vehicle traveling ahead has
moved out from its lane of travel, the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode accelerates and maintains vehicle speed up to the set speed.
The ICC system does not control vehicle
speed or warn you when you approach
stationary and slow moving vehicles. You
must pay attention to vehicle operation to
maintain proper distance from vehicles
ahead when approaching toll gates or traffic congestion.

Normally when controlling the distance to
a vehicle ahead, this system automatically
accelerates or decelerates your vehicle according to the speed of the vehicle ahead.
Depress the accelerator to properly accelerate your vehicle when acceleration is required for a lane change. Depress the brake
pedal when deceleration is required to
maintain a safe distance to the vehicle
ahead due to its sudden braking or if a
vehicle cuts in. Always stay alert when using the ICC system.

SSD0254

When driving on the freeway at a set speed
and approaching a slower traveling vehicle
ahead, the ICC system will adjust the speed
to maintain the distance, selected by the
driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle
ahead changes lanes or exits the freeway,
the ICC system will accelerate and maintain the speed up to the set speed. Pay
attention to the driving operation to maintain control of the vehicle as it accelerates
to the set speed.
The vehicle may not maintain the set
speed on winding or hilly roads. If this occurs, you will have to manually control the
vehicle speed.

LSD2680

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE
CONTROL MODE SWITCHES
The system is operated by the ICC switch
and four control switches, all mounted on
the steering wheel.
1. CANCEL switch:
Deactivates the system without erasing the set speed.
2. RES+ switch:
Resumes set speed or increases
speed incrementally.

Starting and driving 5-71

3. SET- switch:

∙ ICC system warning (yellow): Indicates that there is a malfunction in
the ICC system.

Sets desired cruise speed or reduces
speed incrementally.
4. DISTANCE

2. Set vehicle speed indicator:

switch:

Indicates the set vehicle speed.

Changes the vehicle’s following distance:

For Canadian models, the speed is displayed in km/h.

∙ Long

3. Set distance indicator:

∙ Middle

Displays the selected distance between vehicles set with the distance
switch.

∙ Short
5. ICC switch:
LSD2718

Master switch to activate the system.

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode display and
indicators
The display is located between the speedometer and tachometer.
1. This indicator indicates the ICC system
status depending on a color:
∙ ICC system ON indicator (gray): Indicates that the ICC switch is on.
∙ ICC system SET indicator (green):
Indicates that the cruising speed is
set.

5-72 Starting and driving

4. Vehicle ahead detection indicator:
Indicates whether it detects a vehicle
in front of you.

LSD3100

LSD3101

LSD3102

To turn on the cruise control, quickly push
A . The ICC sysand release the ICC switch 䊊
tem ON indicator (gray), set distance indiB
cator and set vehicle speed indicator 䊊
come on in a standby state for setting.

To set cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle to the desired speed, push the SET–
C and release it. The ICC system set
switch 䊊
indicator (green), vehicle ahead detection
indicator, set distance indicator and set veB will come on. Take
hicle speed indicator 䊊
your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your
vehicle will maintain the set speed.

When the SET– switch is pushed under the
following conditions, the system cannot be
set and the ICC indicators will blink for approximately 2 seconds:

Operating vehicle-to-vehicle
distance control mode

∙ When traveling below 20 mph (32 km/h)
and a vehicle ahead is not detected
∙ When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive)
or Manual mode
∙ When the parking brake is applied
∙ When the brakes are operated by the
driver

Starting and driving 5-73

When the SET– switch is pushed under the
following conditions, the system cannot be
set.

Vehicle detected ahead
When a vehicle is detected in the lane
ahead, the ICC system decelerates the vehicle by controlling the throttle and applying the brakes to match the speed of a
slower vehicle ahead. The system then
controls the vehicle speed based on the
speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain the
driver selected distance.

A warning chime will sound and a message
will pop up:
∙ When the VDC system is off (To use the
ICC system, turn on the VDC system.
Push the ICC switch to turn off the ICC
system and reset the ICC switch by
pushing the ICC switch again.)

NOTE:

For additional information about the
VDC system, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) system” in this section.
∙ When ABS or VDC is operating
∙ When a wheel is slipping (To use the ICC
system, make sure the wheels are no
longer slipping.)

1
䊊
2
䊊

LSD3103

System set display with vehicle ahead
System set display without vehicle
ahead

The driver sets the desired vehicle speed
based on the road conditions. The ICC system maintains the set vehicle speed, similar to standard cruise control, as long as no
vehicle is detected in the lane ahead. The
ICC system displays the set speed.

5-74 Starting and driving

∙ The stop lights of the vehicle come on
when braking is performed by the ICC
system.
∙ When the brake operates, a noise may
be heard. This is not a malfunction.
When a vehicle ahead is detected, the vehicle ahead detection indicator comes on.
The ICC system will also display the set
speed and selected distance.
Vehicle ahead not detected
When a vehicle is no longer detected
ahead, the ICC system gradually accelerates your vehicle to resume the previously
set vehicle speed. The ICC system then
maintains the set speed.

When a vehicle is no longer detected, the
vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off.

How to change the set vehicle
speed

If a vehicle ahead appears during acceleration to the set vehicle speed or any time the
ICC system is in operation, the system controls the distance to that vehicle.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of the
following methods:
∙ Push the CANCEL switch. The set vehicle speed indicator will go out.

When a vehicle is no longer detected under
approximately 15 mph (24 km/h), the system will be canceled.

∙ Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle
speed indicator will go out.
∙ Turn the ICC switch off. The ICC indicators will go out.
LSD3104

When passing another vehicle, the set
B will flash when the vespeed indicator 䊊
hicle speed exceeds the set speed. The vehicle detect indicator will turn off when the
area ahead of the vehicle is open. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to
the previously set speed.
Even though your vehicle speed is set in the
ICC system, you can depress the accelerator pedal when it is necessary to accelerate
your vehicle rapidly.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use
one of the following methods:
∙ Depress the accelerator pedal. When
the vehicle attains the desired speed,
push and release the SET– switch.
∙ Push and hold the RES+ switch. The set
vehicle speed will increase by approximately 5 mph (5 km/h).
∙ Push, then quickly release the RES+
switch. Each time you do this, the set
speed will increase by approximately
1 mph (1 km/h).

Starting and driving 5-75

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use
one of the following methods:
∙ Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push
the SET– switch and release it.
∙ Push and hold the SET– switch. The set
vehicle speed will decrease by approximately 5 mph (5 km/h).
∙ Push, then quickly release the SET–
switch. Each time you do this, the set
speed will decrease by approximately
1 mph (1 km/h).
To resume the preset speed, push and
release the RES+ switch. The vehicle will
resume the last set cruising speed when
the vehicle speed is over 20 mph (32 km/h).

LSD2683

The distance to the vehicle ahead can be
selected at any time depending on the traffic conditions.
A is
switch 䊊
Each time the distance
pushed, the set distance will change to
long, middle, short and back to long again,
in that sequence.

5-76 Starting and driving

LSD2752

How to change the set distance
to the vehicle ahead

Distance

Approximate distance at
60 mph (100 km/h) [ft (m)]

Long

200 (60)

Middle

150 (45)

Short

100 (30)

∙ The distance to the vehicle ahead will
change according to the vehicle speed.
The higher the vehicle speed, the longer
the distance.

∙ If the engine is stopped, the set distance
becomes “long.” (Each time the engine
is started, the initial setting becomes
“long.”)

Approach warning
If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle
ahead due to rapid deceleration of that vehicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the system warns the driver with the chime and
ICC system display. Decelerate by depressing the brake pedal to maintain a safe vehicle distance if:
∙ The chime sounds.
∙ The vehicle ahead detection indicator
blinks.
The warning chime may not sound in
some cases when there is a short distance
between vehicles. Some examples are:
∙ When the vehicles are traveling at the
same speed and the distance between
vehicles is not changing.
∙ When the vehicle ahead is traveling
faster and the distance between vehicles is increasing.

The warning chime will not sound when:
∙ The vehicle approaches other vehicles
that are parked or moving slowly.
∙ The accelerator pedal is depressed,
overriding the system.
NOTE:

Automatic cancellation
A chime sounds under the following conditions and the control is automatically canceled:
∙ When the vehicle ahead is not detected
and your vehicle is traveling below the
speed of 15 mph (24 km/h)

The approach warning chime may sound
and the system display may blink when
the ICC sensor detects objects on the
side of the vehicle or on the side of the
road. This may cause the ICC system to
decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The
ICC sensor may detect these objects
when the vehicle is driven on winding
roads, narrow roads, hilly roads, or when
entering or exiting a curve. In these
cases you will have to manually control
the proper distance ahead of your vehicle.

∙ When the system judges the vehicle is
at a standstill

Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected
by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or
driving position in the lane) or traffic or vehicle condition (for example, if a vehicle is
being driven with some damage).

∙ When a wheel slips

∙ When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive)
position or Manual mode
∙ When the parking brake system is applied
∙ When the VDC system is turned off
∙ When ABS or VDC operates
∙ When distance measurement becomes impaired due to adhesion of dirt
or obstruction to the sensor

∙ When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted

∙ When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle.

Starting and driving 5-77

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE
CONTROL MODE LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for the ICC system. Failure to operate
the vehicle in accordance with these
system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
∙ The ICC system is primarily intended
for use on straight, dry, open roads
with light traffic. It is not advisable to
use the ICC system in city traffic or
congested areas.
∙ The ICC system will not adapt automatically to road conditions. This system should be used in evenly flowing
traffic. Do not use the system on roads
with sharp curves, or on icy roads, in
heavy rain or in fog.

5-78 Starting and driving

∙ As there is a performance limit to the
distance control function, never rely
solely on the ICC system. This system
does not correct careless, inattentive
or absentminded driving, or overcome poor visibility in rain, fog, or
other bad weather. Decelerate the vehicle speed by depressing the brake
pedal, depending on the distance to
the vehicle ahead and the surrounding circumstances in order to maintain a safe distance between vehicles.

∙ The system may not detect the vehicle in front of you in certain road or
weather conditions. To avoid accidents, never use the ICC system under
the following conditions:

∙ If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop,
the vehicle decelerates to a standstill
within the limitations of the system.
The system will cancel once it judges
that the vehicle has come to a standstill and sound a warning chime. To
prevent the vehicle from moving, the
driver must depress the brake pedal.

– When rain, snow or dirt adhere to
the bumper around the distance
sensor

∙ Always pay attention to the operation
of the vehicle and be ready to manually control the proper following distance. The ICC system may not be able
to maintain the selected distance between vehicles (following distance) or
selected vehicle speed under some
circumstances.

– On roads where the traffic is heavy
or there are sharp curves
– On slippery road surfaces such as
on ice or snow, etc.
– During bad weather (rain, fog,
snow, etc.)

– On steep downhill roads (the vehicle may go beyond the set vehicle speed and frequent braking
may result in overheating the
brakes)
– On repeated uphill and downhill
roads
– When traffic conditions make it difficult to keep a proper distance between vehicles because of frequent acceleration or deceleration

– Interference
sources

other

radar

∙ Do not use the ICC system if you are
towing a trailer. The system may not
detect a vehicle ahead.
∙ In some road or traffic conditions, a
vehicle or object can unexpectedly
come into the sensor detection zone
and cause automatic braking. Always
stay alert and avoid using the ICC system where not recommended in this
warning section.
The radar sensor will not detect the following objects:
∙ Stationary and slow moving vehicles
∙ Pedestrians or objects in the roadway
∙ Oncoming vehicles in the same lane
∙ Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel
lane
The sensor generally detects the signals
returned from the vehicle ahead. Therefore,
if the sensor cannot detect the reflection
from the vehicle ahead, the ICC system
may not maintain the selected distance.

The following are some conditions in which
the sensor cannot properly detect a vehicle ahead and the system may not operate properly:
∙ When snow or road spray from traveling
vehicles reduces the sensor’s detection.
∙ When your vehicle is towing a trailer, etc.
∙ When excessively heavy baggage is
loaded in the rear seat or cargo area of
your vehicle.
The ICC system is designed to automatically check the sensor’s operation within
the limitations of the system.
When the sensor is covered with dirt or is
obstructed, the system will automatically
be canceled. If the sensor is covered with
ice, a transparent or translucent vinyl bag,
etc., the ICC system may not detect them.
In these instances, the vehicle-to-vehicle
distance control mode may not cancel and
may not be able to maintain the selected
following distance from the vehicle ahead.
Be sure to check and clean the sensor
regularly.

The detection zone of the radar sensor is
limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the detection zone for the vehicle-to-vehicle distance detection mode to maintain the selected distance from the vehicle ahead.
A vehicle ahead may move outside of the
detection zone due to its position within
the same lane of travel. Motorcycles may
not be detected in the same lane ahead if
they are traveling offset from the centerline
of the lane. A vehicle that is entering the
lane ahead may not be detected until the
vehicle has completely moved into the
lane.
If this occurs, the ICC system may warn
you by blinking the system indicator and
sounding the chime. The driver may
have to manually control the proper distance away from vehicle traveling ahead.

Starting and driving 5-79

SSD0252

5-80 Starting and driving

SSD0253

If this occurs, the ICC system may warn
you by blinking the system indicator and
sounding the chime unexpectedly. You
will have to manually control the proper
distance away from the vehicle traveling
ahead.

The detection of vehicles may also be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.)
or vehicle condition.

Starting and driving 5-81

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
The following are conditions in which the
ICC system may be temporarily unavailable. In these instances, the ICC system
may not cancel and may not be able to
maintain the selected following distance
from the vehicle ahead.
Condition A
Under the following conditions, the ICC system
is automatically canceled. A chime will sound
and the system will not be able to be set:
∙ When the VDC system is turned off
∙ When the VDC or ABS operates
∙ When a vehicle ahead is not detected
and your vehicle is traveling below the
speed of 15 mph (24 km/h)
∙ When the system judges the vehicle is
at a standstill
∙ When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive)
or Manual mode
∙ When the parking brake is applied
∙ When a wheel slips
LSD2832

5-82 Starting and driving

∙ When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted

Action to take

Condition C

When the conditions listed above are no
longer present, turn the system off using
the ICC switch. Turn the ICC system back on
to use the system.

When the ICC system is not operating
properly, a chime sounds and the ICC system warning light (orange) will come on.

Condition B
When the radar sensor area of the front
bumper is covered with dirt or is obstructed, the ICC system will automatically
be canceled.
The chime will sound and the “Unavailable:
Front Radar Obstruction” warning message will appear in the vehicle information
display.
When driving on roads with limited road
structures (for example, long bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next to long walls),
the system may illuminate the system
warning light (orange) and display the “Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction” message.

LSD2685

Action to take
If the warning message appears, stop the
vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever
in the P (Park) position, and turn the engine
off. When the radar signal is temporarily
interrupted, clean the sensor area of the
front bumper and restart the engine. If the
“Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction”
warning message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.

Starting and driving 5-83

∙ Do not attach metallic objects near the
sensor area (brush guard, etc.) This
could cause failure or malfunction.
∙ Do not alter, remove, or paint the front
bumper. Before customizing or restoring the front bumper, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

Radio frequency statement
For USA
FCC ID OAYARS4B
LSD3105

LSD2690

Action to take

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off,
restart the engine, resume driving and set
the ICC system again.

A is located
The sensor for the ICC system 䊊
on the front of the vehicle.

If it is not possible to set the system or
the indicator stays on, it may indicate
that the system is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is still drivable under
normal conditions, have the vehicle
checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

5-84 Starting and driving

To keep the ICC system operating properly,
be sure to observe the following:

∙ Always keep the sensor area clean.

FCC Warning

∙ Do not strike or damage the areas
around the sensor.

Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.

∙ Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory
near the sensor. This could cause failure
or malfunction.

For Canada
Model: ARS4–B
IC: 4135A-ARS4B
FCC ID: OAYARS4B
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada licenceexempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation
est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter
tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,
même si le brouillage est susceptible
d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.

Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure Information:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and
operated with minimum distance of 30 cm
between the radiator and your body.
The transmitter must not be co-located or
operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites
d’exposition aux rayonnements IC établies
pour un environnement non contrôlé. Cet
équipement doit être installé et utilisé avec
un minimum de 30 cm de distance entre la
source de rayonnement et votre corps.
FCC Notice
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.

CONVENTIONAL (fixed speed)
CRUISE CONTROL MODE
This mode allows driving at a speed between 25 to 90 mph (40 to 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator
pedal.

WARNING
∙ In the conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode, a warning chime
does not sound to warn you if you are
too close to the vehicle ahead, as neither the presence of the vehicle ahead
nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is
detected.
∙ Pay special attention to the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead of you or a collision could occur.
∙ Always confirm the setting in the ICC
system display.
∙ Do not use the conventional (fixed
speed) cruise control mode when
driving
under
the
following
conditions:
– When it is not possible to keep the
vehicle at a set speed

Starting and driving 5-85

– In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed
– On winding or hilly roads
– On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice,
etc.)
– In very windy areas
∙ Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle
control and result in an accident.

LSD2723

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control switches
1. CANCEL switch:
Deactivates the system without erasing the set speed
2. RES+ switch:
Resumes set speed or increases speed
incrementally

5-86 Starting and driving

LSD2724

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control mode display and
indicators
The display is located in the vehicle information display.
1. Cruise indicator:
This indicator indicates the condition of
the ICC system depending on a color.

3. SET- switch:
Sets desired cruise speed or reduces
speed incrementally

∙ Cruise control ON indicator (gray): Indicates that the ICC switch is on

4. ICC switch:
Master switch to activate the system

∙ Cruise control SET indicator (green):
Indicates that the cruising speed is
set

∙ Cruise control warning (yellow): Indicates that there is a malfunction in
the ICC system

ing the ICC switch again will turn the system completely off. When the ignition
switch is placed in the OFF position, the
system is also automatically turned off.

2. Set vehicle speed indicator:
This indicator indicates the set vehicle
speed. For Canadian models, the
speed is displayed in km/h.

To use the ICC system again, quickly push
and release the ICC switch (vehicle-to vehicle distance control mode) or push and
hold it (conventional cruise control mode)
again to turn it on.

CAUTION

LSD3107

To avoid accidentally engaging cruise
control, make sure to turn the ICC switch
off when not using the ICC system.

Operating conventional (fixed
speed) cruise control mode
To turn on the conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode, push and hold the ICC
A for longer than about 1.5 secswitch 䊊
onds.
When pushing ICC switch on, the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode
B are displayed in
display and indicators 䊊
the vehicle information display. After you
hold ICC switch on for longer than about
1.5 seconds, the ICC system display turns
off. The cruise indicator appears. You can
now set your desired cruising speed. Push-

Starting and driving 5-87

To cancel the preset speed, use any of the
following methods:

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one
of the following three methods:

1. Push the CANCEL switch. The vehicle
speed indicator will turn off.

1. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push
the SET- switch and release it.

2. Tap the brake pedal. The vehicle speed
indicator will turn off.
3. Turn the ICC switch off. Both the cruise
indicator and vehicle speed indicator
will turn off.
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one
of the following three methods:
LSD3108

To set cruising speed, accelerate your veC
hicle to the desired speed, push the SET- 䊊
switch and release it. (The color of the
cruise indicator changes to green and set
vehicle speed indicator comes on.) Take
your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your
vehicle will maintain the set speed.
∙ To pass another vehicle, depress the
accelerator pedal. When you release the
pedal, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed.
∙ The vehicle may not maintain the set
speed when going up or down steep
hills. If this happens, manually maintain
vehicle speed.

5-88 Starting and driving

1. Depress the accelerator pedal. When
the vehicle attains the desired speed,
push and release the SET- switch.
2. Push and hold the RES+ switch. When
the vehicle attains the desired speed,
release the switch.
3. Push, then quickly release the RES+
switch. Each time you do this, the set
speed will increase by about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h).

2. Push and hold the SET- switch. Release
the switch when the vehicle slows
down to the desired speed.
3. Push, then quickly release the SETswitch. Each time you do this, the set
speed will decrease by about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h).
To resume the preset speed, push and release the RES+ switch. The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when the
vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).

System temporarily unavailable
A chime sounds under the following conditions and the control is automatically canceled:
∙ When the vehicle slows down more
than 8 mph (13 km/h) below the set
speed
∙ When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive)
or manual shift mode
∙ When the parking brake is applied
∙ When the VDC operates (including the
traction control system)
∙ When a wheel slips
When the system is not operating properly,
the chime sounds and the color of the
cruise indicator will change to orange.
Action to take
If the color of the cruise indicator changes
to orange, stop the vehicle in a safe place
and place the shift lever in the P (Park) position. Turn the engine off, restart the engine, resume driving, and then perform the
setting again.

LSD2684

Starting and driving 5-89

PROPILOT ASSIST (if so equipped)
If it is not possible to set or the indicator
stays on, it may indicate that the system
is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle
is still drivable under normal conditions,
have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the ProPILOT Assist system could result in serious injury or death.
∙ ProPILOT Assist is not a self-driving
system. Within the limits of its capabilities, as described in this manual, it
helps the driver with certain driving
activities.
∙ The ProPILOT Assist system is not a
replacement for proper driving procedures and is not designed to correct
careless, inattentive or absentminded driving. ProPILOT Assist will
not always steer the vehicle to keep it
in the lane. The ProPILOT Assist system is not designed to prevent loss of
control. It is the driver’s responsibility
to stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in
control of the vehicle at all times.

∙ There are limitations to the ProPILOT
Assist system capability. The ProPILOT Assist system does not function
in all driving, traffic, weather, and road
conditions. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep
the vehicle in the traveling lane, and
be in control of the vehicle at all times.
∙ The ProPILOT Assist system is only an
aid to assist the driver and is not a
collision warning or avoidance device.
∙ The ProPILOT Assist system is for
highway use only and is not intended
for city driving. Failure to apply the
brakes or steer the vehicle when necessary may result in a serious
accident.
∙ Always observe posted speed limits
and do not set the speed over them.
∙ Never take your hands off the steering
wheel when driving. Always keep your
hands on the steering wheel and drive
your vehicle safely.
∙ Never unfasten your safety belt when
using ProPILOT Assist. Doing so automatically cancels the ProPILOT Assist
system.

5-90 Starting and driving

centered in the traveling lane when clear
lane markings are detected.

∙ The ProPILOT Assist system does not
react to stationary and slow moving
vehicles.
∙ Always drive carefully and attentively
when using the ProPILOT Assist system. Read and understand the Owner’s Manual thoroughly before using
the ProPILOT Assist system. To avoid
serious injury or death, do not rely on
the system to prevent accidents or to
control the vehicle’s speed in emergency situations. Do not use the ProPILOT Assist system except in appropriate road and traffic conditions.

LSD2799

The ProPILOT Assist system is intended to
enhance the operation of the vehicle when
following a vehicle traveling in the same
lane and direction.
The ProPILOT Assist system uses a multiA installed behind
sensing front camera 䊊
the windshield and a radar sensor located
B to measure
on the front of the vehicle 䊊
the distance to the vehicle ahead in the
same lane and to monitor the lane markers. If the vehicle detects a slower moving
vehicle ahead, the system will reduce the
vehicle speed so that your vehicle follows
the vehicle in front at the selected distance.
The system will also help keep the vehicle

Starting and driving 5-91

1
䊊
2
䊊
3
䊊
4
䊊

Steering-wheel-mounted control (left)
Vehicle information display
Steering-wheel-mounted control (right)
ProPILOT Assist switch

PROPILOT ASSIST SYSTEM
OPERATION
The ProPILOT Assist system has the following two functions:
1. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
The ICC system can be set to one of
two cruise control modes:
∙ Conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control mode: For cruising at a preset speed
NOTE:
Steering assist is not available in the
conventional (fixed speed) cruise control
mode.

LSD2800

5-92 Starting and driving

∙ Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode: The ICC system maintains a
selected distance from the vehicle in
front of you within the speed range of
0 to 90 mph (0 to 144 km/h) up to the
set speed. The set speed can be selected by the driver between 20 to
90 mph (32 to 144 km/h). When the
vehicle ahead slows to a stop, your
vehicle gradually decelerates to a
standstill. When the vehicle is
stopped, the ICC system maintains
braking force to keep your vehicle
stopped.
NOTE:
When your vehicle is stopped for less
than 3 seconds and the vehicle ahead
begins to move, your vehicle will start
moving again automatically.
– When your vehicle is at a standstill
for more than 3 seconds and the
vehicle ahead begins to accelerate,
push the RES+ switch or lightly depress the accelerator pedal. The ICC
system starts to follow the vehicle
ahead.

– When no vehicle is detected ahead
within the driver selected distance,
the vehicle travels at the speed set
by the driver. The speed must be
above 20 mph (32 km/h) to use this
function.
NOTE:
Even if the Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) setting is turned off by the
driver using the “Settings” menu in the
vehicle information display, AEB will be
automatically turned on when ICC is
used.
2. Steering Assist
The Steering Assist function controls
the steering system to help keep your
vehicle within the traveling lane.

LSD3109

ProPILOT Assist switches
1
䊊

DISTANCE switch:
– Long

When there is no vehicle ahead, Steering Assist is not available at speeds
under 37 mph (60 km/h).

– Middle
– Short
2
䊊

RES+ switch:
Resumes set speed or increases
speed incrementally

3
䊊

CANCEL switch:
Deactivates the ProPILOT Assist system

Starting and driving 5-93

– Lane marker indicator (yellow): Lane
departure is detected
2
䊊

Set distance indicator
Displays the selected distance

3
䊊

Vehicle ahead detection indicator
Indicates whether the system detects
a vehicle in front of you

4
䊊

Steering Assist indicator
Indicates the status of the Steering Assist function by the color of the indicator

4
䊊

LSD2807

SET- switch:
Sets desired cruise speed or reduces
speed incrementally

5
䊊

ProPILOT Assist switch:
Turns the ProPILOT Assist system on or
off

䊊
6

LSD3110

1
䊊

Indicates whether the system detects
lane markers

Steering Assist switch:
Turns the Steering Assist function on
or off

– Lane marker indicator (gray): No lane
markers detected
– Lane marker indicator (green): Lane
markers detected

(gray):

– Steering Assist indicator (green):
Steering Assist active

Lane marker indicator

– No lane markers displayed: Steering
Assist is turned off

5-94 Starting and driving

– Steering Assist indicator
Steering Assist standby

The ProPILOT Assist system
display and indicators

– Steering Assist indicator (orange):
Steering Assist malfunction
5
䊊

ProPILOT Assist activation
Displays once the ProPILOT Assist system is activated

6
䊊

Steering Assist status indicator/
warning

– Speed control status indicator/
): ICC (diswarning (solid green
tance control mode) is active (vehicle detected ahead). Your vehicle
matches the speed of the vehicle
ahead.

Displays the status of the Steering
Assist
by
the
color
of
the
indicator/warning
– No Steering Assist status indicator
displayed: Steering Assist is turned
off
– Steering Assist indicator
Steering Assist standby

– Speed control status indicator/
): ICC
warning (green outline
(maintain speed control mode) is
active (no vehicle detected ahead).
Your vehicle maintains the driverselected set speed.

(gray):

– Steering Assist indicator (green):
Steering Assist active

– Speed
control
status
indicator/warning (orange): Indicates an ICC malfunction

– Steering Assist indicator (yellow):
Steering Assist malfunction
7
䊊

Speed control
warning

status

indicator/

Displays the status of speed control by
the color and shape of the
indicator/warning
– Speed control status indicator/
warning (gray): ICC standby

8
䊊

TURNING THE CONVENTIONAL
(fixed speed) CRUISE CONTROL
MODE ON
NOTE:
ProPILOT Assist provides no approach
warnings, automatic braking, or steering
assist in the conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode.
To choose the conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode, push and hold the
ProPILOT Assist switch for longer than approximately 1.5 seconds. For additional information, refer to “Conventional (fixed
speed) cruise control mode” in this section.

Set vehicle speed indicator
Indicates the set vehicle speed

9
䊊

ProPILOT Assist status indicator
Indicates the status of the ProPILOT
Assist system by the color of the indicator
– ProPILOT Assist status indicator
(white): ProPILOT Assist is on but in
standby.
– ProPILOT Assist status indicator
(blue): ProPILOT Assist active

Starting and driving 5-95

LSD3073

OPERATING PROPILOT ASSIST
1. Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)
2. Lane Departure Warning (LDW) when
shaded and Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) when solid
3. Blind Spot Warning (BSW)

5-96 Starting and driving

LSD3074

LSD3111

A .
1. Push the ProPILOT Assist switch 䊊
This turns on the ProPILOT Assist system.

– To change the status of the driving
2
1
or 䊊
to
aids, use the 䊊
navigate the settings screen. For additional information, refer to “How to
use the vehicle information display”
in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.

2. A screen is displayed for a period of
time that indicates the status of the
driving aid functions.
– AEB, LDW, and BSW are enabled
when the specified driving aid is
shaded.

3. The status of the ProPILOT Assist system is displayed in the vehicle informaB.
tion display 䊊

– I-LI is enabled when the driving aid is
solid.

4. Accelerate or decelerate your vehicle
to the desired speed.

NOTE:
Turning the ProPILOT Assist system on
will turn on the Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) system at the same time. For
additional information, refer to “Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)” in this section.

LSD3112

C . The ProPILOT
5. Push the SET- switch 䊊
Assist system begins to automatically
maintain the set speed. The ProPILOT
D and ProAssist activation indicator 䊊
E illumiPILOT Assist status indicator 䊊
nate (blue). When a vehicle ahead is
traveling at a speed of 20 mph
(32 km/h) or below and the SET- switch
is pushed, the set speed of your vehicle
is 20 mph (32 km/h).

LSD2826

When the SET- switch is pushed under the
following conditions, the ProPILOT Assist
system cannot be set and the set vehicle
1 blinks for approximately
speed indicator 䊊
2 seconds:
∙ When traveling below 20 mph (32 km/h)
and the vehicle ahead is not detected
∙ When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive)
position or manual shift mode
∙ When the parking brake is applied
∙ When the brakes are operated by the
driver

Starting and driving 5-97

∙ When the VDC system is off. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in this section.

To change to a slower cruising speed:
∙ Push and hold the SET- switch. The set
vehicle speed decreases by approximately 5 mph (5 km/h).

∙ When the VDC system (including the
traction control system) is operating

∙ Push, then quickly release, the SETswitch. Each time you do this, the set
speed decreases by approximately
1 mph (1 km/h).

∙ When a wheel is slipping
∙ When any door is open

How to momentarily accelerate or
decelerate

∙ When the driver’s seat belt is not fastened

LSD3113

How to change the set vehicle
speed
The set vehicle speed can be adjusted.
To change to a faster cruising speed:
∙ Push and hold the RES+ switch. The set
vehicle speed increases by approximately 5 mph (5 km/h).
∙ Push, then quickly release, the RES+
switch. Each time you do this, the set
speed increases by approximately
1 mph (1 km/h).

5-98 Starting and driving

∙ Depress the accelerator pedal when
acceleration is required. Release the accelerator pedal to resume the previously set vehicle speed.
∙ Depress the brake pedal when deceleration is required. Control by the ProPILOT Assist system is canceled. Push the
RES+ switch to resume the previously
set vehicle speed.

WARNING
When the accelerator pedal is depressed and you are approaching the
vehicle ahead, the ICC system will neither control the brake nor warn the
driver with the chime and display. The
driver must manually control the vehicle speed to maintain a safe distance
to the vehicle ahead. Failure to do so
could result in severe personal injury or
death.
NOTE:
When you accelerate by depressing the
accelerator pedal or decelerate by pushing the SET- switch and the vehicle travels faster than the speed set by the
driver, the set speed vehicle indicator will
blink.

LSD3114

How to change the set distance
to the vehicle ahead
The distance to the vehicle ahead can be
selected at any time.
A is
Each time the DISTANCE switch 䊊
pushed, the set distance will change to
long, middle, short and back to long again
in that sequence.

Starting and driving 5-99

Distance

Approximate distance at
60 mph (100 km/h) [ft (m)]

Long

200 (60)

Middle

150 (45)

Short

90 (30)

∙ The distance to the vehicle ahead
changes automatically according to
the vehicle speed. The higher the vehicle speed, the longer the distance.
∙ If the engine is stopped, the set distance
becomes “long.” (Each time the engine
is started, the initial setting becomes
“long.”)

LSD2806

5-100 Starting and driving

1. Steering-wheel-mounted control (right)
2. Vehicle information display
3. Steering Assist switch

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
STEERING ASSIST
Use the following methods to enable or
disable the Steering Assist.
Steering Assist switch:
To turn the Steering Assist on or off, push
the Steering Assist switch (3) on the instrument panel.
NOTE:
∙ When the Steering Assist switch is
used to turn the system on or off, the
system remembers the setting even
if the ignition switch is cycled. The
switch must be pushed again to
change the setting to on or off.
∙ The Steering Assist switch changes
the status of the “Steering Assist” selection made in the “Settings” screen
in the vehicle information display.

LSD2813

Starting and driving 5-101

Setting in the vehicle information display:

How to cancel the ProPILOT Assist
system

button on the steering
1. Press the
wheel (1) until “Settings” displays in the
vehicle information display (2).

To cancel the ProPILOT Assist system, use
one of the following methods:

button (1) to select “Driver
2. Use the
Assistance.” Then press the OK button
(1).

∙ Tap the brake pedal (except at a standstill).

button (1) to select “Driv3. Use the
ing Aids.” Then press the OK button (1).
4. Select “Steering Assist” and press the
OK button (1).
NOTE:
∙ When the Cruise screen is displayed
on the vehicle information display,
press the OK button on the steering
wheel to call up the “Driving Aids” setting display.
∙ When enabling/disabling the system
through the vehicle information display or when pressing the Steering
Assist switch, the system retains the
current settings even if the engine is
restarted.

5-102 Starting and driving

∙ Push the CANCEL switch.

∙ Push the ProPILOT Assist switch to turn
the system off. The ProPILOT Assist status indicator will go out.
When the ProPILOT Assist system is canceled while the vehicle is stopped, the electronic parking brake is automatically activated.

WARNING
To prevent the vehicle from moving or
rolling unexpectedly, which could result
in serious personal injury or property
damage, before exiting the vehicle
make sure to push the ProPILOT Assist
switch to turn the system off, place the
shift lever in the P (Park) position, and
turn the engine off.

INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL
(ICC) (for vehicles with ProPILOT
Assist)
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the ICC system could result in serious injury or
death.
∙ The ICC system is only an aid to assist
the driver and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. It is recommended for highway use only and it is
not intended for city driving. It is the
driver’s responsibility to stay alert,
drive safely, and be in control of the
vehicle at all times.
∙ There are limitations to the ICC system capability. The ICC system does
not function in all driving, traffic,
weather, and road conditions. It is the
driver’s responsibility to stay alert,
drive safely, keep the vehicle in the
traveling lane, and be in control of the
vehicle at all times.
∙ Always observe posted speed limits
and do not set the speed over them.

∙ The ICC system does not react to stationary and slow moving vehicles.
∙ Always drive carefully and attentively
when using the ICC system. Read and
understand the Owner’s Manual thoroughly before using the ICC system.
To avoid serious injury or death, do
not rely on the system to prevent accidents or to control the vehicle’s
speed in emergency situations. Do
not use the ICC system except in appropriate road and traffic conditions.

ICC system operation
The ICC system is designed to maintain a
selected distance from the vehicle in front
of you and can reduce the speed to match
a slower vehicle ahead. The system decelerates the vehicle as necessary and if the
vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle
decelerates to a standstill. However, the ICC
system can only apply up to 40% of the
vehicle’s total braking power. This system
should only be used when traffic conditions allow vehicle speeds to remain fairly
constant or when vehicle speeds change
gradually. If a vehicle moves into the traveling lane ahead or if a vehicle traveling
ahead rapidly decelerates, the distance between vehicles may become closer be-

cause the ICC system cannot decelerate
the vehicle quickly enough. If this occurs,
the ICC system sounds a warning chime
and blinks the system display to notify the
driver to take necessary action.
The ICC system cancels and a warning
chime sounds if the speed is below approximately 15 mph (24 km/h) and a vehicle
is not detected ahead.
The ICC system operates as follows:
∙ When there are no vehicles traveling
ahead, the ICC system maintains the
speed set by the driver. The set speed
range is between approximately 20 and
90 mph (32 and 144 km/h).

∙ When your vehicle is at a standstill for
more than 3 seconds and the vehicle
ahead begins to accelerate, push the
RES+ switch or lightly depress the accelerator pedal. The ICC system starts to
follow the vehicle ahead.
∙ When the vehicle traveling ahead
moves to a different traveling lane, the
ICC system accelerates and maintains
vehicle speed up to the set speed.
The ICC system does not control vehicle
speed or warn you when you approach
stationary and slow moving vehicles. You
must pay attention to vehicle operation to
maintain proper distance from vehicles
ahead when approaching toll gates or traffic congestion.

∙ When there is a vehicle traveling ahead,
the ICC system adjusts the speed to
maintain the distance, selected by the
driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle
decelerates to a standstill. Once your
vehicle stops, the ICC system keeps the
vehicle stopped.
∙ When your vehicle is stopped for less
than 3 seconds and the vehicle ahead
begins to move, your vehicle will start
moving again automatically.

Starting and driving 5-103

Normally when controlling the distance to
a vehicle ahead, the system automatically
accelerates or decelerates your vehicle according to the speed of the vehicle ahead.
Depress the accelerator to properly accelerate your vehicle when acceleration is required for a lane change. Depress the brake
pedal when deceleration is required to
maintain a safe distance to the vehicle
ahead due to sudden braking or if a vehicle
cuts in. Always stay alert when using the
ICC system.
SSD0254

When driving on the freeway at a set speed
and approaching a slower traveling vehicle
ahead, the ICC system adjusts the speed to
maintain the distance, selected by the
driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle
ahead changes lanes or exits the freeway,
the ICC system accelerates and maintains
the speed up to the set speed. Pay attention to the driving operation to maintain
control of the vehicle as it accelerates to
the set speed.
The vehicle may not maintain the set
speed on winding or hilly roads. If this occurs, you will have to manually control the
vehicle speed.

5-104 Starting and driving

LSD3115

System set display with no vehicle
detected ahead
No vehicle detected ahead
The driver sets the desired vehicle speed
based on the road conditions. The ICC system maintains the set vehicle speed, similar to standard cruise control, as long as no
vehicle is detected in the lane ahead. The
ICC system displays the set speed.

∙ When the brake is applied by the system, a noise may be heard. This is not
a malfunction.
When the ICC system detects a vehicle
ahead, the vehicle ahead detection indicator and the speed control status indicator
(distance control mode) illuminates (solid
).
green

LSD3116

System set display with vehicle ahead
Vehicle detected ahead
When a vehicle is detected in the lane
ahead, the ICC system decelerates the vehicle by controlling the throttle and applying the brakes to match the speed of a
slower vehicle ahead. The ICC system then
controls the vehicle speed based on the
speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain the
driver selected distance.

Vehicle ahead stops
When the vehicle ahead decelerates to
stop, your vehicle decelerates to a standstill. Once your vehicle stops, the ICC system automatically applies the brakes to
keep the vehicle stopped. When your vehicle is at a standstill, the “(RES+) Press to
start” message is displayed on the vehicle
information display.
NOTE:
When your vehicle stops for less than
3 seconds, your vehicle will automatically follow the vehicle as it accelerates
from a stop.

Vehicle ahead accelerates
When your vehicle is stopped and the vehicle ahead begins to accelerate, push the
RES+ switch or lightly depress the accelerator pedal. The ICC system starts to follow
the vehicle ahead.
Vehicle ahead not detected
When a vehicle is no longer detected
ahead, the ICC system gradually accelerates your vehicle to resume the previously
set vehicle speed. The ICC system then
maintains the set speed.
When a vehicle is no longer detected, the
vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off
and speed control status indicator (maintain speed control mode) illuminates
).
(green outline
The ICC system gradually accelerates to
the set speed, but you can depress the
accelerator pedal to quickly accelerate.
When a vehicle is no longer detected and
your vehicle is traveling under approximately 15 mph (24 km/h), the ICC system
automatically cancels.

NOTE:
∙ The stop lights of the vehicle come on
when braking is performed by the ICC
system.

Starting and driving 5-105

When passing another vehicle, the set
B flashes when the vespeed indicator 䊊
hicle speed exceeds the set speed. The vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off
when the area ahead of the vehicle is open.
When the pedal is released, the vehicle returns to the previously set speed. Even
though your vehicle speed is set in the ICC
system, you can depress the accelerator
pedal when it is necessary to accelerate
your vehicle rapidly.

∙ You judge it necessary to maintain a
safe distance.
The warning chime may not sound in
some cases when there is a short distance
between vehicles. Some examples are:
∙ When the vehicles are traveling at the
same speed and the distance between
vehicles is not changing.
∙ When the vehicle ahead is traveling
faster and the distance between vehicles is increasing.
∙ When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle.

5-106 Starting and driving

The warning chime will not sound when:
∙ Your vehicle approaches other vehicles
that are parked or moving slowly.
∙ The accelerator pedal is depressed,
overriding the system.
NOTE:
The approach warning chime may sound
and the system display may flash when
the radar sensor detects objects on the
side of the vehicle or on the side of the
road. This may cause the ICC system to
decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The
radar sensor may detect these objects
when the vehicle is driven on winding,
narrow, or hilly roads or when the vehicle
is entering or exiting a curve. In these
cases, you will have to manually control
the proper distance ahead of your vehicle.
Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected
by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or
driving position in the lane) or traffic or vehicle conditions (for example, if a vehicle is
being driven with some damage).

ICC system limitations
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for the ICC system. Failure to operate
the vehicle in accordance with these
system limitations could result in serious injury or death:
∙ The ICC system is primarily intended
for use on straight, dry, open roads
with light traffic. It is not advisable to
use the ICC system in city traffic or
congested areas.
∙ The ICC system will not adapt automatically to road conditions. This system should be used in evenly flowing
traffic. Do not use the system on roads
with sharp curves or on icy roads, in
heavy rain or in fog.

∙ As there is a performance limit to the
distance control function, never rely
solely on the ICC system. This system
does not correct careless, inattentive
or absentminded driving or overcome
poor visibility in rain, fog, or other bad
weather. Decelerate the vehicle speed
by depressing the brake pedal, depending on the distance to the vehicle
ahead and the surrounding circumstances in order to maintain a safe
distance between vehicles.

∙ The system may not detect the vehicle in front of you in certain road or
weather conditions. To avoid accidents, never use the ICC system under
the following conditions:

∙ When the ICC system automatically
brings the car to a stop, your vehicle
can automatically accelerate if the vehicle is stopped for less than approximately 3 seconds. Be prepared to stop
your vehicle if necessary.

– When rain, snow or dirt adhere to
the bumper around the distance
sensor

– On roads with heavy, high-speed
traffic or sharp curves
– On slippery road surfaces such as
on ice or snow, etc.
– During bad weather (rain, fog,
snow, etc.)

Starting and driving 5-107

– Interference
sources.

other

radar

∙ Do not use the ICC system if you are
towing a trailer. The system may not
detect a vehicle ahead.
∙ In some road or traffic conditions, a
vehicle or object can unexpectedly
come into the sensor detection zone
and cause automatic braking. Always
stay alert and avoid using the ICC system where not recommended in this
warning section.
The ICC system will not detect the following
objects:
∙ Stationary or slow moving vehicles
∙ Pedestrians or objects in the roadway
∙ Oncoming vehicles in the same lane
∙ Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel
lane

The following are some conditions in which
the radar sensor cannot properly detect a
vehicle ahead and the system may not operate properly:
∙ When the sensor detection is reduced
(conditions such as rain, snow, fog, dust
storms, sandstorms, and road spray
from other vehicles)
∙ Driving on a steep downhill slope or
roads with sharp curves
∙ Driving on a bumpy road surface, such
as an uneven dirt road
∙ If dirt, ice, snow or other material is covering the radar sensor area
∙ A complicated-shaped vehicle such as
a car carrier trailer or flatbed
truck/trailer is near the vehicle ahead.
∙ Interference by other radar sources
∙ When your vehicle is towing a trailer, etc.
∙ When excessively heavy baggage is
loaded in the rear seat or cargo area of
your vehicle.
The ICC system is designed to automatically check the radar sensor’s operation
within the limitations of the system.

5-108 Starting and driving

The detection zone of the radar sensor is
limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the detection zone for the ICC system to maintain
the selected distance from the vehicle
ahead. A vehicle ahead may move outside
of the detection zone due to its position
within the same lane of travel. Motorcycles
may not be detected in the same lane
ahead if they are traveling offset from the
center line of the lane. A vehicle that is entering the lane ahead may not be detected
until the vehicle has completely moved into
the lane.
If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you
by blinking the system indicator and
sounding the chime. The driver may have
to manually control the proper distance
away from the vehicle traveling ahead.
The ICC system (with ProPILOT Assist) uses
a multi-sensing front camera. The following are some conditions in which the camera may not properly detect a vehicle and
detection of a vehicle ahead may be delayed:
∙ Poor visibility (conditions such as rain,
snow, fog, dust storms, sandstorms,
and road spray from other vehicles)

∙ The camera area of the windshield is
fogged up or covered with dirt, water
drops, ice, snow, etc.
∙ Strong light (for example, sunlight or
high beams from oncoming vehicles)
enters the front camera
∙ A sudden change in brightness occurs
(for example, when the vehicle enters or
exits a tunnel or shaded area or lightning flashes)

SSD0252

Starting and driving 5-109

Condition A
Under the following conditions, the ICC system
is automatically canceled. A chime will sound
and the system will not be able to be set:
∙ Any door is open.
∙ The driver’s seat belt is not fastened.
∙ The vehicle ahead is not detected and
your vehicle is traveling below the
speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
∙ Your vehicle has been stopped by the
ICC system for approximately 3 minutes
or longer.
SSD0253

When driving on some roads, such as winding, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads
which are under construction, the radar
sensor may detect vehicles in a different
lane, or may temporarily not detect a vehicle traveling ahead. This may cause the
radar system to decelerate or accelerate
the vehicle.
The detection of vehicles may also be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.)
or vehicle condition.

5-110 Starting and driving

If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you
by blinking the system indicator and
sounding the chime unexpectedly. You will
have to manually control the proper distance away from the vehicle traveling
ahead.

Automatic cancellation
The following are conditions in which the
ICC system may be temporarily unavailable. In these instances, the ICC system
may not cancel and may not be able to
maintain the selected following distance
from the vehicle ahead.

∙ The shift lever is not in the D (Drive) position or manual shift mode.
∙ The electronic parking brake is applied.
∙ The VDC system is turned off.
∙ The AEB applies harder braking.
∙ VDC (including the traction control system) operates.
∙ A wheel slips.
∙ When distance measurement becomes impaired due to adhesion of dirt
or obstruction to the sensor.
∙ When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted.

Action to take:

Condition B

Action to take:

When the conditions listed above are no
longer present, turn the system off using
the ProPILOT Assist switch. Turn the ProPILOT Assist system back on to use the system.

When the radar sensor of the front bumper
is covered with dirt or is obstructed, the ICC
system will automatically be canceled.

When the above driving conditions no longer exist, turn the system back on.

NOTE:
When the ICC system is canceled under
the following conditions at a standstill,
the electronic parking brake is automatically activated:

The chime will sound and the “Unavailable:
Front Radar Obstruction” warning message will appear in the vehicle information
display.
Action to take:

∙ The shift lever is not in the D (Drive)
position or manual shift mode.

If the warning message appears, stop the
vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever
in the P (Park) position, and turn the engine
off. When the radar signal is temporarily
interrupted, clean the sensor area of the
front bumper and restart the engine. If the
“Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction”
warning message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.

∙ The VDC system is turned off.

Condition C

∙ When distance measurement becomes impaired due to adhesion of
dirt or obstruction to the sensor.

When driving on roads with limited road
structures or buildings (for example, long
bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next to
long walls), the system may illuminate the
system warning light and display the “Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction” message.

∙ Any door is open.
∙ The driver’s seat belt is not fastened.
∙ Your vehicle has been stopped by the
ICC system for approximately 3 minutes or longer.

∙ When the radar signal is temporarily
interrupted.

ICC system malfunction
If the ICC system malfunctions, it will be
turned off automatically, a chime will
sound, and the speed control status warning (orange) will illuminate.
Action to take:
If the warning light comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off,
restart the engine and set the ICC system
again. If it is not possible to set the ICC
system or the indicator stays on, it may be
a malfunction. Although the normal driving
can be continued, the ICC system should
be inspected. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

ICC sensor maintenance
The radar sensor is located on the front of
the vehicle.
To keep the ICC system operating properly,
be sure to observe the following:
∙ Always keep the sensor area clean.

Starting and driving 5-111

∙ Do not strike or damage the areas
around the sensor.
∙ Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory
near the sensor. This could cause failure
or malfunction.
∙ Do not attach metallic objects near the
sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This
could cause failure or malfunction.
∙ Do not alter, remove, or paint the front
bumper.
Before customizing or restoring the front
bumper, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer.
The camera sensor is located above the
inside mirror.
To keep the proper operation of the systems and prevent a system malfunction,
be sure to observe the following:
∙ Always keep the windshield clean.
∙ Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory
near the camera unit.

5-112 Starting and driving

∙ Do not place reflective materials, such
as white paper or a mirror, on the instrument panel. The reflection of sunlight
may adversely affect the camera unit’s
capability of detecting the lane markers.
∙ Do not strike or damage the areas
around the camera unit. Do not touch
the camera lens or remove the screw
located on the camera unit.
If the camera unit is damaged due to an
accident, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer.

STEERING ASSIST
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the Steering Assist could result in serious injury
or death.

∙ The Steering Assist is not a replacement for proper driving procedures
and is not designed to correct careless, inattentive or absent-minded
driving. The Steering Assist will not always steer the vehicle to keep it in the
lane. It is not designed to prevent loss
of control. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the
vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in
control of the vehicle at all times.
∙ As there is a performance limit to the
Steering Assist’s capability, never rely
solely on the system. The Steering Assist does not function in all driving,
traffic, weather, and road conditions.
Always drive safely, pay attention to
the operation of the vehicle, and
manually
control
your
vehicle
appropriately.
∙ The Steering Assist is intended for use
on well-developed freeways or highways with gentle (moderate) curves.
To avoid risk of an accident, do not use
this system on local or non-highway
roads.

∙ The Steering Assist only steers the vehicle to maintain its position in the
center of a lane. The vehicle will not
steer to avoid objects in the road in
front of the vehicle or to avoid a vehicle moving into your lane.
∙ It is the driver’s responsibility to stay
alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in
the traveling lane, and be in control of
the vehicle at all times. Never take
your hands off the steering wheel
when driving. Always keep your hands
on the steering wheel and drive your
vehicle safely.
∙ Always drive carefully and attentively
when using the Steering Assist. Read
and understand the Owner’s Manual
thoroughly before using the Steering
Assist. To avoid serious injury or
death, do not rely on the system to
prevent accidents or to control the vehicle’s speed in emergency situations.
Do not use the Steering Assist except
in appropriate road and traffic
conditions.

Steering Assist operation
The Steering Assist controls the steering
system to help keep your vehicle near the
center of the lane when driving. The Steering Assist is combined with the Intelligent
Cruise Control (ICC) system. For additional
information, refer to “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (with ProPILOT Assist)” in this section.
The Steering Assist can be activated when
the following conditions are met:
∙ The ICC system is activated.
∙ Lane markers on both sides are clearly
detected.
∙ A vehicle ahead is detected (when the
vehicle is driven at speeds under
37 mph [60 km/h])
∙ The driver grips the steering wheel.
∙ The vehicle is driven at the center of the
lane.
∙ The turn signals are not operated.
∙ The windshield wiper is not operated in
the low (LO) or high (HI) speed operation
(the steering assist function is disabled
after the wiper operates for approximately 10 seconds).

LSD3118

Steering Assist display and
indicators
1
䊊

Steering Assist status indicator/
warning
Displays the status of the Steering Assist
by
the
color
of
the
indicator/warning
∙ Steering Assist indicator (gray): Steering Assist standby
∙ Steering Assist indicator (green):
Steering Assist active
∙ Steering Assist indicator (yellow):
Steering Assist malfunction

Starting and driving 5-113

2
䊊

Steering Assist indicator
Indicates the status of the Steering Assist by the color of the indicator
∙ Steering Assist indicator (gray): Steering Assist standby
∙ Steering Assist indicator (green):
Steering Assist active

3
䊊

Lane marker indicator
Indicates whether the system detects
the lane marker
∙ Lane marker indicator (gray): Lane
markers not detected
∙ Lane marker indicator (green): Lane
markers detected
∙ Lane marker indicator (yellow): Lane
departure is detected

When the Steering Assist is in operation,
1 , the
the Steering Assist status indicator 䊊
2 , and the lane
Steering Assist indicator 䊊
3 on the vehicle informarker indicator 䊊
mation display turn green. A chime sounds
when the Steering Assist initially activates.

5-114 Starting and driving

When the Steering Assist deactivates, the
1 , the
Steering Assist status indicator 䊊
2 , and the lane
Steering Assist indicator 䊊
3 on the vehicle informarker indicator 䊊
mation display turn gray and a chime
sounds twice.

Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)
When a curve or strong cross wind exceeds
the capabilities of the Steering Assist and
your vehicle approaches either the left or
the right side of the traveling lane, a warning chime sounds and the I-LI indicator
light (orange) on the instrument panel
flashes to alert the driver. Then, the I-LI system automatically applies the brakes for a
short period of time to help assist the
driver to return the vehicle to the center of
the traveling lane. This action is in addition
to any Steering Assist actions.

Hands on detection
When the Steering Assist is activated, it
monitors the driver’s steering wheel operation.
If the steering wheel is not operated or the
driver takes his/her hands off the steering
wheel for a period of time, the warning (1)
appears in the vehicle information display.
If the driver does not operate the steering
wheel after the warning has been displayed, an audible alert sounds and the
warning flashes in the vehicle information
display, followed by a quick brake application to request the driver to take control of
the vehicle again.
If the driver still does not respond, the ProPILOT Assist turns on the hazard flasher
and slows the vehicle to a complete stop.
The driver can cancel the deceleration at
any time by steering, braking, accelerating,
or operating the ProPILOT Assist switch.

LSD3119

Starting and driving 5-115

WARNING
Steering Assist is not a system for a
hands-free driving. Always keep your
hands on the steering wheel and drive
your vehicle safely. Failure to do so
could cause a collision resulting in serious personal injury or death.
NOTE:
If the driver lightly touches (instead of
firmly grips) the steering wheel, the
steering torque sensor may not detect
the driver’s hand(s) on the wheel and a
sequence of warnings may occur. When
the driver holds and operates the steering wheel again, the warnings turn off.

Steering Assist limitations
WARNING
∙ In the following situations, the camera may not detect lane markers correctly or may detect lane markers incorrectly and the Steering Assist may
not operate properly:

5-116 Starting and driving

– When driving on roads where there
are multiple parallel lane markers,
lane markers that are faded or not
painted clearly, nonstandard lane
markers, or lane markers covered
with water, dirt, snow, etc.

∙ Do not use the Steering Assist under
the following conditions because the
system may not properly detect lane
markers. Doing so could cause a loss
of vehicle control and result in an
accident.

– When driving on roads with discontinued lane markers

– During bad weather (rain, fog,
snow, dust, etc.)

– When driving on roads with a widening or narrowing lane width

– When rain, snow, sand, etc., is
thrown up by the wheels of other
vehicles

– When driving on roads where there
are multiple lanes or unclear lane
markers due to road construction
– When driving on roads where there
are sharply contrasting objects,
such as shadows, snow, water,
wheel ruts, seams, or lines remaining after road repairs (the Steering
Assist could detect these items as
lane markers)
– When driving on roads where the
traveling lane merges or separates

– When dirt, oil, ice, snow, water, or
another object adheres to the
camera unit
– When the lens of the camera unit is
foggy
– When strong light (for example,
sunlight or high beams from oncoming vehicles) shines on the
camera
– When the headlights are not bright
due to dirt on the lens or the headlights are off in tunnels or darkness
– When a sudden change in brightness occurs (for example, when the
vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or is
under a bridge)

– When driving on roads where the
traveling lane merges or separates
or where there are temporary lane
markers
because
of
road
construction
– When there is a lane closure due to
road repairs
– When driving on a bumpy road surface, such as an uneven dirt road
– When driving on sharp curves or
winding roads
– When driving on repeated uphill
and downhill roads
∙ Do not use the Steering Assist under
the following conditions because the
system will not operate properly:
– When driving with a tire that is not
within normal tire conditions (for
example, tire wear, abnormal tire
pressure, installation of a spare
tire, tire chains, nonstandard
wheels)
– When the vehicle is equipped with
non-original brake or suspension
parts

– When an object such as a sticker or
cargo obstructs the camera

Steering Assist temporary
standby

– When excessively heavy baggage
is loaded in the rear seat or luggage area of your vehicle

Automatic standby due to driving operation:

– When the vehicle load capacity is
exceeded
– When towing a trailer or other
vehicle
∙ Excessive noise will interfere with the
warning chime sound, and the beep
may not be heard.
∙ For the ProPILOT Assist system to operate properly, the windshield in front
of the camera must be clean. Replace
worn wiper blades. The correct size
wiper blades must be used to help
make sure the windshield is kept
clean. Only use Genuine NISSAN wiper
blades, or equivalent wiper blades,
that are specifically designed for use
on your vehicle model and model
year. It is recommended that you visit
your NISSAN dealer for the correct
parts for your vehicle.

When the driver activates the turn signal,
the Steering Assist is temporarily placed in
a standby mode. (The Steering Assist restarts automatically when the operating
conditions are met again.)
Automatic standby:
In the following cases, a warning message
is displayed along with the chime, and the
Steering Assist is placed in a temporary
standby mode. (The Steering Assist restarts automatically when the operating
conditions are met again.)
∙ When lane markers on both sides are
no longer detected
∙ When a vehicle ahead is no longer detected under approximately 37 mph
(60 km/h)

Steering Assist cancel
Under the following conditions, the Steering Assist cancels, and the Steering Assist
status indicator and the Steering Assist indicator turn off:

Starting and driving 5-117

∙ When unusual lane markers appear in
the traveling lane or when the lane
marker cannot be correctly detected
for some time due to certain conditions
(for example, a snow rut, the reflection
of light on a rainy day, the presence of
several unclear lane markers)
∙ When the windshield wiper operates in
the low (LO) or high (HI) speed operation
(the Steering Assist is disabled when
the wiper operates for more than approximately 10 seconds)

Action to take:
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the
vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the engine off, restart the engine, resume driving,
and set the Intelligent Cruise Control system again. If the warning (orange) continues to illuminate, the Steering Assist is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, have the
system checked. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Action to take:

Steering Assist maintenance

Turn the ICC system off using the CANCEL
switch. When the conditions listed above
are no longer present, turn the ICC system
on again.

The camera sensor is located above the
inside mirror.

Steering Assist malfunction
When the system malfunctions, it turns off
automatically. The Steering Assist status
warning illuminates (orange). A chime may
sound depending on the situation.

To keep the proper operation of the system
and prevent a system malfunction, be sure
to observe the following:
∙ Always keep the windshield clean.
∙ Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory
near the camera unit.
∙ Do not place reflective materials, such
as white paper or a mirror, on the instrument panel. The reflection of sunlight
may adversely affect the camera unit’s
capability of detecting the lane markers.

5-118 Starting and driving

∙ Do not strike or damage the areas
around the camera unit. Do not touch
the camera lens or remove the screw
located on the camera unit.
If the camera unit is damaged due to an
accident, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer.
Radio frequency statement
For USA
FCC ID OAYARS4B
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.

For Canada
Model: ARS4–B
IC: 4135A-ARS4B
FCC ID: OAYARS4B
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada licenceexempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR
d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation
est autorisee aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter
tout brouillage radioelectrique subi,
meme si le brouillage est susceptible
d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.

Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure Information:

CONVENTIONAL (fixed speed)
CRUISE CONTROL MODE

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.

NOTE:

This equipment should be installed and
operated with minimum distance of 30 cm
between the radiator and your body.
The transmitter must not be co-located or
operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
Cet equipement est conforme aux limites
d’exposition aux rayonnements IC etablies
pour un environnement non controle. Cet
equipement doit etre installe et utilise avec
un minimum de 30 cm de distance entre la
source de rayonnement et votre corps.
FCC Notice
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.

ProPILOT Assist provides no approach
warnings, automatic braking, or steering
assist in the conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode.
This mode allows driving at a speed between 25 to 90 mph (40 to 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator
pedal.

Starting and driving 5-119

4
䊊

∙ Do not use the conventional (fixed
speed) cruise control mode when
driving
under
the
following
conditions:
– When it is not possible to keep the
vehicle at a set speed
– In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed
– On winding or hilly roads
– On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice,
etc.)
– In very windy areas
∙ Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle
control and result in an accident.

LSD3120

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control switches
1
䊊

2
䊊

3
䊊

5-120 Starting and driving

RES+ switch:
Resumes set speed or increases
speed incrementally
CANCEL switch:
Deactivates the system without erasing the set speed
ProPILOT Assist switch:
Turns the ProPILOT Assist system on or
off

SET- switch:
Sets desired cruise speed or reduces
speed incrementally

∙ Cruise control SET indicator (green):
Indicates that the cruising speed is
set
∙ Cruise control warning (yellow): Indicates that there is a malfunction in
the ICC system
2. Set vehicle speed indicator:
This indicator indicates the set vehicle
speed. For Canadian models, the
speed is displayed in km/h.

LSD3106

LSD3094

Operating conventional (fixed
speed) cruise control mode
To turn on the conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode, push and hold the
A for longer than
ProPILOT Assist switch 䊊
about 1.5 seconds.
When pushing the ProPILOT Assist switch
on, the conventional (fixed speed) cruise
B are
control mode display and indicators 䊊
displayed in the vehicle information display. After you hold the ProPILOT Assist
switch on for longer than about 1.5 seconds, the ICC system display turns off. The
cruise indicator appears. You can now set

Starting and driving 5-121

your desired cruising speed. Pushing the
ProPILOT Assist switch again will turn the
system completely off. When the ignition
switch is placed in the OFF position, the
system is also automatically turned off.

To cancel the preset speed, use any of the
following methods:
1. Push the CANCEL switch. The vehicle
speed indicator will turn off.
2. Tap the brake pedal. The vehicle speed
indicator will turn off.

To use the ICC system again, quickly push
and release the ProPILOT Assist switch
(vehicle-to vehicle distance control mode)
or push and hold it (conventional cruise
control mode) again to turn it on.

3. Turn the ProPILOT Assist switch off.
Both the cruise indicator and vehicle
speed indicator will turn off.
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one
of the following three methods:

CAUTION
To avoid accidentally engaging cruise
control, make sure to turn the ProPILOT
Assist switch off when not using the ICC
system.

LSD3117

5-122 Starting and driving

AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING
(AEB) (if so equipped)
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one
of the following three methods:
1. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push
the SET- switch and release it.
2. Push and hold the SET- switch. Release
the switch when the vehicle slows
down to the desired speed.
3. Push, then quickly release the SETswitch. Each time you do this, the set
speed will decrease by about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h).
To resume the preset speed, push and release the RES+ switch. The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when the
vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the AEB
system could result in serious injury or
death.
∙ The AEB system is a supplemental aid
to the driver. It is not a replacement
for the driver’s attention to traffic
conditions or responsibility to drive
safely. It cannot prevent accidents
due to carelessness or dangerous
driving techniques.
∙ The AEB system does not function in
all driving, traffic, weather and road
conditions.
The AEB system can assist the driver when
there is a risk of a forward collision with the
vehicle ahead in the traveling lane.

LSD2690

A
The AEB system uses a radar sensor 䊊
located on the front of the vehicle to measure the distance to the vehicle ahead in
the same lane.

Starting and driving 5-123

1. AEB emergency warning indicator
2. AEB system warning light

AEB SYSTEM OPERATION
The AEB system will function when your
vehicle is driven at speeds above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h).
If a risk of a forward collision is detected,
the AEB system will firstly provide the warning to the driver by flashing the warning
(yellow) in the vehicle information display
and providing an audible alert.
If the driver applies the brakes quickly and
forcefully after the warning, and the AEB
system detects that there is still the possibility of a forward collision, the system will
automatically increase the braking force. If
the driver does not take action, the AEB
system issues the second visual (flashing)
(red) and audible warning. If the driver releases the accelerator pedal, then the system applies partial braking.
If the risk of a collision becomes imminent,
the AEB system applies harder braking automatically.
LSD3079

5-124 Starting and driving

While the AEB system is operating, you may
hear the sound of brake operation. This is
normal and indicates that the AEB system
is operating properly.

If the AEB system has stopped the vehicle,
the vehicle will remain at a standstill for
approximately 2 seconds before the
brakes are released.

NOTE:
The vehicle’s brake lights come on when
braking is performed by the AEB system.
Depending on vehicle speed and distance
to the vehicle ahead, as well as driving and
roadway conditions, the system may help
the driver avoid a forward collision or may
help mitigate the consequences of a collision, should one be unavoidable. If the
driver is handling the steering wheel, accelerating or braking, the AEB system will
function later or will not function.
The automatic braking will cease under the
following conditions:
∙ When the steering wheel is turned as far
as necessary to avoid a collision.
∙ When the accelerator pedal is depressed.
∙ When there is no longer a vehicle detected ahead.

Starting and driving 5-125

TURNING THE AEB SYSTEM
ON/OFF
Perform the following steps to turn the AEB
systems ON or OFF.
button until “Settings”
1. Press the
displays in the vehicle information disbutton to select
play. Use the
“Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK
button.
2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the OK
button.
3. Select “Emergency Brake” and use the
OK button to turn the system on or off.
When the AEB system is turned off, the AEB
system warning light illuminates.
NOTE:
The AEB system will be automatically
turned on when the engine is restarted.

LSD2769

5-126 Starting and driving

AEB SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for the AEB system. Failure to operate
the vehicle in accordance with these
system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
∙ The AEB system cannot detect all vehicles under all conditions.
∙ The radar sensor does not detect the
following objects:
– Pedestrians, animals or obstacles
in the roadway.
– Oncoming vehicles.
– Crossing vehicles.
∙ The radar sensor has some performance limitations. If a stationary vehicle is in the vehicle’s path, the AEB
system will not function when the vehicle is driven at speeds over approximately 50 mph (80 km/h).

– Dirt, ice, snow or other material
covering the radar sensor.
– Interference
sources.

other

radar

– Snow or road spray from traveling
vehicles.
– If the vehicle ahead is narrow (e.g.
motorcycle).
– When driving on a steep downhill
slope or roads with sharp curves.
∙ In some road or traffic conditions, the
AEB system may unexpectedly apply
partial braking. When acceleration is
necessary, continue to depress the
accelerator pedal to override the
system.

∙ The system is designed to automatically check the sensor’s functionality,
within certain limitations. The system
may not detect some forms of obstructions of the sensor area such as
ice, snow, stickers, etc. In these cases,
the system may not be able to worn
the driver properly. Be sure that you
check, clean and clear the sensor area
regularly.
∙ Excessive noise will interfere with the
warning chime sound, and the chime
may not be heard.

∙ Braking distances increase on slippery surfaces.

∙ The radar sensor may not detect a vehicle
ahead
in
the
following
conditions:

Starting and driving 5-127

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
Condition A
When the radar sensor picks up interference from another radar source, making it
impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the
AEB system is automatically turned off.
The AEB system warning light (orange) will
illuminate.
Action to take
When the above conditions no longer exist,
the AEB system will resume automatically.
Condition B
When the sensor area of the front bumper
is covered with dirt or is obstructed, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead,
the AEB system is automatically turned off.
The AEB system warning light (orange) will
illuminate and the “Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.

LSD2717

5-128 Starting and driving

When driving on roads with limited road
structures or buildings (for example, long
bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next to
long walls), the system may illuminate the

AEB system warning light (orange) and display the “Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction” message.

∙ Do not attach metallic objects near the
sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This
could cause failure or malfunction.

Action to take

∙ Do not alter, remove or paint the front
bumper. Before customizing or restoring the front bumper, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop
the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift
lever in the P (Park) position and turn the
engine off. Clean the radar cover on the
lower grille with a soft cloth, and restart the
engine. If the warning light continues to
illuminate, have the AEB system checked. It
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the AEB system malfunctions, it will be
turned off automatically, a chime will
sound, the AEB system warning light (orange) will illuminate and the warning message [Malfunction] will appear in the vehicle
information display.
Action to take
If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop
the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the
AEB system checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Radio frequency statement
For USA
FCC ID OAYARS4B

LSD2690

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
A is located on the front of the
The sensor 䊊
vehicle.

To keep the system operating properly, be
sure to observe the following:
∙ Always keep the sensor area of the front
bumper clean.
∙ Do not strike or damage the areas
around the sensor.
∙ Do not cover or attach stickers or similar objects on the front bumper near
the sensor area. This could cause failure
or malfunction.

This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

Starting and driving 5-129

For Canada
Model: ARS4–B
IC: 4135A-ARS4B
FCC ID: OAYARS4B
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation
of the device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux
CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux
appareils radio exempts de licence.
L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et

5-130 Starting and driving

2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
susceptible d’en compromettre le
fonctionnement.
Radio frequency radiation exposure information:
This equipment complies with FCC and IC
radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and
operated with minimum distance of
30 cm between the radiator and your
body.
This transmitter must not be co-located
or operating in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux rayonnements IC
établies pour un environnement non
contrôlé.
Cet équipement doit être installé et
utilisé avec un minimum de 30 cm de
distance entre la source de rayonnement
et votre corps.

FCC Notice
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING
(AEB) WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION
(if so equipped)
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the AEB
with Pedestrian Detection system
could result in serious injury or death.
∙ The AEB with Pedestrian Detection
system is a supplemental aid to the
driver. It is not a replacement for the
driver’s attention to traffic conditions
or responsibility to drive safely. It cannot prevent accidents due to carelessness or dangerous driving
techniques.
∙ The AEB with Pedestrian Detection
system does not function in all driving, traffic, weather and road
conditions.
The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system
can assist the driver when there is a risk of
a forward collision with the vehicle ahead in
the traveling lane or with a pedestrian
ahead in the traveling lane.

LSD2799

The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system
uses a radar sensor located on the front of
B to measure the distance to
the vehicle 䊊
the vehicle ahead in the same lane. For
pedestrians, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system uses a camera installed beA in addition to the
hind the windshield 䊊
radar sensor.

Starting and driving 5-131

1. AEB with Pedestrian Detection emergency warning indicator
2. AEB with Pedestrian Detection system
warning light

AEB WITH PEDESTRIAN
DETECTION SYSTEM OPERATION
The AEB system operates at speeds above
approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). For the pedestrian detection function, the system
operates at speeds between 6 – 37 mph (10
– 60 km/h).
If a risk of a forward collision is detected,
the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system
will firstly provide the warning to the driver
by flashing the warning (yellow) in the vehicle information display and providing an
audible alert. If the driver applies the brakes
quickly and forcefully after the warning,
and the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system detects that there is still the possibility
of a forward collision, the system will automatically increase the braking force.

LSD3079

5-132 Starting and driving

If the driver does not take action, the AEB
with Pedestrian Detection system issues
the second visual (flashing) (red) and audible warning. If the driver releases the accelerator pedal, then the system applies
partial braking. If the risk of a collision be-

comes imminent, the AEB with Pedestrian
Detection system applies harder braking
automatically.
While the AEB with Pedestrian Detection
system is operating, you may hear the
sound of brake operation. This is normal
and indicates that the AEB with Pedestrian
Detection system is operating properly.
NOTE:
The vehicle’s brake lights come on when
any braking is performed by the AEB
with Pedestrian Detection system.

The automatic braking will cease under the
following conditions:
∙ When the steering wheel is turned to
avoid a collision.
∙ When the accelerator pedal is depressed.
∙ When there is no longer a vehicle or a
pedestrian detected ahead.
If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system has stopped the vehicle, the vehicle
will remain at a standstill for approximately
2 seconds before the brakes are released.

Depending on vehicle speed and distance
to the vehicle or pedestrian ahead, as well
as driving and roadway conditions, the system may help the driver avoid a forward
collision or may help mitigate the consequences if a collision should be unavoidable. If the driver is handling the steering
wheel, accelerating or braking, the AEB with
Pedestrian Detection system will function
later or will not function.

Starting and driving 5-133

TURNING THE AEB WITH
PEDESTRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM
ON/OFF
Perform the following steps to enable or
disable the AEB with Pedestrian Detection
system.
button until “Settings”
1. Press the
displays in the vehicle information disbutton to select
play. Use the
“Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK
button.
2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the OK
button.
3. Select “Emergency Brake” and use the
OK button to turn the system on or off.
When the AEB with Pedestrian Detection
system is turned off, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light illuminates.
NOTE:
The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will be automatically turned on
when the engine is restarted.

LSD2769

5-134 Starting and driving

AEB WITH PEDESTRIAN
DETECTION SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for the AEB with Pedestrian Detection
system. Failure to operate the vehicle in
accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or
death.
∙ The AEB with Pedestrian Detection
system cannot detect all vehicles or
pedestrians under all conditions.
∙ The AEB with Pedestrian Detection
system does not detect the following
objects:
– Small pedestrians (including small
children), animals and cyclists.
– Pedestrians in wheelchairs or using mobile transport such as
scooters, child-operated toys, or
skateboards.
– Pedestrians who are seated or otherwise not in a full upright standing or walking position.

– Crossing vehicles
– Obstacles on the roadside
∙ The AEB with Pedestrian Detection
system has some performance
limitations.
– If a stationary vehicle is in the vehicle’s path, the AEB with Pedestrian
Detection system will not function
when the vehicle is driven at
speeds
over
approximately
50 mph (80 km/h).
– For pedestrian detection, the AEB
with Pedestrian Detection system
will not function when the vehicle
is driven at speeds over approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) or below
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
∙ The AEB with Pedestrian Detection
system will not function for pedestrians in darkness or in tunnels, even if
there is street lighting in the area.
∙ The AEB with Pedestrian Detection
system may not function if the vehicle
ahead is narrow (for example, a
motorcycle).

∙ The AEB with Pedestrian Detection
system may not function if speed difference between the two vehicles is
too small.
∙ The radar sensor AEB with Pedestrian
Detection system may not function
properly or detect a vehicle ahead in
the following conditions:
– Poor visibility (conditions such as
rain, snow, fog, dust storms, sandstorms, and road spray from other
vehicles)
– Driving on a steep downhill slope
or roads with sharp curves.
– Driving on a bumpy road surface,
such as an uneven dirt road.
– If dirt, ice, snow or other material is
covering the radar sensor area.
– Interference
sources.

other

radar

– The camera area of windshield is
fogged up, or covered with dirt, water drops, ice, snow, etc.

– Oncoming vehicles

Starting and driving 5-135

– Strong light (for example, sunlight
or high beams from oncoming vehicles) enters the front camera.
Strong light causes the area
around the pedestrian to be cast in
a shadow, making it difficult to see.
– A sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or a
shaded area or lightning flashes.)
– The poor contrast of a person to
the background, such as having
clothing color or pattern which is
similar to the background.
– The pedestrian’s profile is partially
obscured or unidentifiable due to
the pedestrian transporting luggage, wearing bulky or very loosefitting clothing or accessories.
∙ The system performance may degrade in the following conditions:
– The vehicle is driven on a slippery
road.
– The vehicle is driven on a slope.
– Excessively heavy baggage is
loaded in the rear seat or the trunk
room of your vehicle.

5-136 Starting and driving

∙ The system is designed to automatically check the sensor’s (radar and
camera) functionality, within certain
limitations. The system may not detect blockage of sensor areas covered
by ice, snow or stickers, for example.
In these cases, the system may not be
able to warn the driver properly. Be
sure that you check, clean and clear
sensor areas regularly.
∙ In some road and traffic conditions,
the AEB with Pedestrian Detection
system may unexpectedly apply partial braking. When acceleration is necessary, depress the accelerator pedal
to override the system.
∙ Excessive noise will interfere with the
warning chime sound, and the chime
may not be heard.

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
Condition A:
In the following conditions, the AEB with
Pedestrian Detection system warning light
blinks and the system will be turned off
automatically:
∙ The radar sensor picks up interference
from another radar source.
∙ The camera area of windshield is
misted or frozen.
∙ Strong light is shining from the front.
∙ The cabin temperature is over approximately 104°F (40°C) in direct sunlight.
∙ The camera area of windshield glass is
continuously covered with dirt, etc.
Action to take
When the above conditions no longer exist,
the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system
will resume automatically.

LSD2717

Starting and driving 5-137

NOTE:
When the inside of the windshield on
camera area is misted or frozen, it will
take a period of time to remove it after
the A/C turns on. If dirt appears on this
area, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer.
Condition B:
In the following conditions, the AEB with
Pedestrian Detection system warning light
will illuminate and the system will be
turned off automatically and the “Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction” warning
message will appear in the vehicle information display:
∙ The sensor area of the front bumper is
covered with dirt or is obstructed.
Action to take
If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop
the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift
lever in the P (Park) position and turn the
engine off. Clean the radar sensor area of
front bumper or the camera area of windshield with a soft cloth, and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the AEB with Pedestrian
Detection system checked. It is recom-

5-138 Starting and driving

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, a chime will sound, the AEB with
Pedestrian Detection system warning light
(orange) will illuminate and the warning
message [Malfunction] will appear in the
vehicle information display.
Action to take
If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop
the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the
AEB with Pedestrian Detection system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

LSD2799

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The radar sensor is located on the front of
B . The camera is located on
the vehicle 䊊
A .
the upper side of the windshield 䊊
To keep the AEB with Pedestrian Detection
system operating properly, be sure to observe the following:
∙ Always keep sensor areas of the front
bumper and windshield clean.
∙ Do not strike or damage the areas
around the sensors (e.g., bumper, windshield).

∙ Do not cover or attach stickers, or install
any accessory near the sensors. This
could block sensor signals, and/or
cause failure or malfunction.
∙ Do not attach metallic objects near the
radar sensor (brush guard, etc.). This
could cause failure or malfunction.
∙ Do not place reflective materials, such
as white paper or a mirror, on the instrument panel. The reflection of sunlight
may adversely affect the camera unit’s
detection capability.
∙ Do not alter, remove or paint the front
bumper. Before customizing or restoring the front bumper, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

Radio frequency statement
For USA
FCC ID OAYARS4B
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada
Model: ARS4–B
IC: 4135A-ARS4B
FCC ID: OAYARS4B
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation
of the device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux
CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux
appareils radio exempts de licence.

L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
susceptible d’en compromettre le
fonctionnement.
Radio frequency radiation exposure information:
This equipment complies with FCC and IC
radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and
operated with minimum distance of
30 cm between the radiator and your
body.
This transmitter must not be co-located
or operating in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux rayonnements IC
établies pour un environnement non
contrôlé.

Starting and driving 5-139

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE
Cet équipement doit être installé et
utilisé avec un minimum de 30 cm de
distance entre la source de rayonnement
et votre corps.
FCC Notice
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

CAUTION
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),
follow these recommendations to obtain maximum engine performance
and ensure the future reliability and
economy of your new vehicle. Failure to
follow these recommendations may result in shortened engine life and reduced engine performance.
∙ Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed, either fast or slow, and do
not run the engine over 4,000 RPM.
∙ Do not accelerate at full throttle in any
gear.
∙ Avoid quick starts.
∙ Avoid hard braking as much as possible.
∙ Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles
(805 kilometers). Your engine, axle or
other parts could be damaged.

FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS
Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient
Driving Tips to help you achieve the most
fuel economy from your vehicle.
1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake
Pedal Application
∙ Avoid rapid starts and stops.
∙ Use smooth, gentle accelerator and
brake application whenever possible.
∙ Maintain constant speed while commuting and coast whenever possible.
2. Maintain Constant Speed
∙ Look ahead to try and anticipate and
minimize stops.
∙ Synchronizing your speed with traffic
lights allows you to reduce your number of stops.
∙ Maintaining a steady speed can minimize red light stops and improve fuel
efficiency.
3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher
Vehicle Speeds
∙ Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more
efficient to open windows to cool the
vehicle due to reduced engine load.

5-140 Starting and driving

∙ Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more
efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle
due to increased aerodynamic drag.
∙ Recirculating the cool air in the cabin
when the A/C is on reduces cooling
load.
4. Drive at Economical Speeds and Distances
∙ Observing the speed limit and not
exceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (where
legally allowed) can improve fuel efficiency due to reduced aerodynamic
drag.

5. Use Cruise Control
∙ Using cruise control during highway
driving helps maintain a steady
speed.
∙ Cruise control is particularly effective
in providing fuel savings when driving
on flat terrains.
6. Plan for the Shortest Route
∙ Utilize a map or navigation system to
determine the best route to save
time.
7. Avoid Idling

∙ Maintaining a safe following distance
behind other vehicles reduces unnecessary braking.

∙ Shutting off your engine when safe
for stops exceeding 30–60 seconds
saves fuel and reduces emissions.

∙ Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate
changes in speed permits reduced
braking and smooth acceleration
changes.

8. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll
Roads

∙ Select a gear range suitable to road
conditions.

∙ Automated passes permit drivers to
use special lanes to maintain cruising speed through the toll and avoid
stopping and starting.

9. Winter Warm Up
∙ Limit idling time to minimize impact
to fuel economy.
∙ Vehicles typically need no more than
30 seconds of idling at start-up to
effectively circulate the engine oil before driving.
∙ Your vehicle will reach its ideal operating temperature more quickly
while driving versus idling.
10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool
∙ Park your vehicle in a covered parking
area or in the shade whenever possible.
∙ When entering a hot vehicle, opening
the windows will help to reduce the
inside temperature faster, resulting in
reduced demand on your A/C system.

Starting and driving 5-141

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY
∙ Keep your engine tuned up.
∙ Follow the recommended scheduled
maintenance.
∙ Keep the tires inflated to the correct
pressure. Low tire pressure increases
tire wear and lowers fuel economy.
∙ Keep all the wheels in correct alignment. Improper alignment increases
tire wear and lowers fuel economy.
∙ Use the recommended viscosity engine
oil. For additional information, refer to
“Engine oil and oil filter recommendations” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.

ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) (if so
equipped)
If any malfunction occurs in the AWD system while the engine is running, the master
warning light will come on.
The master warning light may illuminate
while trying to free a stuck vehicle due to
high powertrain oil temperature. The driving mode may change to 2WD. AUTO mode
may change to LOCK mode before the
warning light illuminates. If the master
warning light illuminates during operation,
stop the vehicle with the engine idling in a
safe place immediately. Then, if the light
turns off after a while, you can continue
driving.
A large difference between the diameters
of the front and rear wheels will make the
warning light illuminate. Pull off the road in
a safe area and idle the engine. Check that
all tire sizes are the same, tire pressure is
correct, and the tires are not worn.

CAUTION
∙ If the warning light remains on after
the above operation, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

5-142 Starting and driving

∙ If the warning light comes on while
driving, there may be a malfunction in
the AWD system. Reduce the vehicle
speed and have your vehicle checked
as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
∙ The powertrain may be damaged if
you continue driving with the warning
light illuminated.
∙ Never drive on dry, hard surface roads
in the LOCK mode, as this will overload
the powertrain and may cause a serious malfunction.

WARNING
∙ For AWD equipped vehicles, do not attempt to raise two wheels off the
ground and shift the transmission to
any drive or reverse position with the
engine running. Doing so may result
in drivetrain damage or unexpected
vehicle movement which could result
in serious vehicle damage or personal
injury.

∙ Do not attempt to test an AWD
equipped vehicle on a 2–wheel dynamometer (such as the dynamometers
used by some states for emissions
testing) or similar equipment even if
the other two wheels are raised off the
ground. Make sure that you inform
the test facility personnel that your
vehicle is equipped with AWD before it
is placed on a dynamometer. Using
the wrong test equipment may result
in drivetrain damage or unexpected
vehicle movement which could result
in serious vehicle damage or personal
injury.

LOCK mode:
The AWD LOCK indicator light will illuminate.
AUTO mode:
The AWD LOCK indicator light will turn off.

LIC2645

ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) LOCK
SWITCH OPERATIONS
The AWD LOCK switch is located on the
lower side of the instrument panel. This
switch is used to select the AUTO or LOCK
mode depending on the driving conditions.

Starting and driving 5-143

AWD mode

Wheels driven

AUTO

Distribution of torque
to the front and rear
wheels changes
automatically, depending on road conditions
encountered [100:0]
←→ [50:50]. This results
in improved driving
stability. *1

LOCK

AWD *2, *3

AWD LOCK indicator light

Use conditions

For driving on paved
or slippery roads.

For driving on rough
roads.

*1 When the rotation difference between the front and rear wheels is large, the AWD mode
may change from AUTO to LOCK for a while; however, this is not a malfunction.
*2 The LOCK mode will change to AUTO mode automatically when the vehicle has been
driven at a high speed. The AWD LOCK indicator light turns off.
*3 LOCK mode will automatically be canceled when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position.

5-144 Starting and driving

∙ The AWD torque distribution between
the front and rear wheels can be displayed in the video information display.
∙ If the AWD LOCK switch is operated
while accelerating or decelerating, or if
the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position, you may feel a jolt. This is normal.
∙ The oil temperature of the powertrain
parts will increase if the vehicle is continuously operated under conditions
where the difference in rotation between the front and rear wheels is large
(wheel slip), such as when driving the
vehicle on rough roads or through sand
or mud or freeing a stuck vehicle. In
these cases, the master warning light
illuminates and the AWD mode
changes to 2WD to protect the powertrain parts. Stop driving with the engine idling and wait until the warning
light turns off and the AWD returns to
the AUTO mode. If the warning light remains on, have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

WARNING
∙ When driving straight, shift the AWD
LOCK switch to AUTO. Do not operate
the AWD LOCK switch when making a
turn or backing up.
∙ Do not operate the AWD LOCK switch
with the front wheel spinning.
∙ Engine idling speed is high while
warming up the engine. Be especially
careful when starting or driving on
slippery surfaces.
∙ When turning the vehicle in LOCK
mode on paved roads, you may feel a
braking effect. This is a normal condition of the AWD model.

WSD0050

WARNING
∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags. They may
ignite and cause a fire.

∙ Safe parking procedures require that
both the parking brake be set and the
transmission placed into P (Park). Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to
move unexpectedly or roll away and
result in an accident. Make sure the
shift lever has been pushed as far forward as it can go and cannot be
moved without depressing the foot
brake pedal.
∙ Never leave the engine running while
the vehicle is unattended.

Starting and driving 5-145

POWER STEERING

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, do not
leave children, people who require the
assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally,
the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people
and pets.
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling
into traffic when parked on an incline, it
is a good practice to turn the wheels as
illustrated.
A :
∙ HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB 䊊

Turn the wheels into the curb and
move the vehicle forward until the curb
side wheel gently touches the curb.
B:
∙ HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB 䊊

Turn the wheels away from the curb
and move the vehicle back until the
curb side wheel gently touches the
curb.

5-146 Starting and driving

∙ HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO
C :
CURB 䊊
Turn the wheels toward the side of the
road so the vehicle will move away
from the center of the road if it moves.
4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK
position.

WARNING
∙ If the engine is not running or is
turned off while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work.
Steering will be harder to operate.
∙ When the power steering warning
light illuminates with the engine running, there will be no power assist for
the steering. You will still have control
of the vehicle, but the steering will be
much harder to operate. Have the
power steering system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
The power steering system is designed to
provide power assistance while driving to
operate the steering wheel with light force.
When the steering wheel is operated repeatedly or continuously while parking or
driving at a very low speed, the power assist for the steering wheel will be reduced.
This is to prevent overheating of the power
steering system and protect it from getting
damaged. While the power assist is reduced, steering wheel operation will become heavy. If the steering wheel operation is still performed, the power steering
may stop and the power steering warning
light will illuminate. In a safe location, stop

BRAKE SYSTEM
the engine and place the ignition switch in
the OFF position. The temperature of the
power steering system will go down after a
period of time and the power assist level
will return to normal after starting the engine. The power steering warning light will
go off. Avoid repeating such steering wheel
operations that could cause the power
steering system to overheat.
You may hear a noise from the front of the
vehicle when the steering wheel is operated. This is a normal operational noise
and is not a malfunction.
If the power steering warning light illuminates while the engine is running, it may
indicate the power steering system is not
functioning properly and may need servicing. Have the power steering system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
When the power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running, the
power assist for the steering will cease operation but you will still have control of the
vehicle. At this time, greater steering efforts
are required to operate the steering wheel,
especially in sharp turns and at low speeds.

The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions,
you will still have braking at two wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS
Vacuum assisted brakes
The brake booster aids braking by using
engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you
can stop the vehicle by depressing the
brake pedal. However, greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be required to
stop the vehicle and stopping distance will
be longer.

Using the brakes
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal
while driving. This will overheat the brakes,
wear out the brake pads faster, and reduce
gas mileage.
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent
the brakes from overheating, reduce speed
and downshift to a lower gear before going
down a slope or long grade. Overheated
brakes may reduce braking performance
and could result in loss of vehicle control.

WARNING
∙ While driving on a slippery surface, be
careful when braking, accelerating or
downshifting. Abrupt braking or accelerating could cause the wheels to
skid and result in an accident.
∙ If the engine is not running or is
turned off while driving, the power assist for the brakes will not work. Braking will be harder.

Wet brakes
When the vehicle is washed or driven
through water, the brakes may get wet. As
a result, your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side
during braking.
To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe
speed while lightly pressing the brake
pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until
the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving
the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes
function correctly.

Starting and driving 5-147

Parking brake break-in
Break in the parking brake shoes whenever
the stopping effect of the parking brake is
weakened or whenever the parking brake
shoes and/or drums/rotors are replaced,
in order to assure the best braking performance.
This procedure is described in the vehicle
service manual. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)
WARNING
∙ The ABS is a sophisticated device, but
it cannot prevent accidents resulting
from careless or dangerous driving
techniques. It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces. Remember that stopping distances on slippery surfaces
will be longer than on normal surfaces even with ABS. Stopping distances may also be longer on rough,
gravel or snow covered roads, or if you
are using tire chains. Always maintain
a safe distance from the vehicle in
front of you. Ultimately, the driver is
responsible for safety.

5-148 Starting and driving

∙ Tire type and condition may also affect braking effectiveness.
– When replacing tires, install the
specified size of tires on all four
wheels.
– When installing a spare tire, make
sure that it is the proper size and
type as specified on the Tire and
Loading Information label. For additional information, refer to “Tire
and Loading Information label” in
the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
– For additional information, refer to
“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-ityourself ” section of this manual.
The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels
do not lock during hard braking or when
braking on slippery surfaces. The system
detects the rotation speed at each wheel
and varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking and sliding.
By preventing each wheel from locking, the
system helps the driver maintain steering
control and helps to minimize swerving
and spinning on slippery surfaces.

Using the system
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.
Depress the brake pedal with firm steady
pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The
Anti-lock Braking System will operate to
prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer
the vehicle to avoid obstacles.

WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so
may result in increased stopping
distances.

Self-test feature
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) includes
electronic sensors, electric pumps, hydraulic
solenoids and a computer. The computer
has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests
the system each time you start the engine
and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse. When the self-test occurs,
you may hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel a
pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal
and does not indicate a malfunction. If the
computer senses a malfunction, it switches
the ABS off and illuminates the ABS warning
light on the instrument panel. The brake system then operates normally but without
anti-lock assistance.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
SYSTEM
If the ABS warning light illuminates during
the self-test or while driving, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Normal operation
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) operates at speeds above 3 - 6 mph (5 10 km/h). The speed varies according to
road conditions.
When the ABS senses that one or more
wheels are close to locking up, the actuator
rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure. This action is similar to pumping the
brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise
from under the hood or feel a vibration
from the actuator when it is operating. This
is normal and indicates that the ABS is operating properly. However, the pulsation
may indicate that road conditions are hazardous and extra care is required while
driving.

BRAKE ASSIST
When the force applied to the brake pedal
exceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist is
activated generating greater braking force
than a conventional brake booster even
with light pedal force.

WARNING
The Brake Assist is only an aid to assist
braking operation and is not a collision
warning or avoidance device. It is the
driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive
safely and be in control of the vehicle at
all times.

The VDC system uses various sensors to
monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion.
Under certain driving conditions, the VDC
system helps to perform the following
functions:
∙ Controls brake pressure to reduce
wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel
so power is transferred to a nonslipping drive wheel on the same axle.
∙ Controls brake pressure and engine
output to reduce drive wheel slip based
on vehicle speed (traction control function).
∙ Controls brake pressure at individual
wheels and engine output to help the
driver maintain control of the vehicle in
the following conditions:
– Understeer (vehicle tends to not follow the steered path despite increased steering input)
– Oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due
to certain road or driving conditions)
The VDC system can help the driver to
maintain control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss of vehicle control in all driving situations.

Starting and driving 5-149

When the VDC system operates, the
indicator in the instrument panel flashes
so note the following:
∙ The road may be slippery or the system
may determine some action is required
to help keep the vehicle on the steered
path.
∙ You may feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal and hear a noise or vibration from
under the hood. This is normal and indicates that the VDC system is working
properly.
∙ Adjust your speed and driving to the
road conditions.
For additional information, refer to “Slip indicator light” and “Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) OFF indicator light” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.
If a malfunction occurs in the system,
and
indicator lights come
the
on in the instrument panel. The VDC system automatically turns off when these indicator lights are on.
The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the
indicator and the
VDC system. The
AEB system warning light illuminates to indicate the VDC system is off.

5-150 Starting and driving

When the VDC switch is used to turn off the
system, the VDC system still operates to
prevent one drive wheel from slipping by
transferring power to a non-slipping drive
indicator flashes if this ocwheel. The
curs. All other VDC functions are off and
indicator will not flash.
the
The VDC system is automatically reset to
on when the ignition switch is placed in the
OFF position then back to the ON position.
The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you
start the engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse at a slow speed. When
the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk
noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of a malfunction.

∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. If suspension parts such as
shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, bushings and wheels are
not NISSAN recommended for your
vehicle or are extremely deteriorated,
the VDC system may not operate
properly. This could adversely affect
vehicle handling performance, and
indicator may flash or both
the
and
indicator lights
the
may illuminate.
∙ If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system
may not operate properly and both
and the
indicator
the
lights may illuminate.
∙ If engine control related parts are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, both the
and
indicator
lights
may
illuminate.

∙ When driving on extremely inclined
surfaces such as higher banked corners, the VDC system may not operate
indicator may
properly and the
and
indiflash or both the
cator lights may illuminate. Do not
drive on these types of roads.
∙ When driving on an unstable surface
such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or
indicator may flash or
ramp, the
and
indicator
both the
lights may illuminate. This is not a
malfunction. Restart the engine after
driving onto a stable surface.
∙ If wheels or tires other than the
NISSAN recommended ones are used,
the VDC system may not operate
indicator may
properly and the
and
indiflash or both the
cator lights may illuminate.
∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for
winter tires or tire chains on a snow
covered road.

BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION
During braking while driving through turns,
the system optimizes the distribution of
force to each of the four wheels depending
on the radius of the turn.

WARNING
∙ The VDC system is designed to help
the driver maintain stability but does
not prevent accidents due to abrupt
steering operation at high speeds or
by careless or dangerous driving
techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and
be especially careful when driving and
cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully.
∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. If suspension parts such as
shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, bushings and wheels are
not NISSAN recommended for your
vehicle or are extremely deteriorated,
the VDC system may not operate
properly. This could adversely affect
vehicle handling performance, and
indicator may flash or both
the
and
indicator lights
the
may illuminate.

∙ If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system
may not operate properly and both
and the
indicator
the
lights may illuminate.
∙ If engine control related parts are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, both the
and
indicator
lights
may
illuminate.
∙ When driving on extremely inclined
surfaces such as higher banked corners, the VDC system may not operate
indicator may
properly and the
and
indiflash or both the
cator lights may illuminate. Do not
drive on these types of roads.
∙ When driving on an unstable surface
such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or
indicator may flash or
ramp, the
and
indicator
both the
lights may illuminate. This is not a
malfunction. Restart the engine after
driving onto a stable surface.

Starting and driving 5-151

CHASSIS CONTROL

∙ If wheels or tires other than the
NISSAN recommended ones are used,
the VDC system may not operate
indicator may
properly and the
and
indiflash or both the
cator lights may illuminate.
∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for
winter tires or tire chains on a snow
covered road.

The chassis control is an electric control
module that includes the following functions:
∙ Intelligent Trace Control
∙ Intelligent Engine Brake
∙ Active Ride Control

INTELLIGENT TRACE CONTROL
(I-TC)
This system senses driving based on the
driver’s steering and acceleration/braking
patterns, and controls brake pressure at
individual wheels to aid tracing at corners
and help smooth vehicle response.
The I-TC can be set to on (enabled) or off
(disabled) through the vehicle information
display “Settings” page. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.
When the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC system, the I-TC is also turned off.

5-152 Starting and driving

INTELLIGENT ENGINE BRAKE (I-EB)
The I-EB function adds subtle deceleration
by controlling Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) gear ratio, depending on the
cornering condition calculated from driver’s steering input and plural sensors. This
benefit is for easier traceability and less
workload of adjusting speed with braking
at corners.
The I-EB also enhances braking feel by
adding subtle deceleration with CVT gear
ratio control according to driver’s brake
pedal operation
LSD2185

When the I-TC is operated and the “Chassis
Control” mode is selected in the vehicle information display, the I-TC graphics are
shown in the vehicle information display.
For additional information, refer to “Vehicle
information display” in the “Instruments
and controls” section of this manual.
If the “Chassis Control System Error: See
Owner’s Manual” warning message appears in the vehicle information display, it
may indicate that the I-TC is not functioning properly. Have the system checked as
soon as possible. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING
The I-TC may not be effective depending on the driving condition. Always
drive carefully and attentively.

The I-EB can be set to on (enabled) or off
(disabled) through the vehicle information
display “Settings” page. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

When the I-TC is operating, you may feel a
pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a
noise. This is normal and indicates that the
I-TC is operating properly.
Even if the I-TC is turned off, some functions
will remain on to assist the driver (for example, avoidance scenes).

Starting and driving 5-153

ACTIVE RIDE CONTROL (ARC)
This system senses upper body motion
(based on wheel speed information) and
controls engine torque and four wheel
brake pressure. This will enhance ride comfort in effort to restrain uncomfortable upper body movement when passing over
undulated road surfaces. This system
comes into effect above 25 mph (40 km/h).
When the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC system, the ARC is also turned off.
LSD2185

When the I-EB is operated at corners and
the “Chassis Control” mode is selected in
the vehicle information display, the I-EB
graphics are shown in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the
“Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.
If the “Chassis Control System Error: See
Owner’s Manual” warning message appears in the vehicle information display, it
may indicate that the I-EB is not functioning properly. Have the system checked as
soon as possible. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

5-154 Starting and driving

WARNING
The I-EB may not be effective depending on the driving condition. Always
drive carefully and attentively.
When the I-EB is operating, the needle of
the tachometer will rise up and you may
hear an engine noise. This is normal and
indicates that the I-EB is operating properly.

HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM
When the ARC is operating, you may hear
noise and sense slight deceleration. This is
normal and indicates that the ARC is operating properly.

LSD2186

When brake control of ARC is operated and
the “Chassis Control” mode is selected in
the vehicle information display, the ARC
graphics are shown in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the
“Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.
If the “Chassis Control System Error: See
Owner’s Manual” warning message appears in the vehicle information display, it
may indicate that the ARC is not functioning properly. Have the system checked as
soon as possible. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LSD2441

WARNING
∙ Never rely solely on the hill start assist
system to prevent the vehicle from
moving backward on a hill. Always
drive carefully and attentively. Depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Be especially careful when stopped on a hill
on frozen or muddy roads. Failure to
prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards may result in a loss of control of
the vehicle and possible serious injury
or death.

Starting and driving 5-155

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

∙ The hill start assist system is not designed to hold the vehicle at a standstill on a hill. Depress the brake pedal
when the vehicle is stopped on a
steep hill. Failure to do so may cause
the vehicle to roll backwards and may
result in a collision or serious personal
injury.

The maximum holding time is 2 seconds.
After 2 seconds the vehicle will begin to roll
back and hill start assist will stop operating
completely.
Hill start assist will not operate when the
shift lever is moved to N (Neutral) or P (Park)
or on a flat and level road.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK
To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply
de-icer through the key hole. If the lock
becomes frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key hole, or use the
NISSAN Intelligent Key®.

ANTIFREEZE

∙ The hill start assist may not prevent
the vehicle from rolling backwards on
a hill under all load or road conditions.
Always be prepared to depress the
brake pedal to prevent the vehicle
from rolling backwards. Failure to do
so may result in a collision or serious
personal injury.

In the winter when it is anticipated that the
temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C),
check the antifreeze to assure proper winter protection. For additional information,
refer to “Engine cooling system” in the “Doit-yourself ” section of this manual.

When the vehicle is stopped on a hill, the hill
start assist system automatically keeps
the brakes applied. This helps prevent the
vehicle from rolling backward in the time it
takes the driver to release the brake pedal
and apply the accelerator.

If the battery is not fully charged during
extremely cold weather conditions, the
battery fluid may freeze and damage the
battery. To maintain maximum efficiency,
the battery should be checked regularly.
For additional information, refer to “Battery”
in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this
manual.

Hill start assist will operate automatically
under the following conditions:
∙ The shift lever is moved to a forward or
reverse gear.
∙ The vehicle is stopped completely on a
hill by applying the brake.

5-156 Starting and driving

BATTERY

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER
If the vehicle is to be left outside without
anti-freeze, drain the cooling system, including the engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle. For additional information, refer to “Changing engine coolant” in
the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual.

TIRE EQUIPMENT
1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to
provide superior performance on dry
pavement. However, the performance
of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions. If
you operate your vehicle on snowy or
icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use
of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES
on all four wheels. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for the tire
type, size, speed rating and availability
information.
2. For additional traction on icy roads,
studded tires may be used. However,
some U.S. states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local,
state and provincial laws before installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studded
snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow
tires.
3. Tire chains may be used. For additional
information, refer to “Tire chains” in the
“Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT
It is recommended that the following items
be carried in the vehicle during winter:
∙ A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove ice and snow from the windows
and wiper blades.
∙ A sturdy, flat board to be placed under
the jack to give it firm support.
∙ A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.
∙ Extra washer fluid to refill
windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

the

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE
WARNING
∙ Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),
very cold snow or ice can be slick and
very hard to drive on. The vehicle will
have much less traction or “grip” under these conditions. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted
or sanded.
∙ Whatever the condition, drive with
caution. Accelerate and slow down
with care. If accelerating or downshifting too fast, the drive wheels will
lose even more traction.
∙ Allow more stopping distance under
these conditions. Braking should be
started sooner than on dry pavement.
∙ Allow greater following distances on
slippery roads.
∙ Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).
These may appear on an otherwise
clear road in shaded areas. If a patch
of ice is seen ahead, brake before
reaching it. Try not to brake while on
the ice, and avoid any sudden steering
maneuvers.

Starting and driving 5-157

∙ Do not use the cruise control (if so
equipped) on slippery roads.
∙ Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
gases under your vehicle. Keep snow
clear of the exhaust pipe and from
around your vehicle.

PARKING BRAKE
CAUTION
When parking in an area where the outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), do
not apply the parking brake to prevent
it from freezing.
For safe parking, place the shift lever in
the P (Park) position and securely block
the wheels.

5-158 Starting and driving

For models equipped with
electronic parking brake system
CAUTION
To keep the electronic parking brake released after the engine is turned off, refer to “Parking brake” in this section.

6 In case of emergency

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Emergency engine shut off (push-button
ignition models only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Run-flat tires (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck
vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF
(push-button ignition models only)
WARNING
∙ If stopping for an emergency, be sure
to move the vehicle well off the road.
∙ Do not use the hazard warning flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you
to drive so slowly that your vehicle
might become a hazard to other
traffic.
∙ Turn signals do not work when the
hazard warning flasher lights are on.

LIC0394

Push the switch on to warn other drivers
when you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.

6-2 In case of emergency

The flashers will operate with the ignition
switch placed in any position.
Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use
of the hazard warning flasher switch
while driving.

To shut off the engine in an emergency
situation while driving, perform the following procedure:
∙ Rapidly push the push-button ignition
switch three consecutive times in less
than 1.5 seconds, or
∙ Push and hold the push-button ignition
switch for more than 2 seconds.

FLAT TIRE
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
This vehicle is equipped with TPMS. It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the
spare. When the low tire pressure warning
light is lit, and the “Tire Pressure Low — Add
Air” (“Flat Tire — Visit Dealer” for vehicles
equipped with run-flat tires) warning appears in the vehicle information display,
one or more of your tires is significantly
under-inflated. If equipped, the system also
displays pressure of all tires (except the
spare tire) on the display screen by sending
a signal from a sensor that is installed in
each wheel. If the vehicle is being driven
with low tire pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure warning light. This system will activate
only when the vehicle is driven at speeds
above 16 mph (25 km/h). For additional information, refer to “Warning lights, indicator
lights and audible reminders” in the “Instruments and controls” section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this
manual.

WARNING
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use
a pacemaker should contact the electric
medical equipment manufacturer for
the possible influences before use.
∙ If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden
steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,
reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to
a safe location and stop the vehicle as
soon as possible. Driving with underinflated tires may permanently damage
the tires and increase the likelihood of
tire failure. Serious vehicle damage
could occur and may lead to an accident
and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four
tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown
on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning
light OFF. If the light still illuminates
while driving after adjusting the tire
pressure, a tire may be flat or the TPMS
may be malfunctioning. If you have a
flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as
soon as possible. If no tire is flat and all
tires are properly inflated, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

∙ When replacing a wheel without TPMS
such as the spare tire, TPMS will not
function and the low tire pressure
warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain
on after 1 minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as
soon as possible. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
these services.
∙ Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect
the proper operation of the TPMS.
∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.

RUN-FLAT TIRES (if so equipped)
Run-flat tires are those tires that can be
used temporarily if they are punctured. For
additional information, refer to “Run-flat
tires” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this
manual.
For additional information, refer to the tire
safety information in the Warranty Information Booklet.

In case of emergency 6-3

WARNING
∙ Although you can continue driving
with a punctured run-flat tire, remember that vehicle handling stability is
reduced, which could lead to an accident and personal injury. Also, driving
a long distance at high speeds may
damage the tires.
∙ Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not drive more than
approximately 93 miles (150 km) with
a punctured run-flat tire. The actual
distance the vehicle can be driven on
a flat tire depends on outside temperature, vehicle load, road conditions
and other factors.

CAUTION
∙ Never install tire chains on a punctured run-flat tire, as this could damage your vehicle.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic
and to signal professional road assistance personnel that you need assistance.

∙ Avoid diving over any projection or
pothole, as the clearance between the
vehicle and the ground is smaller than
normal.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away
from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

∙ Drive safely at reduced speeds. Avoid
hard cornering or braking, which may
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

∙ If you detect any unusual sounds or
vibrations while driving with a punctured run-flat tire, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop the vehicle as
soon as possible. The tire may be seriously damaged and need to be
replaced.

Stopping the vehicle

6-4 In case of emergency

4. Turn off the engine.

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions
below:

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and
away from traffic.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
3. Park on a level surface and apply the
parking brake. Move the shift lever to P
(Park).

WARNING
∙ Make sure the parking brake is securely applied and the shift lever is
shifted into P (Park).
∙ Never change tires when the vehicle is
on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is
hazardous.
∙ Never change tires if oncoming traffic
is close to your vehicle. Wait for professional road assistance.

LCE2142

Blocks

Flat tire

Blocking wheels
Place suitable blocks at both the front and
back of the wheel diagonally opposite the
flat tire to prevent the vehicle from moving
when it is jacked up.

LCE2111

LIC2640

Getting the spare tire and tools (if
so equipped)

1. The jack and tool kit are located in the
storage compartment to the left.

Open the rear liftgate. Remove the DivideN-Hide® floor. For additional information,
refer to “Divide-N-Hide® adjustable floor” in
the “Instruments and controls” section of
this manual.

2. Remove the storage door by pressing
A simultanethe two release tabs 䊊
ously.

Lift the floorboard.

WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle
may move and result in personal injury.

In case of emergency 6-5

LCE2112

B restraining the jack
3. Unhook the clip 䊊
and tool kit.

4. Remove the tool kit.

LCE2247

WCE0188

5. Remove the jack by turning the spindle
C
counterclockwise, relieving the
䊊
pressure on the jack.

6. To loosen the bolt, turn counterclockwise.
7. Once loosened, remove the bolt.
8. Remove the spare tire.
9. Once the flat tire is exchanged with the
spare tire, store the flat tire where the
spare tire was located.
10. Turn the bolt clockwise to tighten.

6-6 In case of emergency

LCE2109

Changing the spare tire with
BOSE® sub-woofer (if so
equipped)

LCE2110

3. Place the sub-woofer in the upper right
corner of the cargo space, leaning
against the 2nd row passenger side
seat.

1. To loosen the bolt, turn counterclockwise.

4. Remove the spare tire.

2. Once loosened, remove the bolt.

5. Once the flat tire is exchanged with the
spare tire, store the flat tire where the
spare was located.
6. Place the sub-woofer inside the flat tire.
7. Turn the bolt clockwise to tighten.

SCE0630

Removing wheel cover (if so
equipped)
CAUTION
Do not use your hands to pry off wheel
caps or wheel covers. Doing so could
result in personal injury.
To remove the wheel cover, use the jacking
1 .
rod 䊊
2 between the wheel and
Apply cloth 䊊
jacking rod to prevent damaging the wheel
and wheel cover.
Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover
or wheel surface.

In case of emergency 6-7

Jacking up vehicle and removing
the damaged tire
WARNING

LCE2380

∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by the jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands.
∙ Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the
jack provided with your vehicle on other
vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting
only your vehicle during a tire change.
∙ Use the correct jack-up points. Never
use any other part of the vehicle for
jack support.
∙ Never jack up the vehicle more than
necessary.
∙ Never use blocks on or under the jack.
∙ Do not start or run the engine while vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the vehicle to move. This is especially true for
vehicles with limited slip differentials.
∙ Do not allow passengers to stay in the
vehicle while it is on the jack.
∙ Never run the engine with a wheel(s)
off the ground. It may cause the vehicle to move.

6-8 In case of emergency

SCE0002

Always refer to the illustrations for the correct placement and jack-up points for your
specific vehicle model and jack type.
Carefully read the caution label attached
to the jack body and the following instructions.
1. Loosen each wheel nut 1 or 2 turns by
turning counterclockwise with the
wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the
wheel nuts until the tire is off the
ground.

2. Place the jack directly under the
jack-up point so the top of the jack
contacts the vehicle at the jack-up
point. Align the jack head between the
2 notches in the front or the rear. Also fit
the groove of the jack head between
the notches.

WCE0056

Installing the spare tire (if so
equipped)
The spare tire is designed for emergency
use. For additional information, refer to
“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.

The jack should be used on firm and
level ground.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface
between the wheel and hub.

3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack
lever and rod with both hands. Carefully
raise the vehicle until the tire clears the
ground. Remove the wheel nuts, and
then remove the tire.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and
tighten the wheel nuts finger tight.

In case of emergency 6-9

JUMP STARTING
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten
wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the
sequence illustrated until they are tight
A ,䊊
B ,䊊
C ,䊊
D ,䊊
E ).
(䊊
4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire
touches the ground. Then, with the
wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel
nuts securely in the sequence illusA ,䊊
B ,䊊
C ,䊊
D ,䊊
E ). Lower the vetrated (䊊
hicle completely.
5. Securely store the jacking equipment
in the vehicle. When storing the tool kit,
it is requested to tighten the bag securely with the attached band to prevent movement of the tools, otherwise
noise may occur.
NOTE:
You may need to remove the wheel cap
in order to secure the damaged tire using the spare tire clamp.

WARNING
∙ Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the
wheel to become loose or come off.
This could cause an accident.

6-10 In case of emergency

∙ Do not use oil or grease on the wheel
studs or nuts. This could cause the
nuts to become loose.
∙ Retighten the wheel nuts when the
vehicle has been driven for 600 miles
(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,
etc.).
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel
nuts to the specified torque with a
torque wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
83 ft-lb (113 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened
to specification at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to
specifications at each lubrication interval.
Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.
COLD pressure: After vehicle has been
parked for 3 hours or more or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km).
COLD tire pressures are shown on the tire
and loading information label affixed to
the driver side center pillar.

To start your engine with a booster battery,
the instructions and precautions below
must be followed.

WARNING
∙ If done incorrectly, jump starting can
lead to a battery explosion, resulting
in severe injury or death. It could also
damage your vehicle.
∙ Explosive hydrogen gas is always
present in the vicinity of the battery.
Keep all sparks and flames away from
the battery.
∙ Do not allow battery fluid to come into
contact with eyes, skin, clothing or
painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a
corrosive sulfuric acid solution which
can cause severe burns. If the fluid
should come into contact with anything, immediately flush the contacted area with water.
∙ Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
∙ The booster battery must be rated at
12 volts. Use of an improperly rated
battery can damage your vehicle.

∙ Whenever working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protectors (for example, goggles or industrial safety spectacles) and remove
rings, metal bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean over the battery
when jump starting.
∙ Do not attempt to jump start a frozen
battery. It could explode and cause
serious injury.
∙ Your vehicle has an automatic engine
cooling fan. It could come on at any
time. Keep hands and other objects
away from it.

LCE2223

WARNING
Always follow the instructions below.
Failure to do so could result in damage
to the charging system and cause personal injury.
1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, position the two vehicles to bring
their batteries near each other.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift
lever to P (Park). Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems (lights, heater,
air conditioner, etc.).
3. Ensure the vent caps are level and
tight.
4. Connect the jumper cables in the seA ,䊊
B ,䊊
C ,䊊
D ).
quence illustrated (䊊

Do not allow the two vehicles to
touch.

In case of emergency 6-11

PUSH STARTING

CAUTION
∙ Always connect positive (⫹) to positive (⫹) and negative (⫺) to body
ground (for example, strut mounting
bolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) — not to
the battery.
∙ Make sure the jumper cables do not
touch moving parts in the engine
compartment and that the cable
clamps do not contact any other
metal.

CAUTION
∙ Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) models cannot be push-started
or tow-started. Attempting to do so
may cause transmission damage.
∙ Do not push start this vehicle. The
three-way catalyst may be damaged.

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

WARNING
∙ Do not continue to drive if your vehicle
overheats. Doing so could cause engine damage or a vehicle fire.
∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never remove the radiator or coolant
reservoir cap while the engine is still
hot. When the radiator or coolant reservoir cap is removed, pressurized hot
water will spurt out, possibly causing
serious injury.

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and let it run for a few minutes.

∙ Do not open the hood if steam is coming out.

6. Keep the engine speed of the booster
vehicle at about 2,000 rpm and start
the engine of the vehicle being jump
started.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by
an extremely high temperature gauge
reading), or if you feel a lack of engine
power, detect abnormal noise, etc. take the
following steps:

CAUTION
Do not keep the starter motor engaged
for more than 10 seconds. If the engine
does not start right away, place the ignition switch in the OFF position and
wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.
7. After starting the engine, carefully disconnect the negative cable and then
the positive cable.

6-12 In case of emergency

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply the parking brake and move the
shift lever to P (Park).
Do not stop the engine.
2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the
windows, move the heater or air conditioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to high
speed.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen
for steam or coolant escaping from the
radiator before opening the hood. If
steam or coolant is escaping, turn off
the engine. Do not open the hood further until no steam or coolant can be
seen.
4. Open the engine hood.

WARNING
If steam or water is coming from the
engine, stand clear to prevent getting
burned.
5. Visually check drive belts for damage
or looseness. Also check if the cooling
fan is running. The radiator hoses and
radiator should not leak water. If coolant is leaking, the water pump belt is
missing or loose, or the cooling fan
does not run, stop the engine.

WARNING
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,
jewelry or clothing to come into contact
with, or get caught in, engine belts or
the engine cooling fan. The engine cooling fan can start at any time.

6. After the engine cools down, check the
coolant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank with the engine running.
Add coolant to the engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary. Have your vehicle repaired. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

When towing your vehicle, all jurisdictional
and local regulations for towing must be
followed. Incorrect towing equipment
could damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are available from a NISSAN
dealer. Local service operators are generally familiar with the applicable laws and
procedures for towing. To assure proper
towing and to prevent accidental damage
to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service operator tow your vehicle. It is
advisable to have the service operator
carefully read the following precautions:

WARNING
∙ Never ride in a vehicle that is being
towed.
∙ Never get under your vehicle after it
has been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION
∙ When towing, make sure that the
transmission, axles, steering system
and powertrain are in working condition. If any of these conditions apply,
dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be
used.
∙ Always attach safety chains before
towing.

In case of emergency 6-13

For additional information, refer to “Flat
towing for All-Wheel drive vehicle” or “Flat
towing for front wheel drive vehicle” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY
NISSAN
NISSAN recommends towing your vehicle
based upon the type of drivetrain. For additional information, refer to the diagrams in
this section to ensure that your vehicle is
properly towed.
LCE2238

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models with
Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT)
NISSAN recommends that towing dollies
be used when towing your vehicle or place
the vehicle on a flatbed truck as illustrated.

6-14 In case of emergency

CAUTION
Never tow AWD models equipped with a
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) with any of the wheels on the
ground as this may cause serious and
expensive damage to the transfer case
and transmission.

∙ When towing Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) models with the
rear wheels on the ground or on towing dollies:

LCE2239

Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) models
with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT)
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be
towed with the driving (front) wheels off the
ground or place the vehicle on a flatbed
truck as illustrated.

CAUTION
∙ Never tow Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) models with the
front wheels on the ground or four
wheels on the ground (forward or
backward), as this may cause serious
and expensive damage to the transmission. If it is necessary to tow the
vehicle with the rear wheels raised always use towing dollies under the
front wheels.

– Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position, and secure the steering
wheel in a straight-ahead position
with a rope or similar device. Never
secure the steering wheel by placing the ignition switch in the LOCK
position. This may damage the
steering lock mechanism (for
models with a steering lock
mechanism).

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a
stuck vehicle)
WARNING
To avoid vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when recovering a
stuck vehicle:
∙ Contact a professional towing service
to recover the vehicle if you have any
questions regarding the recovery
procedure.

In case of emergency 6-15

∙ Tow chains or cables must be attached only to main structural members of the vehicle.
∙ Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to
tow or free a stuck vehicle.
∙ Only use devices specifically designed
for vehicle recovery and follow the
manufacturer’s instructions.
∙ Always pull the recovery device
straight out from the front of the vehicle. Never pull at an angle.
∙ Route recovery devices so they do not
touch any part of the vehicle except
the attachment point.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,
etc., use a tow strap or other device designed specifically for vehicle recovery. Always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the recovery device.

Rocking a stuck vehicle
WARNING
∙ Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
∙ Do not spin your tires at high speed.
This could cause them to explode and
result in serious injury. Parts of your
vehicle could also overheat and be
damaged.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,
etc., use the following procedure:
1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) system.
2. Make sure the area in front and behind
the vehicle is clear of obstructions.
3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear an area around the front tires.
4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and
backward.
∙ Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and D (Drive).
∙ Apply the accelerator as little as possible to maintain the rocking motion.

6-16 In case of emergency

∙ Release the accelerator pedal before
shifting between R (Reverse) and D
(Drive).
∙ Do not spin the tires above 35 mph
(55 km/h).
5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a
few tries, contact a professional towing
service to remove the vehicle.

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped) . . . . . . .
Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-2
7-2
7-2
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-4

Air fresheners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floor mats (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the seat tracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Most common factors contributing to
vehicle corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environmental factors influence the
rate of corrosion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . .

7-4
7-5
7-6
7-7
7-7
7-7
7-7
7-7

CLEANING EXTERIOR
In order to maintain the appearance of
your vehicle, it is important to take proper
care of it.
To protect the paint surfaces, please wash
your vehicle as soon as you can:
∙ After a rainfall to prevent possible damage from acid rain.
∙ After driving on coastal roads.
∙ When contaminants such as soot, bird
droppings, tree sap, metal particles or
bugs get on the paint surface.
∙ When dust or mud builds up on the surface.
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area.
When it is necessary to park outside, park in
a shady area or protect the vehicle with a
body cover.
Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the
body cover.

WASHING
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty
of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or
general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed
with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.

CAUTION
∙ Do not use car washes that use acid in
the detergent. Some car washes, especially brushless ones, use some
acid for cleaning. The acid may react
with some plastic vehicle components, causing them to crack. This
could affect their appearance, and
also could cause them not to function
properly. Always check with your car
wash to confirm that acid is not used.

∙ Avoid using tight-napped or rough
cloths, such as washing mitts. Care
must be taken when removing
caked-on dirt or other foreign substances so the paint surface is not
scratched or damaged.
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of
clean water.
Inside edges, seams and folds on the
doors, hatches and hood are particularly
vulnerable to the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas must be cleaned regularly.
Take care that the drain holes in the lower
edge of the door are open. Spray water
under the body and in the wheel wells to
loosen the dirt and wash away road salt.
A damp chamois can be used to dry the
vehicle to avoid water spots.

∙ Do not wash the vehicle with strong
household soap, strong chemical detergents, gasoline or solvents.

WAXING

∙ Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or while the vehicle body is hot,
as the surface may become
water-spotted.

Regular waxing protects the paint surface
and helps retain new vehicle appearance.
Polishing is recommended to remove
built-up wax residue and to avoid a weathered appearance before re-applying wax.
A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing
the proper product.

7-2 Appearance and care

∙ Wax your vehicle only after a thorough
washing. Follow the instructions supplied with the wax.
∙ Do not use a wax containing any abrasives, cutting compounds or cleaners
that may damage the vehicle finish.
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

REMOVING SPOTS
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,
insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible
from the surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or staining. Special cleaning
products are available at a NISSAN dealer
or any automotive accessory store. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for these products.

UNDERBODY
In areas where road salt is used in winter, it
is necessary to clean the underbody regularly in order to prevent dirt and salt from
building up and causing the acceleration of
corrosion on the underbody and suspension. Before the winter period and again in
the spring, the underseal must be checked
and, if necessary, re-treated.

GLASS

CAUTION

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and
dust film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to become coated with a film
after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun.
Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily
remove this film.

CAUTION
When cleaning the inside of the windows, do not use sharp-edged tools,
abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based
disinfectant cleaners. They could damage the electrical conductors, radio antenna elements or rear window defroster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS (if so
equipped)
Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge
dampened in a mild soap solution, especially during winter months in areas where
road salt is used. If not removed, road salt
can discolor the wheels.

Follow the directions below to avoid
staining or discoloring the wheels:
∙ Do not use a cleaner that uses strong
acid or alkali contents to clean the
wheels.
∙ Do not apply wheel cleaners to the
wheels when they are hot. The wheel
temperature should be the same as
ambient temperature.
∙ Rinse the wheel to completely remove
the cleaner within 15 minutes after
the cleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTS
Clean all chrome parts regularly with a
non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain
the finish.

TIRE DRESSINGS
NISSAN does not recommend the use of
tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a
coating to the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rubber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may react with the coating and form a compound. This compound
may come off the tire while driving and
stain the vehicle paint.

Appearance and care 7-3

CLEANING INTERIOR
If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the
following precautions:
∙ Use a water-based tire dressing. The
coating on the tire dissolves more easily
than with an oil-based tire dressing.
∙ Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help
prevent it from entering the tire
tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to remove).
∙ Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry
towel. Make sure the tire dressing is
completely removed from the tire
tread/grooves.
∙ Allow the tire dressing to dry as recommended by the tire dressing manufacturer.

Occasionally remove loose dust from the
interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a
vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe
the vinyl and leather (if so equipped) surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in
mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a
dry, soft cloth.
Regular care and cleaning is required in
order to maintain the appearance of the
leather (if so equipped).
Before using any fabric protector, read the
manufacturer’s recommendations. Some
fabric protectors contain chemicals that
may stain or bleach the seat material.
Use a cloth dampened only with water to
clean the meter and gauge lens.

WARNING
Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can
damage the seat or occupant classification sensor. This can also affect the
operation of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury.

7-4 Appearance and care

CAUTION
∙ Never use benzine, thinner or any
similar material.
∙ Small dirt particles can be abrasive
and damaging to leather surfaces
and should be removed promptly. Do
not use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents,
detergents or ammonia-based cleaners as they may damage the leather’s
natural finish.
∙ Never use fabric protectors unless
recommended by the manufacturer.
∙ Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on
meter or gauge lens covers. It may
damage the lens cover.

AIR FRESHENERS
Most air fresheners use a solvent that
could affect the vehicle interior. If you use
an air freshener, take the following precautions:
∙ Hanging-type air fresheners can cause
permanent discoloration when they
contact vehicle interior surfaces. Place
the air freshener in a location that allows it to hang free and not contact an
interior surface.

∙ Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip
on the vents. These products can cause
immediate damage and discoloration
when spilled on interior surfaces.

∙ Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats,
or equivalent floor mats, that are specifically designed for use in your vehicle model and model year.

Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s instructions before using the air fresheners.

∙ Properly position the mats in the
floorwell using the floor mat positioning hook. For additional information,
refer to "Floor mat installation" in this
section.
∙ Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with pedal operation.
LAI2007

FLOOR MATS (if so equipped)
WARNING
To avoid potential pedal interference
that may result in a collision, injury or
death:
∙ NEVER place a floor mat on top of another floor mat in the driver front position or install them upside down or
backwards.

∙ Periodically check the floor mats to
make sure they are properly installed.
∙ After cleaning the vehicle interior,
check the floor mats to make sure
they are properly installed.
The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats can
extend the life of your vehicle carpet and
make it easier to clean the interior. Mats
should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they become excessively worn.

Appearance and care 7-5

Floor mat installation
Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat positioning hook(s). The number and shape of
the floor mat positioning hooks for each
seating position varies depending on the
vehicle.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for details about installing the floor
mats in your vehicle.

When installing Genuine NISSAN floor mats,
follow the installation instructions provided
with the mat and the following:
1. With the ignition in the OFF position, the
shift lever in P (Park) position and with
the parking brake fully applied, position
the floor mat in the floorwell so that the
floor mat grommet holes are aligned
with the hook(s).
2. Secure the grommet holes into the
hook(s) and ensure that the floor mat is
properly positioned.
3. Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with pedal operation. With the ignition still in the OFF position, the shift
lever in the P (Park) position and with
the parking brake applied, fully apply
and release all pedals. The floor mat
must not interfere with pedal operation or prevent the pedal from returning to its normal position.

7-6 Appearance and care

LAI2046

Positioning hooks
The illustration shows the location of the
floor mat positioning hooks.

SEAT BELTS
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping
them with a sponge dampened in a mild
soap solution. Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade before using them. For
additional information, refer to “Seat belt
maintenance” in the “Safety—Seats, seat
belts and supplemental restraint system”
section of this manual.

CORROSION PROTECTION

WARNING
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in
the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or
chemical solvents to clean the seat
belts, since these materials may severely weaken the seat belt webbing.

CLEANING THE SEAT TRACKS
CAUTION
Periodically clean the seat tracks to prevent reduction of ability to move the
seats.
Clean periodically with a high-powered
vacuum cleaner. Dirt and debris may reduce the ability to adjust the seat. A wet
cleansing agent may be used if necessary.

MOST COMMON FACTORS
CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE
CORROSION

freezing and where atmospheric pollution
exists and road salt is used.

Most vehicle corrosion is caused by:

High temperatures accelerate the rate of
corrosion to those parts which are not well
ventilated.

∙ The
accumulation
of
moistureretaining dirt and debris in body panel
sections, cavities, and other areas.
∙ Damage to paint and other protective
coatings caused by gravel and stone
chips or minor traffic collisions.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
INFLUENCE THE RATE OF
CORROSION
Moisture
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on
the vehicle body underside can accelerate
corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry
completely inside the vehicle and should
be removed for drying to avoid floor panel
corrosion.

Temperature

Air pollution
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in
the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt
use accelerates the corrosion process.
Road salt also accelerates the disintegration of paint surfaces.

PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM
CORROSION
∙ Wash and wax your vehicle often to
keep the vehicle clean.
∙ Always check for minor damage to the
paint and repair it as soon as possible.

Relative humidity

∙ Keep drain holes at the bottom of the
doors open to avoid water accumulation.

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of
high relative humidity, especially those areas where the temperatures stay above

∙ Check the underbody for accumulation
of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with
water as soon as possible.

Appearance and care 7-7

CAUTION
∙ NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose.
Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or
broom.
∙ Never allow water or other liquids to
come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may
damage them.
Chemicals used for road surface de-icing
are extremely corrosive. They accelerate
corrosion and deterioration of underbody
components such as the exhaust system,
fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan
and fenders.
In winter, the underbody must be
cleaned periodically.
For additional protection against rust and
corrosion, which may be required in some
areas, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer.

7-8 Appearance and care

8 Do-it-yourself

Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Changing engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir. . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Variable voltage control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Air cleaner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Brakes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Passenger compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
NISSAN Intelligent Key® (if so equipped) . . . . . . 8-24
NISSAN jackknife key (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 8-26
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Headlights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Fog lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28
Exterior and interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Tire labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40
Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take
care to prevent serious accidental injury to
yourself or damage to the vehicle. The following are general precautions which
should be closely observed.

WARNING
∙ Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the parking brake securely and
block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. Move the shift lever to P (Park).
∙ Be sure the ignition switch is in the
OFF or LOCK position when performing any parts replacement or repairs.
∙ If you must work with the engine running, keep your hands, clothing, hair
and tools away from moving fans,
belts and any other moving parts.
∙ It is advisable to secure or remove any
loose clothing and remove any jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc. before working on your vehicle.
∙ Always wear eye protection whenever
you work on your vehicle.

8-2 Do-it-yourself

∙ Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic engine cooling fan. It may come
on at any time without warning, even
if the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the engine is not running.
To avoid injury, always disconnect the
negative battery cable before working near the fan.
∙ If you must run the engine in an enclosed space such as a garage, be sure
there is proper ventilation for exhaust
gases to escape.
∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by a jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands.
∙ Keep smoking materials, flame and
sparks away from the fuel tank and
battery.
∙ Because the fuel lines on gasoline engine models are under high pressure
even when the engine is off, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for service of the fuel filter or fuel lines.

CAUTION
∙ Do not work under the hood while the
engine is hot. Turn the engine off and
wait until it cools down.

∙ Avoid contact with used engine oil
and coolant. Improperly disposed engine oil, engine coolant and/or other
vehicle fluids can damage the environment. Always conform to local
regulations for disposal of vehicle
fluid.
∙ Never leave the engine or Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) related component harnesses disconnected while the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
∙ Never connect or disconnect the battery or any transistorized component
while the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
This “Do-it-yourself ” section gives instructions regarding only those items which are
relatively easy for an owner to perform.
You should be aware that incomplete or
improper servicing may result in operating
difficulties or excessive emissions, and
could affect warranty coverage. If in doubt
about any servicing, it is recommended
that you have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
QR25DE engine

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

Engine coolant reservoir
Engine oil filler cap
Brake fluid reservoir
Battery
Air cleaner
Fuse/Fusible link box
Radiator cap
Engine oil dipstick
Drive belt location
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

* Engine cover removed for clarity.

LDI2809

Do-it-yourself 8-3

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
The engine cooling system is filled at the
factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50%
Genuine
NISSAN
Long
Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and 50% water to
provide year-round antifreeze and coolant
protection. The antifreeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional engine cooling system additives are
not necessary.

WARNING
∙ Never remove the radiator or coolant
reservoir cap when the engine is hot.
Wait until the engine and radiator cool
down. Serious burns could be caused
by high pressure fluid escaping from
the radiator. For additional information on precautions, refer to “If your
vehicle overheats” in the “In case of
emergency” section of this manual.
∙ The radiator is equipped with a pressure type radiator cap. To prevent engine damage, use only a Genuine
NISSAN radiator cap.

8-4 Do-it-yourself

CAUTION
∙ Never use any cooling system additives such as radiator sealer. Additives
may clog the cooling system and
cause damage to the engine, transmission and/or cooling system.
∙ When adding or replacing coolant, be
sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or
equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is prediluted to provide antifreeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). If additional
freeze protection is needed due to
weather where you operate your vehicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) concentrate following the directions on the
container. If an equivalent coolant
other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, follow the coolant manufacturer’s instructions to maintain minimum antifreeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). The
use of other types of coolant solutions other than Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or
equivalent may damage the engine
cooling system.

∙ The life expectancy of the factory-fill
coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km)
or 7 years. Mixing any other type of
coolant other than Genuine NISSAN
Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue),
including Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use
of non-distilled water will reduce the
life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For additional information, refer
to the "Maintenance and schedules"
section of this manual.

For additional information on the location
of the engine coolant reservoir, refer to “Engine compartment check locations” in this
section.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
A NISSAN dealer can change the engine
coolant. The service procedure can be
found in the NISSAN Service Manual.
Improper servicing can result in reduced
heater performance and engine overheating.
LDI2810

Type A (if so equipped)

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT
LEVEL
Check the coolant level in the reservoir
when the engine is cold. If the coolant
B , add coolant
level is below the MIN level 䊊
A . If the reservoir is empty,
to the MAX level 䊊
check the coolant level in the radiator
when the engine is cold. If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator
with coolant up to the filler opening and
also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX
A .
level 䊊

LDI3211

Type B (if so equipped)
This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant is
105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing
any other type of coolant or the use of
non-distilled water will reduce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For additional information, refer to the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this
manual.
If the cooling system frequently requires
coolant, have it checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.

WARNING
∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never change the coolant when the
engine is hot.
∙ Never remove the radiator or engine
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be
caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator.
∙ Avoid direct skin contact with used
coolant. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner
as soon as possible.
∙ Keep coolant out of the reach of children and pets.

Do-it-yourself 8-5

ENGINE OIL
Engine coolant must be disposed of properly. Check your local regulations.

LDI2811

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it
reaches operating temperature.
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than
10 minutes for the oil to drain back
into the oil pan.
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.
Reinsert it all the way.

8-6 Do-it-yourself

LDI2812

5. Remove the dipstick again and check
the oil level. It should be between the H
B . This is the
(High) and L (Low) marks 䊊
normal operating oil level range. If the
A ,
oil level is below the L (Low) mark 䊊
remove the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil through the opening.
C .
Do not overfill 䊊
6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.
It is normal to add some oil between oil
maintenance intervals or during the
break-in period, depending on the severity of operating conditions.

A by turning it
3. Remove the oil filler cap 䊊
counterclockwise.

CAUTION
Oil level should be checked regularly.
Operating the engine with an insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered
by warranty.

4. Place a large drain pan under the drain
B.
plug 䊊

B with a
5. Remove the drain plug 䊊
wrench by turning it counterclockwise
and completely drain the oil.

If the oil filter is to be changed, remove
and replace it at this time. For additional information, refer to “Changing
engine oil filter” in this section.
∙ Waste oil must be disposed of properly.
∙ Check your local regulations.

WARNING
∙ Prolonged and repeated contact with
used engine oil may cause skin
cancer.
LDI2813

CHANGING ENGINE OIL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it
reaches operating temperature, then
turn it off.

∙ Try to avoid direct skin contact with
used oil. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner
as soon as possible.
∙ Keep used engine oil out of reach of
children.

Do-it-yourself 8-7

CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine oil may be hot.
6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a
new washer. Securely tighten the drain
plug with a wrench. Do not use excessive force.

8. Start the engine. Check for leakage
around the drain plug and oil filter. Correct as required.
9. Turn the engine off and wait more than
10 minutes. Check the oil level with the
dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.

Drain plug tightening torque:
25 ft-lb (34 N·m)
7. Refill engine with recommended oil
through the oil filler opening, then install
the oil filler cap securely.
For additional information on drain
and refill capacity, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
The drain and refill capacity depends
on the oil temperature and drain time.
Use these specifications for reference
only. Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is
in the engine.

LDI2814

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake.
2. Turn the engine off.

8-8 Do-it-yourself

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID
3. Place a large drain pan under the oil
B.
filter 䊊

A from the right engine
4. Remove pins 䊊
protector located inside right wheel
well, remove protector. Remove oil filter
B with an oil filter wrench by turning it
䊊
counterclockwise. Then remove the oil
filter by turning it by hand.

CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine oil may be hot.
5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface
with a clean rag.

CAUTION
∙ Be sure to remove any old gasket
material remaining on the sealing
surface of the engine. Failure to do
so could lead to an oil leak and engine damage.
∙ The dipstick must be inserted in
place to prevent oil spillage from
the dipstick hole when filling the
engine with oil.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with
clean engine oil.
7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten an additional
2/3 turn.
8. Start the engine and check for leakage
around the oil filter. Correct as required.
9. Turn the engine off and wait more than
10 minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if necessary.

CAUTION
∙ NISSAN recommends using Genuine
NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or equivalent)
ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with
other fluids.
∙ Do not use Automatic Transmission
Fluid (ATF) or manual transmission
fluid in a NISSAN CVT, as it may damage the CVT. Damage caused by the
use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under
NISSAN’s
New
Vehicle
Limited
Warranty.
∙ Using fluids that are not equivalent to
Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may
also damage the CVT. Damage caused
by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under
NISSAN’s
New
Vehicle
Limited
Warranty.
When checking or replacement of CVT fluid
is required, it is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Do-it-yourself 8-9

BRAKE FLUID

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

CAUTION
Do not spill the fluid on any painted surfaces. This will damage the paint. If fluid
is spilled, immediately wash the surface
with water.
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the
B , the
brake fluid is below the MIN line 䊊
brake warning light will illuminate. Add
A . For addibrake fluid up to the MAX line 䊊
tional information on brake fluid type, refer
to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and
capacities” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
LDI2815

WARNING
∙ Use only new fluid from a sealed container. Old, inferior or contaminated
fluid may damage the brake system.
The use of improper fluids can damage the brake system and affect the
vehicle’s stopping ability.
∙ Clean the filler cap before removing.
∙ Brake fluid is poisonous and should
be stored carefully in marked containers out of reach of children.

8-10 Do-it-yourself

If the brake fluid must be added frequently,
the brake system should be thoroughly
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

LDI3130

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
RESERVOIR
Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir
periodically. Add windshield-washer fluid
when the low windshield-washer fluid
warning light (if so equipped) comes on or
the “Low Washer Fluid” warning message (if
so equipped) shows on the vehicle information display or when there is no fluid in
the dip tube.

To check the fluid level with the dip tube,
A of
use your finger to plug the center hole 䊊
the cap/tube assembly, then remove it
from the reservoir. If there is no fluid in the
dip tube, add fluid.
To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir,
lift the cap off the reservoir and pour the
windshield-washer fluid into the reservoir
opening.
Add a washer solvent to the washer for
better cleaning. In the winter season, add a
windshield washer antifreeze. Follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for the mixture ratio.
Refill the reservoir more frequently when
driving conditions require an increased
amount of windshield-washer fluid.
Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN
Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner &
Antifreeze or equivalent.

CAUTION
∙ Do not substitute engine antifreeze
coolant for windshield-washer fluid.
This may result in damage to the
paint.
∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir with washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl
alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the
grille if spilled while filling the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
∙ Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates
with water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before pouring the
fluid into the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir. Do not use the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir to mix the
washer fluid concentrate and water.

Do-it-yourself 8-11

BATTERY

Caution symbols for battery
1
䊊

No smoking, No exposed flames, No
Sparks

WARNING
Do not expose the battery to flames or electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas generated by the battery is
explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.

2
䊊

Shield eyes

Handle the battery cautiously. Always wear eye protection glasses to protect against explosion or
battery acid.

3
䊊

Keep away from children

Never allow children to handle the battery. Keep the battery out of the reach of children.

4
䊊

Battery acid

5
䊊

Note operating instructions

6
䊊

Explosive gas

8-12 Do-it-yourself

Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. After handling the
battery or battery cap, immediately wash your hands thoroughly. If the battery fluid gets into your
eyes, or onto your skin or clothing, flush with water immediately for at least 15 minutes and seek
medical attention. Battery fluid is acid. If the battery fluid gets into your eyes or onto your skin, it
could cause loss of your eyesight or burns.
Before handling the battery, read this instruction carefully to ensure correct and safe handling.

Hydrogen gas generated by battery fluid is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or
injury.

∙ If the battery is labeled "do not open" it
is maintenance free and battery fluid
should not be checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
or a qualified specialist workshop to
confirm the battery’s performance.
∙ Keep the battery surface clean and dry.
Clean the battery with a solution of baking soda and water.
∙ Make certain the terminal connections
are clean and securely tightened.
∙ If the vehicle is not to be used for
30 days or longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal cable to prevent
discharge.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions
such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not
running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD
players, etc.)

In these cases, the battery may need to
be charged to maintain battery health.

WARNING
∙ Do not expose the battery to flames,
an electrical spark or a cigarette. Hydrogen gas generated by the battery
is explosive. Explosive gases can
cause blindness or injury. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your skin,
eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can cause blindness or injury. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your
eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If
the acid contacts your eyes, skin or
clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek
medical attention.

∙ Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
∙ Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
∙ Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent
caps tight and the battery level.

∙ Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid
in the battery is low. Low battery fluid
can cause a higher load on the battery
which can generate heat, reduce battery life, and in some cases lead to an
explosion.
∙ When working on or near a battery,
always wear suitable eye protection
and remove all jewelry.

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or
only driven short distances.

Do-it-yourself 8-13

WDI0224

Battery (Type A) (if so equipped)

LDI3226

Battery (Type B) (if so equipped)
1. For Type A batteries, remove the vent
lids with a screwdriver as shown. Use a
cloth to protect the battery case. For
Type B batteries, twist off the vent caps
as shown.
WDI0529

2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is
necessary to add fluid, add only distilled water to bring the level up to the
bottom of the filler opening. Do not
overfill. Reinstall the vent caps.

8-14 Do-it-yourself

JUMP STARTING

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or
under severe conditions require frequent
checks of the battery fluid level.

If jump starting is necessary, refer to “Jump
starting” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. If the engine does not
start by jump starting, the battery may
have to be replaced. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LDI2817

Battery (Type C) (if so equipped)
NOTE:
Do not try to open the top of the battery.
The Type C battery is not equipped with
removable vent caps. If low battery fluid is
suspected, it is recommended you see a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

Do-it-yourself 8-15

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL
SYSTEM

DRIVE BELT
The current sensor is located near the battery along the negative battery cable. If you
add electrical accessories to your vehicle,
be sure to ground them to a suitable body
ground such as the frame or engine block
area.

LDI2130

LDI2178

CAUTION
∙ Do not ground accessories directly to
the battery terminal. Doing so will bypass the variable voltage control system and the vehicle battery may not
charge completely.
∙ Use electrical accessories with the engine running to avoid discharging the
vehicle battery.
Your vehicle is equipped with a variable
A . This system
voltage control system 䊊
measures the amount of electrical discharge from the battery and controls voltage generated by the generator.

8-16 Do-it-yourself

QR25DE engine

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Crankshaft pulley
Drive belt automatic tensioner pulley
Water pump pulley
Generator pulley
Air conditioner compressor pulley
WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is placed in
the OFF or LOCK position before servicing drive belt. The engine could rotate
unexpectedly.

SPARK PLUGS
1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If
the belt is in poor condition or is loose,
have it replaced or adjusted. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.

WARNING
Be sure the engine and ignition switch
are off and that the parking brake is
engaged securely.

CAUTION

2. Have the belt checked regularly for
condition and tension in accordance
with the maintenance schedule found
in the "Maintenance and schedules"
section of this manual.

Be sure to use the correct socket to remove the spark plugs. An incorrect
socket can damage the spark plugs.
If replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
SDI1895

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
Iridium-tipped spark plugs
It is not necessary to replace iridiumA spark plugs as frequently as contipped 䊊
ventional type spark plugs because they
last much longer. Follow the maintenance
log shown in the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual. Do not service
iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or
regapping.
∙ Always replace spark plugs with recommended or equivalent ones.

Do-it-yourself 8-17

AIR CLEANER

WARNING
∙ Operating the engine with the air
cleaner removed can cause you or
others to be burned. The air cleaner
not only cleans the air, it stops the
flame if the engine backfires. If it isn’t
there, and the engine backfires, you
could be burned. Do not drive with the
air cleaner removed, and be careful
when working on the engine with the
air cleaner removed.

LDI3139

The viscous paper type filter element
should not be cleaned and reused. Replace
it according to the maintenance log shown
in the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual.
To remove the air cleaner filter:
A inward to
1. Pinch the retaining clips 䊊
B frontward, and reunlock, move tab 䊊
C upward.
move air duct 䊊

NOTE:
Do not bend retaining clips outward or
they may break.

8-18 Do-it-yourself

LDI3141

D and
2. Unlatch the retaining clips 䊊
E forward.
move air cleaner cover 䊊

3. Remove air cleaner filter.
Follow the removal instruction in reverse
order to install air cleaner filter, air cleaner
cover and air cleaner duct.
NOTE:
After installing a new air cleaner filter,
make sure the air cleaner cover and air
cleaner duct are seated correctly and all
the retaining clips are latched.

∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body
or attempt to start the engine with
the air cleaner removed. Doing so
could result in serious injury.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry
of airborne dust and pollen particles and
reduces some objectionable outside
odors. The filter is located behind the glove
box. For additional information, refer to the
“Maintenance and schedules” section of
this manual for change intervals.
If replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
CLEANING

2. Rapidly lift the windshield wiper and
A upwards twice within
washer lever 䊊
0.5 seconds. This action will cause the
wipers to automatically take the service position.

If your windshield is not clear after using
the windshield-washer or if a wiper blade
chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a
washer solution or a mild detergent. Your
windshield is clean if beads do not form
when rinsing with clear water.
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth
soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then rinse the blades with clear
water. If your windshield is still not clear
after cleaning the blades and using the
wiper, replace the blades.

CAUTION
Worn windshield wiper blades can
damage the windshield and impair
driver vision.

LDI2476

REPLACING
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.
To replace the windshield wiper blades, follow the procedure below:
1. When ignition switch is ON or within
60 seconds after placing the ignition
switch from the ON to OFF position,
place the windshield wiper and washer
lever into the OFF position.

Do-it-yourself 8-19

LDI2475

LDI2477

3. Once the wipers are in the service poB.
sition, push the release tab 䊊

7. Finally, lift the windshield wiper and
D
washer lever to the mist position 䊊
once and release. This action will cause
the wipers to resume the set position.

C and re4. Move the wiper blade down 䊊
move.

5. Insert the new wiper blade onto the
wiper arm until it clicks into place.
6. Rotate the wiper blade so the dimple is
in the groove.

CAUTION
∙ After wiper blade replacement, return
the wiper arm to its original position;
otherwise it may be damaged when
the hood is opened.
∙ Make sure the wiper blades contact
the glass; otherwise the arms may be
damaged from wind pressure.

8-20 Do-it-yourself

LDI2820

If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not to let wax get into the washer nozzle
F . This may cause clogging or improper
䊊
windshield-washer operation. If wax gets
into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or
E .
small pin 䊊

BRAKES
Rear window wiper blade
If checking or replacement is required, it is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

If the brakes do not operate properly, have
the brakes checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Self-adjusting brakes
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting
brakes.
The front and rear disc-type brakes selfadjust every time the brake pedal is applied.

Under some driving or climate conditions,
occasional brake squeak, squeal or other
noise may be heard. Occasional brake
noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or
performance of the brake system.
Proper brake inspection intervals should
be followed. For additional information regarding brake inspections, refer to the appropriate maintenance schedule information in the "Maintenance and schedules"
section of this manual.

WARNING
Have your brake system checked if the
brake pedal height does not return to
normal. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Brake pad wear indicators
The disc brake pads on your vehicle have
audible wear indicators. When a brake pad
requires replacement, a high pitched
scraping or screeching sound will be heard
when the vehicle is in motion. The noise will
be heard whether or not the brake pedal is
depressed. Have the brakes checked as
soon as possible if the wear indicator
sound is heard.

Do-it-yourself 8-21

FUSES
Fusible links
If the electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition, check
the fusible links. If any of these fusible links
are melted, replace with only Genuine
NISSAN parts.

LDI2385

If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse.
Fuses are used in the passenger and engine compartment. Spare fuses are provided and can be found in the passenger
compartment fuse box.
When installing a fuse make sure the fuse is
installed in the fuse box securely.

LDI2840

ENGINE COMPARTMENT
WARNING
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than that specified on
the fuse box cover. This could damage
the electrical system or electronic control units or cause a fire
If any electrical equipment does not come
on, check for an open fuse.
For checking and replacing fuses, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.

8-22 Do-it-yourself

LDI2821

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
WARNING
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than that specified on
the fuse box cover. This could damage
the electrical system or electronic control units or cause a fire.
If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse.

NOTE:
The fuse box is located on the driver’s
side of the instrument panel.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the
headlight switch are OFF.
2. Remove the fuse box cover with a suitable tool. Use a cloth to avoid damaging the trim.

LDI2760

B , replace it with an
5. If the fuse is open 䊊
C .
equivalent good fuse 䊊

6. Push the fuse box cover to install.
If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
system checked and repaired, It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

3. Locate the fuse that needs to be replaced.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller
A .
䊊

Do-it-yourself 8-23

BATTERY REPLACEMENT
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® (if so
equipped)

CAUTION
Be careful not to allow children to swallow the battery or removed parts.

Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as
follows:
1. Remove the mechanical key from the
Intelligent Key.
A
2. Insert a small flathead screwdriver 䊊
B of the corner and twist it
into the slit 䊊
to separate the upper part from the
lower part. Place a cloth over the
screwdriver to protect the casing.

LDI2001

8-24 Do-it-yourself

3. Replace the battery with a new one.
Recommended battery: CR2032 or
equivalent.
∙ Do not touch the internal circuit and
electric terminals as doing so could
cause a malfunction.
∙ Hold the battery by the edges. Holding the battery across the contact
points will seriously deplete the storage capacity.
∙ Make sure that the + side faces the
bottom of the lower part.
4. Close the lid securely as illustrated with
C and 䊊
D.
䊊
5. Operate the buttons to check the operation.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer if you need assistance for replacement.

FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Note:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

LDI2637

Do-it-yourself 8-25

3
䊊

Replace the battery with a new one.
Recommended battery: CR2032 or
equivalent.
∙ Do not touch the internal circuit and
electric terminals as doing so could
cause a malfunction.
∙ Hold the battery by the edges. Holding the battery across the contact
points will seriously deplete the storage capacity.

4
䊊

Close lid securely as illustrated.

Operate the buttons to check the operation.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer if you need assistance for replacement.
NOTE:

NISSAN JACKKNIFE KEY (if so
equipped)

1
䊊

Replace the battery in the jackknife key as
follows:
2
䊊

8-26 Do-it-yourself

LDI2354

Hold jackknife key button side up. Insert a small screwdriver into the slit of
the corner and twist it to separate the
upper part from the lower part. Use a
cloth to protect the casing.
Remove old battery.

Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

LIGHTS
FCC Notice:

HEADLIGHTS

For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.

For additional information on headlight
bulb replacement, refer to the instructions
outlined in this section.

The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type
which uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. They can be replaced from inside
the engine compartment without removing the headlight assembly.

∙ Only touch the base when handling
the bulb. Never touch the glass envelope. Touching the glass could significantly affect bulb life and/or headlight performance.

For Canada:
This device complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

If headlight bulb replacement is required, it
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

∙ High pressure halogen gas is sealed
inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may
break if the glass envelope is
scratched or the bulb is dropped.

Replacing the halogen headlight
bulb (if so equipped)

CAUTION
∙ Aiming is not necessary after replacing the bulb. When aiming adjustment
is necessary, it is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.

∙ Do not leave the headlight assembly
open without a bulb installed for a
long period of time. Dust, moisture,
smoke, etc. entering the headlight
body may affect bulb performance.
Remove the bulb from the headlight
assembly just before a replacement
bulb is installed.

∙ Use the same number and wattage as
shown in the chart.
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens
of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car
wash. A temperature difference between
the inside and the outside of the lens
causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. If
large drops of water collect inside the lens,
it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for servicing.

Do-it-yourself 8-27

Replacing the LED headlight bulb
(if so equipped)
If LED headlight bulb replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)
For additional information on fog light bulb
replacement, refer to the instructions outlined in this section.

Replacing the fog light bulb
If bulb replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

CAUTION
∙ High pressure halogen gas is sealed
inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may
break if the glass envelope is
scratched or the bulb is dropped.
∙ When handling the bulb, do not touch
the glass envelope.
∙ Use the same number and wattage as
originally installed as shown in the
chart.

8-28 Do-it-yourself

∙ Do not leave the bulb out of the fog
light for a long period of time as dust,
moisture and smoke may enter the
fog light body and affect the performance of the fog light.

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
Item
Headlight assembly (Type A) (if so equipped)*
High
Low
Turn
Side marker
Daytime running lights*
Headlight assembly (Type B) (if so equipped)*
High
Low
Turn
Side marker
Daytime running lights*
Fog lights (if so equipped)*
Courtesy light*
Door mirror turn signal light (if so equipped)*
Map light*
Glove box light*
Vanity mirror light (if so equipped)
Room light (if so equipped)
Personal lights (if so equipped)
Cargo light*
High-mounted stop light*
Rear combination light*
Stop
Tail/Stop
Turn
Side marker
Backup (reversing) assembly*
Backup
Tail
License plate light*

Wattage (W)

Bulb No.

65
55
28/8
5
—

H9
H11
7444NA
W5W
—

—
—
28/8
—
—
35
—
—
—
—
1.8
8
8
5
—

—
—
7444NA
—
—
H8
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

21
—
21
5

W21W
—
WY21W
W5W

18
—
5

921
—
W5W

* It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for replacement.
Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.

Do-it-yourself 8-29

1.
2
3
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.

Headlight assembly
Map light
Personal light (if so equipped)
Door mirror turn signal light (if so
equipped)
Fog light (if so equipped)
Daytime running light
Room light (if so equipped)
Cargo light
High mounted stop light
License plate light
Backup (reversing) assembly
Rear combination light

WDI0263

Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D.
When replacing a bulb, first remove the
lens, lamp and/or cover.
LDI3227

8-30 Do-it-yourself

Indicates bulb removal
Indicates bulb installation

WHEELS AND TIRES
If you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat tire” in
the “In case of emergency” section of
this manual.

TIRE PRESSURE
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
WARNING
Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment.
Those who use a pacemaker
should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for
the possible influences before
use.
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).
It monitors tire pressure of all tires
except the spare. When the low tire
pressure warning light is lit and the
“Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning
appears in the vehicle information
display, one or more of your tires is
significantly
under-inflated.
If
equipped, the system also displays
pressure of all tires (except the spare

tire) on the display screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is
installed in each wheel.
The TPMS will activate only when the
vehicle is driven at speeds above
16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system
may not detect a sudden drop in tire
pressure (for example a flat tire while
driving).
For additional information, refer to
“Low tire pressure warning light” in
the “Instruments and controls” section, “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section and “Flat tire” in the “In
case of emergency” section of this
manual.

Tire inflation pressure
Check the tire pressures (including
the spare) often and always prior to
long distance trips. The recommended tire pressure specifications
are shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label or the Tire and
Loading Information label under the

“Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The Tire
and Loading Information label is affixed to the driver side center pillar.
Tire pressures should be checked
regularly because:
∙ Most tires naturally lose air over
time.
∙ Tires can lose air suddenly when
driven over potholes or other objects or if the vehicle strikes a
curb while parking.
The tire pressures should be
checked when the tires are cold. The
tires are considered COLD after the
vehicle has been parked for 3 or
more hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) at moderate speeds.
The TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert
provides visual and audible signals
outside the vehicle for inflating the
tires to the recommended COLD tire
pressure. For additional information,
refer to “TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire
Alert” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
Do-it-yourself 8-31

Incorrect tire pressure, including
under inflation, may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling.
WARNING
∙ Improperly inflated tires can fail
suddenly
and
cause
an
accident.
∙ The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) is located on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label. The vehicle weight
capacity is indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
Do not load your vehicle beyond
this capacity. Overloading your
vehicle may result in reduced
tire life, unsafe operating conditions due to premature tire failure, or unfavorable handling
characteristics and could also
lead to a serious accident. Loading beyond the specified capacity may also result in failure of
other vehicle components.

8-32 Do-it-yourself

∙ Before taking a long trip, or
whenever you heavily load your
vehicle, use a tire pressure
gauge to ensure that the tire
pressures are at the specified
level.
∙ For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

4
䊊
5
䊊
6
䊊

Tire and Loading Information
label
1
䊊

2
䊊

Seating capacity: The maximum
number of occupants that can
be seated in the vehicle.
Tire size - refer to “Tire labeling” in
this section.

3
䊊

Original tire size: The size of the
tires originally installed on the
vehicle at the factory.
Spare tire size (if so equipped).
Vehicle load limit: Refer to “Vehicle loading information” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

LDI2737

Cold tire pressure: Inflate the
tires to this pressure when the
tires are cold. Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has
been parked for 3 or more hours,
or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
at moderate speeds. The recommended cold tire inflation is
set by the manufacturer to provide the best balance of tire
wear, vehicle handling, drivability,
tire noise, etc., up to the vehicle’s
GVWR.
Do-it-yourself 8-33

3. Remove the gauge.
4. Read the tire pressure on the
gauge stem and compare to the
specification shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label.

LDI0393

Checking tire pressure
1. Remove the valve stem cap from
the tire.
2. Press the pressure gauge
squarely onto the valve stem. Do
not press too hard or force the
valve stem sideways, or air will
escape. If the hissing sound of air
escaping from the tire is heard
while checking the pressure, reposition the gauge to eliminate
this leakage.
8-34 Do-it-yourself

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If
too much air is added, press the
core of the valve stem briefly
with the tip of the gauge stem to
release pressure. Recheck the
pressure and add or release air
as needed.
6. Install the valve stem cap.
7. Check the pressure of all other
tires, including the spare.

Size
Front and Rear
Original Tire:
225/65R17 102H
Front and Rear
Original Tire:
225/65RF17
100H
Front and Rear
Original Tire:
225/60R18 100H
Front and Rear
Original Tire:
225/55R19 99H
Spare Tire:
T155/90D17 101M
Spare Tire:
T145/90D16
106M

Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
33 psi, 230 kPa

33 psi, 230 kPa

33 psi, 230 kPa
60 psi, 420 kPa
60 psi, 420 kPa

WDI0394

Example

TIRE LABELING
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires.
This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides the
Tire Identification Number (TIN) for
safety standard certification. The TIN
can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.

WDI0395

1
䊊

Example

Tire size (example: P215/65R15
95H)
1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is designed for passenger vehicles
(not all tires have this information).
2. Three-digit number (215): This
number gives the width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall
edge to sidewall edge.

3. Two-digit number (65): This
number, known as the aspect
ratio, gives the tire’s ratio of
height to width.
4. R: The “R” stands for radial.
5. Two-digit number (15): This number is the wheel or rim diameter
in inches.

Do-it-yourself 8-35

6. Two- or three-digit number (95):
This number is the tire’s load index. It is a measurement of how
much weight each tire can support. You may not find this information on all tires because it is
not required by law.
7. H: Tire speed rating. You should
not drive the vehicle faster than
the tire speed rating.
LDI2786

Example

2 TIN (Tire Identification Number)
䊊
for a new tire (example: DOT XX XX
XXX XXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Department Of Transportation”.
The symbol can be placed
above, below or to the left or
right of the Tire Identification
Number.
2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
8-36 Do-it-yourself

3. Two-digit code: Tire size.
4. Three-digit code: Tire type code
(Optional).
5. Four numbers represent the
week and year the tire was built.
For example, the numbers 3103
means the 31st week of 2003. If
these numbers are missing then
look on the other sidewall of the
tire.

3 Tire ply composition and material
䊊

7 The word “radial”
䊊

The number of layers or plies of
rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate
the materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester and others.

The word “radial” is shown if the tire
has radial structure.

4 Maximum permissible inflation
䊊
pressure

This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure.
5 Maximum load rating
䊊

This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds
that can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle, always use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.
6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”
䊊

8 Manufacturer or brand name
䊊

Manufacturer or brand name is
shown.
Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms that
are defined throughout this section,
Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the
sidewall that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering or bears
manufacturer, brand, and/or model
name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on
the other sidewall of the tire, or (2)
the outward facing sidewall of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES
WARNING
∙ When changing or replacing tires, be
sure all four tires are of the same type
(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and
construction. A NISSAN dealer may be
able to help you with information
about tire type, size, speed rating and
availability.
∙ Replacement tires may have a lower
speed rating than the factory
equipped tires, and may not match
the potential maximum vehicle
speed. Never exceed the maximum
speed rating of the tire.
∙ Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect
the proper operation of the low tire
pressure warning system.
∙ For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Indicates whether the tire requires
an inner tube (“tube type”) or not
(“tubeless”).
Do-it-yourself 8-37

∙ Always use tires of the same type,
size, brand, construction and tread
pattern on all four wheels. Failure to
do so may result in a circumference
difference between tires on the front
and rear axles which can cause the
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system
to malfunction resulting in personal
injury or death, excessive tire wear
and may damage the transmission,
transfer case and differential gears.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models

CAUTION
∙ ONLY use spare tires specified for the
AWD model.
If excessive tire wear is found, it is recommended that all four tires be replaced with
tires of the same size, brand, construction
and tread pattern. The tire pressure and
wheel alignment should also be checked
and corrected as necessary. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

All season tires
NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some
models to provide good performance all
year, including snowy and icy road condi-

8-38 Do-it-yourself

tions. All Season tires are identified by ALL
SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall.
Snow tires have better snow traction than
All Season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas.

Summer tires
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some
models to provide superior performance
on dry roads. Summer tire performance is
substantially reduced in snow and ice.
Summer tires do not have the tire traction
rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy
or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the
use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all
four wheels.

Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to
select tires equivalent in size and load rating to the original equipment tires. If you do
not, it can adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may
not match the potential maximum vehicle
speed. Never exceed the maximum speed
rating of the tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be the
same size, brand, construction and tread
pattern on all four wheels.
For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some U.S.
states and Canadian provinces prohibit
their use. Check local, state and provincial
laws before installing studded tires. Skid
and traction capabilities of studded snow
tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded snow tires.

Run–Flat Tires (if so equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with run-flat tires
and is not equipped with a spare tire, or a
jack and tool kit. The jack and tool kit may
be purchased at the dealer. Please consult
a NISSAN dealer for additional information.
You can continue driving to a safe location
even if the run-flat tires are punctured. Always use run-flat tires of the specified size
on all four wheels. Mixing tire sizes or construction may reduce vehicle handling stability. If necessary, it is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Frequently check the tire pressure and adjust pressure of each tire properly. The tire
pressure can be also checked in the vehicle
information display.

It can be difficult to tell if a run-flat tire is
under-inflated or flat. Check the tire pressures as described in this section. If the tire
becomes under-inflated while driving, the
low tire pressure warning light will illuminate and the “Tire Pressure Low – Add Air”
warning appears in the vehicle information
display. If the tire becomes flat while driving,
the low tire pressure warning light and the
“Flat Tire – Visit dealer" (if so equipped)
warning will appear.
Low tire pressure:
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire
pressure, the low tire pressure warning
light will illuminate and the “Tire Pressure
Low – Add Air” warning appears in the vehicle information display.
Flat tire:
If the vehicle is being driven with one or
more flat tires, the low tire pressure warning light will illuminate continuously and a
chime will sound for 10 seconds. A “Flat Tire
– Visit dealer" (if so equipped) warning also
appears in the vehicle information display.
The chime will only sound at the first indication of a flat tire and the warning light will
illuminate continuously. When the flat tire
warning is activated, have the system reset

and the tire checked and replaced if necessary. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service. Even if the
tire is inflated to the specified COLD tire
pressure, the warning light will continue to
illuminate until the system is reset. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.

∙ Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not drive more than
approximately 93 miles (150 km) with
a punctured run-flat tire. The actual
distance the vehicle can be driven on
a flat tire depends on outside temperature, vehicle load, read conditions
and other factors.

If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates continuously and the “Flat Tire – Visit
dealer" (if so equipped) warning appears in
the vehicle information display:

∙ Drive safely at reduced speeds. Avoid
hard cornering or braking, which may
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle.

∙ Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
∙ Increase your following distance to allow for increased stopping distances.
∙ Avoid sudden maneuvers, hard cornering and hard braking.

CAUTION
∙ Never install tire chains on a punctured run-flat tire, as this could damage your vehicle.
∙ Avoid driving over any projection or
pothole, as the clearance between the
vehicle and the ground is smaller than
normal.

Do-it-yourself 8-39

∙ Do not enter an automated car wash
with a punctured run-flat tire.
∙ Have the punctured tire inspected by
a NISSAN dealer or other authorized
repair shop. Replace the tire as soon
as possible if the tire is seriously
damaged.
∙ Always use tires of the same type,
size, brand, construction (bias, biasbelted or radial), and tread pattern on
all four wheels. Failure to do so may
result in a circumference difference
between tires on the front and rear
axles which will cause excessive tire
wear and may damage the transmission, transfer case and differential
gears (AWD models).
∙ ONLY use spare tires specified for the
AWD model.
∙ If excessive tire wear is found, it is recommended that all four tires be replaced with tires of the same size,
brand, construction and tread pattern. The tire pressure and wheel
alignment should also be checked
and corrected as necessary. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

8-40 Do-it-yourself

TIRE CHAINS
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws
before installing tire chains. When installing
tire chains, make sure they are the proper
size for the tires on your vehicle and are
installed according to the chain manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE class “S”
chains. Class “S” chains are used on vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance. Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains
are designed to meet the minimum clearances between the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or body component required to accommodate the use of a
winter traction device (tire chains or
cables). The minimum clearances are determined using the factory equipped tire
size. Other types may damage your vehicle.
Use chain tensioners when recommended
by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a
tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain
must be secured or removed to prevent
the possibility of whipping action damage
to the fenders or underbody. If possible,
avoid fully loading your vehicle when using
tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced
speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be
damaged and/or vehicle handling and
performance may be adversely affected.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving
with chains in such conditions can cause
damage to the various mechanisms of the
vehicle due to some overstress.

Wheel nut tightening torque:
83 ft-lb (113 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specifications at all times.
It is recommended that wheel nuts
be tightened to specification at
each tire rotation interval.

∙
WDI0258

∙

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES
Tire rotation
NISSAN recommends rotating the
tires every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).

∙

For additional information on tire replacing procedures, refer to “Flat tire”
in the “In case of emergency” section
in this manual.

∙

As soon as possible, tighten the
wheel nuts to the specified torque
with a torque wrench.

WARNING
After rotating the tires, check
and adjust the tire pressure.
Retighten the wheel nuts when
the vehicle has been driven for
600 miles (1,000 km) (also in
cases of a flat tire, etc.).
Do not include the spare tire in
the tire rotation.
For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

WDI0259

Tire wear and damage
1. Wear indicator
2. Location mark
WARNING
∙ Tires should be periodically inspected for wear, cracking,
bulging or objects caught in the
tread. If excessive wear, cracks,
bulging or deep cuts are found,
the tire(s) should be replaced.

Do-it-yourself 8-41

∙ The original tires have built-in
tread wear indicators. When the
wear indicators are visible, the
tire(s) should be replaced.
∙ Tires degrade with age and use.
Have tires, including the spare,
over 6 years old checked by a
qualified technician because
some tire damage may not be
obvious. Replace the tires as
necessary to prevent tire failure
and possible personal injury.
∙ Improper service of the spare
tire may result in serious personal injury. If it is necessary to
repair the spare tire, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
∙ For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Replacing wheels and tires
When replacing a tire, use the same size,
tread design, speed rating and load carry-

8-42 Do-it-yourself

ing capacity as originally equipped. Recommended types and sizes are shown in
“Wheels and tires” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

WARNING
∙ The use of tires other than those recommended or the mixed use of tires
of different brands, construction
(bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread
patterns can adversely affect the ride,
braking, handling, Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) system, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, tire
chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper
height. Some of these effects may
lead to accidents and could result in
serious personal injury.
∙ For 2WD models, if your vehicle was
originally equipped with four tires
that were the same size and you are
only replacing two of the four tires,
install the new tires on the rear axle.
Placing new tires on the front axle
may cause loss of vehicle control in
some driving conditions and cause an
accident and personal injury

∙ If the wheels are changed for any reason, always replace with wheels
which have the same off-set dimension. Wheels of a different off-set
could cause premature tire wear, degrade vehicle handling characteristics, affect the VDC system and/or interference with the brake discs. Such
interference can lead to decreased
braking efficiency and/or early brake
pad/shoe wear. For additional information on wheel off-set dimensions,
refer to “Wheels and tires” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
∙ When replacing a wheel without the
TPMS, such as the spare tire, the TPMS
will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your
tires replaced and/or TPMS system
reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
∙ Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect
the proper operation of the TPMS.

∙ The TPMS sensor may be damaged if
it is not handled correctly. Be careful
when handling the TPMS sensor.
∙ When replacing the TPMS sensor, the
ID registration may be required. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for ID registration.
∙ Do not use a valve stem cap that is not
specified by NISSAN. The valve stem
cap may become stuck.
∙ Be sure that the valve stem caps are
correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve
may be clogged up with dirt and
cause a malfunction or loss of
pressure.
∙ Do not install a damaged or deformed
wheel or tire even if it has been repaired. Such wheels or tires could
have structural damage and could fail
without warning.
∙ The use of retread tires is not
recommended.
∙ For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

CAUTION
Always use tires of the same type, size,
brand, construction (bias, bias-belted
or radial), and tread pattern on all four
wheels. Failure to do so may result in a
circumference difference between tires
on the front and rear axles which will
cause excessive tire wear and may
damage the transmission, transfer case
and differential gears (AWD models).
If excessive tire wear is found, it is recommended that all four tires be replaced with
tires of the same size, brand, construction
and tread pattern. The tire pressure and
wheel alignment should also be checked
and corrected as necessary. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

Wheel balance
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle
handling and tire life. Even with regular use,
wheels can get out of balance. Therefore,
they should be balanced as required.
Wheel balance service should be performed with the wheels off the vehicle.
Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle
could lead to mechanical damage.

∙ For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty
Information Booklet.

Care of wheels
∙ Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to maintain their appearance.
∙ Clean the inner side of the wheels when
the wheel is changed or the underside
of the vehicle is washed.
∙ Do not use abrasive cleaners when
washing the wheels.
∙ Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents
or corrosion. Such damage may cause
loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire
bead.
∙ NISSAN recommends waxing the road
wheels to protect against road salt in
areas where it is used during winter.

Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire) (if so equipped)
When replacing a wheel without the TPMS
such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not
function.

Do-it-yourself 8-43

Observe the following precautions if the
TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be
used. Otherwise, your vehicle could be
damaged or involved in an accident:

WARNING
∙ The spare tire should be used for
emergency use only. It should be replaced with the standard tire at the
first opportunity to avoid possible tire
or differential damage.
∙ Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY
USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid
sharp turns and abrupt braking while
driving.
∙ Periodically check spare tire inflation
pressure. Always keep the pressure of
the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire
at 420 kPa, 4.2 bar (60 psi).
∙ With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare
tire installed do not drive the vehicle
at speeds faster than 50 mph
(80 km/h).
∙ When driving on roads covered with
snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire should be used on the
rear wheels and the original tire used
on the front wheels (drive wheels).

8-44 Do-it-yourself

∙ Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster
rate than the standard tire. Replace
the spare tire as soon as the tread
wear indicators appear.
∙ Do not use the spare tire on other
vehicles.
∙ Do not use more than one spare tire at
the same time.
∙ Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.

CAUTION
∙ Do not use tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains
will not fit properly and may cause
damage to the vehicle.
∙ Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire is smaller than the original
tire, ground clearance is reduced. To
avoid damage to the vehicle, do not
drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive
the vehicle through an automatic car
wash since it may get caught.

9 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Scheduled maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Where to go for service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Explanation of general maintenance
items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 9-5
Emission control system maintenance:. . . . . . . 9-5
Chassis and body maintenance:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Maintenance schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Additional maintenance items for
severe operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Standard maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Emission control system maintenance . . . . . . . 9-8
Chassis & body maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Maintenance under severe operating
conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Severe driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Maintenance log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
Some day-to-day and regular maintenance is essential to maintain your vehicle
good mechanical condition, as well as its
emissions and engine performance.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure
that the scheduled maintenance, as well as
general maintenance, is performed.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one
who can ensure that your vehicle receives
proper maintenance. You are a vital link in
the maintenance chain.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE
General maintenance includes those items
which should be checked during normal
day-to-day operation. They are essential
for proper vehicle operation. It is your responsibility to perform these procedures
regularly as prescribed.
Performing general maintenance checks
requires minimal mechanical skill and only
a few general automotive tools.
These checks or inspections can be done
by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you
prefer, a NISSAN dealer.

9-2 Maintenance and schedules

GENERAL MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
The maintenance items listed in this section are required to be serviced at regular
intervals. However under severe driving
conditions, additional or more frequent
maintenance will be required.

WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE
If maintenance service is required or your
vehicle appears to malfunction, have the
systems checked and serviced. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up-to-date with the
latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips and training programs. They are completely qualified to
work on NISSAN vehicles before work begins.
You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s service department can perform the
service needed to meet the maintenance
requirements on your vehicle.

During the normal day-to-day operation of
the vehicle, general maintenance should
be performed regularly as prescribed in
this section. If you detect any unusual
sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to
check for the cause or have it checked
promptly. In addition, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer if you think
that repairs are required.
When performing any checks or maintenance work, closely observe the “Maintenance precautions” in the “Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Additional information on the following
items with “ * ” is found in the “Do-ityourself ” section of this manual.

Outside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should
be performed from time to time, unless
otherwise specified.
Doors and engine hood: Check that the
doors and engine hood operate properly.
Also ensure that all latches lock securely.
Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers
and links if necessary. Make sure that the

secondary latch keeps the hood from
opening when the primary latch is released.
When driving in areas using road salt or
other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.
Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular
basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop
lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other
lights are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check headlight aim.
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When checking the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are
missing, and check for any loose wheel
nuts. Tighten if necessary.
Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).
Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge
often and always prior to long distance
trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all
tires, including the spare, to the pressure
specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts
or excessive wear.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
transmitter components: Replace the
TPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve core
and cap when the tires are replaced due to
wear or age.

Wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle should pull to either side while driving
on a straight and level road, or if you detect
uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may
be a need for wheel alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be
needed.
For additional information regarding tires,
refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in
the Warranty Information Booklet.
Windshield: Clean the windshield on a
regular basis. Check the windshield at least
every six months for cracks or other damage. Have a damaged windshield repaired
by a qualified repair facility.
Windshield wiper blades*: Check for
cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should
be checked on a regular basis, such as
when performing scheduled maintenance,
cleaning the vehicle, etc.
Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for
smooth operation and make sure the

pedal does not catch or require uneven
effort. Keep the floor mat away from the
pedal.
Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth
operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes
down further than normal, the pedal feels
spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer
to stop, have your vehicle checked immediately. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service. Keep the
floor mat away from the pedal.
Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull
the vehicle to one side when applied.
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) P (Park) position mechanism: On a
fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held
securely with the shift lever in the P (Park)
position without applying any brakes.
Parking brake: Check the parking brake
operation regularly. The vehicle should be
securely held on a fairly steep hill with only
the parking brake applied. If the parking
brake needs adjustment, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
Seats: Check seat position controls such
as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to
ensure they operate smoothly and all

Maintenance and schedules 9-3

latches lock securely in every position.
Check that the head restraints/headrests
move up and down smoothly and the locks
(if so equipped) hold securely in all latched
positions.

Under the hood and vehicle

Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat
belt system (for example, buckles, anchors,
adjusters and retractors) operate properly
and smoothly, and are installed securely.
Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying,
wear or damage.

Battery* (for serviceable batteries):
Check the fluid level in each cell. The fluid
should be at the bottom of the filler opening. Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require
frequent checks of the battery fluid level.

Steering wheel: Check for changes in the
steering system, such as excessive free
play, hard steering or strange noises.

NOTE:

Warning lights and chimes: Make sure all
warning lights and chimes are operating
properly.

The maintenance items listed here should
be checked periodically (for example, each
time you check the engine oil or refuel).

Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions
such as:

Windshield defroster: Check that the air
comes out of the defroster outlets properly
and in sufficient quantity when operating
the heater or air conditioner.

1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not
running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD
players, etc.).

Windshield wiper and washer*: Check
that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak.

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or
only driven short distances.

9-4 Maintenance and schedules

In these cases, the battery may need to
be charged to maintain battery health.

Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the brake
fluid level is between the MAX and MIN lines
on the reservoir.
Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant
level when the engine is cold.
Engine drive belts*: Make sure the drive
belts are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
Engine oil level*: Check the level after
parking the vehicle on a level spot and
turning off the engine. Wait more than
15 minutes for the oil to drain back into the
oil pan.
Exhaust system: Make sure there are no
loose supports, cracks or holes. If the
sound of the exhaust seems unusual or
there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust system inspected. It
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. For additional information, refer to “Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)” in the “Starting and driving” section
of this manual.

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for
fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the
vehicle has been parked for a while. Water
dripping from the air conditioner after use
is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if
fuel fumes are evident, check for the cause
and have it corrected immediately.

The following descriptions are provided to
give you a better understanding of the
scheduled maintenance items that should
be regularly checked or replaced. The
maintenance schedule indicates at which
mileage/time intervals each item requires
service.

Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the
radiator and clean off any dirt, insects,
leaves, etc., that may have accumulated.
Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose connections.

In addition to scheduled maintenance,
your vehicle requires that some items be
checked during normal day-to-day operation. For additional information, refer to
“General maintenance” in this section.

Underbody: The underbody is frequently
exposed to corrosive substances such as
those used on icy roads or to control dust. It
is very important to remove these substances, otherwise rust may form on the
floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around the
exhaust system. At the end of winter, the
underbody should be thoroughly flushed
with plain water, being careful to clean
those areas where mud and dirt may accumulate. For additional information, refer to
the “Appearance and care” section of this
manual.
Windshield-washer fluid*: Check that
there is adequate fluid in the reservoir.

Items marked with “*” are recommended
by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation.
You are not required to perform maintenance on these items in order to maintain
the warranties which come with your
NISSAN. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.
When applicable, additional information
can be found in the “Do-it-yourself ” section
of this manual.

NOTE:
NISSAN does not advocate the use of
non-OEM approved aftermarket flushing systems and strongly advises
against performing these services on a
NISSAN product. Many of the aftermarket flushing systems use non-OEM approved chemicals or solvents, the use of
which has not been validated by NISSAN.
For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids,
grease, and refrigerant, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
MAINTENANCE:
Drive belts*: Check engine drive belts for
wear, fraying or cracking and for proper
tension. Replace any damaged drive belts.
Engine air filter: Replace at specified intervals. When driving for prolonged periods in
dusty conditions, check/replace the filter
more frequently.
Engine coolant*: Replace coolant at the
specified interval. When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine
NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)

Maintenance and schedules 9-5

or equivalent with the proper mixture. (For
additional information on the proper mixture for your area, refer to “Engine cooling
system” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of
this manual.)
NOTE: Mixing any other type of coolant
or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the recommended service interval
of the coolant.
Engine oil and oil filter: Replace engine oil
and oil filter at the specified intervals. For
recommended oil grade and viscosity refer
to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and
capacities” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
Engine valve clearance*: Inspect only if
valve noise increase. Adjust valve clearance
if necessary.
Evaporative emissions control vapor
lines*: Check vapor lines for leaks or looseness. Tighten connections or replace parts
as necessary.
Fuel filter*: Periodic maintenance is not required. (in-tank type filter)
Fuel lines*: Check the fuel hoses, piping
and connections for leaks, looseness, or
deterioration. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.

9-6 Maintenance and schedules

Spark plugs: Replace at specified intervals.
Install new plugs of the same type as originally equipped.

CHASSIS AND BODY
MAINTENANCE:

Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts, drive shaft boots: Check
for damage, looseness, and leakage of oil
or grease. Under severe driving conditions,
inspect more frequently.

Brake lines and cables: Visually inspect for
proper installation. Check for chafing,
cracks, deterioration, and signs of leaking.
Replace any deteriorated or damaged
parts immediately.

Tire rotation: Tires should be rotated every
5,000 miles (8,000 km) according to the instructions under “Explanation of general
maintenance items” in this section. When
rotating tires, check for damage and uneven wear. Replace if necessary.

Brake pads and rotors: Check for wear,
deterioration and fluid leaks. Replace any
deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.

Transmission fluid/oil, differential oil,
transfer case oil: Visually inspect for signs
of leakage at specified intervals.

Exhaust system: Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks,
cracks, deterioration, and damage. Tighten
connections or replace parts as necessary.
In-cabin microfilter: Replace at specified
intervals. When driving for prolonged periods in dusty conditions, replace the filter
more frequently.
Propeller shaft(s): Check for damage,
looseness, and grease leakage. (AWD)

If towing a trailer, using a camper or car-top
carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads:
∙ Replace the fluid/oil every 20,000 miles
(32,000 km) or 24 months.
∙ Replace the CVT fluid every 60,000 miles
(96,000 km) or request the dealer to inspect the fluid deterioration data using
a CONSULT. If the deterioration data is
more than 210000, replace the CVT fluid.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Off-Road Maintenance Check the following items frequently whenever you drive
off-road through deep sand, mud or water:
∙ Brake pads and rotors
∙ Differential, transmission and transfer
case oil
∙ Steering linkage
∙ Propeller shaft(s) and front drive shafts
∙ Engine air filter

To help ensure smooth, safe and economical driving, NISSAN provides two maintenance schedules that may be used, depending upon the conditions in which you
usually drive. These schedules contain
both distance and time intervals, up to
120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144 months. For
most people, the odometer reading will indicate when service is needed. However, if
you drive very little, your vehicle should be
serviced at the regular time intervals
shown in the schedule.

∙ Repeated short trips of less than
10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing.
∙ Operating in hot weather in stopand-go “rush hour” traffic.
∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distances, such as police,
taxi or door-to-door delivery use.
∙ Driving in dusty conditions.
∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread
roads.

After
120,000
miles
(192,000 km)/144 months, continue
maintenance at the same mileage/time
intervals.

NOTE:

ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS
FOR SEVERE OPERATING
CONDITIONS

For vehicles operated in Canada, both
standard and severe maintenance items
should be performed at every interval.

∙ Towing a trailer, using a camper or using
a car-top carrier.

Additional maintenance items for severe
operating conditions should be performed on vehicles that are driven under
especially demanding conditions. Additional maintenance items should be performed if you primarily operate your vehicle
under the following conditions:
∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles
(8 km).

Maintenance and schedules 9-7

STANDARD MAINTENANCE
The following tables show the standard
maintenance schedule. Depending upon
weather and atmospheric conditions,
varying road surfaces, individual driving
habits and vehicle usage, additional or
more frequent maintenance may be required.
After
120,000
miles
(192,000 km)/144 months, continue
maintenance at the same mileage/time
interval.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Drive belts
Air cleaner filter
EVAP vapor lines
Fuel lines
Fuel filter
Engine coolant*
Engine oil
Engine oil filter
Spark plugs
Intake and exhaust valve clearances*

9-8 Maintenance and schedules

miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
See NOTE (1)
See NOTE (2)

5
(8)
6

10
(16)
12

15
(24)
18

20
(32)
24

I*
I*

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
25
30
35
40
(40)
(48)
(56)
(64)
30
36
42
48
I*
R
I*
I*

45
(72)
54

50
(80)
60
I*

55
(88)
66

60
(96)
72
I*
R
I*
I*

R
R

See NOTE (3)
See NOTE (4)(5)
R
R
See NOTE (6)
See NOTE (7)

R
R

R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)

MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Drive belts
Air cleaner filter
EVAP vapor lines
Fuel lines
Fuel filter
Engine coolant*
Engine oil
Engine oil filter
Spark plugs
Intake and exhaust valve clearances*

miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
See NOTE (1)
See NOTE (2)

65
(104)
78

70
(112)
84
I*

75
(120)
90

80
(128)
96
I*
I*
I*

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
85
90
95
100
(136)
(144)
(152)
(160)
102
108
114
120
I*
I*
R
I*
I*

105
(168)
126

110
(176)
132
I*

115
(184)
138

120
(192)
144
I*
R
I*
I*

R
R

See NOTE (3)
See NOTE (4)(5)
R
R
See NOTE (6)
See NOTE (7)

R
R

R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)

NOTE:
(1) After 40,000 miles (64,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if
found damaged.
(2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.
(3) Periodic maintenance is not required.
(4) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles
(120,000 km) or 60 months.
(5) Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and 50%
demineralized or distilled water. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the life expectancy
of the factory fill coolant.
(6) Replace spark plug when the plug gap exceeds 0.055 in (1.4 mm) even if within specified periodic replacement mileage.
(7) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increased, inspect valve clearance.
* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform
such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and
intervals are required.

Maintenance and schedules 9-9

CHASSIS & BODY MAINTENANCE
Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace,
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Brake lines and cables
Brake pads and rotors夝
Brake fluid夝
CVT fluid
Transfer fluid & differential gear oil
Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension
parts夝
Tire rotation
Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (AWD models)夝
Exhaust system夝
In-cabin microfilter
Intelligent key battery

9-10 Maintenance and schedules

miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months

See NOTE (1)
See NOTE (2)

5
(8)
6

10
(16)
12
I
I

15
(24)
18

I
I

20
(32)
24
I
I
R
I
I
I

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
25
30
35
40
(40)
(48)
(56)
(64)
30
36
42
48
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I

45
(72)
54

50
(80)
60
I
I
I
I

55
(88)
66

60
(96)
72
I
I
R
I
I
I

See NOTE (3)
I

I
R
I

I
R
R

R
R

I
I
R
R

MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Brake lines and cables
Brake pads and rotors夝
Brake fluid夝
CVT fluid
Transfer fluid & differential gear oil
Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension
parts夝
Tire rotation
Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (AWD models)夝
Exhaust system夝
In-cabin microfilter
Intelligent key battery

miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months

See NOTE (1)
See NOTE (2)

65
(104)
78

70
(112)
84
I
I

75
(120)
90

I
I

80
(128)
96
I
I
R
I
I
I

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
85
90
95
100
(136)
(144)
(152)
(160)
102
108
114
120
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I

105
(168)
126

110
(176)
132
I
I
I
I

115
(184)
138

120
(192)
144
I
I
R
I
I
I

See NOTE (3)
I

I
R
R

R
R

I
I
R
R

NOTE:
Maintenance items with “夝” should be performed more frequently according to “Maintenance under severe driving conditions”.
(1) If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier or driving on rough or muddy roads, inspect CVT fluid deterioration every
60,000 miles (96,000 km), then change CVT fluid if necessary. And if the inspection is not performed, change (not just inspect) CVT
fluid every 60,000 miles (96,000 km). It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
(2) If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every
20,000 miles (32,000 km) or 24 months.
(3) For additional information on tire rotation, refer to “General maintenance” in this section.

Maintenance and schedules 9-11

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE
OPERATING CONDITIONS
The maintenance intervals shown on the preceding pages are for normal operating conditions. If the vehicle is mainly operated under
severe driving conditions as shown below, more frequent maintenance must be performed on the following items as shown in the table.

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS
∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles
(8 km).

∙ Operating in hot weather in stopand-go “rush hour” traffic.
∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distance, such as police, taxi
or door-to-door delivery use.

∙ Repeated short trips of less than
10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing.
Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary.
Maintenance item
Brake fluid
Brake pads & rotors
Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts
Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (AWD models)
Exhaust system

9-12 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance operation
Replace
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect

∙ Driving in dusty conditions.
∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread
roads.
∙ Towing a trailer, using a camper or using
a car-top carrier.

Maintenance interval
Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months
Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

MAINTENANCE LOG

5,000 Miles (8,000 km) or 6
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

10,000 Miles (16,000 km) or 12
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or 18
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

20,000 Miles (32,000 km) or 24
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

25,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 30
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

30,000 Miles (48,000 km) or 36
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

35,000 Miles (56,000 km) or 42
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

40,000 Miles (64,000 km) or 48
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

45,000 Miles (72,000 km) or 54
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

Maintenance and schedules 9-13

50,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 60
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

55,000 Miles (88,000 km) or 66
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

60,000 Miles (96,000 km) or 72
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

65,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 78
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

70,000 Miles (112,000 km) or 84
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 90
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

80,000 Miles (128,000 km) or 96
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

85,000 Miles (136,000 km) or 102
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

90,000 Miles (144,000 km) or 108
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

9-14 Maintenance and schedules

95,000 Miles (152,000 km) or 114
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

100,000 Miles (160,000 km) or
120 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

105,000 Miles (168,000 km) or 126
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

110,000 Miles (176,000 km) or 132
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

115,000 Miles (184,000 km) or 138
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

120,000 Miles (192,000 km) or 144
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

Maintenance and schedules 9-15

10 Technical and consumer information

Recommended fluids/lubricants and
capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Fuel recommendation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Engine oil and oil filter
recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Air conditioner system refrigerant and
oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
When traveling or registering in another
country. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Vehicle identification number
(chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . .10-11
Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Tire and Loading Information label . . . . . . . . . 10-12

Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Installing front license plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Securing the load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Towing load/specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Flat towing for all–wheel drive vehicle
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Flat towing for front wheel drive vehicle
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Emission control system warranty. . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Event Data Recorders (EDR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Additional Data Recording (on vehicles
equipped with optional ProPILOT
Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order
information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/
LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure
described in the “Do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Fluid type

Capacity (approximate)
Metric
US
Imperial
Measure
Measure
Measure

Fuel

55 L

14-1/2 gal

12-1/8 gal

With oil filter
change

4.6 L

4-7/8 qt

4 qt

Without oil filter
change

4.3 L

4-1/2 qt

3-3/4 qt

8.1 L

2-1/8 gal

1-3/4 gal

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid

—

Differential gear oil
Transfer oil

—
—

Brake fluid

—

Multi-purpose grease

—

Air conditioning system refrigerant

—

Engine oil*1
Drain and refill
*1: For additional
information, refer to “Engine
oil” in the “Do-it-yourself ”
section of this manual.
Engine coolant
with reservoir

10-2 Technical and consumer information

Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

• For additional information, refer to “Fuel recommendation” in
this section.
• Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN” is recommended.
• If the above motor oil is not available, use an equivalent motor
oil that matches the above grade and viscosity. For additional
information, refer to “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations”
in this section.
• Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)
or equivalent
• Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3
• NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or
equivalent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other fluids.
Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN CVT NS-3
may damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids other
than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or
equivalent conventional (non-synthetic) oil
• Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*2 or equivalent
DOT 3
*2: Available in mainland USA through a NISSAN dealer.
• NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)
• HFC-134a (R-134a)
• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations” in this section.

Fluid type

Capacity (approximate)
Metric
US
Imperial
Measure
Measure
Measure

Air conditioning system oil

—

Windshield-washer fluid

1-3/8 gal

1-1/8 gal

FUEL RECOMMENDATION
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock
Index) number (Research octane number
91).

CAUTION
∙ Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door
label can operate on E-85. Fuel system
or other damage can occur if E-85 is
used in vehicles that are not designed
to run on E-85.
∙ Using a fuel other than that specified
could adversely affect the emission
control system, and may also affect
the warranty coverage.
∙ Under no circumstances should a
leaded gasoline be used, because this
will damage the three-way catalyst.

Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

• NISSAN A/C System Oil Type ND-OIL8 or exact equivalents
• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations” in this section.
• Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent

∙ Do not use fuel that contains the octane booster methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using
fuel containing MMT may adversely
affect vehicle performance and vehicle emissions. Not all fuel dispensers are labeled to indicate MMT content, so you may have to consult your
gasoline retailer for more details.
Note that Federal and California laws
prohibit the use of MMT in reformulated gasoline.
∙ U.S. government regulations require
ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and
black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage
for that region.

Technical and consumer information 10-3

Gasoline specifications
NISSAN recommends using gasoline that
meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC)
specifications where it is available. Many of
the automobile manufacturers developed
this specification to improve emission control system and vehicle performance. Ask
your service station manager if the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasoline
Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines. These gasolines are
specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN supports efforts towards
cleaner air and suggests that you use reformulated gasoline when available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, Methyl
Tert-butyl Ether (MTBE) and methanol with
or without advertising their presence.
NISSAN does not recommend the use of
fuels of which the oxygenate content and
the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily determined. If in doubt, ask
your service station manager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline,
please take the following precautions as
the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle
performance problems and/or fuel system
damage.
∙ The fuel should be unleaded and have
an octane rating no lower than that
recommended for unleaded gasoline.
∙ If an oxygenate-blend other than
methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 15% oxygenate.
∙ If a methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 5% methanol
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It
should also contain a suitable
amount of appropriate cosolvents
and corrosion inhibitors. If not properly formulated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors,
such methanol blends may cause fuel
system damage and/or vehicle performance problems. At this time, sufficient data is not available to ensure
that all methanol blends are suitable
for use in NISSAN vehicles.
If any driveability problems such as engine
stalling and difficult hot-starting are experienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels,

10-4 Technical and consumer information

immediately change to a non-oxygenate
fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE.
Take care not to spill gasoline during refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates
can cause paint damage.

E–15 fuel
E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15%
fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline.
E-15 can only be used in vehicles designed
to run on E-15 fuel. U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing
pumps to be identified with small, square,
orange and black label with the common
abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.

E–85 fuel
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85%
fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline.
E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel
Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. government regulations require
fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black
label with the common abbreviation or the
appropriate percentage for that region.

Fuel containing MMT
MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting additive. NISSAN does not recommend the
use of fuel containing MMT. Such fuel may
adversely affect vehicle performance, including the emissions control system. Note
that while some fuel pumps label MMT
content, not all do, so you may have to
consult your gasoline retailer for more details.

Aftermarket fuel additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of
any aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injector cleaner, octane
booster, intake valve deposit removers,
etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of
these additives intended for gum, varnish
or deposit removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients that can be
harmful to the fuel system and engine.

spark knock even when using gasoline
of the stated octane rating, or if you hear
steady spark knock while holding a
steady speed on level roads, it is recommended that you have a NISSAN dealer
correct the condition. Failure to correct
the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for
which NISSAN is not responsible.
Incorrect ignition timing may result in
spark knock, after-run and/or overheating,
which may cause excessive fuel consumption or engine damage. If any of the above
symptoms are encountered, have your vehicle checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.
However, now and then you may notice
light spark knock for a short time while
accelerating or driving up hills. This is not
a cause for concern, because you get the
greatest fuel benefit when there is light
spark knock for a short time under heavy
engine load.

Octane rating tips
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating lower than recommended can
cause persistent, heavy “spark knock.”
(“Spark knock” is a metallic rapping
noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine
damage. If you detect a persistent heavy

Technical and consumer information 10-5

Oil which may contain foreign matter or
has been previously used should not be
used.

Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness
changes with temperature. Because of
this, it is important to select the engine oil
viscosity based on the temperatures at
which the vehicle will be operated before
the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could
cause serious engine damage.
LTI2051

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER
RECOMMENDATIONS
Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct grade,
quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure
satisfactory engine life and performance.
For additional information, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities”
in this section. NISSAN recommends the
use of an energy conserving oil in order to
improve fuel economy.
Select only engine oils that meet the
American Petroleum Institute (API) certifi-

cation or International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC)
certification and SAE viscosity standard.
These oils have the API certification mark
on the front of the container. Oils which do
not have the specified quality label should
not be used as they could cause engine
damage.

Oil additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil
additives. The use of an oil additive is not
necessary when the proper oil type is used
and maintenance intervals are followed.

10-6 Technical and consumer information

Selecting the correct oil filter
Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a
high-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. When
replacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or
its equivalent for the reason described in
“Change intervals.”

Change intervals
The oil and oil filter change intervals for
your engine are based on the use of the
specified quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding recommended oil
and filter change intervals could reduce
engine life. Damage to the engine caused
by improper maintenance or use of incor-

rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is
not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
REFRIGERANT AND OIL
RECOMMENDATIONS

Your engine was filled with a high-quality
engine oil when it was built. You do not have
to change the oil before the first recommended change interval. Oil and filter
change intervals depend upon how you
use your vehicle.

The air conditioner system in your
NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the
refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and
NISSAN A/C system oil Type ND-OIL8 or
the exact equivalents.

Operation under the following conditions
may require more frequent oil and filter
changes:
∙ repeated short distance driving at cold
outside temperatures
∙ driving in dusty conditions
∙ extensive idling
∙ towing a trailer
∙ stop and go commuting
For additional information, refer to the
“Maintenance and schedules” section of
this manual.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer when servicing your air conditioner
system.

CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or oil
will cause severe damage to the air conditioning system and will require the replacement of all air conditioner system
components.
The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your
NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s
ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does
not affect the earth’s atmosphere, certain
government regulations require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during
automotive air conditioner system service.
A NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians and equipment needed to recover
and recycle your air conditioner system refrigerant.

Technical and consumer information 10-7

SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE
Model
Type
Cylinder arrangement
Bore x Stroke
Displacement
Firing order

QR25DE
Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC
4-cylinder
in (mm) 3.504 x 3.937 (89.0 x 100.0)
cu in (cm3) 151.82 (2,488)
1-3-4-2

Idle speed
CVT (in N position)
Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed)
CO % at idle
Spark plug
Spark plug gap (Nominal)
Camshaft operation
This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

10-8 Technical and consumer information

No adjustment is necessary.

FXE20HE-11C
in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)
Timing chain

WHEELS AND TIRES

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Wheel type

Offset in (mm)

Size

Steel

1.38 (35)

17 x 7J

Aluminum

1.38 (35)

17 x 7J

1.38 (35)

18 x 7J

1.57 (40)

19 x 7J

Tires

Size

Non Run Flat

225/65R17

Overall length
Overall width
Overall height
with All-wheel drive
with front wheel drive
Front and Rear Track
Wheelbase
Gross vehicle weight rating
Gross axle weight rating
Front
Rear

in (mm)
in (mm)

184.5 (4,686)
72.4 (1,840)

in (mm)
68.5 (1,741)
in (mm)
68.0 (1,726)
in (mm)
62.8 (1,595)
in (mm)
106.5 (2,706)
lbs. (kg) Refer to the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.
V.S.S. certification label” on
lbs. (kg) the center pillar between
lbs. (kg) the driver’s side front and
rear doors.

225/60R18
225/55R19
Run Flat

225/65RF17

Spare tires

Size

Spare Wheel - Steel

T145/90D16

Spare Wheel - Steel

T155/90D17

Technical and consumer information 10-9

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING
IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

When planning to drive your NISSAN vehicle in another country, you should first
find out if the fuel available is suitable for
your vehicle's engine.
Using fuel with an octane rating that is too
low may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking
your vehicle to areas where appropriate
fuel is not available.
When transferring the registration of
your vehicle to another country, state,
province or district, it may be necessary
to modify the vehicle to meet local laws
and regulations.
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle
emission control and safety standards
vary according to the country, state, province or district; therefore, vehicle specifications may differ.

TI1050M

LTI2270

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(VIN) PLATE

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(chassis number)

The VIN plate is attached as shown. This
number is the identification for your vehicle
and is used in the vehicle registration.

The vehicle identification number is located as shown.

When any vehicle is to be taken into another country, state, province or district
and registered, its modifications, transportation and registration are the responsibility of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that
may result.

10-10 Technical and consumer information

WTI0096

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
The number is stamped on the engine as
shown.

WTI0099

LTI2072

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION
LABEL

EMISSION CONTROL
INFORMATION LABEL

The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed as shown. This label
contains valuable vehicle information, such
as: (GVWR), (GAWR), month and year of
manufacture, (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

The emission control information label is
attached to the underside of the hood as
shown.

Technical and consumer information 10-11

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

LTI2251

LTI2271

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION
LABEL

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION
LABEL

The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. The label is
located as shown.

The air conditioner specification label is affixed to the underside of the hood as
shown.

10-12 Technical and consumer information

LTI2265

To mount the front license plate, attach the
license plate bracket to the bumper fascia
at the location marks (small dimples) using
A .
the two provided screws 䊊

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

WARNING
∙ It is extremely dangerous to
ride in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to
be seriously injured or killed.
∙ Do not allow people to ride in
any area of your vehicle that is
not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
∙ Be sure everyone in your vehicle
is in a seat and using a seat belt
properly.

TERMS
It is important to familiarize yourself
with the following terms before
loading your vehicle:
∙ Curb Weight (actual weight of
your vehicle) - vehicle weight including: standard and optional
equipment, fluids, emergency
tools, and spare tire assembly.
This weight does not include
passengers and cargo.

∙ GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb
weight plus the combined weight
of passengers and cargo.
∙ GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) - maximum total combined
weight of the unloaded vehicle,
passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer
tongue load and any other optional equipment. This information
is
located
on
the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label.
∙ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) maximum weight (load) limit
specified for the front or rear axle.
This information is located on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label.

∙ Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load
limit, Total load capacity - maximum total weight limit specified
of the load (passengers and
cargo) for the vehicle. This is the
maximum combined weight of
occupants and cargo that can be
loaded into the vehicle. If the vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the
trailer tongue weight must be included as part of the cargo load.
This information is located on the
Tire and Loading Information label.
∙ Cargo capacity - permissible
weight of cargo, the subtracted
weight of occupants from the
load limit.

∙ GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
rating) - The maximum total
weight rating of the vehicle, passengers, cargo, and trailer.

Technical and consumer information 10-13

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that you do not exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
or the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for your vehicle. Both the
GVWR and GAWR are located on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
For additional information, refer to
“Measurement of weights” in this
section.
Do not exceed the load limit of your
vehicle shown as “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo” on
the Tire and Loading Information label. Do not exceed the number of
occupants shown as “Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Loading Information label.
To get “the combined weight of occupants and cargo”, add the weight
of all occupants, then add the total
luggage weight. Examples are
shown in the following illustration.
LTI2320

Example

10-14 Technical and consumer information

Steps for determining correct
load limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
lbs. or XXX kg” on your vehicle’s
Tire and Loading Information label.
2. Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
from XXX lbs. or XXX kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals
1,400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lbs. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150) =
650 lbs.) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =
300 kg.)

5. Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed
the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in
step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that you do not exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
or the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for your vehicle. For additional information, refer to “Measurement of weights” in this section.
Also check tires for proper inflation
pressures. For additional information, refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information label” in this section.

LIC2629

Cargo area luggage hooks

SECURING THE LOAD
There are luggage hooks (if so equipped)
located in the cargo area as shown. The
hooks can be used to secure cargo with
ropes or other types of straps.
When securing items using luggage
hooks located on the side finisher do not
apply a load over more than 6.5 lbs. (29 N)
to a single hook.
The luggage hooks that are located on
the floor should have loads less than
110 lbs. (490 N) to a single hook.

Technical and consumer information 10-15

WARNING
∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding
or shifting. Do not place cargo higher
than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop
or collision, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
∙ The child restraint top tether strap
may be damaged by contact with
items in the cargo area. Secure any
items in the cargo area. Your child
could be seriously injured or killed in a
collision if the top tether strap is
damaged.
∙ Do not load your vehicle any heavier
than the GVWR or the maximum front
and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of
your vehicle can break, tire damage
could occur, or it can change the way
your vehicle handles. This could result
in loss of control and cause personal
injury.

∙ Do not load the front and rear
axle to the GAWR. Doing so will
exceed the GVWR.
WARNING
∙ Properly secure all cargo with
ropes or straps to help prevent
it from sliding or shifting. Do not
place cargo higher than the
seatbacks. In a sudden stop or
collision, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
∙ Do not load your vehicle any
heavier than the GVWR or the
maximum front and rear
GAWRs. If you do, parts of your
vehicle can break, tire damage
could occur, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This
could result in loss of control
and cause personal injury.

LOADING TIPS
∙ The GVW must not exceed GVWR
or GAWR as specified on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label.
10-16 Technical and consumer information

∙ Overloading not only can
shorten the life of your vehicle
and the tire, but can also cause
unsafe vehicle handling and
longer braking distances. This
may cause a premature tire failure which could result in a serious accident and personal injury.
Failures
caused
by
overloading are not covered by
the vehicle’s warranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS
Secure loose items to prevent
weight shifts that could affect the
balance of your vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive to a scale and
weigh the front and the rear wheels
separately to determine axle loads.
Individual axle loads should not exceed either of the GAWR. The total of
the axle loads should not exceed the
GVWR. These ratings are given on
the vehicle certification label. If
weight ratings are exceeded, move
or remove items to bring all weights
below the ratings.

TOWING A TRAILER

WARNING
Overloading or improper loading of a
trailer and its cargo can adversely affect
vehicle handling, braking and performance and may lead to accidents.

CAUTION
∙ Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy
load for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Your engine, axle or other parts could
be damaged.
∙ For the first 500 miles (805 km) that
you tow a trailer, do not drive over
50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make
starts at full throttle. This helps the
engine and other parts of your vehicle
wear in at the heavier loads.
Your new vehicle was designed to be used
primarily to carry passengers and cargo.
Remember that towing a trailer places additional loads on your vehicle’s engine,
drive train, steering, braking and other systems.

A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is available
on
the
website
at
www.nissanusa.com. This guide includes
information on trailer towing capability and
the special equipment required for proper
towing.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS
Maximum trailer loads
Never allow the total trailer load to exceed
the value specified in the “Towing
Load/Specification” chart found in this section. The total trailer load equals trailer
weight plus its cargo weight.
The maximum Gross Combined Weight
Rating (GCWR) should not exceed the value
specified in the following Towing
Load/Specification Chart.

LTI2030

The Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)
equals the combined weight of the towing
vehicle (including passengers and cargo)
plus the total trailer load. Towing loads
greater than these or using improper towing equipment could adversely affect vehicle handling, braking and performance.
The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is
not only related to the maximum trailer
loads, but also the places you plan to tow.
Tow weights appropriate for level highway
driving may have to be reduced for low
traction situations (for example, on slippery
boat ramps).

Technical and consumer information 10-17

Temperature conditions can also affect
towing. For example, towing a heavy trailer
in high outside temperatures on graded
roads can affect engine performance and
cause overheating. The engine protection
mode, which helps reduce the chance of
engine damage, could activate and automatically decrease engine power. Vehicle
speed may decrease under high load. Plan
your trip carefully to account for trailer and
vehicle load, weather and road conditions.

CAUTION
Vehicle damage resulting from improper towing procedures is not covered by NISSAN warranties.

WARNING
Overheating can result in reduced engine power and vehicle speed. The reduced speed may be lower than other
traffic, which could increase the chance
of a collision. Be especially careful when
driving. If the vehicle cannot maintain a
safe driving speed, pull to the side of the
road in a safe area. Allow the engine to
cool and return to normal operation. For
additional information, refer to “If your
vehicle overheats” in the “In case of
emergency” section of this manual.

10-18 Technical and consumer information

WTI0160

Tongue load
When using a weight carrying or a weight
distributing hitch, keep the tongue load between 10 - 15% of the total trailer load or use
the trailer tongue load specified by the
trailer manufacturer. The tongue load
must be within the maximum tongue load
limits shown in the following “Towing
Load/Specification” chart. If the tongue
load becomes excessive, rearrange cargo
to allow for proper tongue load.

Towing capacities are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve the rating. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional
equipment, such as the trailer hitch, will
add weight to the vehicle and reduce your
vehicle’s maximum towing capacity and
trailer tongue load.
The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed
to confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR,
Front GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined
Weight Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.
LTI2031

Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW)/maximum Gross Axle
Weight (GAW)
The GVW of the towing vehicle must not
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label. The GVW equals the
combined weight of the unloaded vehicle,
passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue
load and any other optional equipment. In
addition, front or rear GAW must not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured using platform type scales commonly found at truck stops, highway weigh
stations, building supply centers or salvage
yards.
To determine the available payload capacity for tongue/king pin load, use the following procedure.
1. Locate
the
GVWR
on
the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all
of the passengers and cargo that are
normally in the vehicle when towing a
trailer.

3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from
the GVWR. The remaining amount is
the available maximum tongue/king
pin load.
To determine the available towing capacity,
use the following procedure.
1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the
"Towing Load/Specification" chart
found in this section.
2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight
from the GCWR. The remaining amount
is the available maximum towing capacity.
To determine the Gross Trailer Weight,
weigh your trailer on a scale with all equipment and cargo, that are normally in the
trailer when it is towed. Make sure the
Gross trailer weight is not more than the
Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown on the
trailer and is not more than the calculated
available maximum towing capacity.
Also weigh the front and rear axles on the
scale to make sure the Front Gross Axle
Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight are not
more than Front Gross Axle Weight and
Rear Gross Axle Weight on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The

Technical and consumer information 10-19

cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to
be moved or removed to meet the specified ratings.

7,250 lbs. (3,289 kg)
– 6,350 lbs. (2,880 kg)
= 900 lbs. (409 kg)

Example:
∙ Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed
on a scale - including passengers, cargo
and hitch - 6,350 lbs. (2,880 kg).
∙ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
from F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label - 7,250 lbs. (3,289 kg).

GVW
Available for tongue
weight

15,100 lbs. (6,849 kg)

GCWR

– 6,350 lbs. (2,880 kg)

GVW

= 9,123 lbs. (4,138 kg) Capacity available for
towing

∙ Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)
from “Towing Load/Specification" chart
- 15,100 lbs. (6,849 kg).
∙ Maximum Trailer towing capacity from
“Towing Load/Specification" chart 9,100 lbs. (4,128 kg).

GVWR

900 lbs. (409 kg)
/ 8,750 lbs. (3,969 kg)
=

Available tongue
weight
Available capacity
10 % tongue weight

The available towing capacity may be less
than the maximum towing capacity due to
the passenger and cargo load in the vehicle.
Remember to keep trailer tongue weight
between 10 - 15% of the trailer weight or
within the trailer tongue load specification
recommended by the trailer manufacturer.
If the tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange the cargo to obtain the proper
tongue load. Do not exceed the maximum
tongue weight specification shown in the

10-20 Technical and consumer information

“Towing load/specification” chart even if
the calculated available tongue weight is
greater than 15%. If the calculated tongue
weight is less than 10%, reduce the total
trailer weight to match the available
tongue weight.
Always verify that available capacities are
within the required ratings.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION
WARNING
The towing capacities provided in this
manual are for general reference only.
The safe towing capacity of your vehicle
is affected by dealer and factory installed options and passenger and
cargo loads. You must weigh the vehicle
and trailer as described in this manual
to determine the actual vehicle towing
capacity. Do not exceed the published
maximum towing capacity or the GCWR
or
the
GVWR
shown
on
the
FMVSS/CMVSS label. Doing so can result in an accident causing serious personal injury or property damage.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHART
U.S. and Canada
Maximum Towing Capacity*1
1,100 lbs.
(500 kg)
Maximum Tongue Load
110 lbs.
(50 kg)
Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating
5,291 lbs.
(2,400 kg)
*1: The towing capacity values are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve the rating. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment will add weight to
the vehicle and reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacity.

TOWING SAFETY
Trailer hitch
Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional trailer tow package. The trailer tow
package includes a receiver-type frame
mounted hitch. This hitch is rated for the
maximum towing capacity of this vehicle
when the proper towing equipment is
used. Choose a proper ball mount and
hitch ball that is rated for the trailer to be
towed. Genuine NISSAN ball mounts and
hitch balls are available from a NISSAN
dealer.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the optional trailer tow package, check the towing capacity of your bumper hitch or
receiver-type frame mounted hitch.
Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and
trailer. A Genuine NISSAN trailer hitch is
available from a NISSAN dealer. Make sure
the trailer hitch is securely attached to the
vehicle to help avoid personal injury or
property damage due to sway caused by
crosswinds, rough road surfaces or passing trucks.

Technical and consumer information 10-21

WARNING

Ball mount

Trailer hitch components have specific
weight ratings. Your vehicle may be capable of towing a trailer heavier than the
weight rating of the hitch components.
Never exceed the weight rating of the
hitch components. Doing so can cause serious personal injury or property damage.

The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount
and the ball mount is inserted into the
hitch receiver. Choose a proper class ball
mount based on the trailer weight. Additionally, the ball mount should be chosen to
keep the trailer tongue level with the
ground.

Hitch ball

Weight carrying hitches

Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and
weight rating for your trailer:

A weight carrying or “dead weight” ball
mount is one that is designed to carry the
whole amount of tongue weight and gross
weight directly on the ball mount and on
the receiver.

∙ The required hitch ball size is stamped
on most trailer couplers. Most hitch
balls also have the size printed on the
top of the ball.
∙ Choose the proper class hitch ball
based on the trailer weight.
∙ The diameter of the threaded shank of
the hitch ball must be matched to the
ball mount hole diameter. The hitch ball
shank should be no more than 1/16”
smaller than the hole in the ball mount.
∙ The threaded shank of the hitch ball
must be long enough to be properly
secured to the ball mount. There should
be at least 2 threads showing beyond
the lock washer and nut.

Weight distribution hitch
This type of hitch is also called a “loadleveling” or “equalizing” hitch. A set of bars
attach to the ball mount and to the trailer
to distribute the tongue weight (hitch
weight) of your trailer. Many vehicles can’t
carry the full tongue weight of a given
trailer, and need some of the tongue
weight transferred through the frame and
pushing down on the front wheels. This
gives stability to the tow vehicle.

10-22 Technical and consumer information

A weight-distributing hitch system (Class
IV) is recommended if you plan to tow trailers with a maximum weight over 5,000 lbs.
(2,268 kg). Check with the trailer and towing
equipment manufacturers to determine if
they recommend the use of a weightdistributing hitch system.
NOTE:
A weight-distributing hitch system may
affect the operation of trailer surge
brakes. If you are considering use of a
weight-distributing hitch system with a
surge brake-equipped trailer, check with
the surge brake, hitch or trailer manufacturer to determine if and how this can be
done.
Follow the instructions provided by the
manufacturer for installing and using the
weight-distributing hitch system.
General set-up instructions are as follows:
1. Park unloaded vehicle on a level surface. With the ignition on and the doors
closed, allow the vehicle to stand for
several minutes so that it can level.
2. Measure the height of a reference point
on the front and rear bumpers at the
center of the vehicle.

3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust the hitch equalizers so that the
front bumper height is within 0 .5 inches (0 – 13 mm) of the reference
height measured in step 2. The rear
bumper should be no higher than the
reference height measured in step 2.

WARNING
Properly adjust the weight distributing
hitch so the rear of the bumper is no
higher than the measured reference
height when the trailer is attached. If
the rear bumper is higher than the measured reference height when loaded,
the vehicle may handle unpredictably
which could cause a loss of vehicle control and cause serious personal injury or
property damage.

Sway control device
Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buffeting caused by other vehicles can affect
trailer handling. Sway control devices may
be used to help control these affects. If you
choose to use one, contact a reputable
trailer hitch supplier to make sure the sway
control device will work with the vehicle,
hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake system.

Follow the instructions provided by the
manufacturer for installing and using the
sway control device.

Class I hitch
Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball
mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow
trailers of a maximum weight of 2,000 lbs.
(907 kg).

Tire pressures

Safety chains
Always use suitable safety chains between
your vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains
should be crossed and should be attached
to the hitch, not to the vehicle bumper or
axle. The safety chains can be attached to
the bumper if the hitch ball is mounted to the
bumper. Be sure to leave enough slack in the
chains to permit turning corners.

Trailer lights

∙ When towing a trailer, inflate the
vehicle tires to the recommended cold tire pressure indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label.
∙ Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and proper inflation pressure
should be in accordance with the
trailer and tire manufacturer’s
specifications.

CAUTION
When splicing into the vehicle electrical
system, a commercially available powertype module/converter must be used to
provide power for all trailer lighting. This
unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct
power source for all trailer lights while using the vehicle tail light, stop light and
turn signal circuits as a signal source. The
module/converter must draw no more
that 15 milliamps from the stop and tail
lamp circuits. Using a module/converter
that exceeds these power requirements
may damage the vehicle’s electrical system. It is recommended that you visit a
reputable trailer retailer to obtain the
proper equipment and to have it installed.

Technical and consumer information 10-23

Trailer lights should comply with federal
and/or local regulations. For assistance in
hooking up trailer lights, contact a NISSAN
dealer or reputable trailer retailer. Vehicles
equipped with the optional trailer tow
package are equipped with a 7-pin trailer
harness connector. If your trailer is
equipped with a flat 4-pin connector, an
adapter will be needed to connect the
trailer lights to the vehicle. Adapters are
available at auto parts stores and hitch retailers.

Pre-towing tips
∙ Be certain your vehicle maintains a level
position when a loaded and/or unloaded trailer is hitched. Do not drive the
vehicle if it has an abnormal nose-up or
nose-down condition; check for improper tongue load, overload, worn suspension or other possible causes of either condition.
∙ Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving.
∙ Keep the cargo load as low as possible
in the trailer to keep the trailer center of
gravity low.

∙ Load the trailer so approximately 60%
of the trailer load is in the front half and
40% is in the back half. Also make sure
the load is balanced side to side.
∙ Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure,
vehicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, and trailer wheel lug nuts every
time you attach a trailer to the vehicle.
∙ Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to all federal, state or local regulations. If not, install any mirrors required
for towing before driving the vehicle.
∙ Determine the overall height of the vehicle and trailer so the required clearance is known.

Trailer towing tips
In order to gain skill and an understanding
of the vehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning, stopping and backing up in an
area which is free from traffic. Steering stability and braking performance will be
somewhat different than under normal
driving conditions.
∙ Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving.

10-24 Technical and consumer information

∙ Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin
or lock to prevent the coupler from inadvertently becoming unlatched.
∙ Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or
stops.
∙ Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.
∙ Always drive your vehicle at a moderate
speed.
∙ When backing up, hold the bottom of
the steering wheel with one hand. Move
your hand in the direction in which you
want the trailer to go. Make small corrections and back up slowly. If possible,
have someone guide you when you are
backing up.
Always block the wheels on both vehicle
and trailer when parking. Parking on a
slope is not recommended; however, if you
must do so:

CAUTION
If you move the shift lever to the P (Park)
position before blocking the wheels
and applying the parking brake, transmission damage could occur.

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
2. Have someone place blocks on the
downhill side of the vehicle and trailer
wheels.
3. After the wheel blocks are in place,
slowly release the brake pedal until the
blocks absorb the vehicle load.
4. Apply the parking brake.
5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).
6. Turn off the engine.
To drive away:
1. Start the vehicle.
2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into gear.
4. Release the parking brake.
5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer
are clear from the blocks.
6. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
7. Have someone retrieve and store the
blocks.

∙ While going downhill, the weight of the
trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may
decrease overall stability. Therefore, to
maintain adequate control, reduce your
speed and shift to a lower gear. Avoid
long or repeated use of the brakes
when descending a hill, as this reduces
their effectiveness and could cause
overheating. Shifting to a lower gear instead provides “engine braking” and reduces the need to brake as frequently.
∙ If the engine coolant temperature rises
to a high temperature, refer to “If your
vehicle overheats” in the “In case of
emergency” section of this owner’s
manual.
∙ Trailer towing requires more fuel than
normal circumstances.
∙ Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s
first 500 miles (805 km).
∙ For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you
do tow, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h).
∙ Have your vehicle serviced more often
than at intervals specified. For additional information, refer to "Maintenance schedules" in the "Maintenance
and schedules" section of this manual..

∙ When making a turn, your trailer wheels
will be closer to the inside of the turn
than your vehicle wheels. To compensate for this, make a larger than normal
turning radius during the turn.
∙ Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect vehicle/trailer handling,
possibly causing vehicle sway. When
being passed by larger vehicles, be prepared for possible changes in crosswinds that could affect vehicle handling.
Do the following if the trailer begins to
sway:
1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal
to allow the vehicle to coast and steer
as straight ahead as the road conditions allow. This combination will help
stabilize the vehicle
– Do not correct trailer sway by steering or applying the brakes.
2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply the brakes and pull to the side of the
road in a safe area.
3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is
balanced as described in this section.

Technical and consumer information 10-25

∙ Be careful when passing other vehicles.
Passing while towing a trailer requires
considerably more distance than normal passing. Remember, the length of
the trailer must also pass the other vehicle before you can safely change
lanes.

∙ Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness
connections, and trailer wheel lug nuts
after 50 miles (80 km) of travel and at
every break.

∙ Downshift the transmission to a lower
gear for engine braking when driving
down steep or long hills. This will help
slow the vehicle without applying the
brakes.

∙ Make sure you disconnect the trailer
lights before backing the trailer into the
water or the trailer lights may burn out.

∙ Avoid holding the brake pedal down too
long or too frequently. This could cause
the brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced braking efficiency.
∙ Increase your following distance to allow for greater stopping distances
while towing a trailer. Anticipate stops
and brake gradually.
∙ NISSAN recommends that the cruise
control not be used while towing a
trailer.

∙ When launching a boat, don’t allow the
water level to go over the exhaust tail
pipe or rear bumper.

When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil
should be replaced and transmission
oil/fluid should be changed more frequently. For additional information, refer
to the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this
manual.

FLAT TOWING FOR ALL–WHEEL
DRIVE VEHICLE (if so equipped)
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on
the ground is sometimes called flat towing.
This method is sometimes used when
towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor home.

∙ Some states or provinces have specific
regulations and speed limits for vehicles that are towing trailers. Obey the
local speed limits.

10-26 Technical and consumer information

CAUTION
∙ Failure to follow these guidelines can
result in severe transmission damage.
∙ Never flat tow your All-Wheel Drive
(AWD) vehicle.
∙ DO NOT tow your All-Wheel Drive
(AWD) vehicle with any wheels on the
ground. Doing so may cause serious
and expensive damage to the
powertrain.
∙ For emergency towing procedures refer to “Towing recommended by
NISSAN” in the “In case of emergency”
section of this manual.

FLAT TOWING FOR FRONT WHEEL
DRIVE VEHICLE (if so equipped)
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on
the ground is sometimes called flat towing.
This method is sometimes used when
towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor home.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

CAUTION
∙ Failure to follow these guidelines can
result in severe transmission damage.
∙ Whenever flat towing your vehicle, always tow forward, never backward.
∙ Never tow your front wheel drive vehicle with the front tires on the ground.
Doing so may cause serious and expensive damage to the powertrain.
∙ DO NOT tow your front wheel drive continuously variable transmission vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground (flat
towing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal
transmission parts due to lack of transmission lubrication.
∙ For emergency towing procedures refer to “Towing recommended by
NISSAN” in the “In case of emergency”
section of this manual.

Continuously Variable
Transmission
To tow a vehicle equipped with a continuously variable transmission, an appropriate
vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the
towed vehicle’s drive wheels. Always follow
the dolly manufacturer’s recommendations when using their product.

DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality Grades: All passenger car tires must
conform to federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B and C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled

conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.

WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature A, B and C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat, and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Technical and consumer information 10-27

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARRANTY
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, under-inflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat build-up and
possible tire failure.

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following emission warranties:
For USA
1. Emission Defects Warranty
2. Emissions Performance Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with
other vehicle warranties in your Warranty
Information Booklet which comes with
your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a
Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost,
you may obtain a replacement by writing
to:
∙ Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003

10-28 Technical and consumer information

For Canada
Emission Control System Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with
other vehicle warranties in your Warranty
Information Booklet which comes with
your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a
Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost,
you may obtain a replacement by writing
to:
∙ Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
For USA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying NISSAN.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints,
it may open an investigation, and if it
finds that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you,
your dealer, or NISSAN.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or
write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400
Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C.
20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.

You may notify NISSAN by contacting our Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1.
For Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform Transport Canada in addition to notifying
NISSAN.
If Transport Canada receives complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
request that NISSAN conduct a recall
campaign.
However,
Transport
Canada cannot become involved in
individual problems between you,
your dealer, or NISSAN.

cp.aspx?lang=eng (English speakers)
or
https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/SafSec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fccp.aspx?lang=fra (French speakers)
Additional information concerning
motor vehicle safety may be obtained from Transport Canada’s
Road Safety Information Centre at
1-800-333-0371
or
online
at
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety
(English
speakers)
or
www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere
(French speakers).
To notify NISSAN of any safety concerns please contact our Consumer
Information Centre toll free at 1-800387-0122.

You may contact Transport Canada’s
Defect Investigations and Recalls Division toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You
may also report safety defects online
at:
https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/SafSec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fcTechnical and consumer information 10-29

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/
MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST
WARNING
A vehicle equipped with All -Wheel Drive
(AWD) should never be tested using a
two wheel dynamometer (such as the
dynamometers used by some states for
emissions testing), or similar equipment. Make sure you inform the test facility personnel that your vehicle is
equipped with AWD before it is placed
on a dynamometer. Using the wrong
test equipment may result in drivetrain
damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)
vehicle’s inspection/maintenance test
readiness condition. Place the ignition
switch in the ON position without starting
the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds
and then blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test
condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not
blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is “ready”. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer to set the “ready condition” or to prepare the vehicle for testing.

Due to legal requirements in some states
and Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may
be required to be in what is called the
“ready
condition”
for
an
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the
emission control system.
The vehicle is set to the “ready condition”
when it is driven through certain driving
patterns. Usually, the ready condition can
be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle.
If a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected, the
vehicle may be reset to a “not ready” condition. Before taking the I/M test, check the

10-30 Technical and consumer information

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an
EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data
that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
∙ How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
∙ Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
∙ How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal;
and,
∙ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
∙ Sounds are not recorded.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g.

name, gender, age and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine the EDR
data with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to
the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN
dealer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can
read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only be
accessed with the consent of the vehicle
owner or lessee or as otherwise required or
permitted by law.

ADDITIONAL DATA RECORDING (on
vehicles equipped with optional
ProPILOT Assist)
If your vehicle is equipped with the optional
ProPILOT Assist, it will also be equipped
with supplemental data recording function
intended to assist in understanding how
ProPILOT Assist performs in certain nontrival crash or near-crash scenarios. Specifically, supplemental recording is designed to capture the following:

∙ Driver operational status of the accelerator, brakes, steering, etc.
∙ Detection status of a vehicle ahead and
lane markers
∙ Vehicle information including distance
to vehicle ahead and lateral position
∙ Information on the operation of the
ProPILOT Assist and other crash avoidance features
∙ ProPILOT Assist malfunction diagnosis
information
∙ External images from the multi-sensing
front camera (Available only when the
SRS air bag or IEB system is activated)

NISSAN and third parties entrusted by
NISSAN will not disclose/provide the recorded data to a third party except:
- With the consent of the vehicle owner or
with the consent of the lessee
- In response to an official request from law
enforcement, court order, governmental
agency, or other legally enforceable request
- For research purposes after the data is
modified such that it is no longer tied to a
specific vehicle or vehicle owner (anonymized)

The ProPILOT Assist does not record conversations, sounds or images of the inside
of the vehicle.
To read this supplemental data, special
equipment is required and access to the
vehicle or the recording unit is needed. This
supplemental data will only be accessed
with the consent of the vehicle owner or
lessee or as otherwise required or permitted by law. If downloaded, NISSAN and third
parties entrusted by NISSAN may use the
data recorded for the purpose of improving NISSAN’s vehicle safety performance.

Technical and consumer information 10-31

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE
MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION
Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this
model year and prior can be purchased. A
Genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best
source of service and repair information for
your vehicle. This manual is the same one
used by the factory-trained technicians
working at NISSAN dealerships. Genuine
NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can also be purchased.
For USA
For current pricing and availability of Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals, contact:
www.nissan-techinfo.com
For current pricing and availability of Genuine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, contact:
1-800-247-5321
For Canada
To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN
Service Manual or Owner’s Manual, for this
model year and prior, please contact the
nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone number and location of a NISSAN dealer in your
area, call the NISSAN Information Center at
1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representative will assist you.

10-32 Technical and consumer information

11 Index
2nd row bench seat adjustment . . . . . .1-6
A
Active Ride Control (ARC) . . . . . . . . .5-154
Air bag (See supplemental restraint
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-50
Air bag system
Front (See supplemental front impact air
bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-57
Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . .1-67
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . .1-68, 2-17
Air bag warning light,
supplemental . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-68, 2-17
Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . .8-18
Air conditioner
Air conditioner operation . . . .4-32, 4-38
Air conditioner specification label . .10-12
Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil
recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Air conditioner system refrigerant
recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Heater and air conditioner
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29, 4-38
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . .4-41
Air flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33
Alarm system
(See vehicle security system) . . . . . . .2-39
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-142, 6-14
Anchor point locations. . . . . . . . . . . .1-33
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42

Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-156
Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . .2-12
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . .5-148
Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
Automatic
Automatic drive positioner . . .3-43, 3-44
Automatic power window switch. . .2-68
Automatic anti-glare inside
mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39, 3-41
Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Automatic drive positioner . . . . .3-43, 3-44
Automatic Emergency Braking
(AEB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12, 5-123
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with
Pedestrian Detection . . . . . . . . . . . .5-131
AWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-142, 6-14

Brake
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . .5-148
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . .8-29
Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-147
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Brake wear indicators . . . . . . .2-20, 8-21
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . .5-27
Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . .8-21
Brake assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-149
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Brakes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21
Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-147
Break-in schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-140
Brightness control
Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49
Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . .2-12
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-156, 8-12
Charge warning light. . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
Key fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
NISSAN Intelligent Key®. . . . . .8-24, 8-26
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . .5-18
Belt (See drive belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-46

Capacities and recommended fuel/
lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Cargo area storage bin . . . . . . . . . . .2-62
Cargo cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-64
Cargo light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-73
Cargo
(See vehicle loading information). . . . .10-13
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . .4-42
Chassis control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-152
Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Check tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34

Child restraints. . . . . . . .1-25, 1-26, 1-28, 1-30
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) System. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-30
Precautions on child
restraints . . . . . . . . .1-28, 1-35, 1-41, 1-46
Top tether strap anchor point
locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-33
Child restraint with top tether strap . . . .1-32
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Chimes, audible reminders . . . . . . . . .2-20
Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . .7-2, 7-4
C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . .10-11
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . .5-156
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59
Console light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-72
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Controls
Heater and air conditioner
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29, 4-38
Coolant
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . .8-5
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . .8-5
Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-6
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-64
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60

11-2

D
Defroster switch
Rear window and outside mirror
defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44
Dimensions and weights. . . . . . . . . . .10-9
Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . .2-49
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5, 3-6
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
Drive positioner, Automatic . . . . . .3-43, 3-44
Driving
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . .5-156
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Precautions when starting and
driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4, 5-11
Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Dynamic driver assistance switch
(for vehicles without ProPILOT Assist) . . .2-53

Checking engine coolant level . . . . . .8-5
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . .8-6
Engine compartment check
locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-6
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . .8-4
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Engine oil and oil filter
recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
Engine oil viscosity. . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . .2-6
Event Data recorders. . . . . . . . .10-30, 10-31
Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide). . . . . . .5-4
Explanation of maintenance items . . . . .9-2
Explanation of scheduled maintenance
items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5
Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . .2-57
Eyeglass case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59

E
F
ECO mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-142
Emergency engine shutoff. . . . . . . . . .5-17
Emission control information label . . . .10-11
Emission control system warranty . . . .10-28
Engine
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . .5-18
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . .8-5
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . .8-8

Flashers
(See hazard warning flasher switch) . . . .6-2
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . .7-6
Fluid
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . .8-10
F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . . .10-11
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50
Front air bag system
(See supplemental restraint system) . . .1-57
Front-door pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58
Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-5
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Fuel
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-142
Fuel-filler door and cap. . . . . . . . . .3-35
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-5
Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . . .2-34
Fuel efficient driving tips . . . . . . . . . .5-140
Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
Fusible links. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22

Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59
H
Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . . . .6-2
Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . .2-44
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . .2-44
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11
Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51
Heated steering wheel switch . . . . . . .2-52
Heater
Heater and air conditioner
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29, 4-38
Heater operation . . . . . . . . . .4-30, 4-39
Hill start assist system . . . . . . . . . . .5-155
HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver . . . . . . . . . .2-74, 2-76, 2-77, 2-77
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27
Hook
Luggage hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-63
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51

G
Garage door opener, HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver . . . . . . . . . .2-74, 2-76, 2-77, 2-77
Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35
Gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-6
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6

I
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Push-button ignition switch . . . . . . .5-15
Immobilizer system . . . . . . .2-40, 5-14, 5-18
Important vehicle information label. . . .10-11
In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . .5-142

Indicator
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge
indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Indicator lights and audible reminders
(See warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12, 2-18
Information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Inside automatic anti-glare mirror. .3-39, 3-41
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . .2-49
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-6, 2-2
Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . .2-49
Intelligent Around View Monitor . . . . . . .4-11
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
(for vehicles without ProPILOT Assist) . . .5-66
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
(for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist) . . . .5-102
Intelligent Engine Brake (I-EB) . . . . . . .5-153
Intelligent Key system
Key operating range. . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Remote keyless entry operation . . . .3-17
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . .3-22
Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22
Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) . . . . .5-39
Intelligent Trace Control (I-TC) . . . . . . .5-152
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-71, 2-73
ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-30
J
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10, 8-15

11-3

K
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
Key fob battery replacement . . . . . . . .8-24
Keyless entry
With Intelligent Key system
(See Intelligent Key system) . . . . . . .3-17
Without Intelligent Key system
(See remote keyless entry
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2, 3-8, 3-9
Keys
NISSAN Intelligent Key®. . . . . . . .3-3, 3-11
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
L
Label
Tire and Loading Information label . .10-12
Labels
Air conditioner specification label . . .10-12
C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . .10-11
Emission control information label . .10-11
Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . .10-11
F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . .10-11
Tire and Loading Information label . .10-12
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . .10-10
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Warning labels (for SRS). . . . . . . . . .1-67
Lane Departure Prevention (LDP)
system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system . .5-34
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-30

11-4

LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49
License plate
Installing the license plate . . . . . . .10-12
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
Liftgate release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33
Light
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-68, 2-17
Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . .8-29
Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . .2-12
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29
Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Console light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-72
Exterior and Interior lights . . . . . . . .8-29
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50
Headlight and turn signal switch. . . .2-44
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-44
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-71, 2-73
Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-14
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34
Passenger air bag and status light. . .1-59
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-72
Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . .2-72
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12, 2-18
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-72
Lock
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . .3-7
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5, 3-6
Liftgate release . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33

Power door locks. . . . . . . . . . . .3-6, 3-7
Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . .2-34, 3-36
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . .2-16, 2-33
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-14
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34
Luggage hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-63
Luggage rack (see roof rack) . . . . . . . .2-65
Luggage
(See vehicle loading information) . . . . .10-13
Luggage storage (see vehicle loading
information) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-62
M
Maintenance
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
Maintenance precautions. . . . . . . . .8-2
Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . .1-25
Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . .9-4
Maintenance log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13
Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . .9-2
Maintenance schedules . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7
Maintenance under severe operation
conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-3
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-72
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43, 3-44
Meters and gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Instrument brightness control . . . . .2-49

Mirror
Automatic anti-glare inside
mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . .
Rearview. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . .
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moving Object Detection (MOD)

. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .

.3-39, 3-41
. . . .3-41
. . . .3-39
. . . .3-38
. . . .3-39
. . . .2-69
. . . .4-23

Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41
Overhead sunglasses holder . . . . . . . .2-59
Overheat
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . .6-12
Owner's manual order form . . . . . . . .10-32
Owner's manual/service manual order
information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-32

Precautions on supplemental restraint
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-50
Precautions when starting and
driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4, 5-11
ProPILOT Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-90
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12
R

P
N
NissanConnect® Owner's Manual . . . . . .4-2
NISSAN Intelligent Key®. . . . . . . . . .3-3, 3-11
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge
indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40, 5-14, 5-18
O
Octane rating (See fuel octane rating). . .10-5
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Oil
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . .8-8
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . .8-6
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Engine oil and oil filter
recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
Engine oil viscosity. . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6

Parking
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . .5-27
Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . .5-146
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . .2-14, 2-18, 5-27
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-72
Power
Front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
Power door locks. . . . . . . . . . . .3-6, 3-7
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55
Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-67
Power steering system . . . . . . . . .5-146
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-66
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-67
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-146
Precautions
Maintenance precautions. . . . . . . . .8-2
On-pavement and off-road driving
precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9
Precautions on booster
seats . . . . . . . . . . . .1-28, 1-35, 1-41, 1-46
Precautions on child
restraints . . . . . . . . .1-28, 1-35, 1-41, 1-46
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .1-16

Radio
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . .4-42
Readiness for inspection maintenance
(I/M) test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-30
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) . . . . . . .5-56
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-67
Rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39
RearView Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44
Rear window wiper and washer
switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43
Recommended Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Recorders
Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-30, 10-31
Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . .10-7
Registering a vehicle in another
country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Remote Engine Start . . . . . . . . . .3-24, 5-21
Remote keyless entry system . . .3-2, 3-8, 3-9
Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .10-29
Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-65

11-5

S
Safety
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . .3-7
Child seat belts. . . . . .1-28, 1-35, 1-41, 1-46
Reporting safety defects (US only) . .10-29
Seat adjustment
Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . .1-3
Front power seat adjustment . . . . . .1-5
Second row bench seats . . . . . . . . .1-6
Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58
Seat belt
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25
Infants and small children . . . . . . . .1-26
Injured Person. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .1-16
Pregnant women. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . .1-25
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16, 7-6
Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . .1-23
Three-point type with retractor . . . . .1-19
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . .1-19, 2-17
Seats
2nd row bench seat adjustment . . . . .1-6
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
Automatic drive positioner . . . .3-43, 3-44
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51
Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . .1-3
Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19

11-6

Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
System), engine start . . . . . .2-40, 5-14, 5-18
Security systems
Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . .2-39
Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21
Service manual order form. . . . . . . . .10-32
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . .4-41
Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-23
Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . .2-4
SPORT mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . . .2-72
SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-67
Standard maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
Starting
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . .5-18
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10, 8-15
Precautions when starting and
driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4, 5-11
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Starting the engine (models with NISSAN
Intelligent Key® system) . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Steering
Power steering system . . . . . . . . .5-146
Steering Assist switch
(for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist) . . . . .2-53
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37
Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58

Storage bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-62
Sunglasses case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59
Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-69
Sunroof (see Moonroof) . . . . . . . . . . .2-69
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
Supplemental air bag warning labels . . .1-67
Supplemental air bag warning
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-68, 2-17
Supplemental front impact air bag
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-57
Supplemental restraint system
Information and warning labels . . . .1-67
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-50
Supplemental restraint system
(Supplemental air bag system) . . . . . . .1-50
Switch
Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
Automatic power window switch . . .2-68
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50
Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . .6-2
Headlight and turn signal switch. . . .2-44
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-44
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Instrument brightness control . . . . .2-49
Power door lock switch . . . . . . . .3-6, 3-7
Rear window and outside mirror
defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44
Rear window wiper and washer
switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49

T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Temperature gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-6
Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),
engine start . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40, 5-14, 5-18
Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
Tire
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
Spare tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5, 8-43
Tire and Loading Information label . .10-12
Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40
Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31
Tire rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-41
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-37
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . .10-27
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31
Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
Tire pressure
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-14
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . .5-5
Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . .1-32
Towing
4-wheel drive models . . . . . . . . . . .6-15
Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-26
Towing load/specification . . . . . . .10-20
Tow truck towing . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17
Transceiver
HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver . . . . . . . .2-74, 2-76, 2-77, 2-77

Transmission
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Travel (See registering a vehicle in another
country). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49

Vehicle recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-15, 6-16
Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . .2-39
Vehicle security system (NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System), engine
start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40, 5-14, 5-18
Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
W

U
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . .10-27
USB/iPod® Charging Ports . . . . . . . . .4-42
V
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
Variable voltage control system . . . . . .8-16
Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . . .10-9
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-149
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . .10-10
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
(Chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Vehicle immobilizer system . .2-40, 5-14, 5-18
Vehicle Information Display . . . . . . . . .2-21
Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . .10-13

Warning
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-68, 2-17
Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . .2-12
Battery charge warning light . . . . . .2-13
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . .6-2
Lane Departure Prevention . . . . . . .5-34
Lane Departure Warning light. . . . . .5-34
Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . .2-34, 3-36
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . .2-16, 2-33
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-14
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34
Passenger air bag and status light. . .1-59
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . .1-19, 2-17
Supplemental air bag warning
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-68, 2-17
TPMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . .2-39
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12, 2-18
Warning labels (for SRS). . . . . . . . . .1-67

11-7

Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12, 2-18
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . .2-12, 2-18
Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12, 2-18
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12, 2-18
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12, 2-18
Warning lights, indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Washer switch
Rear window wiper and washer
switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43
Weights (See dimensions and weights) . .10-9
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31
Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
When traveling or registering in another
country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-66
Locking passengers' windows . . . . .2-67
Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-67
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-66
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-67
Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
Wiper
Rear window wiper and washer
switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43
Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . .2-42

11-8

MEMO

GAS STATION INFORMATION
FUEL RECOMMENDATION:
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock
Index) number (Research octane number
91).

∙ Do not use a fuel containing more
than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your
vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel
containing more than 15% ethanol.
Using a fuel containing more than 15%
ethanol in a vehicle not specifically
designed for a fuel containing more
than 15% ethanol can adversely affect
the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle. Damage caused
by such fuel is not covered by the
NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
∙ Do not use fuel that contains the octane booster methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using
fuel containing MMT may adversely
affect vehicle performance and vehicle emissions. Not all fuel dispensers are labeled to indicate MMT content, so you may have to consult your
gasoline retailer for more details.
Note that Federal and California laws
prohibit the use of MMT in reformulated gasoline.

∙ U.S. government regulations require
ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and
black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage
for that region.
For additional information, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities”
in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:
• Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN”
For additional information, refer to “Engine
oil and oil filter recommendations” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

COLD TIRE PRESSURE:
For additional information, refer to “Tire and
Loading Information label” in the “Technical
and consumer information” section of this
manual.
The label is typically located on the driver
side center pillar or on the driver’s door. For
additional information, refer to “Wheels and
tires” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this
manual.

RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE
BREAK-IN PROCEDURE:
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of
vehicle use, follow the break-in procedure
recommendations for the future reliability
and economy of your new vehicle. For additional information, refer to “Break-in
schedule” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Failure to follow these
recommendations may result in vehicle
damage or shortened engine life.

Printing : May 2018
Publication No.: OM18EA 0T32U2
Printed in the U.S.A.

T32-D

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : No
Create Date                     : 2018:03:28 13:38:33-04:00
Keywords                        : nissan;, rogue;, 2018;, owner, manual;, owner, guide;, owner’s, manual;, pdf;, vehicle, manual;, service;, maintenance
Modify Date                     : 2018:06:01 12:50:12-05:00
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c006 80.159825, 2016/09/16-03:31:08
Metadata Date                   : 2018:06:01 12:50:12-05:00
Creator Tool                    : PDFL 7.0
Document ID                     : uuid:8C8248FC9E32E811A71791A030B4C743
Instance ID                     : uuid:7ca46beb-ac96-4cd7-948c-26889adfcada
Derived From Instance ID        : uuid:ec3bf888-3419-43be-b735-7c5b0272d68c
Derived From Document ID        : uuid:786b7041-f65f-4588-8e45-271dbb941248
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : 2018 Nissan Rogue | Owner's Manual and Maintenance Information | Nissan USA
Description                     : Download the 2018 Nissan Rogue Owner's Manual at the official Nissan USA website.
Creator                         : 
Subject                         : nissan, rogue, 2018, owner manual, owner guide, owner’s manual, pdf, vehicle manual, service, maintenance
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 10.1.16 (Windows)
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 547
Warning                         : [Minor] Ignored duplicate Info dictionary

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

2018 Nissan Rogue | Owner's Manual And Maintenance Information USA Owner

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation